3760 - Boat Regal - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Luxury Performance Cruiser Boat
Overall Length	34 ft 9 in (10.6 m)
Beam	12 ft 2 in (3.7 m)
Draft (I/O)	36 in (0.9 m)
Draft (V-Drive)	34 in (0.9 m)
Dry Weight (approx.)	15,200 lbs (6,895 kg) with twin 8.1L engines
Fuel Capacity	276 US gal (1,045 L)
Fresh Water Capacity (I/O)	67 US gal (254 L)
Fresh Water Capacity (V-Drive)	61 US gal (231 L)
Holding Tank Capacity	28 US gal (106 L)
Bridge Clearance (with Radar Arch)	12 ft 4 in (3.7 m)
Headroom (Cabin)	6 ft 5 in (1.96 m)
Deadrise	19 degrees
Cockpit Depth	30 in (0.7 m)
Engine Options	Twin sterndrive (I/O) or V-Drive gasoline engines (typically 8.1L)
Safety Equipment	CO detector, automatic fire extinguisher, bilge pumps, high water alarm, navigation lights
Electrical System	12V DC and 120V AC with shore power, battery charger, inverter
Standard Features	Air conditioning, refrigerator, microwave, stereo/CD, TV/DVD, toilet, shower, windlass
Maintenance	Regular inspection of hull, engine, fuel system, and safety gear; winterization required in freezing climates
Warranty	Lifetime limited hull warranty (original owner), 5-year transferable hull warranty, 1-year limited general warranty

Frequently Asked Questions - 3760 Regal

What is the fuel capacity of the Regal 3760?

The fuel capacity is 276 US gallons (1,045 L). Use the one-third rule: one-third for outward journey, one-third for return, and one-third reserve.

How do I winterize the generator?

Winterize the generator by: 1) Running it until warm, 2) Changing oil and filter, 3) Closing seacock and running antifreeze (e.g., propylene glycol) through the raw water system, 4) Disconnecting low seawater pressure switch, 5) Running until coolant exits exhaust, 6) Reconnecting switch, 7) Turning off fuel valve and letting it run out, 8) Adding fuel stabilizer, and 9) Disconnecting battery.

What safety equipment is required on board?

Required equipment includes: Coast Guard-approved PFDs (one per person plus a throwable for boats over 16 ft), fire extinguishers (Type B-I or B-II depending on size), visual distress signals (day/night), a sound-producing device (horn/whistle), and navigation lights for night operation.

How do I handle carbon monoxide (CO) on board?

CO can accumulate from exhaust. Never block exhaust outlets, ventilate cabins while underway, test CO detectors per manufacturer instructions, and avoid operating engines in confined spaces or with people on the swim platform. Symptoms include dizziness, nausea, headache, and confusion.

What is the proper anchoring procedure?

Approach the anchor spot heading into wind/current. Lower the anchor slowly from the bow, letting out a scope of 5-7 times the water depth. Set the anchor by reversing gently, then secure the line. Check for holding. When weighing anchor, motor up slowly and retrieve the line.

How do I operate the VacuFlush toilet?

Operate the VacuFlush toilet by pressing the flush button. A vacuum pump draws waste into the holding tank. Use only marine toilet paper. For winterization, add antifreeze to the bowl and pump through. Refer to the toilet manual for detailed maintenance.

What does the 'Red Right Returning' rule mean?

When returning from sea or traveling upstream, red markers should be kept on your starboard (right) side and green markers on your port side. This is the standard buoyage system for U.S. waters.

How often should I inspect the exhaust system?

Inspect the exhaust system before each trip: check clamps, look for leaks (rust/black streaks), cracks, and ensure water exits at the outlet. Annually, a marine professional should replace hoses/mufflers if worn and inspect metallic components.

What is the proper way to start the engines?

Before starting, open engine compartment, check for fuel odors, run blower for at least 4 minutes. Ensure all safety equipment is on board. Start engines one at a time, check gauges, and allow to warm up before shifting into gear.

How do I care for the gelcoat and fiberglass?

Wash regularly with mild soap and water. Apply marine wax periodically to protect gelcoat. Repair scratches or chips promptly. For bottom paint, use anti-fouling paint suitable for your area. Avoid harsh chemicals that can damage the finish.

USER MANUAL 3760 Regal

REGAL®

Follow no one.

OWNER'S MANUAL 3760

OWNER'S MANUAL

3760

1 INTRODUCTION

Regal Owner's Manual 1-4

General Information 1-5

Regal Marine Warranty 1-12

2 SAFETY ON BOARD

Safety Labels 2-1

General Boating Safety 2-2

Required Safety Equipment 2-4

Fire Extinguishers 2-6

Visual Distress Signals 2-7

Sound Protecting Devices 2-10

Radio Communications 2-10

Navigation Lights 2-10

Marine Sanitation Devices 2-10

Garbage Discharge 2-12

EBIRB 2-12

Life Rafts 2-13

U.S.C.G Minimum Equipment Requirements 2-13

Exhaust & Carbon Dioxide 2-14

Boating & Alcohol 2-16

Boating Accidents 2-17

Water Sports 2-19

Weather & Water Conditions 2-20

3 RULES OF THE ROAD

Navigation Rules Defined 3-1

Navigation Rules 3-1

Table Of Contents

4 ENGINES & CONTROLS

Introduction 4-1

Ventilation 4-2

Controls 4-3

Stern Drive Engines 4-8

V-Drive Engines 4-19

5 SYSTEMS

Electrical 5-1

Fuel 5-15

Steering 5-17

Trim 5-18

Waste & Water 5-22

6 VESSEL OPERATION

Getting Underway 6-1

Starting & Stopping 6-4

Fenders 6-5

Dock Line Basics 6-6

Steps To Stern Drive Docking 6-8

Stern Drive Mancuvering 6-9

Steps To V-Drive Docking 6-11

V-Drive Maneuvering 6-12

Anchoring 6-13

Towing 6-14

Admiralty Law 6-14

Knots 6-15

Emergencies 6-16

Environmental Awareness 6-18

Battery Charger 7-11

Battery Parallel Switch 7-12

Battery Switch Panel 7-13

CO Detector 7-14

Coffee Maker 7-15

D C Distribution Panel 7-17

DVD Player 7-18

Door-Cabin Entry 7-26

Flooring- Cherry & Holly 7-27

Hatches 7-27

Isolator-Galvanic 7-28

Lighting 7-30

Microwave Oven 7-33

Monitor-Water/Waste 7-42

Portlights 7-42

Range 7-43

Refrigerator 7-45

Shower Sump Pump 7-46

Sleeper/Sofa 7-47

Seat-Aft Bench 7-49

Stereo/CD Player 7-50

Television 7-62

Toilet 7-85

Table Of Contents

EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT

Arch-Radar 7-87

Bilge Pump/Float 7-88

Canvas 7-89

Carpet- Cockpit 7-93

Compass 7-93

Electronics 7-94

Fire Extinguisher- Automatic 7-132

Hatch-Engine 7-134

Heater-Hot Water 7-135

High Water Alarm 7-136

Markers For Slings 7-137

Pump-Fresh Water 7-138

Shower-Transom 7-139

Seat-Aft Bench 7-140

Seat-Helm Adjustment 7-141

Spotlight 7-142

Sunpad/Chaise Lounge 7-143

Swim Platform/Ladder 7-144

Table- Cockpit 7-145

Wash Down-Fresh Water 7-147

Water Inlet-Dockside 7-147

Windlass 7-148

Windshield-Center Latch 7-151

Wiper-Windshield 7-151

Valves-Fuel Tank/Generator 7-152

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

Bottom Paint 7-155

Cablemaster System 7-156

Camera Monitoring System 7-158

Electronics 7-159

Compass 7-93

Electronics-Autopilot 7-159

Electronics-E Series Plotter 7-163

Electronics-Radar 7-173

Gas Vapor Detector 7-178

Generator-Gas/Diesel 7-179

Hard Top 7-190

Neutra-Salt System-Volvo Only 7-192

Overboard Discharge Pump (Macerator) 7-193

Refrigerator/Icemaker 7-194

Sterco/CD Changer/Amp/Woofcr 7-197

iPod Adapter 7-199

Performance Stereo Package 7-201

Sirius Satellite Radio 7-202

Sirius Marine Weather 7-203

Teak Inlay For Swim Platform 7-205

Underwater Lighting 7-206

Vacuum Cleaner System 7-207

Table Of Contents

8 COSMETIC CARE & MAINTENANCE

Cosmetic Carc 8-1

Maintenance 8-18

Stern Drive Maintenance 8-49

V-Drive Maintenance 8-94

Gas Generator 8-142

Diesel Generator 8-157

9 TROUBLESHOOTING

Diagnostic Charts 9-1

10 STORAGE & WINTERIZATION

Checklists 10-1

11 GLOSSARY & INDEX 11-1

12 TECHNICAL

Technical Information 12-1

Technical Drawings 12-7

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Introduction

Boating is becoming more popular every year. There are numerous types of recreational vessels on our waterways today involved in an every growing number of activities. Therefore, as a new boat owner it is of the highest priority to learn about general boating practices before operating your craft.

Your Regal dealer will answer many questions and provide valuable “hands on” information during the completion of the new boat delivery process. In addition, your dealer has received special factory training on the product line and his services should be employed to solve technical problems and periodic maintenance beyond the scope of this manual. Also, your Regal dealer carries a line of factory approved parts and accessories. Your Regal dealer can provide information regarding national training organizations such as the U.S. Power Squadron and United States Coast Guard Auxiliary. Along with other organizations and literature, they can help build your “boating savvy” by developing the necessary skills and awareness to be a safe and component skipper.

Your local library can also help in providing recommended boating literature such as Chapman Piloting (Scamanship & Boat Handling by Elbert S. Maloney).

Remember, the waterways can change from normal to abnormal conditions in a heartbeat. Knowing how to react quickly comes from experience and knowledge which can be gained through boating education.

Welcome aboard!

WELCOME TO REGAL

I know I speak for everyone at Regal when I welcome you to the ever-growing family of Regal boat owners. You've chosen a craft that is recognized worldwide for its standard of excellence. Each step in construction has been carefully scrutinized to assure comfort, performance, reliability and safety for both your passengers and yourself.

Your boat is certified by the National Marine Manufacturers Association. It also complies with the applicable standards set by the United States Coast Guard, American Boat and Yacht Council and the International Marine Certification Institute. Your Regal boat was built with the same attention to detail and quality of construction that we would expect in a boat we would purchase ourselves.

Whether you're a veteran boater or a newcomer, we strongly urge you to read this boat owner's manual thoroughly. Familiarize yourself with the various components of your boat, and heed the safety precautions noted herein.

If you have questions that are not covered in this manual, please consult your authorized Regal dealer for assistance or phone the Regal factory at 407-851-4360.

Thank you, and welcome to the "World of Regal!"

Paul Kuck

Founder

REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES, INC. MISSION STATEMENT

With God's help

and a steadfast commitment to integrity,

we will develop a team

of exceptional people and relationships

to provide exceptional customer satisfaction.

REGAL OWNER'S MANUAL

Your Regal owner's manual has been compiled to help you operate your craft with safety and pleasure. It contains specific details of the vessel, the equipment, its systems, and information on its operation and maintenance. Please read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vessel before using it.

This manual is not to be thought of as a complete shop technical manual. Your Regal dealer has received special factory training on our complete product line and his services should be employed to solve technical problems. In addition to your Regal owner's manual, we have provided an owner's information packet on the vessel. This packet contains important equipment literature along with vendor and warranty information.

Please ensure that you obtain handling and operating experience before assuming control of your boat. Your dealer will be pleased to advise you of local training organizations such as the Power Squadron and United States Coast Guard Auxiliary.

Contact your local dealer if any of the above material is missing. In keeping with its commitment to continued improvement, Regal notes that all specifications, models, standard and optional equipment is subject to change without notice.

OWNER'S PACKET

Regal has provided an information packet on board the vessel. Read and become familiar with the materials. This packet contains valuable literature on your propulsion package, standard and optional equipment, systems and various care and cleaning instructions. Be sure to store the information packet in a clean, dry area.

GENERAL INFORMATION

HULL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (HIN)

The United States Coast Guard has established a universal system of numerically identifying vessels by using a hull identification number or “HIN.” This number identifies your Regal boats model, hull number, month and year of manufacture. The HIN is found on your boat’s transom, on the starboard side, just below the rub rail on the transom vertical surface. The HIN consists of 12 alpha or numeric characters.

It is recommended that you locate and write down the HIN for future reference. It can be especially useful when ordering parts from your Regal dealer. A second HIN number is found in a hidden location. This second HIN is useful to authorities if the vessel is stolen and the original transom HIN is modified or eliminated.

HULL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

VESSEL INFORMATION SHEET

It is recommended that you fill out the information on the following page. It will supply vital statistics on your vessel. Make a copy of the data for safe keeping at home.

VESSEL FLOAT PLAN

Fill out the float plan on the following page before departing. Leave it with a responsible person who will notify the United States Coast Guard or local law enforcement authorities if you do not return as planned. If you change your plans be sure to notify this person. Make copies of the float plan and use one each time you go boating. This will help people know where to find you should you not return on schedule. Do not file the float plan with the United States Coast Guard.

NMMA YACHT CERTIFICATION PLATE

In the dash area you will notice a metal plate which recognizes that your boat was built to design compliance in effect on the date the certification was verified. The plate also states that your vessel complies with U. S. Coast Guard safety system standards in effect on the date of certification.

VESSEL INFORMATION

Owner:

Address:

City & State:

Home Phone:

Business Phone:

In Case Of Emergency Notify:

Address

City_

State

Phonc

Insurance Agent's Name:

Policy#:

USCG Phone:

Local Police:

Marina Phone:

Slip (Dock#):

Hull Serial #: RGM

Key #:

Port Engine:

Stbd Engine:

Key #:

Cabin Door:

Selling Dealer:

Address:

City & State:

Phone:

Fax:

Servicing Dealer:

Address:

City & State:

Phone:

Fax:

FLOAT PLAN

Fill out this form before departure. Leave it with a responsible person who will notify the Coast Guard or police if you don't return as planned. If you change your plans be sure to notify this person. Make copies of the float plan and use one each time you go on a trip. This will help people know where to find you should you not return on schedule. Do not file this plan with the Coast Guard.

Owner: ____ Safety Equipment Aboard: ____

Address: ____ Life Jackets

City & State: First Aid Kit

Telephone#: Flares

Flash Light

VHF Radio

Person Filing Report: ____ Anchor

Name ____ Compass

Telephone ____ Food

Water

Make Of Boat: Registration#

Length____Boat Name ____ Destination:

Color ____ Trim ____ Hp ____ Leave From ____

Inboard ____ Outboard ____ Time Left ____

Hull I.D.# ____ Going To ____

____ Fuel Capacity ____

Est. Time Of Arrival

Other Information: ____ ____

Return:

Est. Time Of Arrival

If Not Back By o'clock Call Coast Guard

Persons Aboard:

Name Age Address Phone

LAUNCH & CRUISE CHECKLIST

☐ Obtain a current weather report.

□ Inspect the hull and propeller for damage. Excessive dirt or marine growth will affect your boat's performance and fuel efficiency.

☐ Check the electrical system and navigation lights.

☐ If your boat has been in the water, run the bilge pump until the flow of water stops.

☐ If your boat has been out of the water, check to see that all bilge water has drained out. Then install the drain plug.

☐ Check that all required safety equipment is on board and in good working condition. Examples include personal flotation devices (PFD's), horn, fire extinguishers, visual distress signals, etc. Take along a gallon of drinking water.

☐ Check that all other equipment is on board such as mooring lines, first aid kit, tool kit and extra parts.

☐ Open engine compartment. Inspect for fuel odors and visible leaks in the fuel, oil, coolant, exhaust and power steering systems.

□ Visually inspect engine for cracked hoses, defective belts, and loose fasteners such as bolts, nuts or hose clamps.

☐ Check fuel level. Fuel tanks should be filled to slightly less than capacity. Allow for fuel expansion.

☐ Make sure all navigation charts, equipment and vessel registration paperwork are on board.

☐ Check operation of bilge blower, steering system, navigation lights and horn.

RECOMMENDED ON BOARD EQUIPMENT

TOOLS

SPARE PARTS

Allen Wrenches Fuel Filter

Jack Knife Spark Plugs

Phillips Screwdriver Water Pump Belt

Regular Pliers Alternator Belts

Combination Box & End Wrench Set Anti-siphon Valve

Slotted Screwdriver Set Propellers

Ratchet & Socket Set Propeller Nuts & Hardware

Electrical Crimper & Cutter Extra Light Bulbs/Batteries

Hammer Fuses

Feeler Gauges Liquid Wrench

Jaw Plicrs Gear Lubricant

Vise Grip Pliers

Floating Flashlight/Lantern

Lubricating Oil

Electrical Strippers

Oil & Fuel Filter Wrench

Water Pump Impeller

Jumper Cables

Duct & Electricians Tape

Power Steering Belt

Engine & Transmission Oil

BASIC GEAR

Tow Line

Mooring Lines

Dock Fenders

Distress Signals

First Aid Kit

Boat Hook

Foul Weather Gear

VHF Radio

GPS

Charts & Plotting Instruments

Emergency Water & Food

Bailer or Hand Pump

EPIRB & Fire Extinguisher

Personal Floatation Devices

Life Raft

Bucket

Owner's Registration & Systems Checklist

Please note that your Regal boat requires the proper registration by your authorized Regal dealer. To initiate the vessel warranty your dealer must complete the owner's registration form and systems checklist at the time of delivery. The owner must sign the paperwork to acknowledge that the dealer has reviewed the boat systems and warranty provisions with the owner. The owner should keep the original paperwork that features a temporary warranty registration. A warranty certificate will be sent approximately 6 weeks after receipt of the paperwork at Regal headquarters.

Dealer's Responsibility

The vessel has undergone rigid quality assurance inspections before leaving the factory. However, your dealer has been trained to perform final pre-delivery checks and to service your Regal boat prior to your pickup. Your dealer's responsibilities include:

1. A complete orientation in the operation of your Regal boat, including matters relating to the safe operation of your craft.

2. Completion and mailing of your boat registration warranty form to Regal.

3. Vendor warranties, registration materials, owner's manual, operation, installation and maintenance instructions for auxiliary equipment supplied with or installed on your Regal boat.

Owner's Responsibility

You are entitled to all the benefits and services outlined in your Regal boat warranty. However, you have certain responsibilities to ensure warranty satisfaction.

These are:

To read the warranty materials and understand them fully.

To examine the boat in detail at the time of delivery.

Apply the following: boating rules and regulations, safety equipment, environmental regulations, accident reports and warranty regulations terms and conditions.

To read thoroughly all literature supplied with your boat, including this owner's manual and to follow the recommendations in the literature.

To return the boat after the recommended hours of engine operation for the proper dealer service inspections and maintenance.

To provide proper maintenance and periodic servicing of your boat and equipment as set forth in the various manuals supplied.

REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES, INC. LIFETIME PLUS LIMITED HULL WARRANTY

Welcome to the Worldwide Family of Regal Owners! We are very pleased that you have chosen a Regal Powerboat!

This document is your Warranty Registration Certificate and Statement of Warranty. Please check the registration information section for accuracy. If this information is not correct or if you change your address at some future date, please notify us at the following address: Regal Marine Industries, Inc. Attention: Warranty Registrations, 2300 Jetport Drive, Orlando, Florida 32809

Please read the warranty carefully. It contains important information on Regal's claims procedures and your rights and obligations under this warranty.

WHAT IS COVERED: This Limited Warranty applies only to Regal beginning with model year 2005.

LIFETIME LIMITED STRUCTURAL HULL WARRANTY: Regal Marine Industries, Inc. warrants to the original retail purchaser of this boat if purchased from an authorized Regal dealer that the selling dealer or Regal will repair or replace the fiberglass hull if it is found to be structurally defective in material or workmanship for as long as the original retail purchaser owns the boat. For purposes of this warranty, the hull is defined as the single fiberglass easting which rests on the water. This limited warranty is subject to all limitations and conditions explained below.

FIVE-YEAR TRANSFERABLE LIMITED STRUCTURAL HULL WARRANTY: In addition to the Lifetime Limited Structural Hull Warranty, Regal offers a Transferable Five-Year Limited Structural Hull Warranty. Under the Five-Year Transferable Limited Structural Hull Warranty, Regal will repair or replace the fiberglass hull if it is found to be structurally defective in material or workmanship within the first (5) years after the date of delivery to the original retail purchaser. Any remaining term of this Five-Year Limited Hull Warranty may be transferred to a second owner if within 60 days of purchase, the new owner registers the transfer with Regal and pays the established warranty transfer fee. Contact Regal Customer Service at the above address for details.

FIVE-YEAR LIMITED HULL BLISTER WARRANTY: Regal will Warrant to the original retail purchaser, any underwater geicoated surfaces of the hull against laminate blisters which occur as a result of defects in material or workmanship within (5) years of the date of delivery, provided that the original factory gelcoat surface has not been altered. Alternation would include but is not limited to damage repair; excessive sanding, scraping, sandblasting; or from improper surface preparation for application of a marine barrier coating or bottom paint, any of which shall void this Five-Year Limited Hull Blister Warranty. Regal Marine shall repair or cause to be repaired any covered laminate blisters based on the following prorated schedule. Less than two (2) years from delivery date - 100%, Two (2) to three (3) years from delivery date - 75%, Three (3) to four (4) years from delivery date - 50%, Four (4) to five (5) years from delivery date - 25%.

Reimbursement shall be limited to one repair, not to exceed (\$80.00) dollars per foot of boat length prior to prorating. Regals prior authorization for the method and cost of repair, must be obtained before repairs are commenced. All costs to transport the boat for repairs are the responsibility of the owner.

LIMITED GENERAL WARRANTY: In addition to above hull warranties, Regal warrants to the original purchaser of this boat if purchased from an authorized dealer that the dealer or Regal will repair or replace any parts found to be defective in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of delivery, subject to all limitations and conditions contained herein.

LIMITED EXTERIOR FINISH WARRANTY: Regal warrants that the selling dealer or Regal will repair cosmetic defects in the exterior gelcoated finish including cracks or crazing reported to Regal within 90 days from the date of delivery to the original purchaser, subject to all limitations and conditions contained herein. All warranty work is to be performed at a Regal dealership or other location authorized by a Regal Customer Service Manager after it is established to Regal's satisfaction that there is a defect in material or workmanship.

REGISTRATION INFORMATION:

CUSTOMER OBLIGATIONS: The following arc conditions precedent to the availability of any benefits under these limited warranties:

(a) The purchaser must sign and the dealer must submit to Regal the "OWNER REGISTRATION AND SYSTEMS CHECKLIST FORM within ten (10) days of the date of delivery and such information must be on file at Regal.
(b) The purchaser must first notify the dealer from whom the boat was purchased of any claim under this warranty within the applicable warranty period and within a reasonable period of time (not to exceed thirty (30) days) after the defect is or should have been discovered.
(c) Regal will not be responsible to repair or replace any part, (1) if the use of the boat is continued after the defect is or should have been

Introduction

discovered; and (2) if such continued use causes other or additional damage to the boat or component parts of the boat.

(d) Based on the dealer's knowledge of Regal's warranty policy and/or consultations with Regal, the dealer will accept the claim and arrange for appropriate repairs to be performed, or deny the claim if it is not within the warranty.
(e) The dealer will contact the Regal boat owner regarding instructions for delivery of boat or part for warranty repair if it is covered by the limited warranty.

ALL COSTS TO TRANSPORT THE BOAT FOR REPAIRS ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER;

(f) If the Regal boat owner believes a claim has been denied in error or the dealer has performed the warranty work in an unsatisfactory manner, the owner must notify Regal's Customer Service Department in writing at the address listed for further consideration. Regal will then review the claim and take appropriate follow-up action.

WARRANTY EXCEPTIONS: THIS LIMITED WARRANTY does not cover and the following are not warranted:

(a) Engines, metal plating or finishes, windshield breakage, leakage, fading and deterioration of paints, canvas, upholstery and fabrics;
(b) Gelcoat surfaces including, but not limited to, cracking, crazing, discoloration or blistering except as noted above;
(c) Accessories and items which were not part of the boat when shipped from the Regal factory, and/or any damage caused thereby;
(d) Damage caused by misuse, accident, galvanic corrosion, negligence, lack of proper maintenance, or improper trailering;
(e) Any boat used for racing, or used for rental or commercial purposes;
(f) Any boat operated contrary to any instructions furnished by Regal, or operated in violation of any federal, state, Coast Guard or other governmental agency laws, rules, or regulations;
(g) The limited warranty is void if alterations have been made to the boat;
(h) Transportation of boat or parts to and/or from the REGAL factory or service location;
(i) Travel time or haul outs, loss of time or inconvenience;
(j) Any published or announced catalog performance characteristics of speed, fuel and oil consumption, and static or dynamic transportation in the water;
(k) Any boat that has been repowered beyond Regal's power recommendations;
(1) Boats damaged by accident and boats damaged while being loaded onto, transported upon or unloaded from trailers, cradles, or other devices used to place boats in water, remove boats from water or store or transport boats on or over land;
(m) Water damage to, dry rot to, condensation to, or absorption by interior surfaces, wood structures or polyurethane foam; interior wood including, but not limited to, bleeding and/or discoloration as a result of condensation or moisture or water continually contacting the plywood causing staining to upholstery, carpet or other interior surfaces;
(n) Costs or charges derived from inconveniences or loss of use, commercial or monetary loss due to time loss, and any other special, incidental or consequential damage of any kind or nature whatsoever.
WARRANTY EXCEPTIONS: The terms, conditions, limitations and disclaimers contained herein cannot be wavered except by the Customer Service Manager of Regal. Any such wavier must be in writing. Neither the dealer, nor the customer, nor any service, sales and/or warranty representative of Regal is authorized to waive and/or modify these conditions, limitations and/or disclaimers.

GENERAL PROVISIONS:

ALL GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL AND/OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARE EXCLUDED FROM THIS WARRANTY AND ARE TOTALLY DISCLAIMED BY REGAL. IT IS THE INTEREST OF THE PARTIES THAT THE OWNER'S SOLE REMEDY IS THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE VESSEL OR ITS ALLEGEDLY DEFECTIVE COMPONENT PARTS AND THAT NO OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE REMEDIES SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO SAID OWNER. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE FOREGOING MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

THIS IS A LIMITED WARRANTY; REGAL MAKES NO WARRANTY, OTHER THAN CONTAINED HEREIN; TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARISING IN STATE LAW ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. ALL OBLIGATIONS OF REGAL ARE SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH HEREIN. REGAL DOES NOT AUTHORIZE ANY PERSON OR DEALER TO ASSUME ANY LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH REGAL BOATS. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you. Regal's obligation with respect to this warranty is limited to making repairs to or replacing the defective parts and no claim for breach of warranty shall be cause for cancellation or rescission of the contract or sale for any boat manufactured by REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES, INC.

Regal will discharge its obligations under this warranty as rapidly as possible, but cannot guarantee any specific completion date due to the different nature of claims which may be made and services which may be required. Regal reserves the right to change or improve the design of its boats without obligation to modify any boat previously manufactured. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which may vary from state to state. Regal shall in no way be responsible for any repairs not PRE-AUTHORIZED by a Regal Customer Service Manager or repairs performed by a repair shop not PRE-AUTHORIZED by a Regal Customer Service Manager.

Notes

Safety On Board

Safety awareness can not be over emphasized. Safety on board needs to be the skippers number one priority. In this manual you will find many safety precautions and symbols to identify safety related items. Heed all safety precaution information. Remember, the skipper is responsible for the safety of his passengers and crew.

SAFETY LABELS

Safety Precaution Definition

Safety precautions are stated as caution, warning and danger signal words. They are highlighted in this manual by font design and symbol usage. Also, a notice heading is included which provides operation and maintenance information but is not hazard-related. An information label provides tips on a variety of topics. Become familiar and understand all safety precaution labels!

DANGER

Immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

Potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or unsafe practice that, if not avoided, may result in injury or property or product damage.

NOTICE

General or specific information which is important to correct operation or maintenance, but is not hazard related.

INFORMATION

Educational tips for the skipper and crew.

PRECAUTIONARY LABELS

Read and understand all safety labels affixed to your Regal boat. Most of the safety labels are found close to the helm, aft cockpit, cabin and swim platform. The location of the labels may vary by model. The label list does not cover everything! Use common sense to analyze the result of an action on board your vessel. Always think safety first!

NOTICE

DO NOT REMOVE OR COVER ANY PRECAUTIONARY LABELS. KEEP HARSH CHEMICALS AWAY FROM LABELS.

IF A LABEL BECOMES ILLEGIBLE, CONTACT YOUR REGAL DEALER FOR ORDERING REPLACEMENTS.

GENERAL BOATING SAFETY

We understand that you are cager to go boating. However, we strongly suggest that you thoroughly familiarize yourself and friends or members of your family with safe boating practices before setting out.

Remember, that along with the freedom and exhilaration of boating comes the responsibility that you have for the safety of your passengers and other boaters who share the water with you.

Boating regulations vary from state to state. Check with your local state and local authorities for the regulations pertaining to your area.

◆ Check with local weather stations, the U. S. Coast Guard, or weather station broadcasts for the latest conditions. Remember getting caught in severe weather is hazardous. Check weather conditions periodically while you are boating and before your outing. If you are forced to operate your boat in a storm condition, take common sense precautions; wear PFD's, store gear, reduce speed and head for safe refuge.

It is best to avoid operating your boat in foggy weather. When fog sets in, take bearings, log courses and speeds. You are required to emit a five second blast from your horn or whistle once every minute. Also, have your passengers wear PFD's and observe for oncoming vessels.

◆ Operate in shallow water presents a number of hazards including sand bars and water levels influenced by tides. If the vessel strikes an underwater hazard, check for boat and engine damage. If the engine vibrates excessively after striking an underwater obstruction, it may indicate a damaged propeller. If you run aground, seek help by radio or flares.

◆ Make sure your boat and equipment are in top condition. Do this by frequently inspecting the hull, engine and gear.

Safety On Board

• You must provide a Coast Guard approved personal flotation device (PFD) for every person on board. These PFD's should be in good condition and easily accessible.
  ♦ Insist that non-swimmers and children on board wear a PFD at all times. Any time you encounter rough weather conditions, make sure everyone on board is wearing a PFD, including yourself. Instruct your passengers in how to put on their PFDs and be sure they know their storage location on the boat. Remember, in an emergency, a PFD that cannot be quickly located and worn is useless.
  ♦ Never allow anyone to sit anywhere on the boat not specifically designed seating. While underway, ALWAYS insist passengers sit in the provided seating and set an example by doing this yourself.
  ◆ Use maximum caution when fueling. Never allow any smoke or flame nearby while you are fueling. ALWAYS check for fuel leaks and fumes when fueling is completed.

♦ Never drink and drive! As captain, you are responsible for the safety of your passengers and yourself. Alcohol and boating can be a dangerous combination. DO NOT mix them. Alcohol impairs the boat operators ability to make conscious decisions and react to

emergency situations quickly.

♦ Never overload your boat! An overloaded boat, or one with uneven weight distribution can be difficult to steer.

- Be certain there is enough fuel aboard for your cruising needs. Include any reserve that might be needed should you change your plans due to weather or emergency. Practice the “one-third rule: Use one-third of your fuel going out,

one-third to return and retain one-third as a reserve.

◆ Always check the weather before departure. Be particularly cautious of electrical storms and high winds.
◆ Always have up-to-date charts aboard. You will need current charts of the area you'll be cruising to stay on proper course. Charts can be obtained at your closet marine outlet or store or by contacting one of three federal government agencies.
◆ Always file a float plan. Leave details of your trip with someone responsible who will be remaining on shore. Include expected return, plus name and phone number of a contact person in case of emergency.
◆ Use care, courtesy and common sense when launching, docking or operating your boat.
Learn and obey the “Rules of the Road”. A copy of the “Rules of the Road” can be obtained from the U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary or local Power Squadron.

In case of emergency: Know the international distress signals if you have a VHF radio aboard. The spoken word "MAYDAY" is the international signal of distress and is for emergency use only. Under no circumstances should this word be used, unless there is danger at hand.

- Posted speed limits, swimming areas, “no wake” zones and other restrictions should be red-flagged. They are so noted for a reason. Sensible boat use, plus courtesy, equals enjoyable and safe boating.

It is your responsibility to stay abreast of all federal, state and local rules, as some laws or regulations may change or be different from state to state. Contact your local boating agencies for updated information.

We can not stress safety enough! Remember, there are no brakes on your boat, and the water current and wind velocity all affect your ability to respond. The driver must use caution at all times to maintain control of his vessel and especially to keep a safe distance from other boats and obstacles.

◆ Always keep all safety gear in optimum condition. Pay special attention to attached tags and plates indicating expiration dates on equipment such as fire extinguishers, and personal flotation devices. Encourage a periodic maintenance check on all safety equipment. Contact your Regal dealer or marine professional for more information. Again, remember that the captain is responsible for his passengers and vessel.

REQUIRED SAFETY EQUIPMENT

PERSONAL FLOTATION DEVICES

All personal flotation devices (PFD's) must be Coast Guard approved, in good working condition, and must be the correct size for the wearer. All PFD's must be readily accessible. This means being able to wear them in a reasonable amount of time in case of an emergency (fire, boat sinking, etc.). They should not be stored or locked in closed areas Also, make sure that all coverings are removed such as plastic from any PFD's. Throwable devices such as a ring buoys need to be available for immediate deployment. A PFD should be worn at all times when your boat is operating on the water. A PFD may save your life, but it must be worn to do so.

As minimum U. S. Coast Guard requirements all recreational boats must carry one type I, II, III, or V PFD (wearable) for each person aboard. See the explanation following for each type. For type V to be counted they must be used according to the label instructions. In addition, all boats over 16' must carry one Type IV (throwable) PFD.

Some states require that PFD's be worn by children of specific ages at all times. Check with state boating agencies for particular requirements in your state before taking children on the water.

Remember PFD's will not necessarily keep you from drowning, even though they are designed to keep a person from sinking. When purchasing PFD's make sure it safely fits the person wearing it. It is a good idea to test PFD's in a lifeguarded shallow pool before venturing on the water.

Safety On Board

Refer to the USCG minimum equipment requirements at the end of this chapter. It is meant to be a guide only. Contact state and local agencies for additional equipment requirements. Remember as the captain of your vessel you are responsible for its safe operation.

TYPE I- Also known as an off-shore jacket, it provides the most buoyancy. It is a PFD for all waters and is especially useful in rough waters where rescue may encompass additional time. It is designed to turn most unconscious users in the water to a face-up position. Type I PFD is available in adult & child sizes.

TYPE II- Also known as nearshore buoyant vest, it is recommended for calm, inland water where rescue time will be minimal. It will turn some unconscious people face-up in the water but not as numerous as Type I. They are available in adult, medium child, along with infant and small child sizes.

TYPE III- Known as a flotation aid it is good for calm, inland water or where there is a chance for quick rescue. It is designed so wearers can place themselves in a face-up position in the water. The wearer may have to tilt their head back to avoid turning face-down in the

TYPE IV- Intended for calm, inland water with heavy vessel traffic, where help is constantly present. It is designed to be thrown into the water for someone to grab on to and held until rescued. It should not be worn. Type IV includes ring buoys, buoyant cushions, and horseshoe buoys.

TYPE V- This is the least bulky of all PFD's. It contains a small amount of inherent buoyancy, and an inflatable chamber. It is rated even to a Type I, II, or III PFD (as noted on the jacket label) when inflated. Hybrid PFD's must be worn to be acceptable.

water.

MAINTAINING YOUR PFD'S

A PFD is only useful if it is well maintained. Always be aware of PDF age since it has a life expectancy like any other piece of equipment.

√ Check periodically for broken zippers, frayed webbing, water soaked kapok bags, missing straps, and sewing that has become undone.
√ Clean each PFD with mild soap and water only. Again, let dry sufficiently before storing.
√ Keep PFD's out of grease and oil since they can deteriorate the jacket inner and outer materials.
√ Check any kapok-bagged jackets by squeezing. If you hear air escaping the bag is defective and the PFD should be thrown away.
√ Grab the cover with the fingers. If the cover material rips, the PFD is rotted and should be thrown away.
√ If the kapok bag is hard the PFD should be discarded.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

GENERAL INFORMATION

Fire extinguishers are classified by a letter and numeric symbol. The letter references the type of fire the unit is designed to extinguish.

(For example, type B extinguishers commonly used on boats are designed to put out flammable liquids such as grease, oil and gasoline.

The number indicates the general size of the extinguisher (minimum extinguishing agent weight).

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CONTENTS
CLASS	FOAMIN GALS. IN	C02 DRYIN LBS.	CHEM HALONIN LBS.	IN LBS.
B-I	1.25	4	2	2.5
B-II	2.5	15	10	10

MINIMUM PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS REQUIRED
VESSEL NO LENGTH SYSTEM	FIXED WITH SYSTEM	FIXED
LESS THAN 26' 1 B-1 026' TO LESS THAN 40' 2 B-1 OR 1 B-II 1 B-140' TO 65' 3 B-1 OR 1 B-II 2 B-1AND 1 B-1 OR 1 B-II

Safety On Board

U. S. Coast Guard approved fire extinguishers are required on all Regal boats. Besides the minimum Coast Guard requirements always check state and local agencies for additional requirements and equipment.

Coast Guard approved extinguishers are hand-portable, either B-I or B-II classification. U. S. Coast Guard approved hand-portable and semi-portable extinguishers contain a metal plate that shows the manufacturers name and extinguisher type, capacity and operating instructions. They have a special marine type mounting bracket which keeps the extinguisher solidly mounted until needed. The extinguisher needs to be mounted in a readily accessible location but one out of being bumped by people while underway. All approved extinguishers need to have an indication gauge.

U.S.C.G APPROVED FIRE EXTINGUISHER TYPES & FEATURES

The dry chemical agent is widely used because of its convenience and low cost. The extinguisher canister is filled with a white dry chemical power along with a pressurized gas. It is a good idea to shake this type periodically because they tend to "pack" on the canister bottom.

rubber, plastics, cloth wood, and paper. It leaves a messy residue. Not for electric fires.

■ The carbon dioxide unit uses CO2 gas under high pressure, with a funnel discharge hose usually swivel mounted. This extinguisher leaves no residue and does not cause interior engine harm. To ensure workability, weigh the unit annually. A 10%

maximum weight variance is allowed.

Another type of liquified gas used today is FE-241. This gas is colorless and odorless, heavier than air and sinks to the lower bilge to extinguish fires. Since the year 2000 ingredients have changed to a more environmental friendly formula (Chlorotetrafluoroethane or FE-241). FE-241 is used in portable-hand units along with making up the majority of boat automatic fire extinguishing systems. The canister needs to be weighed once a year. These clean agent units feature a dash mount indicator. Refer to the information regarding fire prevention in this manual.

VISUAL DISTRESS SIGNALS

All vessels used on coastal waters, any of the Great Lakes, territorial seas, and those waters connected directly to them up to point where a body of water is less than two miles wide, must have Coast Guard approved visual distress signals.

The foam type uses a chemical foaming agent plus water and is best when used for fires involving flammable liquids- solvents, gasoline, oil, grease and various paints. It will work on fires involving rubber, plastics, cloth, wood, and paper. It leaves a messy residue. Do not use

this extinguisher for electric fires.

PYROTECHNIC DEVICES

Pyrotechnic visual distress signals must be Coast Guard approved, be ready for service and must be readily accessible. They all display a marking which is the service life, which must not have expired. A minimum of 3 devices are required for the day and 3 devices for night.

Some devices meet both day and night requirements. Pyrotechnic devices should be stored in a cool, dry location. Most of these devices can be purchased in an highly visible (orange) watertight container. Types of Coast Guard approved pyrotechnic distress signals and associated devices are:

■ Pyrotechnic red flares, hand-held or aerial type.

■ Pyrotechnic orange smoke, hand-held or floating type.

■ Launchers for parachute flares or aerial red meteors.

All in all, each distress signal has certain advantages and disadvantages.

There is no distress signal that is best under all situations.

Pyrotechnics are recognized world-wide as superior distress signals. A downfall is they emit a very hot flame that can cause burns and or ignite flammable materials. Pistol launched and hand-held parachute flares operate consistent with firearms and therefore must be carefully handled. Check with local and state regulations since since some of these device are considered firearms and are prohibited.

NON-PYROTECHNIC DEVICES

Non-pyrotechnic devices must all be in serviceable condition, readily accessible, and must be certified by the manufacturer to comply with Coast Guard standards. They include:

■ Orange distress flag.
■ Electric distress flag.

The distress flag is for day use only. It must be 3 x 3 or larger with a black square and ball on an orange background. It can be spotted when attached to a boat hook, long fishing rod, or paddle with the person waving the flag back and forth overhead.

The electric distress flag is for night use only flashing the international SOS distress signal (..._ _ _ ...).

Under Inland Navigation Rules, a high intensity white light that flashes at regular intervals from 50-70 times per minute is considered a distress signal.

Remember that regulations prohibit the display of visual distress signals on the water under any circumstances except when assistance is required to prevent immediate or potential danger to passengers on a vessel.

Safety On Board

INTERNATIONAL DISTRESS SIGNALS

SOUND PRODUCING DEVICES

According to both Inland and International Rules, all boats must carry some way of producing an efficient sound signal. If your vessel is 12 meters (39' 4") or longer, a power whistle, power horn or bell must be carried. The bell must be 7 7/8" in diameter.

Boats less than 12 meters a horn or whistle is recommended to signal intentions or signal position. The sound signal made in all cases must be capable of a four or six second blast audible for one half mile. See the section discussing bridge and whistle signals for more information.

RADIO COMMUNICATIONS

VHF radios are used for distress and ship to shore and ship to ship communications today. Learn the specialized messages such as Mayday, Mayday, Mayday. It is only used when life or vessel is in imminent danger.

NAVIGATION LIGHTS

The U. S. Coast Guard requires recreational boats operating at night to display navigation lights between sunset and sunrise. Navigation lights help avoid collisions by improving the night visibility of vessels. Red and green directional lights, white stern lights, white masthead lights and white all-around lights must be displayed in specified positions, depending on boat size, and mode of operation.

The configuration of visible lights tells and operator the size, direction of travel and means of propulsion (sail, power, rowing or at anchor) of another vessel.

This helps both operators determine who has the right of way. Larger boats are required to carry larger, brighter lights that are visible over longer distances. See the light requirement chart for pleasure craft.

MARINE SANITATION DEVICES

Recreational vessels under 65' with installed toilet facilities must have an operable marine sanitation device (MSD) on board. Vessels 65' and under may use Type I, II, or III MSD. All installed MSD's must be U.S. Coast Guard certified. Most of the devices are labeled to show conformity to the regulations.

NOTICE

DISCHARGE OF OIL PROHIBITED

THE FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

ACTPROHIBITS THE DISCHARGE

OF OIL OR OILY WASTE

INTO OR UPON THE NAVIGABLE WATERS

AND CONTIGUOUS ZONE

OF THE UNITED STATES IF SUCH DISCHARGE

CAUSES A FILM OR SHEEN UPON,

OR DISCOLORATION OF THE SURFACE OF

THE WATER, OR CAUSES A SLUDGE

OR EMULSION BENEATH THE SURFACE

OF THE WATER

VIOLATORS ARE SUBJECT TO

A PENALTY OF \$5,000

Safety On Board

NAVIGATION LIGHT RULES

figure 7 a b c

Sailboat using sail alone, less than 7 meters in length: If impractical to display lights in figure 4, 5 or 6, a single white light may be displayed in time to prevent a collision (figure 7c). Row Boats or Paddle Boats One all-round white light ready to display in time to prevent a collision (figure 7 a or b).

Great Lakes figure 7d Motorboat or sailboat using power on Great Lakes: The lighting arrangements in figure 7d may be used instead of the arrangements in figures 1 and 2.

Location of lights on vessel	Visible Range		Degrees of arc lights
	Less than 12 m.	12 m. but less than 20 m.
	in miles
Masthead	2	3	225°
All-round	2	2	360°
Side lights	1	2	112.5° each color
Stern light	2	2	135°

Boats less than 12 meters in length

Motorboats or sailboats using power: The lighting arrangements to figure 1, 2 or 3 may be used.

Sailboat using sails alone: The lighting arrangements in figure 4, 5 or 6 may be used.

Boats 12 meters but less than 20 meters in length

Motorboats or sailboats using power: The lighting arrangements to figure 1 or 2 may be used.

Sailboat using sails alone: The lighting arrangements in figure 4, 5 or 6 may be used.

Location of lights

Lights should be located as shown in the drawings.

The masthead light (forward white light in figures 1, 2 and 7d) must be at least one meter higher than the colored lights on a boat less than 12 meters in length and at least 2.5 meters above the gunwale on a boat 12 meters but less than 20 meters in length.

Exceptions

Motorboat or sailboat using power, built before December 24, 1980: The lighting arrangement in figure 1, 2 or 3 may be used. However, the arrangement in figure 3 is not acceptable on a boat that is 12 meters or longer on international waters.

You must immediately notify the U. S. Coast Guard if your vessel discharges oil or hazardous substances in the water. Call toll free 1-800-424-8802. Report the following information: location, source, size, color, substances and time observed.

GARBAGE DISCHARGE

The act to prevent pollution from ships places limitations on the discharge of garbage from vessels. It is illegal to dump plastic trash anywhere in the ocean or navigable waters of the United States. Also, it is illegal to discharge garbage in the navigable waters of the United States, including the Great Lakes. The discharge of other types of garbage is allowed outside certain specified distances from shore as determined by the nature of that garbage. United States vessels of 26 feet or longer must display in a prominent location, a durable placard at least 4" x 9" notifying crew and passengers of discharge restrictions.

EBIRB

It is a good idea to carry communication gear such as a VHF-FM and/or HF transceivers set up for your operating area. Also, cell phones are useful in many coastal areas. Be sure to carry extra batteries. Also, mainly for offshore vessels, EPIRBs are designed to quickly and accurately

alert rescue forces, indicate an accurate distress position, and guide units to the distress scene. These devices operate from satellite signals sent to a ground station where the signal is downloaded. The downside is that they are relatively expensive but they are reliable even when other communications have been exhausted.

GARBAGE TYPE DISCHARGE

Plastics- includes synthetic ropes, fishing nets, Prohibited in all areas. and plastic bags.

Floating dunnage, lining and packing materials. Prohibited less than 25 miles from nearest land.

Food, waste, paper bags, rags, glass, metal, bottles Prohibited less than 12 m. from nearest land and crockery.

Comminuted or ground food. Prohibited less than 3 miles from the nearest land waste, paper, rags, glass, etc.

Safety On Board

LIFE RAFTS

Inflatable life rafts are recommended for ocean going and operating a vessel in a large body of water like the Great Lakes.

They provide a shelter for extended periods. If used, make sure it is large enough for all aboard and contains the proper emergency equipment pack. Also, get the unit professionally serviced. Make sure the life raft is Coast Guard approved.

USCG MINIMUM EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

Use the chart below as a guideline for assuring your vessel is outfitted to meet the USCG standards. Remember to check the local and state authorities for additional equipment requirements. Make sure your vessel and trailer registration paperwork and numbers on the boat are up to date and displayed properly according to state requirements. Keep the paperwork on board in a watertight and safe environment. Make sure it is quickly accessible.

USCG Minimum Equipment Requirements for Recreational Vessels

Boat Size in Feet	16'	26'	40'	65'	165'
Personal Flotation Devices1	One Type I, II, III, or V per person		One Type I, II, III, or V per person plus one Type IV throwable
Fire Extinguishers2	One B-I, any type		One B-II or Two B-I	One B-II and one B-L or three B-I	One or more B-II (vessels 0-50 tons gross)Two or more B-II (vessels 50-100 tons gross)
No Fixed System
With Fixed System	No Portables Required		One B-I	Two B-I or one Class B-II
Visual Distress Signals	Night signals required when operating at night Minimum of three day-use and three night-use (or three day/night combination) pyrotechnic devices5
Sound Producing Devices	Horn or whistle recommended to signal intentions or signal position			One bell, and one whistle or horn required to signal intentions or position
Backfire Flame Arrestor	One CG-approved device on each carburetor of all gasoline-powered engines built after April 1940, except outboard motors
Ventilation	CG standard system required on gasoline powered vessels with enclosed engine compartments built after August 1980
Navigation Lights Under Power3,4	Sidelights, Stern Light and Masthead6,7
Under Sail	Sidelights and Stern Light6,8
Rowing	Same as "Under Sail"
At Anchor	All-round light, 2nm (at night) or black anchoring ball (during the day) when outside a designated anchorage
Visibility Range	1nm Sidelights, 2nm all others			3nm Masthead, 2nm all others	5nm Masthead, 2nm all others
Pollution Regulations	"Honor system" (no plaques required)		5" x 8" Oil Discharge placard and 4" x 9" Waste Discharge placardVessels over 40' with a galley must have a Waste Management Plan
Marine Sanitation Devices	Vessels with installed toilet facilities must have an operable, CG-certified Type I, II or III Marine Sanitation Device (MSD). Subject to local laws!				Type II or III MSD only
Navigation Rules Familiarity with the Inland Navigation Rules required The Inland Navigation Rules ("Rules of the Road") must be kept on board
1. Pfd's must be CG approved, wearable by the intended user and readily accessible. 5. Non-pyrotechnic substitutes: 1 orange distress flag (day-use) and 1 electric SOS signal light (night-use).2. Fire extinguishers required on boats with enclosed engine compartments (not outboards), enclosed living spaces or permanent fuel tanks. 6. All boats under 65' can substitute a single bi-color light for sidelights.3. Sailboats operating under engine power are considered power driven and must follow the "Under Power" rules. During the day, motorsailing vessels are required to fly a motoring cone. 7. Boats under power under 40' can substitute a single all-round light for separate stern and masthead lights.4. Power-driven vessels under 23' and under 7 knots can substitute a white lantern or torch in place of the required lights. 8. Boats under sail under 40' can substitute a tri-color light for separate sidelights and stern light.Additions to theses requirements are prescribed by some individual state laws. Check your state's Boating Safety Handbook for a complete list.

EXHAUST & CARBON MONOXIDE

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust can be hazardous. It is important for you and your passengers to be aware of the potential safety hazard created by exhaust gases. Familiarize yourself with the symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning.

For safety sake avoid the following:

1. Do not allow the boat to remain stationary with the engine idling for an extended period of time.
2. Do not disable the carbon monoxide alarms that come with your Regal boat. Test the unit in accordance with the alarm manufacturers instructions.
3. Do not operate the engine for extended periods of time while in a confined area or where exhaust outlets face a wall or bulkhead.
4. Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time with the canvas in the upright and installed position.
5. Have the engine exhaust system inspected when the boat is in for service.
6. Persons sleeping can easily be overcome by carbon monoxide without realizing it. Do not sleep on board while the engine is running.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH FROM CO POISONING! DO NOT OPERATE THE BOAT WITH PEOPLE HOLDING ON TO THE SWIM PLATFORM WHILE IN THE WATER.

Blockage of exhaust outlets can cause carbon monoxide to accumulate in the cabin and cockpit area even when the

hatches, windows, portholes and doors are open.

Exhaust from another vessel alongside your boat, while docked or anchored, can emit poisonous CO gas inside the cabin and

cockpit areas of your boat.

The “station wagon effect” or backdrafting can cause CO gas to accumulate inside the cabin, cockpit or bridge areas when the

boat is under-way, using protective weather coverings, high bow angle, improper or heavy loading, slow speeds, or when boat is at rest.

In high concentrations, CO can be fatal in minutes. However, the effects of lower concentrations over a extended period of time can be just as lethal.

Carbon Monoxide accumulation requires immediate attention! Thoroughly ventilate cabin and cockpit areas. Determine the probable source of the carbon monoxide and correct the condition immediately. Regal has installed CO detectors on your boat. Have these detectors professionally calibrated at regular intervals according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

Symptoms of excessive exposure to carbon monoxide are:

• Dizziness • Watering, itchy eyes
- Drowsiness - Flushed appearance
- Nausea • Inattentiveness
- Headache • Incoherence
- Ringing in the ears - Fatigue or vomiting
- Throbbing temples - Convulsions

WARNING

EXHAUST FUMES CAN KILL! INSPECT THE EXHAUST SYSTEM REPAIR OR REPLACE LEAKING, CRACKED AND CORRODED, OR MISSING EXHAUST COMPONENTS BEFORE EACH OUTING.

DANGER

CARBON MONOXIDE IS A TASTELESS, ODORLESS AND INVISIBLE GAS THAT CAN CAUSE DISCOMFORT, SEVERE ILLNESS, AND EVEN DEATH. EXERCISE CAUTION WHILE OPERATING GENERATOR OR ENGINES IN CONFINED SPACES OR AT DOCKSIDE. DO NOT ALLOW HULL EXHAUST OUTLETS TO BECOME BLOCKED OR EXHAUST FUMES CAN BECOME TRAPPED IN AND AROUND THE CONFINES OF YOUR BOAT. DURING IDLE AND SLOW CRUISE CONDITIONS, BILGE BLOWERS SHOULD BE USED.

To help prevent carbon monoxide accumulation, ventilate your cabin and cockpit while underway. Open a forward hatch, porthole or window to allow air to travel through the boat's interior. See the

illustration below for desired airflow.

EACH TRIP

■ Make sure all exhaust hose clamps are in place and secure.
■ Look for exhaust leaking from the exhaust system components, indicated by rust and or black streaking, water leaks, or corroded or cracked fittings.
- Inspect all rubber exhaust hoses for burned or cracked areas. All rubber hoses should feel soft and and be free of kinks.
■ Visually verify that water exits at the engine exhaust outlet.
- Keep an ear tuned for any change in exhaust sound that could indicate an exhaust component malfunction.

DO NOT OPERATE THE VESSEL IF ANY OF THE ABOVE ITEMS EXIST. CONTACT A MARINE PROFESSIONAL!

At Least Annually

(To be performed by a marine professional);

√ Replace exhaust hoses or mufflers if any evidence of cracking, charring or deterioration is found.

√ Replace the engine water pump impeller along with the plate and housing if necessary. This will help prevent cooling system and in turn exhaust system overheating.

☑ Inspect each of the metallic exhaust components for cracking, rusting, leaking or looseness. Pay detailed attention to the exhaust manifold, cylinder head, water injection elbows.

BOATING & ALCOHOL

! WARNING

FEDERAL LAWS PROHIBIT OPERATING A VESSEL UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF ALCOHOL OR DRUGS. THESE LAWS ARE VIGOROUSLY ENFORCED BY ALL ENFORCEMENT AGENCIES.

Operating a vessel while intoxicated became a specific federal offense effective in 1988. The ruling set federal standards for determining when an individual is intoxicated. If the blood alcohol content (BAC) is .10% (.08 in some states) or higher for operators of recreational vessels being used only for pleasure are subject to a civil penalty up to \1,000 or criminal penalty up to \5,000, one year imprisonment or both. In some states the fines and imprisonment may increase significantly.

The effects of alcohol and drugs account for the highest single cause of marine accidents and deaths. Most deaths in boating accidents occur when someone falls into the water. Balance is one of the first things you lose when drinking alcohol or under the influence of drugs. The problem arises out of not knowing your balance is restricted.

Overall vision is reduced by alcohol especially at night, along with double or blurred vision. Peripheral vision is lessened which restricts seeing vessels or objects on the side. Also, color awareness decreases especially with red and green which happen to be the colors of boat navigation lights, buoys, and channel markers.

Alcohol will greatly increase your heat loss so it increases the effects of hypothermia. Finally, your ability to make correct judgements in emergency situations is greatly reduced. Alcohol takes away the brains ability to process information quickly and delays a persons reaction time.

Don't drink and drive!

Safety On Board

ALCOHOL MYTHS AND FACTS

Myth: Beer is less intoxicating than other alcoholic beverages.

Fact: One 12 oz. can of beer has about the same amount of alcohol as a 5oz. glass of wine or a shot of liquor.

Myth: Black coffee, fresh air, and a shower will sober the effects of alcohol.

Fact: After consuming alcohol time is the only thing that will sober you up. Our bodics average burning 1 oz. of alcohol every hour. If a person is drunk, it will take a person seven or more hours to sober up.

Myth: Telling if a person is too drunk to operate a vessel is easy.

Fact: Many experienced drinkers have learned to compensate for the visual effects of alcohol and can disguise their drunk condition.

Myth: You can judge if you are fit to operate a boat.

Fact: Judgement is one of the first elements you lose when drinking.

BOATING ACCIDENTS

The following is a list of common causes of boating accidents. Be aware of them and take the necessary steps to ensure that yourself and crew are educated and prepared to act in an emergency.

1. Mixing boating and alcohol. Remember, the skipper is responsible for his boat, crew and passengers.

2. Trying to reach the bow by the deck walk-around while the vessel is moving too fast.

3. Someone sitting on the bow, deck, or swim platform while underway.

4. Choosing a boating outing day with inclement weather, especially in high winds and thunderstorms in the forecast or staying out when bad weather is approaching.

5. Discembarking without checking all the fluids or systems, and especially fuel system components.

6. Not monitoring the boating traffic or possible obstructions around you.

7. Emergency communications equipment, signaling devices, and navigation lights not working.

8. Improper boat handling especially high speed turns in rough water. Using trim improperly.

9. Being too far from shore with inadequate fuel supply or navigational aids.

10. Passengers, especially children that are not wearing the proper life saving devices.

11. Skipper or passengers not seated in the boat.

REPORTING BOATING ACCIDENTS

According to the Federal Boat Safety Act of 1971 involving collision, accident or other casualty, the operator must make a formal report within 48 hours to the nearest state boating authority when the incident involves:

1. Death
2. Injury requiring treatment other than first aid
3. The disappearance of someone from a boat under death or injury circumstances.

A formal report must be made within 10 days for accidents involving more than \$500 damage or complete loss of vessel.

For information regarding accident reporting, placease call the Boating

Safety Hotline at 800-368-5647.

The operator of a vessel is obligated by law to provide assistance that can be provided safely to any individuals in dangerous situation on the waterways. The operator is subject to fine and or imprisonment for failure to do so. Move cautiously and think before acting.

RENDERING ASSISTANCE

The operator of a vessel is obligated by law to provide assistance that can be provided safely to any individuals in dangerous situation on the waterways. The operator is subject to fine and or imprisonment for failure to do so. Move cautiously and think before acting.

! DANGER

AVOID BODILY INJURY OR DEATH! TO AVOID FALLING OVERBOARD STAY SEATED IN THE COCKPIT WHILE THE BOAT IS RUNNING.

WATER SPORTS

Besides learning the safety precautions for safe boating, as well as understanding and knowing required rules and regulations, you are obligated to be particularly careful around other water sportsman, such as scuba divers, water skiers, wake boarders, and fisherman.

diver's air bubbles.

Whenever you see a “Diver Down” flag, maintain a distance of at least 100 feet on inland waters. In bays and open waters stay 300 feet away. The flag indicates a diver in the water. If a diver is operating from your boat, be certain to use this flag and post a lookout on board to observe the

SWIM PLATFORM

On integrated or extended swim platforms you should make periodic inspections of the swim ladder and hardware that supports the platform to ensure that all connections and fittings are tight and in good condition. When fishing from your boat, never anchor in a shipping channel or tie up to any navigational aids. These must be kept clear of at all times. Use heed when operating the boat in reverse to insure that water does not accumulate excessively on the platform or transom, especially in rough seas or strong currents. Do not exceed the platform recommended maximum

capacity label! Typical label shown above.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! DO NOT OPERATE THE BOAT WITH PEOPLE IN THE WATER OR ON TOP OR HOLDING ON TO THE SWIM PLATFORM STRUCTURE.

Most boaters fish from time to time. With the propulsion systems of today it is possible to fish in out-of-the-way places. When crusing, stay clear of fisherman. They may have lines or nets out which might be cut or get caught in your propeller if you come too close. Slow down when approaching fishing boats.

Do not return to cruising speed until the boats have been passed. If a fishing boat should be anchored, a large wake could flip or swamp the boat, upset fishing gear, pull the anchor loose from the bottom or worse yet cause someone to fall overboard.

Do not return to cruising speed until the boats have been passed. If a fishing boat should be anchored, a large wake could flip or swamp the boat, upset fishing gear, pull the anchor loose from the bottom or worse yet cause someone to fall overboard.

When fishing from your boat, never anchor in shipping channel or tie up to any navigational aids. These must be kept clear of at all times.

Be sure to carry a chart of the area and be on the lookout for shallow water and hidden obstructions. Pick up a local tidal chart if appropriate so you do not end up grounded.

WEATHER & WATER CONDITIONS

Before a boating outing check the weather conditions. As we all know the weather can change rapidly in many parts of the country. It does so sometimes without being predicted. NOAA weather radio reports are continuously available on designated frequencies installed on VHF radios and various handhelds. Also, many local radio stations carry weather reports.

CLOUD FORMATIONS

Clouds indicate the type of current weather and upcoming changes in the weather. Knowing the type of cloud formations can assist you in choosing the appropriate boating day or if already on the water will help you understand any upcoming weather changes. Flat clouds (stratus) normally indicate stable air. Cumulus clouds indicate unstable air. Many times a “cottonball” or cumulus cloud builds vertical height in the afternoon and the result is a thunderstorm with increased winds and waves; sometimes these storms are quite violent. You can find additional information on weather (meteorology) at your local library.

WAVES & FOG

As the wind blows across water waves are created. The stronger the wind and increased distance across the water enlarges the wave action.

Other factors that can cause problem situations for vessels are fog, currents, and tidal changes.

Fog can develop inland on clear, calm mornings. Coastal areas see large “blankets” of fog roll in and stay for extended time periods causing sometimes hazardous navigation conditions. If you are caught in the fog, do not panic. Think of the best plan of action and proceed carefully. If you are limited in navigation equipment at the first sign of fog proceed to the nearest shoreline and wait until the fog lifts.

Boats equipped with navigation equipment, local waterway experience and charts should proceed to a safe harbor. Use extreme caution, signal as needed, and reduce to a speed where you can stop within half of your forward vision range.

If foul weather catches you at sea do the following:

1. Slow down. Proceed with caution and put on your life vests.

2. Try to reach the nearest safe shoreline.

3. Navigate your vessel slowly into the waves at a 45-degree angle.

4. Passengers should sit low in the center of the vessel.

Safety On Board

1. Monitor your bilge pump. Make sure sump stays free of water.

2. Secure loose gear. Make ready emergency equipment.

3. If the engine stops, throw the anchor over the bow. If needed use a sea anchor. Never anchor off the stern.

MARINE WEATHER SYMBOLS

SMALL CRAFT		GALE	STORM	HURRICANE
DAYFLAGS
NIGHTLIGHTS

Although the National Weather Service has discontinued the use of the day flags and night lights, many marinas and ports of call still use them.

Notes

Rules Of The Road

NAVIGATION RULES DEFINED

The Navigation Rules set forth actions to be followed by boats to avoid collision. They are referred to as the “Rules of the Road”. There are two main parts referred to as the inland and international rules. The inland rules apply to vessels operating inside the boundaries of the United States. The international rules (referred to as72 COLREGS) apply to vessels operating on the high seas and all connected waters outside the established demarcation boundaries. Most navigational charts show the demarcation lines by red dotted lines and are published in the navigation rules. Remember to consult state and local agencies since areas such as “no wake zones,” swimming beaches, “diver down flag” and inland landlocked lakes fall under their jurisdiction. This section is only an introduction to the “rules of the road”. We strongly recommend additional training before getting behind the “wheel” of your boat.

WARNING

TO AVOID INJURY AND DEATH FOLLOW THE NAVIGATION "RULES OF THE ROAD" TO PREVENT COLLISIONS.

You can order the Inland & International Navigation Rules from:

Superintendent of Documents

U. S. Government Printing Office

Washington, DC 20402

Tel: [phone]) Fax:[phone]

NAVIGATION RULES

RIGHT OF WAY

1. Cross waves at right angles.
2. When caught in heavy water or squalls, head either directly into the waves or at a slight angle. Reduce speed, but maintain enough power to maneuver your boat safely.
3. Keep your speed under control. Respect the rights of other boaters engaged in all water sports. Give them a plenty of operating room.
4. Whenever meeting a boat head on, keep to the right where possible.

5. When two boats cross, the boat to the right (starboard) has the right of way.

6. When overtaking or passing, the boat being passed has the right of way.

In general, boats with less maneuverability have right-of-way over more agile craft. The skipper must keep his craft clear of the following vessels:

• A vessel not under command or aground; due to their circumstances, these vessels have no maneuverability.
• A vessel restricted in its maneuverability; these vessels usually are performing work which limits their maneuverability such as surveying, dredging, laying pipe or cable, or servicing navigational markers among others.
• A vessel engaged in fishing; these include boats fishing with lines, trawls or nets, but not trolling lines.
• Sailboats; they have the right-of-way over powerboats. However, if a sailboat is using a prop to move forward, it is considered a powerboat even if the sails are up.
• Remember the unwritten “rule of tonnage”. Basically a smaller tonnage vessel should take every effort to avoid close quarters with a larger tonnage vessel. One way to accomplish this is to have a designated human lookout to “eyeball” the horizon for any developing collision course.
• Use defensive driving skills on the waterway just as you do on the roadway. The other vessel may not know the "rules of the road". Be alert and ready to take immediate action.
• If a collision course is unavoidable neither boat has the right of way. Both boats must react to avoid an accident according to the rules of the road.

WHISTLE SIGNALS

ONE LONG BLAST: Warning signal (Coming out of slip)

ONE SHORT BLAST: Pass on my port side TWO SHORT BLASTS: Pass on my starboard side THREE SHORT BLASTS: Engine(s) in reverse FOUR OR MORE BLASTS: Danger signal

BRIDGE SIGNALS

Rules Of The Road

NAVIGATION RULES

The Navigation Rules set forth 3 types of crossing situations- crossing, meeting, and overtaking. In each case, both boats are governed by special procedures.

In a head-on meeting, both vessels must sound a single blast to give way toward starboard and pass to port.

These rules appear when there is a risk of collision. In a crossing situation be aware of the other craft's position. For safety, there should be a noticeable change in the angle, bow or stern; a gradual change in position indicates possible danger.

NAVIGATION RULES

An overtaking boat is burdened, and is not the priveleged craft, even though it approaches the danger zone of the overtaken boat.

The overtaking boat first signals with a single blast if that boat desires to pass on the starboard side of the boat ahead, or a double blast if passing to port. The overtaken craft responds with the same signal if safe, or with the danger signal (5 short blasts or more) if unsafe. The boat overtaking must not pass unless the appropriate signals are sounded.

Rules Of The Road

NAVIGATION AIDS

Navigation aids are placed along coasts and navigable waters as a guide for mariners in determining their position in reference to land and hidden danger. Each aid provides specific information. They form a continuous system of charted markers for accurate piloting on paper and on the water.

Nautical charts are provided by the National Ocean Service (NOS) and are distributed nationwide through marinas and outlet stores. These charts show the geography of the coast, water depth, landmarks, navigation aids (buoys and markers), marine hazards, and port facilities. Use only up-to-date charts for navigation. We recommend when purchasing a chart to look for the weather resistant ones. Buoys provide a roadmap to keep the skipper on course and to avoid hazards. Buoys are identified by light, shape, color and in severe weather conditions by sound.

Buoys or beacons called lateral markers indicate the port and starboard sides of the waterway to be followed. U. S markers follow the buoyage system known as Red Right Returning. When returning from sea or traveling upstream, the green markers are to port (on your left) and the red markers are to the starboard side (on your right). When traveling downstream or out to sea the marker color would be reversed.

Also, there are GPS devices along with plotters that use various cards to show the geography of waterways.

Before operating your vessel, learn to identify the various navigational aids such as lateral aids, mid-channel markers, information and regulatory markers.

NOTICE

SKIPPERS MUST NOT RELY ON BUOYS

ALONE TO MARK THEIR POSITION.

SEVERE WEATHER CONDITIONS

AND WAVE ACTION CAN ALTER

A BUOYS POSITION.

NEVER TIE UP TO A BUOY.

REGULATORY MARKERS

Diamond Shape Warns Of Danger

Diamond Shape With Cross-Boats Keep Out

Circle Marks Area Controlled As Indicated.

For showing information such as locations, distances and directions

NIGHT RUNNING

Boats operating between sunset and sunrise (hours vary by state), or in conditions of reduced visibility, must use navigation lights. Nighttime operation, especially during bad weather and fog, can be dangerous. All Rules of the Road apply at night, but it is best to slow down and stay clear of all boats regardless of who has the right-of-way. To see more easily at night, avoid bright lights when possible. Also, it is helpful to have a passenger keep watch for other boats, water hazards and navigational aids.

To determine the size, speed and direction of other vessels at night, you should use the running lights. A green light indicates starboard side, and a red light indicates port side. Generally, if you see a green light, you have the right-of-way. If you see a red light, give way to the other vessel.

BRIDGE CLEARANCE

Be aware that your vessel requires a specified bridge clearance height. This height is a measured estimate from the waterline to the top of the highest equipment height. The estimated height can change because of variances in the loaded condition of the vessel. Consult the bridge clearance specifications located in Chapter 12 (Technical Information section).

Some bridges are tendered. Know and use the proper bridge signals when approaching these bridges (see bridge signals in this chapter). You can also monitor and communicate on channel 13 of a VHF radio for bridge information in most domestic locals. Other bridges are marked with a clearance measurement and you are on your own.

After determining your vessel will clear the bridge proceed with caution at a safe idle speed. Keep your eye on vessel traffic at all times in order to react quickly. Resume a safe speed once clear of the bridge structure and acknowledgment of clear visibility.

Use common sense regarding bridge clearance because boat property damage and bodily injury could result if a mishap occurs with a bridge structure.

Engines & Controls

INTRODUCTION

This chapter covers stern drive & V-drive propulsion systems separately since the vessel is offered both ways. Information related to both propulsion systems is presented together at the beginning of this chapter.

It is important that you read all engine manuals carefully and become completely familiar with the operation as well as necessary maintenance requirements on the engine itself and related propulsion system.

If this is your first boat, learn to operate the boat in a controlled environment where you can practice shifting and docking operations at your own pace. Learn how the vessel's engines and propulsion systems behave at different speeds, in different seas, and under various load conditions.

To prevent possible fire or explosion, check the engine compartment for fuel fumes and leaks before each outing (before starting engines) and after each outing (after stopping engines). Always smell for the presence of gas fumes. This procedure will help you detect fuel, coolant, or oil leaks and to spot anything else unusual that has occurred or is about to take place.

If powered by stern drives raise the drives and check the drive housings and propellers for obstructions, fish line and damage.

On V-drive vessels ensure that the all seacocks are open and the sea water strainers are clear of debris.

Your Regal dealer has been factory trained on various vessel systems. Consult your Regal dealer for further information regarding technical support and parts.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! READ ALL MANUFACTURER'S ENGINE AND PROPULSION OWNER'S MANUALS BEFORE STARTING YOUR ENGINES AND OPERATING YOUR VESSEL.

CAUTION

NEVER RUN THE ENGINES

OUT OF THE WATER.

SEVERE DAMAGE

TO THE WATER PUMP, IMPELLER

AND ENGINE PARTS COULD OCCUR.

VENTILATION SYSTEM

Ventilation systems are required for engine compartments. Your boat features a set of deck cowlings. Under the cowlings is a system of ducting that supplies constant fresh air to the engine compartment. Dual powered blowers connected to ducts in the lower one third of the bilge help evacuate any fuel vapors and carbon monoxide to the atmosphere.

The intake ducts are separated from the exhaust ducts to help prevent any mixing of the two systems. They are found on both port and starboard deck sides. See the illustration.

Owners are responsible for keeping their boat's ventilation systems in top operating condition. This means making sure the ventilation openings are obstruction free, duct hoses are not blocked with insect nests, tore, blowers operate properly and any worn parts are replaced with approved marine replacements only. Never use automotive or RV parts since they may not be ignition protected and therefore may cause a fire or explosion especially if used in the engine compartment.

READ & UNDERSTAND THE FOLLOWING WARNING LABELS!

! WARNING

GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE! BEFORE STARTING ENGINE(S) OPERATE BLOWERS 4 MINUTES AND CHECK ENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR GASOLINE LEAKS AND VAPORS. RUN BLOWER BELOW CRUSING SPEED.

! WARNING

TO PREVENT INJURY OR DEATH DO NOT STORE GASOLINE OR FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS IN CONTAINERS ANYWHERE ON THE VESSEL!

! WARNING

TO PREVENT INJURY OR DEATH USE ONLY APPROVED MARINE REPLACEMENT PARTS THAT ARE IGNITION PROTECTED.

Engine & Controls

CONTROLS

OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

The entire dash instrument panel wiring is protected by a main 20 amp ignition breaker. It is connected through the key switch.

Both engine wiring harnesses

are protected by a main breaker (Mercruiser) with a push button or a "flag style" reset breaker mounted on the engine or a breaker/relay box (Volvo). On Volvo units each breaker or relay is listed by position on the cover diagram. If a breaker "pops" or a fuse "blows" figure out the reason why before resetting or replacing it.

Refer to the maintenance chapter for more information. Individual switches located at the starboard helm are protected by a circuit breaker located below the dash.

Note: In an emergency, when you need to run the engine and the fault for the overload can not be found and corrected, disconnect or turn off all engine accessories and gauge wiring. Reset the circuit breaker. If the circuit breaker remains open, the overload has not been eliminated. The fault must be further investigated. Contact your closest Regal dealer or marine professional.

NOTICE

WITH THE BATTERY SWITCH IN THE "OFF" POSITION THERE IS NO POWER TO THE DASH KEY SWITCHES.

INSTRUMENTATION

The helm station is equipped with a complete set of instruments (called gauges) to monitor the condition of the engines. Close observation of the gauges is the responsibility of the captain while cruising. Periodically scan the gauges for the appropriate meter levels including the depth gauge. It may save the engines or vessel from damage.

Become familiar with all the gauge functions especially their safe limits while cruising. The following pages introduces the gauges and related instrumentation. Gauge deflection (movement) is very similar to automobiles.

GAUGE OPERATION

Tachometer

The tachometer (tach) indicates the speed of the engine in revolutions per minute (rpm). The tachometer allows you to monitor the engine speed so you do not surpass the limits of the engine manufacturer.

Some tachometers have built in hour meters.

Fuel Gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the level of fuel inside the fuel tanks. It is a good idea to keep the fuel tanks "topped off" when possible to reduce fuel vapors inside the tank. Do not run the fuel level close to

empty. Figure in an adequate "safety" factor when monitoring fuel gauges since they are not entirely accurate.

Oil Pressure

The oil pressure gauge indicates the pressure of the oil inside the engine lubrication system. A drop in oil pressure may be an indication of a low oil situation or a leak. Operation of the engines with low oil pressure could lead to

engine damage. Refer to appropriate manufacturer's engine manual for more information.

Depth Gauge

The depth gauge indicates the water depth under the keel of the boat. It features a shallow water alarm which is adjustable. By monitoring the water depth closely, damage related to props and

underwater hardware can be avoided.

Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge monitors the cooling system of the engine. A sudden increase in the temperature could be a sign that the engine cooling system is malfunctioning. Shut down the engine

immediately and investigate the problem. Consult your engine manual for allowable limits.

Speedometer

The speedometer used on selected models indicates kilometers per hour and miles per hour by measuring water pressure against a small hole in a device mounted under the boat

or in the stern drive housing. Consult the owner's information packet on speedometer maintenance.

Engine & Controls

system or battery problem.

Volt Meter

The volt meter monitors the battery condition as well as the alternator performance. Normal voltage is between 12.0 and 15.0 volts. Readings outside of this range may indicate a charging

The optional automatic fire extinguishing system utilizes an instrument display unit (gauge) that provides the operator with a system status of charged or uncharged condition by an audible alarm. With the ignition on and no light indicates the system has discharged. If the system should discharge the ignition system will be instantaneously interrupted. Should this occur shut down the engine, ventilation blower and any electrical system components. Investigate the source of the shutdown immediately and take appropriate action. Refer to the manufacturer's owner's manual.

This stern drive only gauge measures the stern drive tilt and indicates the relative position of the bow, up or down when the boat is on plane. The power trim normally begins in the down position when used to accelerate the boat onto a plane position.

When the boat reaches the desired trim the operator disengages the trim button which through the trim gauge indicates the relative altitude of the vessel. The gauge can be helpful in achieving the most economical running condition.

The optional gas vapor detector determines if there is a level of gasoline vapors that is unsafe in the engine room of the boat. If installed, turn on the unit and wait about one minute for it to perform a self-safety test. If all is well it will give you a green light. You must run the test before you start the engines. In the event the gauge does not show a green light, you must investigate the bilge of the boat for gas fumes or signs of a fuel leak before starting the engines. If uncertain, consult a marine service professional.

High Water Alarm

This gauge through a bilge sensor determines a high water situation and sends a signal. This may indicate that a large amount of water has entered the hull and/or the automatic bilge pump cannot evacuate water overboard fast enough.

TYPICAL INSTRUMENTATION OVERVIEW

PORT ENGINE GAUGES
STARBOARD ENGINE GAUGES

Engine & Controls

TYPICAL STERN DRIVE HELM OVERVIEW

STERN DRIVE ENGINES

It is important that you read the engine manual carefully and become completely familiar with the operation as well as required maintenance procedures on the engines and related propulsion systems.

REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW

Regal features dual binnacle style remote controls on the 3760. The port (left) control handle operates the port engine shift and throttle positions. The starboard (right) control handle operates the starboard engine shift and throttle positions.

All remote controls feature a neutral detented position for starting the engines. A neutral safety switch prevents the engine from starting in gear. Engines will not crank over unless the remote control shift handle is in neutral. At that point the neutral safety switch permits current to pass through to the starter solenoid for cranking over the engine.

Some controls make a clicking noise at the neutral detent position while others feature a distinct “crush” in the remote control handle when neutral is found.

At the outside base of each remote control handle is a small button. It is called a “throttle only button.” See the illustration. Press in the “throttle only” button and you will be able to advance the throttle without engaging the gear shift. This feature is useful when trying to start a cold engine because of the ability to adjust the engine speed to starting conditions. As the engine starts and idles smoothly you can return the throttle to the neutral detented position at which point you will hear the “throttle only” button pop out after which you can then shift the drive unit into forward or reverse.

Notice that each engine has designated power trim and trailer functions controlled by switches normally mounted on the remote control box along with a dash gauge(s) that allows you to change and monitor trim angle. Do not confuse the power trim with the trim tab switch located on the dash panel.

STERN DRIVE REMOTE CONTROL

The trailer switch raises the outdrive beyond the trim elevation. This feature is especially useful when inspecting or changing the drive propellers or hardware. Operate the trailer function only when the boat is stopped in the water or the engine could overheat from a lack of water being picked up by the stern drive. This control positions the trim switches for both engines on the port control handle for ease of operation. See illustration A.

! CAUTION

NEVER SHIFT THE CONTROL HANDLES WITH THE ENGINE STOPPED AS SHIFT OR DRIVE SYSTEMS COULD BE DAMAGED.

Engine & Controls

STERN DRIVE REMOTE CONTROL SHIFTING

Before attempting to start the engines make sure the blower has been running for at least 4 minutes and you have finished a sniff test to detect any gasoline vapors.

To use the stern drive remote controls follow these steps:

1. Make sure the remote control handles are in the neutral detented position. Listen for the click or the "crush" as the control handles engage the neutral detent. See illustration A.

2. With the control handles in neutral push in the throttle only button on each control handle. Advance the throttles slightly. Do not fully advance the throttles as fuel injection engines may become flooded.

3. Start both engines. After the engines have started let them warm up for 5 minutes or so. Be sure to monitor the gauges for proper oil pressure and temperature during the warm up period. As the engines reach normal operating temperature and they smooth out you can return both remote control handles to the neutral position. At this position you are ready to shift into forward gear.

4. With the engines running in neutral engage both shift handles into the forward gear position. At that point you will feel the propellers pushing the boat forward.

Pushing the control handles beyond the forward gear position will result in the throttles increasing the engine speed and revolutions per minute which is shown on the tachometers. See illustration B.

1. For neutral position from forward, pull the control handles aft until you locate the neutral detent.

Chapter 4

F

F

N

N

R

R

C

F

F

N

N

R

R

1. Make sure the remote control handles are in the neutral detented position. Listen for the click or feel the handles as they find neutral. See illustration A.
2. With the engines running in forward or neutral engage both shift handles into the reverse gear position. At that point you will feel the propellers pulling the boat aft. Pushing the control handles beyond the reverse gear position will result in the throttles increasing the engine speed and revolutions per minute which is shown on the tachometers. See illustration C.
3. For neutral position from reverse, push the control handles forward. This will release the stern drives from reverse gear as soon as the neutral detent is found.

NOTICE

PRACTICE YOUR REMOTE CONTROL SHIFTING AT A DOCK ENVIRONMENT WITHOUT HEAVY BOAT TRAFFIC.

R

D

STERN DRIVE REMOTE CONTROL THROTTLES

1. To reach a full throttle position from forward or reverse gear simply push the throttles toward the bow in forward gear or pull the throttles toward the stern in reverse gear until the desired revolutions per minute (rpm's) is found.
2. You will learn to synchronize (engines running at the same rpm) both engine throttles to the tachometers with experience. You will need to make minor adjustments while cruising to your remote control throttle handles. Eventually your ear will sense whether both engines are running at the same speed and rpm.

Engine & Controls

Once you have mastered the basics of the remote control shifting process follow this information for maneuvering in close quarters using the remote control handles with minimum throttle only.

1. Engage the port control handle into forward gear with minimum throttle.

2. Next, engage the starboard control handle into reverse gear position with minimum throttle. See illustration E.

3. This allows headway to starboard with minimum throttle. The vessel will run a circular course to starboard.

The position above allows headway to port with minimum throttle.

1. Engage the port control handle into reverse gear with minimum throttle.
2. Next, engage the starboard control handle into forward gear with minimum throttle. See illustration F.
3. This allows headway to port with minimum throttle. The vessel will run in a circular course to port.

NOTICE

THE TURNING BOW POSITIONS LEND THEMSELVES TO DOCKING SITUATIONS, BRIDGE OPENINGS AND MARINA COMMUNICATIONS.

BEFORE STARTING STERN DRIVE ENGINES

Before starting the engines follow the general instructions in chapter 6 (Vessel Operation). As a quick review follow these guidelines:

1. Make sure the blowers have been running for at least 4 minutes. Open the engine hatch and sniff for fuel vapors. If vapors are present shut down all systems until the cause is found and corrected.
2. Remove any loose canvas and store in a dry location.
3. Shut and secure all hatches and doors.
4. View the propellers and stern drives for any obstructions.
5. Make sure the swim ladder is secured in its folding position.
6. Check fuel supply.
7. Turn all battery switches to the "on" position.
8. Turn on the VHF and listen for the latest weather.
9. Make sure all passengers are accounted for, seated and their life jackets are properly fitted.
10. Check for a balanced load.

STARTING STERN DRIVE ENGINES

Read and understand the remote control functions explained earlier in this chapter before attempting to start the engines.

1. Locate the remote control handles in the neutral detended position. Make sure you hear the distinct click or feel the handle in neutral. This position provides minimum throttle which is usually good for starting fuel injection engines. You may find you do need to use the throttle only button to give you a slight throttle advance but you need to be careful not to flood the engine.

2. Crank over one engine until it starts. Release the key at that point. It is the same procedure as an automobile. If the engine fails to start, refrain from cranking the engine after 10-12 seconds. Allow the battery and starter recovery time.

3. As the engine cranks to start you may hear an audible alarm. It should end once the engine starts since it will develop the necessary oil pressure to shut down the alarm. If it does not subside shut the system down and investigate the situation. Do not operate the engine once the alarm has sounded except to avoid a hazardous situation. As part of the engine damage control system engine speeds could be reduced if an alarm has sounded. Again, shut down the engine and find the cause of the problem. Call professional assistance if the cause can not be found.

Engines may feature the following audible alarms. Read your engine owner's manual for additional information.

1. Engine oil pressure too low.
2. Engine temperature too high.
3. Stern drive oil too low.
4. Seawater pressure too low- not enough water being picked up by the stern drive or engine water pump.

Engine & Controls

If the oil pressure is too low stop the engine and check the engine oil pressure.

If the temperature is too high, check the stern drives for obstructions. Sometimes plastic bags or sand may of been sucked up into the intakes and as a result the water supply may be restricted. Check the engine hoses for leaks or failures.

Remember your engines may feature other control modules such as:

Knock sensor system for low octane fuel.

Ignition, fuel and idle air control.

Rev limiters to control revolutions per minute.

1. When the engine starts, immediately check the oil pressure gauge for the recommended oil pressure. Advance the throttle slightly (Around 1000-1200 rpm's) to smooth out the engine. Let it run at this position until it is warmed up. Then reduce the throttle to the minimum position.

2. As the engine warms up monitor the temperature gauge for the recommended system limits.

3. Scan your other gauges. The volt meter should show above battery voltage. Also, it is a good idea to adjust your trim gauges to the “in” position at this time.

4. Crank over the other engine following the same procedures mentioned above. After both engines have warmed up you can secure the remote control handles in the minimum throttle position for shifting.

SHIFTING STERN DRIVE ENGINES

Look around you 360 degrees to make sure the coast is clear before shifting the remote controls. Engage both controls in forward or reverse with a brisk motion until they reach the gear position. Do not shift the controls in forward or reverse slowly as drive damage could result. With practice you will develop this shifting motion.

As you make headway push both throttles ahead until the bow begins to rise. With additional throttle the bow will fall and the vessel will begin to plane. As this happens use the power trim to achieve the best running position along with the trim tabs to adjust for load, sea and wind conditions.

Review chapter 6 for additional operating information.

STOPPING STERN DRIVE ENGINES

To stop the engines simply pull back both throttles to the detented neutral position from forward or reverse gear. Let both engines idle for a few minutes especially after a long cruise. During this time period, monitor the gauges for recommended limits.

Never turn off the ignition keys while the engines are in gear since at that point the vessel is out of control. Never back in reverse with maximum throttle since water could enter the engines through the exhaust system and damage the internal engine parts.

STERN DRIVE PROPELLERS

We have carefully tested and chosen the propellers to give your boat the best possible performance and have allowed for the additional weight in equipment that might be added to the boat.

It is a good idea to carry a spare set of propellers and hand tools in order to handle an emergency propeller change. Refer to the maintenance chapter or this manual for propeller changing information.

Contact a propeller shop or your closest Regal dealer if any of the above symptoms exist. Propeller shops have special equipment to refurbish both stainless steel and aluminum propellers. After making any blade alternations the propellers are “repitched” in special prop jigs.

NOTICE

NEVER CONTINUOUSLY RUN WITH A DAMAGED PROPELLER SINCE DRIVE UNIT AND ENGINE DAMAGE COULD RESULT.

In an emergency propeller remember to take off the hardware and lay it out for correct reassembly. Always use genuine marine manufacturer replacement parts.

DANGER

PREVENT SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH! SHUT OFF IGNITION SWITCH NEAR SWIMMERS TO AVOID ROTATING PROPELLER BLADES.

PROPELLER CHECKLIST

At least twice a year check the propeller for:

☑ Loose, missing or corroded hardware.
☑ Nicks, dings or missing propeller material
☑ Bent propeller blades.

☑ Objects wrapped around the prop such as fish line.

☑ Decomposing propeller blades (electrolysis symptom).

☑ Aluminum prop with paint coming off near blade tip (ventilation symptom).

☑ Send the propellers out to a local shop to have the propeller hub checked for slippage.

NOTICE

A POSSIBLE INDICATION OF A SLIPPING PROPELLER HUB IS WHEN THE BOAT IS NOT RUNNING TO SPECIFIED SPEEDS OR THE TACHOMETER SHOWS EXCESSIVE RPM OF ONE ENGINE OVER THE OTHER ENGINE. A SLIPPING HUB IN A PROPELLER CAN NOT DEVELOP THE NEEDED THRUST AND LOSES EFFICIENCY.

Engine & Controls

STERN DRIVE PROPELLER ROTATION

Volvo Stern Drive Shown

Shown in the illustration above is a Volvo stern drive with propellers. The outer propeller is a left hand; the inner propeller is right hand.

Notice how the tip of the blade on the outer propeller travels down and to the left. The tip of the inner propeller travels down and to the right. The same holds true for propellers when you lay them down. This is one way to identify propeller rotation.

Advantages of featuring dual rotating propellers on the drive unit is more efficiency and less steering torque.

STERN DRIVE BILGE EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Engine & Controls

STEERING-STERN DRIVE

Stern drive vessels use a rotary style steering system. This system transfers helm mechanical energy to the engine. There is a hydraulic steering cylinder with the help of a steering pump which sends fluid force to the stern drive steering arm changing the course of the boat, depending on the direction the steering wheel is turned.

Refer to the steering manufacturer's literature in the owner's packet for more information along with the following illustrations.

Since the steering system is the primary link for engine control, it must be periodically inspected and maintained. The hardware at both the helm and engine must be checked regularly for tightness.

Before Each Outing Check:

1. All steering hardware for tightness especially the cotter and clevis pins holding the steering cable to the steering actuator and tie bar.

2. Coupler nut is tight and torqued to specifications.

3. Tie bar, pin and hardware connecting both engines to the steering system.

4. Check the power steering reservoir on the engine. Remember twin engines both share one power steering system.

5. See the appropriate engine manufacturer's operating manual for additional detailed information.

TYPICAL V-DRIVE HELM OVERVIEW

Engine & Controls

V-DRIVE ENGINES

It is important that you read the engine manual carefully and become completely familiar with the operation as well as required maintenance procedures on the engines and related propulsion systems.

BEFORE STARTING V- DRIVE ENGINES

Before starting the engines follow the general instructions in chapter 6 (Vessel Operation). As a quick review follow these guidelines:

1. Make sure the blowers have been running for at least 4 minutes. Open the engine hatch and sniff for fuel vapors. If vapors are present shut down all systems until the cause is found and corrected.

2. Make sure all passengers are accounted for, seated and their life jackets are properly fitted.

3. Remove any loose canvas and store in a dry location.

4. Check for a balanced load.

5. Shut and secure all hatches and doors.

6. Remove any debris from the engine water strainers before turning on the seacock handle.

7. Ensure both engine seacocks are in the "open" position. In the open position the handle is in line with the incoming hose not perpendicular to it. See the illustration.

8. Make sure the swim ladder is secured in its folding position.

9. Check fuel supply levels.

10. Turn all battery switches to the "on" position.

11. Turn on the VHF and listen for the latest weather.

REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW

Regal features separate binnacle style remote controls on the 3760 V-drive. The port (left) remote control handles operate the engine shift positions. The shift controls can also be identified by the black inserts on the control handles. See illustration A.

The port shift handle controls the port engine.

The starboard shift handle controls the starboard engine.

NOTICE

PRACTICE YOUR REMOTE CONTROL SHIFTING AT AN ON THE WATER ENVIRONMENT WITHOUT HEAVY BOAT TRAFFIC.

The starboard (right) remote control handles operate the starboard engine throttle controls. The throttle controls can also be identified by the red inserts on the control handles. See illustration B.

The port throttle handle controls the port engine.

The starboard throttle handle controls the starboard engine.

! WARNING

TO PREVENT POSSIBLE BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ADJUST SHIFT OR THROTTLE CONTROLS. CONSULT A MARINE PROFESSIONAL.

NOTICE

TO PREVENT POSSIBLE TRANSMISSION DAMAGE SHIFT IN AND OUT OF GEAR AT IDLE SPEEDS ONLY.

Engine & Controls

V-DRIVE REMOTE CONTROL SHIFTING-TYPICAL

All V-drive remote controls feature a neutral detented position for starting the engines. A neutral safety switch on the transmission prevents the engine from starting in gear. Engines will not crank over unless the remote control shift handle is in neutral. At that point the neutral safety switch permits current to pass through to the starter solenoid for cranking over the engine.

Some controls make a clicking noise at the neutral detent position while others feature a distinct “crush” in the remote control handle when neutral is found.

Before attempting to start the engines make sure the blower has been running for at least 4 minutes and you have finished the sniff test to detect gasoline vapors.

To use the stern drive remote controls follow these steps:

1. Make sure the remote control handles are in the neutral detented position. Listen for the click or the "crush" as the handles find neutral. See illustration A.

2. With the control handles in neutral advance the throttles slightly. Do not fully advance the throttles as fuel injection engines may become flooded.

3. Using the key switch crank over each engine until they start. After the engines have started let them warm up for 15 minutes or so. Be sure to monitor the gauges for proper oil pressure and temperature during this warm up period. As the engines reach normal operating temperature and they smooth out you can bring both remote control throttle handles to the minimum position. At this position you are ready to shift into forward gear.

1. With the engines running in neutral engage both shift handles into the forward gear position. At that point you will feel the propellers push the boat forward. See illustration C.

Pushing the control handles beyond the forward gear position will result in the throttles increasing the engine speed and revolutions per minute which is shown on the tachometers.

1. With the engines running in forward or neutral engage both shift handles into the reverse gear position. At this point you will feel the propellers pulling the boat aft.

Pushing the control handles beyond the reverse gear position will result in the throttles increasing the engine speed and revolutions

per minute which is shown on the tachometers. See illustration D.

1. For neutral position from reverse, push the control handles forward. This will release the V-drives from reverse gear as soon as the neutral detent is found.

V-DRIVE REMOTE CONTROL THROTTLES-TYPICAL

trol throttle handles. Eventually your ear will sense whether both engines are running at the same speed and rpm.

See illustration E for maximum throttle position. See illustration B for minimum throttle position.

1. To reach a full throttle position from forward or reverse gear simply push in forward gear or pull in reverse gear until the desired revolutions per minute (rpm's) is reached.

2. You will learn to synchronize both engine throttles to the tachometers with experience. You will need to make minor adjustments while cruising to your remote con-

Once you have mastered the basics of the remote control shifting process follow this information for maneuvering in close quarters using the remote control handles with minimum throttle only.

1. Engage the port control handle into forward gear with minimum throttle.

2. Next, engage the starboard control handle into reverse gear with minimum throttle. See illustration F.

3. This allows headway to starboard with minimum throttle. The vessel will run a circular course to starboard.

Engine & Controls

1. Engage the port control handle in reverse gear with minimum throttle.

2. Next, engage the starboard control handle in forward gear at minimum throttle. See illustration G.

3. This allows headway to port with minimum throttle. The vessel will run in a circular course to port.

V-DRIVE PROPELLERS

We have carefully tested and chosen the propellers to give your boat the best possible performance and have allowed for the additional weight in equipment that might be added to the

boat.

Carry the necessary tools in order to handle an emergency propeller change. Besides hand tools a propeller pulling tool for V-drive propellers would be an important part of your emergency tool kit. They can be purchased at a marine supply house.

Carry a set of extra propellers and hardware such as keways, nuts, and cotter keys for emergency repairs.

Always use genuine marine manufacturer replacement parts which can be ordered from your Regal dealer.

Many times a boater is cruising far from his mooring when he needs emergency repairs. A facility may be able to sling your vessel for propeller changing but may not have the special hardware or correctly sized propellers for your vessel. Be prepared!

On twin V-drive vessels the port propeller turns in a counterclockwise direction and the starboard propeller turns in a clockwise direction. This is to balance out the torque of the propulsion systems. When removing and replacing V-drive propellers, be sure to install the correct rotation propeller on the correct drive.

One way to tell if a propeller is left hand (counterclockwise) rotation is by viewing the blades. The blades will curve down to the left when looking at the propeller installed correctly on the shaft..

A right hand propeller (clockwise) rotation blade will curve down to the right when looking at the propeller correctly installed on the shaft.

NOTICE

NEVER CONTINUOUSLY RUN WITH A DAMAGED PROPELLER SINCE V-DRIVE, SHAFT AND/OR ENGINE DAMAGE COULD RESULT.

DANGER

PREVENT SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH! SHUT OFF IGNITION SWITCH NEAR SWIMMERS

TO AVOID ROTATING PROPELLER BLADES.

Engine & Controls

V-DRIVE PROPELLER ROTATION

Left Hand Rotation

Right Hand Rotation

The blade section closest to the boat that cuts through the water first is called the leading edge. Again, if you follow the leading edge on the above propeller it will trail down to the left thus being a left hand rotation propeller.

Note: The diameter of a propeller is measured from the center of the propeller out to the tip of the blade and multiply by 2.

The pitch is the distance that propellers would move inone revolution if it were traveling through a soft solid. Normal stamping for diameter and pitch on Regal propellers is on the hub. For example, a 18x21 propeller means that the diameter is 18" and the pitch is 21"

Sometime propellers are cupped. The trailing edge of a blade has a slight curl outward (away from the vessel). It is said that a V-drive propeller has a certain cup like 5 which is usually stamped in the hub. A cupped propeller will normally allow more “bite” in the water.

If you follow the leading edge on the above propeller it will trail down to the right thus being a right hand rotation propeller.

V-DRIVE BILGE EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Engine & Controls

STEERING/V-DRIVE

TYPICAL V-DRIVE STEERING SYSTEM (NOT IPS)

Operation

The V-drive vessel features a hydraulic steering system which functions like an automobile with power steering. Hydraulic hoses connect the helm station (steering wheel) to a cylinder located in the engine compartment. As the wheel is turned fluid is purged through a series of valves applying force to the tie bar and rudders. The rudders turn which change vessel direction.

Like an automobile turning the steering wheel clockwise produces a right direction. Turning the steering wheel counterclockwise produces a left direction.

Unlike a mechanical steering system or an automobile there is no definite stop in the wheel travel. This system features relief valves that allow the wheel to continue turning after the steering cylinder has reached the end of its travel. You will feel a slight increase in effort to turn the wheel once this has occurred.

Fluid Recommendations

1. To prevent steering fluid loss keep the steering helm filler cap tightly shut. See the illustration.
2. The oil level is to be within 1/2" of the bottom of the fill hole.
3. Teleflex/Seastar hydraulic oil is the specified filler for your steering system. A spare bottle (HA5430) can be ordered from a Teleflex/Seastar dealer.

Other acceptable and recommended oils for the steering system are:

Texaco HO15

Aero Shell Fluid #41

Esso Univis N15 or J13

Chevron Aviation Fluid A

Mobil Aero HFA

Note: In an emergency automatic transmission Dextron II can be used.

Note: To prevent water intrusion and system contamination keep the steering fill plug tightened.

1. Harsh fluids containing ammonia, acids or any other corrosive ingredients must not be used for cleaning any part of the system.

Before Each Outing:

1. Check the rudder post bolt for tightness.
2. Make sure the steering yoke to rudder post bolt is securely fastened with the aircraft threaded nut.
3. Check the tie bar steering jam nut for tightness.

Systems

ELECTRICAL OVERVIEW

Your vessel uses both direct current (DC) and alternating current (AC). You need to understand the basics of each type of electrical power used on board. Besides the general information in this manual, refer to the various equipment manufacturer's literature located in the owner's information packet. Also, contact your closest Regal dealer or marine professional as required for troubleshooting and repairs. Your vessel may not contain all of the equipment or systems shown. Regal has the right to change, update or add equipment and systems at anytime.

DIRECT CURRENT (DC)

Your vessel uses 12 volt DC electricity otherwise known as direct current. It is called DC because it flows only one way in a circuit. Specific wiring harnesses, gauges, batteries, battery cables, engine electrical components, dash switches, lighting, fresh water, shower sump and bilge pumps, refrigerators, Vacuflush heads, along with any overcurrent protection are all part of the low voltage system. In this system, the black wire is designated as the “hot” or conductor wire and the white wire is referred to as the ground wire. All other current carrying wires are color coded to identify their circuit. This is especially helpful in troubleshooting and adding additional equipment. Be sure to review the wiring schematics in the technical drawing section located in the technical chapter.

Direct current is produced through the engine alternator while the boat engines are running. The alternators charge the batteries and send current through the main distribution panel, battery isolator and battery switch through the required harnesses to the appropriate battery. Normal voltage on the dash volt meter is between 12 and 15 volts. Lower or higher readings could indicate a charging malfunction or weak battery.

The alternators are normally internally “excited” around 1200 revolutions per minute. At idle speeds below 1200, the volt meter will show around 12 volts.

Direct current is stored in the ship's wet cell batteries. There are 2 engine starting batteries and a deep cycle "house" battery on the 3760.

Each battery circuit uses a battery switch that provides a positive battery disconnect, isolates all circuits and protects against the hazards of electrical fire and explosion.

At dockside a battery charger takes the place of the engine's alternator to produce direct current.

The shore power cord sends house current through the battery charger and it is converted to direct current and charges the batteries through the battery isolator just as through the engine alternators. In this scenario the main distribution battery charger switch needs to be activated for the current to flow through to the ship's batteries.

Also, the optional generator away from the dock can send house current through the battery charging system and in turn charge up the ship's batteries as needed.

Direct current circuit protection is located in several areas; dash, AC/DC distribution panel and engine.

The engine resetable breaker powers the key switches as well as the dash gauges. It does not control the dash switches such as the blower, bilge pump, etc. Refer to the engine manufacturer's owner manual for location and particulars regarding the engine breaker.

Refer to the technical chapter for specific wiring schematics. Following is a brief description of selected DC components and general information regarding them.

BATTERY CHARGER

A battery charger is located in the engine room. Its function is to keep the main engine and house batteries fully charged to provide engine starting power and house DC circuit workability. The battery charger operates on 120 volt AC shore power or optional generator power to provide the AC source for the battery charger to function. The main AC and the battery charger breaker need to be energized for the batteries to be

charged. The engine starting batteries used on this vessel are separate from the house battery as a safety feature. The battery parallel switch can be depressed and it will use the charged up battery to start each engine. See the dash illustration in chapter 4 for the parallel switch location. If the engine batteries are discharged the house battery will still allow the engines to be started. Once the engines are started the alternators can then be used to charge the engine batteries. It is critical to consider the warnings on carbon monoxide if the engines are run to charge the electrical system.

BATTERY ISOLATOR

On your vessel a battery isolator automatically senses the charge needed by a specific battery and then sends current until that battery is fully charged. The isolator features a "gate" that senses when the battery is charged and won't allow current to discharge back through the system. The battery isolator requires no periodic care other than checking for fastener tightness.

BATTERY SWITCHES

There are 3 battery switches on the vessel. Two of them are used for each of the engine starting batteries. The remaining switch marked master is used for the house “deep cycle” battery. The deep cycle battery normally features heavier plates than the engine starting batteries.

Notice that each battery switch features an on and off position. Upon leaving the vessel it is recommended that each battery switch be turned to the "off" position. This will deactivate both engines and the house related circuits. The automatic bilge pumps will still operate with these 3 battery switches turned off.

There are three 105 amp resetable circuit breakers mounted on the battery switch panel for each individual battery switch. At times when the battery charger or the alternators are not charging the batteries it protects the wiring from the battery isolator to the battery terminal. If a circuit breaker “pops” determine the root cause before resetting the breaker.

DC DISTRIBUTION CENTER

The DC distribution center panel located at the engine forward bulkhead provides protection for the dash main, cabin main, windlass and electronics circuitry. Each of these appliances use resetable

circuit breakers. If a breaker should "pop" determine the root cause of the problem before resetting the breaker.

! CAUTION

AVOID POSSIBLE FIRE AND/OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE. DO NOT TURN THE BATTERY SWITCHES TO THE "OFF" POSITION WITH THE ENGINES RUNNING.

NOTICE

AS A SAFETY FEATURE THE FORWARD AND AFT BILGE PUMP CIRCUITRY IS CONTINUOUSLY PROVIDING PROTECTION EVEN WITH THE BATTERY SWITCHES AND DC DISTRIBUTION CENTER OFF.

DC CIRCUIT PROTECTION

A source of engine circuit protection is located on the engine itself. Notice that the engine breaker is resetable. It is located on the engine. Refer to chapter 4 or consult the engine owner's manual for detailed information.

The engine breaker powers the key switch as well as the engine dash gauges. It does not power the dash switches such as bilge pump, blower, etc. If the engine circuit breaker “pops” determine the cause of the malfunction before resetting the breaker.

Below is a description of the main dash switched components. This includes the helm and DC switch panel located to the starboard side of the helm seat. Read and understand their operation. Your dash may not include some of the discussed control devices. Refer to more in depth instructions to supplement this information which can be found in the owner's documentation.

Blower

This switch controls the two bilge blowers. The blowers must be activated to the “on” position at least 4 minutes prior to starting the engines. This procedure assists in evacuating any fumes in the bilge areas. The blowers should be used below cruising speeds. Besides activating the blower switch a visual check must be done before starting the engines by lifting the engine inspection hatch and “sniffing” for fumes in the bilge. Notice that each blower uses individual circuit protection as a safety measure. A red icon located in the center of the switch lights up when the blower is activated. If the light activates find the root cause of the problem. Normally there is a hull or equipment leak causing this condition.

WARNING

GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE! BEFORE STARTING ENGINES RUN BLOWERS FOR AT LEAST 4 MINUTES AND CHECKENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR GASOLINELEAKS OR VAPORS. RUN BLOWER BELOW CRUSING SPEEDS.

Battery Parallel Switch

The battery parallel switch provides starting power in the event one or more of the batteries are discharged. Upon starting the engines press the parallel switch to energize the circuit via a charged battery. In the event the battery parallel switch is used make sure you investigate the reason the circuit was initially discharged. A breaker protects the parallel switch.

Ignition Switch

START (SPRING LOADED)

TYPICAL IGNITION SWITCH SHOWING 3 KEY POSITIONS

The ignition switches feature three positions; off, run, and start. The position is spring loaded and the key should be held in this position to engage the starter. Once the engine has started release the key from the start position. It will then be energized in the run position. Both key switches feature overcurrent breakers.

Note: The key switches above apply to Volvo and MerCruiser gas engines. Different key switches are used on Volvo and Yanmar diesel engines. Please refer to the owner's manual information for these models.

! WARNING

TO AVOID BODILY INJURY OR DEATH REMOVE KEYS FROM IGNITION SWITCHES WHEN THE ENGINES ARE NOT RUNNING.

Spotlight

The spotlight control features two functions. The left-sided switch center position is off. Other switch positions will deliver either

flood or spot type lights. The right-side button controls the directional pathway of the light. This is useful for docking or spotting objects in the water. The switch is lighted at night.

12 Volt Accessory Plug

The 12 volt (DC) accessory accepts items which feature male connectors similar to the ones you plug into your automobile cigar lighter. It is useful in charging up cell phones and low amperage equipment. Disconnect any equipment from the plug when not in use and attach the protection cap into the receptacle.

The switch panel controls a majority of the helm electrical equipment. They are positioned for easy access by the skipper and lighted for night visibility. The switches are written below as they are labeled on the panel.

Horn

The trumpet air horn is controlled by a toggle switch. Read and understand the horn signals explained in the Rules of the Road chapter.

Fwd Bilge

This switch controls the forward bilge pump. When the switch is depressed it bypasses the automatic float and activates the bilge pump. In the off position the automatic float feature monitors the pump. When the icon located in the middle of the switch is lighted red the automatic system is activated.

Aft Bilge

This switch controls the forward bilge pump. When the switch is depressed it bypasses the automatic float and activates the bilge pump. In the off position the automatic float feature monitors the pump. When the icon located in the middle of the switch is lighted red the automatic system is activated.

Nav/Anchor

The red and green navigation lights along with the masthead anchor light are controlled by this switch. Read and understand all the rules regarding use of navigation lights for night running.

Cockpit Lt

The cockpit lights are useful for accessing areas of the boat after dark. These lights are normally positioned at points such as entrances and stairways.

Arch Lt

The radar arch lights are controlled by this switch.

Foredeck Lt

This switch controls the light positioned at the forward deck work area. This light is a safety feature when working the lines, etc. after dark.

Panel Lt

The instrument panel gauges and switches are controlled by this light. This is especially useful for night time cruising.

Dimmer

This switch allows any lighting controlled by the switch and instrument panel to be dimmed as a house light. The switch contains a rheostat that accomplishes this task. This feature cuts down on glare especially valuable for night cruising.

Electronics

This switch controls the operation of any electronics including GPS/Plotter, Depth Sounder & VHF radio.

Helm Seat

This toggle switch permits the helm seat to be raised or lowered. The fore and aft seat positions use a lever found under the right hand portion of the seat.

Windshield Vent

The center windshield vent offered on selected models is opened with this switch.

Wiper

This switch controls the helm windshield wiper. Change the wiper periodically for maximum performance.

Permit

This two-way toggle switch features a red “lockout” button in the off position which prevents accidentally letting the anchor out even though the windlass switch is activated. The foot deck foot pedal is inoperative with this feature activated.

Windlass

This rocker style switch is used to adjust the anchor line after the anchor has been set. The bow pedals are used to commission the anchor as well as retrieving it. Do not use this switch to break the anchor from the bottom.

Engine Hatch

This switch opens the engine hatch for inspection and repair. The system is hydraulically controlled.

Eng. Rm Lts

This switch energizes the engine room lights for inspection and repairs.

Acc

This switch is available for adding equipment. Make sure the overcurrent protection is not exceeded. Check equipment amperage draw and leave a safe margin.

If the vessel is equipped with an underwater light or Neutra-Salt option (Volvo only) the accessory switches will be utilized for the above mentioned equipment.

MAIN DC PANEL METER/SWITCH FUNCTIONS

GENERAL INFORMATION

The main direct current panel is located in the salon. It controls many of the house related functions. It features both a direct current volt and amp meter.

DC VOLT METER

The DC volt meter displays the condition of the “deep cycle” house battery. It should always show over 12 volts or a discharged condition may exist. Once a switch is energized a light shows itself as an on position. Always shut down all switches upon leaving the vessel.

DC AMP METER

The DC amp meter displays the amount of direct current draw in amperes on the house circuit. This varies on the amount of equipment being used at one particular time. With all the switches in the off position the meter should zero itself.

Fwd Cabin Lights

This switch controls the lights in the forward cabin. Once energized the cabin individual cabin lights can be operated.

Mid Cabin Lights

This switch controls salon cabin lights similar to the forward cabin.

Aft Cabin Lights

The mid or aft cabin lights are controlled by this single pole switch. Similar to mid & forward cabin design.

Macerator

This switch controls the optional overboard discharge pump also known as the macerator. With this switch on along with the key being turned to the on position at the monitor panel the waste tank can be pumped overboard or through a marina pump-out station. If pumping overboard make sure you are outside the legal limit to do so. Read and understand the laws regarding pumping out waste.

Finally, once you determine it is legal to pump waste overboard position the seacock to the open position before starting the macerator.

NOTICE

TO AVOID MACERATOR DAMAGE SEACOCK MUST BE IN THE OPEN POSITION BEFORE PUMPING OVERBOARD.

Fresh Water

This switch controls the water to the boats fresh water system via the fresh water tank. This system provides water to the galley, head and cockpit faucets. Before energizing the switch be sure the fresh water tank on the monitor panel shows a safe level. Running the fresh water pump without sufficient water will cause pump and or impeller damage.

Refrigerator

The main cabin refrigerator is controlled by this switch. The refrigerator features 120/12 dual capacity. The refrigerator switches AC to DC automatically with the proper switches activated. With this switch energized the refrigerator is capable of operating on 12 volts DC should the shore power fail or you are away from the dock without a generator. Remember the refrigerator demands large supplies of DC current. The house battery will discharge steadily without it being charged through the engine alternators, battery charger or optional generator. The unit can set for several hours without defrosting.

Head

This switch energizes power for the vacuflush toilet.

Acc

This 10 amp switch provides power for any additional 12 volt equipment added to the vessel.

Fwd TV

This switch controls the 12 volt standard salon television along with the optional forward/aft cabin television sets.

DC Outlets

This switch controls the 12 volt accessory outlet located in the dash.

TV Antenna

This switch controls the 1 television antenna located at the radar arch. The television reception is affected by this switch.

Head Vent

The head vent exits humidity and odors. This switch controls power to the wall vent switch.

Stereo

This switch controls the 12 volt stereos located on the vessel.

CO Detector

This switch controls the 12 volt CO detectors located in the aft and forward cabins. Notice there is a cover over the switch. Because of the importance in keeping this safety system operating at all times, it requires a two step thought process to turn the switch off.

Level Monitor

This switch controls the fresh and water tank monitor gauge. With this switch on the level monitor panel switches can be activated to determine their respective level.

ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) GENERAL INFORMATION

Alternating current sometimes called AC is used on board your vessel. It is brought to the boat through the use of shore power cords or produced on board through a generator. Alternating voltage is normally measured at 120 volts. It is important to familiarize yourself and understand the various parts of the main AC panel. It is of prime importance to respect alternating current on a vessel just as you do your home electricity.

Shore Power Locker/Inlets/Cords

The shore power locker stores the two 30 amp shore power cords along with the cable TV cord.

When connecting the shore power cords be sure to twist the cord into the inlet plug first. The cord installs one way only. Align the pins, insert the cord into the inlet plug and twist clockwise in place. Then screw the cord fitting onto the threads to lock the cord in the inlet plug.

Plug the power cord into the marina receptacle last. This reduces the possibility of a shock hazard.

When disconnecting the shore power cord remove from the marina outlet first. Then remove the cord from the ships power inlet.

Note that some dockside power boxes will not accept the male twist shore power cord. Some older power boxes use a 3 prong system similar to a house receptacle. You may need to buy an adapter that changes from twist to 3-way. They can be purchased at most marina supply houses. Make sure it is the same capacity rating as the shore power cord.

! DANGER

PREVENT BODILY INJURY, DEATH OR FIRE! NEVER USE EXTENSION CORDS OR IMPROVISED CORDS IN THE SHORE POWER INLETS. USE ONLY APPROVED MARINE SHORE POWER CORDS.

GFIC Outlet

Sometimes current in a circuit escapes its normal route and finds a “ground fault”. If that vehicle ends up to be your body and the current passes through your heart the results could be deadly.

A ground fault interrupter of GFIC senses this ground current before a fatal dose can be conducted and in a fraction of a second cuts the current.

The GFIC device marine speaking is not ignition protected which means the device can not be installed in the engine room or the fuel tank area of a gasoline powered boat because of increased explosion possibilities.

Your vessel has several 120 volt receptacles. A GFIC outlet is found as the first receptacle in the circuit. By this placement all 120 volt outlets are protected on the vessel. You can identify the GFIC primary receptacle by the test and reset breaker in the center of the device. Check the GFIC protection monthly. If a problem develops with the GFIC circuitry call a marine electrician to access the situation.

The GFIC outlets are especially useful when electrical equipment is employed such as a drill or in the bathroom with the use of personal devices such as curlers and hair dryers. Never use any electrical devices when puddling water is present to prevent possible shock hazard.

Ignition Protected Devices

Many electrical devices in everyday use tend to “arc” or spark when being used. These include motors, fans, switches, relays, etc.

Vessels employ many of these same devices but they are protected from any sparking that may cause the device to ignite with any vapors such as found in the engine and/or fuel tank areas.

When replacing any electrical device make sure it is ignition protected. This means it has been tested and normally the device is stamped with a marking making it safe to use. Do not install any electrical device before ensuring it is ignition protected.

MAIN AC PANEL METER/SWITCH FUNCTIONS

SHORE POWER 1 & 2 SWITCH AC LINE VOLTAGE AC LOAD (AMPS)

REVERSED POLARITY INDICATORS

Note: Reverse polarity indicators also exist on the transom shore power locker AC inlet plugs.

Line Voltage

This meter displays the alternating line voltage as read by the AC panel. Normal voltage should be around 120 volts. Sometimes the voltage reads lower because of spikes in the current or unusually long wire runs.

Load Current

This meter displays the amount of circuit load in amperes as equipment is used. Current load (amps) changes according to the type of device being used.

Shorepower Switch

This switch when activated to port displays all shore power 1 information in both the line voltage and load current meters. In the starboard position shorepower 2 information is displayed in a similar fashion.

Reverse Polarity

The reverse polarity icon on both shore 1 and shore 2 positions uses green and red indicator lights. With the shore power cord in place and the shore 1 and/or 2 main breakers not energized the light will indicate green or red. As with a traffic light green is go and on board the vessel it means the power is connected properly. At this point the main shore 1 or shore 2 breakers can be activated.

If the reverse polarity indicator on either shorepower shows red the hot conductor wire is reversed with another wire at some point. Do not attempt to energize either shore main breaker at this point. Disconnect the shore power cords at the mooring dockside receptacle. Normally there is a problem with the dockside wiring. For your safety, contact marina management.

NOTICE

TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DAMAGE OR FIRE DO NOT TRY TO ACTIVATE THE SHORE BREAKERS IF THE REVERSE POLARITY LIGHT IS DISPLAYED.

GENERATOR

Besides the shore power capability to deliver alternating current some vessels feature generators for supplying AC voltage. Generators use their own ventilation and motor to produce AC electricity on board the vessel.

The following illustration is part of the main DC panel discussed earlier in this chapter.

GENERATOR PORTION OF MAIN DC PANEL

GENERATOR ON/OFF BLOWER SWITCHES SWITCH

Generator Ventilation

Before the generator is started both blower switches are to be activated. These switches evacuate any fumes from the bilge area. Read and understand the blower label on the generator portion of the DC control panel.

NOTICE

TO PREVENT POSSIBLE GENERATOR DAMAGE ALL SHORE POWER BREAKERS AND AC SWITCHES NEED TO BE DEACTIVATED BEFORE STARTING OR STOPPING GENERATOR.

Before Activating Generator

Before starting the generator make sure all equipment switches and shore power breakers are in the “off” position. This procedure helps prevent any voltage surges when the generator starts. Refer to the AC panel illustration earlier.

Generator On/Off Switch

After the blowers are activated and run for at least 4 minutes the generator can be started. Energize the toggle style on/off switch until the generator starts. At that point release the switch and the generator starter will disengage from the flywheel. The generator should continue to run on its own.

Generator Main Breaker

After the generator starts the current produced needs to correctly routed to its final destination. Make sure the shore 1 switch is in the off position and slide the generator arm to the uppermost point. While holding it there, turn on the generator breaker. This will begin the AC current routing. The second portion of the process is accomplished with the transfer slider.

Generator Transfer

With the generator breaker in the on position turn on the shore power 2 breaker. Energize the transfer breaker by moving the slider bar up. Turn on the transfer breaker. The appropriate equipment breakers can now be turned on. Monitor the AC load current display for total amperage draw as equipment is activated.

Generator Shutdown Procedure

To shut the generator down deactivate all AC equipment breakers. Move the transfer slider upward and deactivate the transfer breaker. Finally, energize the generator stop toggle switch until the generator stops.

Fwd Outlets

This switch controls the AC outlets in the salon and forward cabins. These outlets are all GFIC protected.

Microwave

This switch controls the galley microwave.

Aft Outlets

This switch controls the AC outlets in the aft cabin which are GFIC protected.

Stove

This switch controls power to the electric stove.

Aft Air Conditioner

This switch controls the air conditioner located in the main cabin. This breaker sends power to the A/C monitor panel located in the salon.

Note: Since this panel is used on other models the slots labeled Fwd Air Conditioner & A/C Pump are fitted as blanks on the 3760.

Battery Charger

This switch controls alternating current to the battery charger located in the bilge. When leaving the vessel the battery charger breaker should be activated to keep the batteries charged.

Icemaker

This switch controls the combination refrigerator/ icemaker located in the cockpit.

Refrigerator

This switch controls the main cabin refrigerator alternating current circuit. Remember this device also operates off 12 volts direct current (DC) power.

Accessory

This switch controls the accessory switch which is blank at the factory. This allows additional aftermarket equipment to be added to the vessel. Make sure the amperage draw of the device does not exceed the overcurrent capacity of the circuit.

Water Heater

This switch controls the alternating power to the water heater located in the bilge. Notice the warning on the panel that says the water heater must not be activated without water in the heater or the element will be burned out. Once the fresh water switch is activated water will flow to the heater through the piping via the fresh water tank which can be monitored on the display panel.

The fuel system used on your vessel features similar components regardless of being gas or diesel. The system consists of the fuel tank, fittings, hoses, filters anti-siphon valves, gauges and distribution systems. The fuel tank system has been inspected at several points during your vessel's construction.

Regal has the right to change, update or add equipment and systems at anytime.

FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

FUEL TANKS

Your vessel uses aluminum fuel tanks. They are manufactured to rigorous standards. All the fuel system fittings and hoses need to be periodically checked through access plates located in the cockpit or from the bilge area.

FUEL FILLS

The fuel fills are located on the port and starboard rear deck area. They are labeled for gas or diesel filling. Some boats us a keyway to open and close the fill caps. This keyway should be located with the owner's information.

FUEL VENTS

The gasoline fuel system produces vapors. These vapors are vented overboard. At the hull you will find a vent that displaces these vapors. See the illustration. As the fuel tank is being filled the vent will displace fumes found in the tank. As the tank nears full you will hear a distinct sound of the gas vapors being displaced. Be careful slow the pumping rate near the full mark so gas does not exit the boat through this vent and pollute the water. Periodically check the vent for build up of spider webs, debris, etc. which can affect engine performance.

ANTI-SIPHON VALVE

The gasoline fuel system contains a device called an antisiphon valve. It prevents fuel from siphoning out of the fuel tank in the event of a fuel hose rupture or leak. Never remove this valve from the fuel system. Should it become inoperative replace it. It is located at the fuel tank end of the fuel feed hose.

FUEL TANK GAUGE & SENDER

The dash fuel gauge is an indication of the fuel tank level as determined by the sending unit. These 2 calibrated instruments are not 100% accurate. Use the one third rule with regard to fuel reserves.

FUEL FILTER

Each engine regardless of brand uses a fuel filter. Some are of the cartridge spin on type. The purpose of these filters is to trap foreign particles and water in the filter element. Because of the possibility of leaking fuel in the bilge these filters need to be replaced periodically by a marine professional. Call your closest Regal dealer for more information.

FUEL DISTRIBUTION VALVE

A fuel value directs the flow of fuel to and from the engine and optional generator to the fuel tanks.

DIESEL SYSTEM

Diesel engines use many fuel system components which are similar to gasoline systems. The major difference in the two systems is that with diesel you do not have the vapor and therefore the explosive characteristics of the gas system. Diesel systems use return lines which send back unused fuel to the tank for reuse.

DIESEL FILTERS

Many vessels use a special filter that separates water from diesel fuel and holds it in the bottom of the fuel filter. Normally these fuel filters feature a drain plug that can be loosened and drained to eliminate the impurities. Be sure to dispose of these materials properly. Unlike gas filters these filters use a glass bowl that can be visually inspected on a periodic maintenance schedule.

DIESEL TRANSFER PUMP

A fuel transfer pump is included within the diesel fuel system. The pump equalizes the volume of fuel between the two fuel tanks. The pump is located in the bilge at the forward engine bulkhead. The fuel transfer pump switch is located near the helm seat or dash area.

The transfer pump utilizes a

three position, center off style switch. The dash breaker must be energized to activate the switch. Once activated press the fuel transfer switch toward the fuel tank you want the fuel to flow toward.

Monitor the fuel gauges and continue to transfer fuel until the tanks are equalized.

TYPICAL DIESEL FUEL FILTER

Turn Counterclockwise To Remove
Shut-Off Valve

STEERING SYSTEM OVERVIEW

STERN DRIVE STEERING

Stern drive (outdrive) vessels use a rotary style steering system. This system transfers helm mechanical energy to the engine. There is a hydraulic steering cylinder with the help of a steering pump which sends fluid force to the stern drive steering arm changing the course of the boat, depending on the direction the steering wheel is turned. Since the steering system is the primary link for engine control, it must be periodically inspected and maintained. The hardware at both the helm and engine must be checked regularly for tightness.

Refer to the operation and maintenance sections for further information.

V-DRIVE STEERING

The V-drive vessel uses a hydraulic-mechanical steering system. It includes a helm pump, hydraulic lines and fluid, rudders, steering cylinder, tiller arm and various tie-bars. The steering wheel features a smooth turning cycle similar to that of an automobile.

Unlike a mechanical steering system with definite stops from stop to stop the hydraulic system features relief valves that allow the steering wheel to continue turning after the steering cylinder has reached the end of its travel. You will feel a slight increase in effort to turn the wheel once the system has reached this position.

There are special hydraulic fluid requirements and filling procedures for the system to operate sufficiently. Refer to the operation and maintenance for further information.

TRIM SYSTEM OVERVIEW-STERN DRIVE MODELS

Your stern drive vessel features both an outdrive controlled power trim and a transom mounted trim tab system.

V-drive models use the trim tab system only. Both these systems use hydraulic cylinders which are driven electrically by a motor and valves which control the bow rise or port and starboard heeling angles depending on the particular system on your vessel.

Power Trim (Stern Drive Only)

The power trim system features 2 dash reference trim gauges. As the trim switches located on the remote control are activated the gauges will show a up or down resulting angle movement of the stern drives which effects bow rise.

The power trim system features an electric motor, hydraulic pump, and reservoir. As the trim is activated fluid moves proportionally through the system. The pump reservoir needs to be periodically checked for hydraulic fluid levels. See the engine manufacturer's engine owner's manual for specifications and capacity of trim lubricant.

The power trim is normally used prior to accelerating onto a plane, after reaching the desired RPM or boat speed and when there is a change in water or boating conditions. Position passengers and equipment in the boat so that the weight is balanced correctly force and aft as well as side to side. Trimming will not compensate for an unbalanced load. To operate the trim, push the switch until the desired bow position is reached. The trim may be operated at any boat speed or at rest. Avoid operating the trim system when running in reverse. Observe the trim/tilt gauge which indicates the boat's bow position achieved by the trim angle of the vertical drive unit. "Bow-Up" corresponds to the upper portion of the trim range on the gauge while "Bow Down" corresponds to the lower portion of the trim range on the gauge.

To determine the proper trim angle, experiment a little until you are familiar with the changes in your boat. The vessel will be properly trimmed when the trim angle provides the best boat performance for the particular operating conditions. A trim position that provides a balanced steering load is desirable.

To familiarize yourself with the power trim, make test runs at slower speeds and at various trim positions to see the effect of trimming. Note the time it takes for the boat to plane. Watch the tachometer and speedometer readings as well as the ride action of the boat.

The “bow up” or out position is normally used for cruising, running with a choppy wave condition, or running at full speed. Excessive “bow up” trim will cause propeller ventilation resulting in propeller slippage. Use caution when operating in rough water or crossing another boat’s wake. Excessive “bow up” trim may result in the boat's bow rising rapidly, creating a hazardous condition.

The “Bow Down” or in position is normally used for acceleration onto a plane, operating at slow planning speeds, and running against a choppy wave condition. It is also used when pulling water skiers, tubers, kneeboarders, etc. In this position the boats bow will want to go deeper into the water. If the boat is operated at high speed and/or against high waves, the bow of the boat will plow into the water.

In normal running conditions, distribute passengers and gear so boat is level. At or below cruising speeds, trim the vessel for optimum performance. The trim gauge will show somewhere in the center of the gauge. This position will also enhance running visibility and overall stability. Again, each outing provides different wave, load and running conditions. Be prepared to make trim changes as needed.

CAUTION

THE BOAT TRIM SHOULD BE ADJUSTED TO PROVIDE BALANCED STEERING AS SOON AS POSSIBLE WHILE UNDERWAY. SOME BOAT/ENGINE/PROPELLER COMBINATIONS MAY CREATE BOAT INSTABILITY AND/ OR HIGH STEERING TORQUE WHEN OPERATED AT OR NEAR THE LIMITS OF THE "BOW UP" OR "BOW DOWN" POSITIONS. BOAT STABILITY AND STEERING TORQUE CAN VARY DUE TO CHANGING WATER CONDITIONS. IF YOU EXPERIENCE BOAT INSTABILITY AND/OR HIGH STEERING TORQUE, SEE YOUR AUTHORIZED REGAL DEALER.

CAUTION

DO NOT RUN ENGINE ABOVE 1000 RPM WITH THE STERN DRIVE TRIMMED FOR SHALLOW WATER MANUVERING SINCE THE STERN DRIVE IS OUT BEYOND THE GIMBAL RING SIDE SUPPORT BRACKETS. OPERATING IN ABOVE MANNER COULD PRODUCE A DANGEROUS STEERING CONDITION OR COULD DAMAGE THE STERN DRIVE COMPONENTS.

Trim Tabs-All Models

Trim tabs are installed on the hull lower transom area. Water is deflected and redirected as the trim tabs are raised and lowered from the dash switches. This change in water flow creates upper pressure under the tabs, and raises the stern. When the stern rises, the bow is lowered. Lowering the port tab will cause the port stern to rise, making the starboard bow lower. Lowering the starboard tab will cause the starboard stern to rise, making the port bow lower.

Using trim tabs in conjunction with the power trim will compensate for uneven weight distribution, listing, water conditions, and other factors that cause inefficient operation. Remember, that trim tabs are trimming the hull while power trim is trimming the engine drive.

Obtaining A Trimmed Position

Your Regal boat reaches a planing position at adesignataed speed. This speed is determined by bottom design, weight distribution, water conditions, and on board equipment. As the throttle is advanced the stern squats and the bow rises initially. The trim tabs allow your boat to plane at a slower speed than natural conditions allow.

In short bursts both trim tab rocker switches are pushed simultaneously in the “bow down” position which causes the trim tabs to move down. As the boat breaks over the bow high attitude the boat speed accelerates and visibility increases.

If the boat is overturned, it will plow the bow and the boat will lose maneuverability. If this occurs, simply short burst the "bow up" trim tab rocker switch simultaneously. In the "learning curve" process, press the tab switches in half second bursts. You will notice a slight delay from the time the switches are pushed until the boat reacts depending on vessel speed. You will know after awhile the optimum planing angle and speed.

When running in heavy seas press the “bow down” position which will assist the vessel to cut through the waves. This will produce a drier and more comfortable ride. In a following sea especially with V-drives run the tabs in a fully retracted angle for maximum rudder response.

Sometimes you can watch the bow spray or stern wake and the rooster tail (mound of water produced by the rudders or stern drives). In a bow up position the spray is far aft to the hull, the wake is high and the rooster tail is high.

When trimmed or in the bow down position, the bow spray is farther forward, the wake and rooster tail are smaller, and positioned further behind the vessel. Also, when trimmed you will notice that the tachometers show an increase in rpm's.

Rectifying A List

Your vessel can use the trim tabs to rectify a list. The trim tabs adjust the boat's attitude in the direction the helm rocker switch is pushed.

If the port bow is high, push the left-hand "bow down" direction on the dash rocker and the port bow will lower. If the starboard bow is high, push the right-hand "bow down" direction and the starboard bow is

lowered.

Using Stern Drive Power Trim With Trim Tabs

Adjust the trim tabs to achieve a planing attitude. Use the power trim to position the prop path parallel to the water flow. At this point the trim tabs may need a fine adjustment.

One advantage of

the trim tab system is that they allow the trimming of the hull while the power trim results in trimming the props.

Porpoising

Porpoising is a running condition where the bow “bounces” up and down similar to a porpoise motion. Press “bow down” in one-half second bursts. As the trim tabs turn, the porpoising should recede and the vessel speed should increase. Only a small amount of “bow down” is normally necessary to make this change.

WATER/WASTE SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Fresh Water System

Your vessel is equipped with a fresh water supply system. It consists of a fresh water tank, deck fill/vent, monitor panel, pressure water pump, distribution system, water filter, dockside water pressure regulator and water heater. The system holds fresh water until it is needed and then with the pressure pump energized, or with the dockside water pressure regulator the system will supply water to the galley, head, and transom shower.

The system is winterized from the factory utilizing a product called “Freeze Ban”. It is best to completely drain the freeze ban before adding any water to the tank in order to minimize the taste of Freeze Ban. Freeze ban will not harm you but it does have a peculiar taste. The system requires little maintenance except occasional cleaning of the water filter and winterizing during cold weather.

For more specific information on the water system see the equipment operation and troubleshooting chapters or contact your Regal dealer.

Waste Water System

Your vessel features specialized equipment that make up the waste water system. Included are the toilet, overboard discharge pump, monitor panel, waste tank, deck fittings, drains, seacocks, waste tank fittings and hoses.

For more information on the waste system refer to the equipment operation and troubleshooting chapters or contact your Regal dealer.

Vessel Operation

This chapter explores the many faucets of running your vessel from casting off to docking and handling emergencies. We cover the basics but suggest you read other information on the chapter topics. Also, become familiar with your engine owner's manual since many of the items discussed are found there in more detail.

GETTING UNDERWAY

PRE-DEPARTURE QUESTIONAIRE

■ Have all fluid levels been topped off?
Is the fuel tank full?
Are the engines, transmissions, and propellers in good condition?
■ Is the drain plug in place (Dry stored vessels)?
■ Have all passengers been briefed on all emergency procedures and seated for departure? Is the boat load balanced?

Is all safety equipment accounted for and easily accessible?
■ Are navigation lights and horn in good working condition?
Is the bilge free of water and do the bilge pumps operate?

■ Is the operator sober, alert and ready to skipper the vessel?
■ Have all passengers been fitted for life jackets?
■ Has a float plan been filed and left with a component person?
■ Has the bilge been sniffed and the fuel system leak checked?
■ Are the appropriate seacocks open?
■ Is all communication equipment in good operating condition?
■ Has a second person been briefed on operational procedures should the skipper become disabled?

■ Are all gauges and electrical switches functioning properly?
■ Has weather information been gathered and analyzed?

UNDERWAY QUESTIONNAIRE

■ After casting off have all dock lines and fenders been stowed?
Are all passengers seated?
As skipper are you monitoring the dash gauges for changes?
As skipper are you on the lookout for changing weather?
As skipper are you checking for abnormal vibration or steering?

DISEMBARKING QUESTIONNAIRE

■ Have you removed the keys from the ignition and secured them?
■ Have all systems been checked for leaks?
■ Has the battery switch been turned to the "off" position?
Are all storage compartments and seacocks closed?
■ Has the fuel tank been filled enough to assist in preventing condensation?
Is the vessel properly tied and covered with equipment stored?

DANGER

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!

GASOLINE IS A HIGHLY FLAMMABLE

AND EXPLOSIVE MATERIAL.

PRACTICE "NO SMOKING" AND EXTINGUISH

ALL FLAMMABLE MATERIALS

WITHIN 75 FEET OF THE FUEL DOCK.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

FROM EXPLOSION OR FIRE

RESULTING FROM LEAKING FUEL.

INSPECT ENTIRE FUEL SYSTEM AT LEAST

ONCE A YEAR.

WARNING

TO PREVENT INJURY OR DEATH

USE ONLY APPROVED MARINE

REPLACEMENT PARTS

THAT ARE IGNITION PROTECTED.

Vessel Operation

NOTICE

SINCE GASOLINE IS AVAILABLE IN VARIOUS OCTANE LEVELS, REFER TO THE ENGINE MANUFACTURER'S OWNER'S MANUAL FOR THE CORRECT ONE FOR YOUR ENGINE. USING IMPROPER OCTANE FUEL CAN CAUSE ENGINE DAMAGE AND VOID THE WARRANTY.

BEFORE FUELING

☑ Make sure a working fire extinguisher is at close hand.
☑ Stop engines and any device that can cause a spark.
☑ Disembark all passengers and crew not needed for fueling.
☑ Fuel if possible during the daylight hours.
☑ Check to ensure nobody is smoking in the boat or near the fueling dock.
☑ Close all enclosures to keep vapors from blowing aboard and settling in the bilge.
☑ Tic up your boat securely at the fuel dock.
☑ Identify the fuel fill.
☑ Visually inspect all fuel system components before each filling.
☑ Avoid using fuels with alcohol additives. They can attack fuel system hoses and cause deterioration.

DURING FUELING

• Keep the fuel nozzle in contact with the fuel fill to guard against static sparks. The fuel fill pipe is grounded through the fuel system wiring to protect against static electricity.
  ■ Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Leave room for expansion.
  ■ Avoid spilling any fuel. Clean up any fuel accidentally spilled with a clean rag and dispose of it on shore.

AFTER FUELING

■ Close all fuel fill openings tightly.
■ Open all hatches.
■ Energize the blowers for a minimum of 4 minutes
■ Sniff in the lower bilge and engine compartment for gas fumes. If fumes are detected continue to ventilate until the odor is gone. Look for any traces of fuel droplets or spillage.

Do not start the engines, smoke or run any electrical components until the fumes can no longer be detected.

STARTING & STOPPING

The following general information covers starting and stopping your engines. Read and understand all previous information on remote controls, fueling and operational procedures. Pay particular attention to all labels. Refer to the engine owner's manual for in depth propulsion system information.

Review all pre-departure information. Before starting your engine make sure all canvas is removed and stored. Start engine only in a well ventilated location to avoid CO buildup. Make sure all battery switches are activated. Close and lock the center windshield section.

WARNING

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH! WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING TRANSOM DOOR MUST BE CLOSED AND LOCKED. SWIM PLATFORM AND LADDER MUST NOT BE IN USE.

WARNING

GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE! BEFORE STARTING ENGINES OPERATE BLOWERS 4 MINUTES AND CHECK ENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR GASOLINE LEAKS AND VAPORS. RUN BLOWERS BELOW CRUSING SPEED.

STARTING GUIDELINES

Position the remote control handle in the neutral position. Advance the neutral throttle only position as instructed in the engine owner's manual. Keep passengers seated and away from controls.

Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. Then turn the key to the start position. You will hear the starter cranking over the engine. When the engine starts release the key switch. Duplicate the same procedure with the other ignition key.

If the engine does not start, refrain from cranking the engine over 10-12 seconds. Allow the starter and battery a chance to recover. Advance the remote control in the neutral throttle position as recommended in the engine manual. Do not race the remote control in the neutral position. Refer to the engine and control chapter located in the manufacturer's owner's manual for additional information.

CAUTION

AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE! CHECK THE OIL GAUGE IMMEDIATELY AFTER STARTING ENGINE. IF LOW OR NO READING SHUT DOWN ENGINE IMMEDIATELY AND INVESTIGATE THE PROBLEM.

Vessel Operation

SHIFTING GUIDELINES

Before shifting into reverse or forward make sure the coast is clear. When shifting to either gear from neutral make sure the throttle is in the idle position. Do not pause but engage the shifter quickly into the desired gear. Allow your vessel to lose all headway before shifting into reverse or forward gear. Practice shifting! You will become more familiar with the procedure and self-confidence will build especially in tight docking situations. Most importantly, stay alert!

STOPPING GUIDELINES

Before stopping the engine make sure it is in neutral and idle speed. After an outing let the engine cool down at idle speeds for a few minutes before turning the ignition off. Glance at the gauges one last time to monitor their readings. Never turn off the engine while in forward or reverse gear or back up in excessive speeds since water could enter the engine through the exhaust system and cause extensive damage. Above all, use common sense.

FENDERS

FENDER USAGE

Fenders are normally made of a rubberized plastic and are usually filled with air. Most have a fitting like a basketball so they can be inflated or deflated. Fenders are available in a wide range of sizes and shapes to fit both small and large vessels. Fenders are normally designated in inches. They are used between piers, docks, sea walls and the boat. They protect the topsides of the boat from rubbing against rough objects. Most fenders have eyes of attachment which allow a line to be inserted vertically or horizontally. This will permit the fender to be tied off to fit individual dock and tidal situations. Be sure the fender is correct for the vessel size. It is a good idea to carry extra fenders but half a dozen is normally an acceptable number. Remember to store fenders on board so they can be easily accessed. Sometimes people call fenders "bumpers" but this is not correct nautical terminology.

FENDER TYPES

There is a variety of fender styles and types, each selected for specified uses. When choosing fenders, contact a marine dealer or supply house. Explain how you moor and use your vessel so they can recommend the best fender type for you. We suggest the type with a fill plug so you can inflate them with a hand pump

like the ones used for bicycles.

DOCK LINE BASICS

Most skippers use dock line terminology fairly loose but there is more to the basics than just bow or stern lines. There are several lines that can be secured to the bow and stern and depending on their direction and use, can be called other names. Remember that “forward” and “aft” refer to the direction that a spring line runs from the vessel, and not where it is secured on board.

BOW & STERN LINES

There is only one true bow line. It is secured to the forward cleat and run forward along the dock to prevent the vessel from moving to the stern. The stern line leads from a rear cleat to a piling or cleat on the dock astern of the vessel. This line keeps the boat from moving ahead. For small vessels these are the only lines needed for normal wind and current conditions. If located in a tidal environment, keep slack in the lines.

BREAST LINES

These lines are attached to the bow and stern that lead to nearly right angles from the center of the vessel to the dock. They help keep larger vessels from moving away from the dock, or are pulled in to help people board the vessel. Bigger vessels may use bow or quarter breast lines.

SPRING LINES

Most small boats use two spring lines although it is possible to have four. They are called the after bow spring and forward quarter spring.

Bow springs are secured at the vessel's bow area. Forward spring lines lead forward from the boat to the dock and control movement sternward. After springs stem aft from the vessel, and stop movement ahead. Spring lines are used to prevent movement in a berth, ahead or astern. They are really useful in controlling the effects of a real active tidal surge. Spring lines are useful where fenders need to be kept in place against piles.

BOAT MOORING

Most boats can be secured to a dock using four lines. The after bow spring is crossed with the forward quarter spring and secured to individual dock cleats or pilings. This ensures longer springs and can be snugged up tighter for more efficient tidal control. Remember, if you only have one piling available, position the vessel so this point is opposite admidships. Run both spring lines to it. These lines will be shorter but still useful.

Vessel Operation

The bow and stern lines should be relatively at a 45 degree angle with the dock. The stern line can be attached to the near-shore quarter cleat, but will work more efficiently to the offshore quarter cleat. The longer line will allow the boat flow with the tide with less time checking the vessel.

DOCK LINE SIZING

Most dock lines today are made of nylon, either of twisted rope or braided core and cover. The most often used material is nylon because of its stretching abilities absorbing shock loads. It is chafe resistant for extended life and is easier on bare hands.

The line's size varies with the vessel. Normally, a vessel in the 20' to 40' boats will use 1/2" diameter nylon lines.

Dock lines need to have the strength to hold the vessel and have enough density to resist chafing. They shouldn't be too heavy that they lose their shock-absorbing capabilities. Use the right size line for the vessel since a line too large for the boat will pull hard against the vessel since it won't be forced to stretch. If the line is too small for the vessel, there is no margin for wear and chafe when under strain

SECURING LINES

When mooring your boat, make sure the dock lines are secured at both ends. Depending on your situation you may need to loop the eye splice of the dock line around a piling. Sometimes the mooring line will lead down sharply from the piling to the deck cleat. Loop the eye splice around the piling twice to keep it from being pulled up off the pile. Pull the line through the looped eye if the mooring line is too small to go around the piling twice or too small to fit over once.

If you must drop a line over a piling that already holds another boat's line, run the eye of the line up through the first eye from below, then loop it over the pile. This will allow either line to be removed without disturbing the other. If another line is dropped over yours, simply reverse the process.

Secure a little slack in the other dock line, then slip your eye up through its loop and over the top of the pile. Your line can be dropped through the other eye.

When debarking from a dock, it is easier to release the line from a cleat or piling, from on board the boat, as soon as you leave the dock. Loop a long line around the cleat or picr and leading both ends on board you can release the line easily. Slip one end around the cleat or pile, the pull it back on board. Release the line without the eye splice, so it will run freely from around the pile without hanging up on the splice.

STEPS TO STERN DRIVE DOCKING

Inboard/Outboard powered boats are fairly easy to back up and maneuver with a little knowledge and docking practice. One of the most important aspects of the process is to keep your calm in the wake of a busy marina. Basically, the reversing propellers are turned in the direction you want to go by using the steering wheel.

Some boats tend to be influenced by the wind. When backing down in a crosswind, allow room to maneuver and watch the bow. Try not to overreact or get excited, but use your knowledge and experience. If the wind begins to swing the bow, you need to stop backing, turn the wheel to port and go forward to straighten the boat. Use a quick burst of power but not too much to knock your crew off balance.

A. Stop the boat by shifting in reverse. Put the wheel over to the port and begin backing in. Slow down your speed by momentarily shifting into reverse.

* Control in reverse idle position, Outdrives to port.

B. Continue backing up the boat with the wheel hard to port. Keep an eye on the bow, and begin to straighten the wheel as the boat enters the slip.

* Control in reverse idle position, Outdrives to port.

C. Center the wheel to align the boat parallel with the dock. If the stern is too far from the dock, shift to neutral, then put the wheel hard over to port and then go forward a second or two.

* Control in neutral idle position. Drives centered.

D. When the boat is completely into the dock, stop stern movement by shifting into forward. Put the wheel to port to kick the stern over close to the dock if necessary. Shift into neutral Tie up the boat.

* Control in forward idle position. Drives to port.

Vessel Operation

STERN DRIVE MANEUVERING

Inboard/outboard, I/O or sometimes called stern drive boats do not have rudders. The boat uses a steering system that directs the propeller thrust, by turning the stern drive unit where the propeller is mounted. Normally maneuvering the I/O boat is easier than a V-drive vessel. Directing propeller energy (thrust) makes slower speed maneuvering casier. The propeller discharge current is turned from one side to the other which results in turning forces. Rudder boats need water to flow by the rudder to be efficient. Stern drive units are designed to have reduced shaft angle, so the propeller does not produce as much unequal blade thrust and resistance as does a propeller on a single screw boat. Large horsepower stern drive boats do produce more thrust and steering torque but your vessel has the advantage of power steering. Below is some basic information on how stern drive boats handle in normal conditions.

GATHERING HEADWAY

You may notice that if you advance the throttle quickly in initial takeoff (make sure you have a firm grip on the wheel), the boat has a tendency to pull the stern of the vessel to starboard. There is a trim tab (also serves as a sacrificial anode) located on the vertical drive housing just to the top of the propeller blade. This trim tab helps compensate for the low speed steering torque. Once the boat increases headway and the propeller is operating in a faster water flow this torque effect decreases.

Contact your Regal dealer for further information or consult your engine manufacturer's handbook.

TURNING

Once the boat has gathered headway, with the boat planing at the correct bow angle and the stern drive units and helm straight the boat tends to stay on a uniform course heading. To assure the boat trim angle is correct use the trim gauge as a guide while activating the trim button on the remote control panel.

When the helm wheel is turned to the right or starboard, the stern drive units are turned in the same direction. The propeller's discharge force is directed to starboard forcing the boats stern to port. Water flowing past the hull strikes the stern drive gear housings on their starboard side, creating additional turning torque. The stern starts a move to port, forcing the bow to starboard.

If the helm is turned to the left or port the stern drives turn to port, the stern of the boat goes starboard as the bow turns to port.

As the vessel operator gains experience, he will better gauge each maneuver and speed situation. In this way he will understand the handling characteristics of his boat. He needs to keep the safety of his passengers in the highest priority.

BACKING DOWN

Inboard/Outboard (I/O) boats do not have rudders. The boat uses a steering system that directs the propeller thrust, by turning the stern drive unit where the propeller is mounted. Normally maneuvering the I/O boat is easier than a similar V-drive

vessel.

If your boat has the steering wheel and stern drives straight with the control in reverse, the stern will be pushed a bit to port by the reversing propeller thrust. This tendency to back to port can be eliminated by turning the stern drive to starboard.

When the vessel begins to gather speed to stern, the water passing by the lower gearcase housings will continue to increase steering torque. If the helm wheel is turned to starboard, it will direct the propeller thrust to port, tracking the stern to starboard.

Wind and current will affect how a vessel backs. Stern drive boats tend to be light displacements and when backing down in a strong crosswind, the bow will tend to fall toward the windward. This may cause steering problems.

Once increased headway is gathered in reverse gear, the force of the lower hull moving through the water is enough to track straight. When backing, the stern will lead as it heads to port or starboard, before the vessel actually starts to turn. When the control is put in forward gear position, the stern is pushed to starboard; the amount of push depends on the hull design and the amount of throttle advance.

STOPPING

Remember that your boat does not have any brakes. It uses reverse thrust from the propeller to stop. If the vessel has headway, with the helm and propellers in reverse. The propeller thrust is directed backwards, past the lower gearcase of the stern drive. Depending on how far the

throttle is advanced, the discharged thrust may not be strong enough to reverse the water flowing by the gearcase. As the power is increased, the propeller thrust becomes strong enough to stop the flow of water past the lower unit, and, as the throttle is advanced it reverses its flow more completely.

When water is flowing past the gearcases, steering torque is increased, but when the thrust stops the water flow, the boat will not respond to the helm. This is a short lived event and is overcome quickly when the water again flows past the gearcase. Furthermore, added to the energy of the water hitting the lower gearcase, the propeller thrust is directed by turning the stern drives, which can add to the steering torque.

The props tend to throw the stern to port. This is why experienced skippers undertake a portside landing when wind and current conditions permit. They allow the prop to move the stern to port toward the dock.

With a forward motion when the helm wheel is turned hard to one side, the vessel pivots around a point about 1/3 it's length abaft to stern. See illustration.

Vessel Operation

STEPS TO V-DRIVE DOCKING

Twin-screw V-drive vessels can be maneuvered in tight quarters which is always a plus in winds, currents, or busy marina environments. Depending on the conditions, stop the boat in front of the dock slightly to windward or up current. The rudder can be used as needed. Use the examples below as a guide since each situation can be unique.

It may be necessary to switch “starboard” for “port” and vice versa. In the following instance, both throttles are in idle as backing begins.

As the boat begins to back, it will track in a port direction. By moving in a forward direction with the port engine the boat will be forced to turn and align with the dock. When you reach a comfortable alignment, the port engine is put in reverse which will allow continued backing to the dock. Some adjustment in tracking can be realized by putting either control momentarily in neutral or forward. Going forward on the port engine pushes the stern to port; the starboard engine going forward pushes the stern to starboard. Again, keep your calm and do not overreact to the situation.

A. Stop forward motion with the starboard engine in reverse; the stern will begin a port movement. Continue backing up, with the starboard and port engine throttles in the idle position.

B. As the stern backs and you enter the dock, go ahead with the port engine to line up the boat with the dock.

C. As the boat aligns with the dock, put both engines in reverse; keep backing into the dock. If you put either engine in forward, the stern will move in the same direction.

B. When the boat is fully in the dock insert both engines in forward gear momentarily to stop all stern motion. Secure the boat.

V-DRIVE MANEUVERING

Twin-screw (sometimes called twin-inboard or V-drive) boats use twin rudders located directly behind each propeller. These propellers are counter-rotating which will balance steering torque. On Regal twin-screws the port propeller is left-handed and the starboard propeller is right-handed. Mark the propellers in case they need to be changed or repaired at some point as they could be mismatched on reinstallation since they both fit the shaft. Moving forward with the starboard engine for a port turn, the propeller offset from the centerline enhances significantly to pushing the stern to starboard.

In reverse, the starboard propeller throws it thrust energy toward the starboard side of the hull to assist in turning the stern to port. The port propeller reversing, throws its thrust against the port hull side to assist the pivot of the stern to starboard.

The important ingredients in turning and steering are combined by the outward turning propellers. The steering result is used in the same direction as the turning movement caused by the off centerline propeller location.

GATHERING HEADWAY

As opposed to a boat with a single propeller, if the V-drive transmission of a twin-screw vessel are put in gear together, the vessel will make headway without the tendency to pull to the port or starboard. Of course the throttles must be in the same rpm range as read on the tachometers. This factor is very basic to this type of vessel having superior handling and control in tight spaces along with being able to handle wind and current much more adequately than single screw or outdrive boats.

TURNING

When you have two propellers available it provides the skipper a means of shifting one propeller or the other forward or reverse without the assistance of the rudder. When maneuvering at slow speeds the steering wheel is not normally used; the skipper uses the shift and throttle controls to control the vessels actions.

A vessel's stern may be pushed to one side or the other by moving ahead or reversing with just one propeller. A bit of headway or sternway docs accompany the turning motion. You can gain the most turning effect by energizing one propeller forward and the other propeller in reverse.

One advantage of a twin-screw becomes evident when you can turn the vessel in a circle just larger than the vessel itself. As an example, to turn to starboard, the rudders can be centered, while the port engine moves forward and the starboard engine reverses. If you want an even tighter turn, use the rudders.

Begin this type of turn with the engines at idle or in gear at the same rpm (revolutions per minute). For a starboard turn, put the port shifter in forward and the starboard shifter in reverse. When the vessel starts to turn, it may begin to make headway. This relates to the boat and propeller design. As a result, you may have to advance the port throttle somewhat to increase the rpm of the reversing starboard propeller.

When the port engine speed is increased somewhat, the circle is bigger and the vessel makes headway. If the port engine speed is decreased, the circle becomes larger, but the vessel goes sternway as the reversing starboard propeller pulls it around, stern to port.

BACKING DOWN

The skipper of a twin-screw vessel has a great advantage over other boats because they can be steered with the rudders when backing down. The benefits are less than moving forward because the propellers thrust is directed away from the rudders rather than at them.

Vessel Operation

Furthermore, besides the rudders, the twin-screw vessel skipper can use the throttles to slow down an individual or both engines as a help to steering when maintaining sternway. As a option, the skipper is able to stop one propeller or go ahead on it for a higher control factor in reverse.

STOPPING

The best way to stop a twin-screw vessel is by reversing the propellers, This action will not push the stern to one side like other type powered vessels.

The skipper of a twin-screw boat can use the following approach idea in both port and starboard situations; with the boat stopped, the skipper can reverse the propeller so the stern will be pushed toward the dock. With the starboard approach, reverse the outboard engine propeller to check headway when approaching parallel to a dock, the stern will move in. With the port approach, the reversing starboard right-hand propeller will move the stern toward the port. When approaching to put the vessel's starboard side to the pier, the reversing port propeller will move the stern toward starboard.

ANCHORING

Selecting the correct anchor is an important decision. The anchor style in part depends on the usage and boat type. Regal boats designate an anchor type and or model. Some models incorporate chain, line with an optional windlass.

Contact an authorized Regal dealer for more information. Anchoring is easier with another person on board. First be certain that the line for the anchor is properly attached, to avoid losing the anchor and anchor line overboard.

For most anchors to perform more efficiently, you should attach 3 to 6 feet of chain. The chain will stand up to the abrasion of sand, rock, or mud on the bottom much better than a nylon line. It should be galvanized to reduce corrosion. Next, attach a length of nylon line to the other end of the chain.

The nylon will stretch under a heavy strain cushioning the impact of waves or wind on both the boat and the anchor.

To anchor, select a well protected area, preferably with a flat bottom. Contrary to modern belief, you do not throw the anchor over while the boat is making headway, or moving forward. In fact, the bow of the boat should be bought slowly backward, while easing the anchor slowly over the side of the boat until it hits the bottom. To “snub the line” means to stop its outward “pay” or movement. Usually the length of anchor line used should be 5 to 10 times the depth of the water.

After you have anchored, check your position with landmarks if possible. You need to continue to monitor these landmarks to make sure you are not drifting. Since anchoring can also be an emergency procedure, the anchor and line should be readily accessible.

For increased holding power in windy conditions, two anchors are sometimes set. If your primary anchor drags, you can run out your secondary anchor without picking up the primary one. The important thing is to lay them out at an angle. When setting two anchors, make sure they are fastened to separate rodes or cleats. This is done in case you need to adjust one later so the line is accessible.

If two anchors are used ahead of a boat, make sure to set the rodes at an angle rather than in a straight line to reduce the chances of tangeling as the boat moves in wind and current. See the illustration.

TOWING

In case you find yourself aground or in need of a tow, or should you want to tow another vessel, keep in mind that you never use deck hardware or cleats to secure lines for towing!

Deck hardware is intended for mooring and anchoring, and is not designed to withstand the strain and pull of towing. Rather than tie the line to your cleats on deck, it is suggested that you tie a bridle by passing a line completely around the hull of your boat to avoid structural damage. When towing, always stand clear of a taut line, as any type of line breaking under stress can be extremely dangerous. The preferred line for towing is double-braided nylon, as it has sufficient elasticity to cushion shock loads. Move slowly and cautiously.

ADMIRALTY LAW

The Admiralty law sometimes referred to as the salvage law was founded primarily on English law fundamentals and basically says that a vessel distressed, in danger of flounder, if rendered assistance from a towing company or private agency, can be forced to relinquish a portion of the vessels' worth for the assistance received.

Vessel Operation

KNOTS

Knots are useful in docking, towing and other emergency situations. Learning to tie knots requires practice. As they say “Practice makes perfect”. Some of the knots used in boating are the square, bowline, anchor bend, clove hitch, figure eight and half hitch. There are several periodicals available that explain various knots and how to tie them effectively. An experienced skipper will know the basic nautical knots and will use them when on the water. Take the time to know the basic knots.

Figure 8 Knot Tied To Cleat

A useful knot to learn for general docking is the figure eight with one end reversed. By turning the free end of the line back under, the knot can be released without disturbing the boat. After some practice one person can secure a vessel easily to a dock or pier in a variety of weather conditions. This knot normally is used to tie the bow and stern. Then the vessel can further be fastened by tying the spring lines in the figure eight knot. Wrap it around the cleat 2 or 3 times.

EMERGENCIES

Always be ready to help others on the water if possible, but do not take any unnecessary risks. Use equipment to save a life, but do not risk a life to save equipment. Consult earlier information in this manual concerning accidents, etc. Also, read other literature concerning on the water emergencies. Be alert and prepared!

FIRE

Fire aboard a vessel can spread quickly and can cause tremendous alarm among everyone. Most fires can be prevented by keeping the bilge free from oil and debris. Keep all equipment stowed and maintained in working order. Carry a backup fire extinguisher on board. If something becomes a possible fire hazard, remove that possibility at once.

Never use water on gasoline, oil or electrical fires. When you dump water on an electrical fire a you can be shocked since water conducts electricity.

Follow these instructions if a fire breaks out:

1. Fit everyone aboard with a life jacket. Turn off the ignition.

2. Try to keep the fire downwind. If the fire is to the stern, head the bow toward the wind. If forward, put the stern to the wind.

3. If the engine should catch fire, shut off the fuel supply Usually there is a fuel tank access that you can crimp the fuel feed line.

4. Use a hand fire extinguisher. Make sure to point it at the base of the flames. Use short bursts and sweep the extinguisher side to side. Remember: (A 4 pound extinguisher discharges in 20 seconds)

These actions help prevent the fire from spreading to other parts of the boat. You can extinguish fires quickly if you act swiftly. Have a plan of action in motion in case a fire breaks out.

FIRST AID

Knowing first aid can save lives. A first aid kit and the ability to use it are important ingredients for the safety of a skippers' passengers, crew and vessel. Having confidence and competence in handling medical emergencies on board is a must for the skipper. Invest your time in a first aid course available at the American Red Cross.

CPR (BASIC LIFE SUPPORT)

If someone is seriously injured have someone call for help while the injured person is being attended.

Check for possible danger signs; loss of breathing, unconsciousness, severe bleeding and heartbeat. If you determine the individual is not breathing or unconscious place the victim on their back on a hard surface and do the following:

1. If unconscious, open the airway. Neck lift, head lift or chin head lift.

2. If not breathing, begin artificial breathing. Pinch the nose. Give 4 quick breaths. If airway is blocked, try back blows, abdominal or chest thrusts and finger probe until airway is open.

3. Check for pulse. Begin artificial circulation. Depress sternum. Fifteen compressions rate 80 per minute. 2 quick breaths. Continue uninterrupted until advanced medical support is available.

Vessel Operation

HYPOTHERMIA

Hypothermia is a condition where the body temperature decreases because the body can't generate enough heat to maintain its normal temperature. It can be serious and usually occurs where victims have been immersed in water (under 68 degrees) for periods of time. If you encounter a possible hypothermia victim call for help on the radio and get the person out of the water.

Symptoms arc:

1. Shivering that if condition is advanced may stop.
2. Confusion, clumsiness or slurred speech.
3. Rigid muscles.
4. Semiconscious to unconscious.

Treat hypothermia by the following:

■ Remove wet clothing.
■ Monitor the victim's pulse and breathing.
■ Rapidly apply heat to the body core by using blankets, naked bodies or warm water.
■ Do not give the person any food or drink.
■ Do not warm the arms and legs. Warming of these extremities can be fatal.

Follow up immediately with medical authorities!

CALIFORNIA AIR RESOURCE BOARD (CARB) LABEL

Your Regal boat may have a star shaped label affixed to the bow port hullside. It is located at the front of the state registration numbers. This label is part of the California Air Resource Board (Carb) SD/I rule. If your boat is operated in the state of California and/or bordering waters, this label MUST remain intact. The label shows that the engine installed as original equipment meets a currently approved California state regulatory emission level. See the example below which shows the current California ultra low 3 star label.

CALIFORNIA PROP 65

Proposition 65 relates to the state of California and is an additional requirement added to their Safe Drinking & Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986. Prop 65 basically summarized states that: “No person in the course of doing business shall knowingly discharge or release a chemical known to the state to cause cancer or reproductive toxicity into water or onto land where such chemical passes or probably will pass into any source of drinking water ....” and it goes on to say “no person in the course of doing business shall knowingly and intentionally expose any individual to a chemical known to the state to cause cancer or reproductive toxicity without first giving clear and reasonable warning to such individual .....”

For more information, contact the California Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment at 916-445-6900 or http://www.oehha.ca.gov/prop65.html.

WARNING

A wide variety of components used on this vessel contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm.

EXAMPLES INCLUDE:

* Engine and generator exhaust
* Engine and generator fuel, and other liquids such as coolants and oil, especially used motor oil
* Cooking fuels
*Cleaners, paints, substances used for vessel repair
* Waste materials that result from wear of vessel components
* Lead from battery terminals and from other sources such as ballast or fishing sinkers

TO AVOID HARM:

* Keep away from engine, generator, and cooking fuel exhaust fumes
* Wash areas thoroughly with soap & water after handling the substances above

FUEL SPILLAGE

The federal water pollution control act prohibits the discharge of oil or oil waste (such as from the sump bilge pump) into or upon the navigable waters of the United States or the waters of the contiguous zone. Violators are subject to substantial civil fines and criminal sanctions.

A placard is normally found inside the engine hatch area or in the sump warning of overboard discharge of oil or oily waste.

MARPOL TREATY

The USCG now enforces the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from ships, referred to commonly as the MARPOL TREATY (marine pollution). This international treaty prohibits the overboard dumping of all oil, garbage, ship-generated plastic and chemicals. There is a placard on board your boat that explains the garbage and plastic dumping laws in detail. Normally this placard is found near a waste receptacle in the cabin or cockpit.

ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS

There are numerous vessels operating on our waterways on a daily basis. Each boat has as impact on our environment. Boat operation habits, marine sanitation, and maintenance all play a role in a delicate battle to keep the ecosystem clean. Each of us has a role in doing our part as a environmentally conscious skipper to conserve our waterways.

The National Marine Manufacturer's Association lists their top ten of Eco-Boating Practices as follows:

1. Observe all regulatory agency policies regarding marine toilets.

2. If equipped with a holding tank, use marina pump-out facilities.

3. If used, make sure bottom paints are legal and ecosystem friendly.

4. Use only biodegradable cleaning agents.

5. Dispose of all garbage and liter on shore properly, not on the water.

6. Don't top off fuel tanks. Leave expansion room. Clean up spills.

7. Watch your wake and propeller wash.

8. Make sure your engines are well tuned and maintained.

9. Control your bilge water.

10. When fishing, practice the "catch and release" principle.

Follow these basic practices when on the waterways. Treat the environment in a way that you would like to be treated.

Equipment Operation

STANDARD EQUIPMENT

The 3760 features numerous components as standard equipment. This chapter divides the standard equipment into interior and exterior types.

A majority of the standard equipment is listed in alphabetical order by nouns to help you find it easier.

This manual covers most common aspects of each component. However, in selected instances more detailed information is available in the manufacturer's owner's manual or possibly on the internet.

Equipment or vendors may change during a boat's life cycle as we are constantly upgrading our product line.

Regal at any time retains the right to change vendors, equipment, specifications and other technical data.

A quick reference standard equipment index is found on the next page.

Interior Equipment Component

Air Conditioner

Antenna-GPS

Batteries

Battery Charger

Battery Parallel Switch

Battery Switch Panel

Carbon Monoxide Detector

Coffee Maker

DC Distribution Panel

DVD Player

Door- Cabin Entry

Door- Transom

Door- Entry Step Drain

Flooring- Cherry & Holly

Hatches

Isolator- Galvanic

Lighting- Cabin

Microwave Oven

Monitor- Water/Waste

Portlights

Range

Refrigerator

Shower Sump Pump

Sleeper/Sofa-Salon

Scat- Aft Bench

Stereo- CD Player

Stereo- Steering Wheel Controls

Stereo Remote 61

Television

Toilet- VacuFlush 85

Page # Exterior Equipment Component Page #

3 Arch-Radar 87

9 Bilge Pump/Float Switch 88

10 Canvas 89

11 Carpet- Cockpit 93

12 Compass 93

13 Electronics- ST60 Depth Instrument 94

14 Electronics- "C" Series GPS/Plotter 99

15 Electronics- VHF Radio 117

17 Fire Extinguisher- Automatic 132

18 Hatch-Engine 134

26 Heater-Hot Water 135

26 High Water Alarm 136

26 Markers- For Slings 137

27 Pump-Fresh Water 138

27 Shower- Transom 139

28 Seat-Aft Bench 140

30 Scat- Helm 141

33 Spotlight 142

42 Sunpad/Chaise Lounge 143

42 Swim Platform 144

43 Swim Ladder 144

45 Table- Cockpit 145

46 Washdown- Fresh Water 147

47 Water Inlet- Dockside 147

49 Windlass 148

50 Windshield- Center Latch 151

61 Wiper-Windshield 151

Valves- Fuel Tank/Generator 152

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioning information included in this chapter applies only to factory installed equipment. The unit is made by Marine Air Systems and is known as the Vector Compact model with a digital Passport control. The unit output is 18,000 BTU'S (British Thermal Units). The air conditioner replies upon a source of AC power supplied by shorepower or an onboard generator along with a supply of water (salt or fresh). These units feature the ability to provide heat in a reverse cycle mode especially useful in extending the boating season in colder climates. This reverse cycle operation is affected by the temperature of the water. As the water temperature decreases so does its ability to produce heat. It is recommended that the reverse cycle not be used when the water temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

HOW IT WORKS

The air conditioner is self-contained. It is located in the salon just ahead of the AC/DC panel. The cabinet can be accessed by removing several screws under the cabinet top through the front cabinet door. See the illustration.

It is made up of four main components and a refrigerant gas called freon circulating through the system. The BLOWER draws warm air across the fins on the EVAPO-RATOR where the heat from the air is transferred to the refrigerant in the evaporator coil. As the refrigerant evaporates from a liquid to a gas it absorbs the heat from the cabin air.

The COMPRESSOR then compresses the refrigerant gas and pumps it through the outer tube in the CONDENSOR COIL.

The seawater pump located beneath the salon floor circulates cool seawater through the inner tube in the condensor coil; this cools the refrigerant and condenses it into a liquid. The heat from the refrigerant is exchanged to the seawater and discharged overboard. The liquid refrigerant is then passed through the EVAPORATOR and the cycle is repeated.

Removing heat from the cabin lowers its temperature. The cooled air is blown through the ducting and out the supply air grilles.

For reverse cycle heating, the refrigerant flows in the opposite direction through the reversing valve. Heat is transferred from the seawater in the condensor coil to the refrigerant and then to the air blowing through the evaporator into the cabin. As stated on the previous page seawater temperature will directly affect the a/c unit's efficiency. The compact vector model a/c can efficiently cool your boat in water temperatures up to 90 degrees Fahrenheit and can provide heat in water temperatures as low as 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

VECTOR COMPACT AIR CONDITIONER PARTS DESCRIPTION

Equipment Operation

BEFORE STARTING AIR CONDITIONER

1. To use the air conditioner locate and open the through hull seacock valve that supplies water to the air conditioner pump. The A/C seacock is located beneath the salon starboard aft floor.

2. A strainer is in-

stalled between the seacock and the AC pump. This strainer stops foreign matter from being ingested into the AC pump or air conditioning system. Periodically inspect the strainer and clean as necessary.

1. The best way to activate the A/C system is to make sure both shorepower cords are plugged in and both dockside breakers and the transom inlet breakers are energized. Refer to the systems chapter for more information.

An alternative method is to use one shore power cord and simply energize the transfer breaker on the main AC control panel. This sends 120 volts to both banks of the AC. If you employ this method you have 30 total amps availability verses dual 30 amps. You need to monitor the A/C load current meter as you energize various circuits especially using the air conditioner. The above method limits the number of circuits you can energize. The A/C can be used while cruising through the generator. The generator supplies alternating current to operate the air conditioner. As above, once the generator is started, use the transfer switch to distribute current. See the systems chapter for operating the generator.

1. Activate the air conditioner breaker at the A/C distribution panel.

NOTICE

AVOID POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT FAILURE. DO NOT TURN THE UNIT OFF AND IMMEDIATELY TURN IT BACK ON. ALLOW AT LEAST 30 SECONDS FOR REFRIGERANT PRESSURE EQUALIZATION.

TIPS FOR STARTING THE A/C SYSTEM

1. Always check for a steady flow of water from the overboard discharge. Periodically check the discharge during the units activation. When first starting the air conditioner up there is a lag time between turning on the system and the air conditioner seawater pump being activated.

2. Verify that there is steady airflow out of the supply air grills.

3. Do not block the intake grill. It provides continued air for the A/C system. Clean filter periodically.

4. The air conditioning system is programmed for an automatic operation mode. See the Marine Air owner's manual for changing the mode to heat or cool only.

PASSPORT AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL NORMAL HEATING & COOLING CYCLE

OVERVIEW

1. Activate the air conditioner breaker at the ship's service panel.

2. Press the POWER button once to start the system. The display indicates room temperature when the system is on and is blank when the system is off.

3. Set the desired room temperature by pressing the UP or DOWN button. The set point can be viewed by momentarily pressing and releasing UP or DOWN buttons.

4. Fan speed operation is automatic allowing fan speed to decrease as room temperature is approached in the COOL mode. The fan will operate at low speed when set point is satisfied. Manual fan speeds can be selected with the FAN button.

5. The fan can be programmed to run only when cooling or heating is required. Under normal conditions the automatic fan speed operation is reversed in the HEATING mode, however the fan can be programmed to operate the same as in the COOLING mode.

The Passport control features a memory back-up that does not use batteries or other power sources. When power is lost operating parameters are held indefinitely.

When power is resumed, the control continues as last programmed.

1. When powering up the Passport control press and immediately release the POWER button so as to not unintentionally enter the program mode.

Automatic heating and cooling will be supplied as required. Automatic operation maintains a 2 degree Fahrenheit temperature variation. A 4 degree Fahrenheit change in temperature is required to cause the unit to shift to the opposite mode. Once in heating or cooling mode, the Passport control will maintain a 2 degree Fahrenheit differential.

Program COOL only and cooling only will be supplied. The cabin temperature will be maintained at within 2 degrees of set point.

Program HEAT only and heating only will be supplied. The cabin temperature will be maintained within 2 degrees Fahrenheit of set point.

When the heating and cooling is satisfied, the compressor cycles off and the fan returns to low speed. The fan speed will remain constant if MANUAL FAN SPEED has been selected.

Equipment Operation

EARLIER PASSPORT AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL

BASIC OPERATION

Refer to the illustration above for button locations and display functions of the Passport control.

1. POWER BUTTON- Press and release to toggle between the ON and OFF modes.

2. FAN BUTTON- Press to advance through the available fan settings. One through 6 refers to MANUAL FAN SPEEDS. One is the lowest fan speed and six is the highest speed. The letter A indicates automatic fan operation selected.

3. FAN LED INDICATOR- The FAN indicator LED is on when a manual fan speed is selected.

4. DOWN BUTTON- Press and release to display the set point. Press and hold the DOWN button to decrease the set point. Set point is decreased one degree each time the button is depressed.

5. UP BUTTON- Momentarily press and the set point will appear in the display. Press and release the UP button to increase the set point one degree.

6. HEAT MODE LED- The heat mode LED is lit when the HEAT ONLY mode is selected or the unit is in the heating cycle.

7. THREE DIGIT 7 SEGMENT DISPLAY- The inside temperature is displayed when the control is on. The set point is displayed when either UP or DOWN button is pressed. The display also indicates program information and fault codes.

When the control resumes operation after a power interruption all the display LED's will turn on for 1 second. This is a normal operation condition and is referred to as POWER ON RESET.

1. COOL MODE LED- The COOL mode LED is lit when the unit is in a cooling cycle.

DUAL BUTTON FUNCTIONS

UP AND DOWN BUTTONS- Simultaneously press the UP and DOWN buttons while in the program mode to set new program defaults.

POWER & DOWN BUTTONS- Simultaneously press the POWER and DOWN buttons while viewing the service fault history log to clear the fault history log.

POWER & DOWN BUTTONS- Simultaneously press the POWER and DOWN buttons while in the ON mode to enter the MOISTURE mode.

LATER ELITE CONTROL

SPECIAL BUTTON FUNCTIONS

To use the special button functions, you must press and hold a particular button while the controls' AC power is activated.

1. Service History Log- View the service history log by pressing and holding the FAN button while turning on the AC power. Exit the service history log by pressing the POWER button once.
2. Self Test Mode- Press and hold the POWER button while the AC power is applied to enter the self test mode. The self test is used to diagnose problems and test the air conditioning system.
3. View Hour Meter- To view the compressor hour meter, press and hold the DOWN button while applying AC power. Maximum recorded time is 65,536 hours.

MODES OF OPERATION

OffMode

When the Passport Control is in the OFF mode, all control outputs are turned off. Program parameters and user settings are saved in memory. The PROGRAM mode can only be accessed from the OFF mode.

On Mode

When the control is in the ON mode power is supplied to the appropriate outputs and the display indicates the current state of operation. The operating and program parameters resume based on those stored the last time the unit was operating.

Cooling Mode

When COOL mode is selected the cooling systems are operated as required. When the temperature drops below the set point, the system will not automatically switch to the HEAT mode.

Heat Mode

When the heat LED is on, only the heating systems are selected and operated as required. Should the temperature rise above the set point, the system will not automatically switch to the COOL mode.

Automatic Mode

AUTOMATIC mode provides both heating and cooling as required. The HEAT or COOL LED will be lit according to the mode required. Temperature in a given mode is maintained within 2 degrees F. of set point, however a 4 degree F. difference is required to allow the control to change modes.

Once the mode changes temperature will be maintained within 2 degrees F. of set point.

Manual Fan Mode

Press and hold the FAN button during normal operation to select one of the six manual fan speeds available. The fastest fan speed is represented by "6", the slowest represented by "1". MANUAL FAN mode allows the user to select the desired fan speed manually. After choosing the desired fan speed the fan LED will be lit. MANUAL FAN mode is preferred when the room temperature is constantly changing due to varying heat loads.

Equipment Operation

Circulation Mode

When the system is off at the control panel the fan can be used to circulate air only. Press and hold the FAN button when the display is off until the desired speed number appears in the window. Release the FAN button and the fan will run at the selected speed circulating the air without heating or cooling. Press the POWER button once to cancel the CIRCULATION mode and enter the ON mode.

Moisture Mode

While in the ON mode simultaneously press the POWER and DOWN buttons. The first cycle will start in one minute. Every 4 hours, the fan is started and air circulated for 30 minutes. During this time the air temperature is sampled and entered into memory. The cooling cycle is started and continues until the temperature is lowered 2 degrees F. The compressor is allowed a maximum of 1 hour running time to reach the desired temperature. Four hours after the temperature is satisfied or the compressor times out, the cycle is repeated. The "HU1" code is displayed while in the MOISTURE mode.

Program Mode

The PROGRAM mode is used to adjust the systems operating parameters to suit the particular needs of individual users. The PROGRAM mode is also used to taylor the air conditioning system for the most efficient operaiton within an installation. Refer to your Marine Air Systems Manual for detailed instructions on the program mode.

ANTENNA-GPS

The GPS antenna is located on top of the radar arch or optional hard top. The antenna features a built-in position fixing receiver. The helm breaker panel switch labeled GPS/Plotter provides protection for the antenna circuit. The GPS features a filter that compensates for the rolling motion of your boat for clearer course and speed information.

At the top of the antenna dome there is an indicator lighthat tells which tells the status mode of the antenna.

1. Flashing RED indicates the unit is in bootcode, either being upgraded or unable to boot.
2. Flashing ORANGE indicates the unit is running but does not have a fix.
3. Flashing GREEN indicates the unit is running and has a fix.

1 flash every 2 seconds indicates NMEA connection.

1 flash every 4 seconds indicates Sea Talk connection where optional equipment is installed.

BATTERIES

Your vessel uses cranking and deep-cycle batteries. The engine cranking batteries are Group 31A (1000 cold cranking ampres) batteries and the deep-cycle (called house battery)) is a group 8D. All batteries are of the wet cell type and do require periodic inspection and maintenance. The electrolyte and terminals need to be checked for looseness and corrosion. See the maintenance section for further detailed information.

CAUTION

AVOID POSSIBLE EYE DAMAGE AND SKIN BURNS! WEAR GOGGLES & RUBBER GLOVES WHEN WORKING WITH BATTERIES. AVOID CONTACT WITH SKIN, CLOTHING OR EYES. IN CASE OF CONTACT, FLUSH WITH WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES. IF SWALLOWED, DRINK LARGE QUANTITIES OF WATER OR MILK. FOLLOW WITH MILK OF MAGNESIA, BEATEN EGG OR VEGETABLE OIL. GET MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.

Equipment Operation

BATTERY CHARGER

Operation

When power is applied, the charger will enter a “constant current” mode, during which a higher rate of charge is achieved to fully refurbish the batteries. When the batteries are near a full charge, the output current will decrease and the charger will enter a timed absorption mode. After 4 hours in the absorption mode, the output will drop to a float rate to maintain the batteries at a temperature compensated finishing voltage (13.6 VDC @ at 77 degrees Fahrenheit for lead acid batteries).

Overview

Your vessel features a 60 amp automatic battery charger. The battery charger is uses alternating current to function. The charger changes (AC) alternating current to DC. It delivers voltage through the battery isolator which selects the batteries that need charging and then sends regulated voltage through the isolator to the appropriate batteries.

For the battery charger to operate the shore power cords must be installed if at dockside. The generator must be operating if at sea. Locate the battery charger breaker switch on the ship's AC distribution panel. Turn on the breaker to start the charging cycle.

Irregular conditions or loads may cause one or more of the internal fuses to blow. Make sure there is no AC power to the unit before replacing fuses by disconnecting the shore power cords. The battery charge is of the self-limiting type.

BATTERY PARALLEL SWITCH

Once both engines are started the engine alternators will charge the batteries as needed through the battery isolator. As the batteries reach peak charge the battery isolator regulates itself down to a “trickle” charger style output.

Your vessel features a helm mounted battery parallel switch for emergency starting. Both engine cranking batteries are wired to a battery switch, battery parallel solenoid and to the helm push button switch.

For identification purposes the battery parallel solenoid is located in the bilge along the forward engine bulkhead covered by a protective box. See the illustration.

To start an engine with a weak battery simply push the dash push button switch. The switch will automatically start the engine with the weak battery from the other engine's strong battery. Once the engine starts release the push button switch.

Equipment Operation

BATTERY SWITCH PANEL

The battery switch panel is located in the aft section of the cockpit circular seat. The panel consists of 3 battery switches marked port and starboard engine along with the battery marked master which is a “deep cycle” house type battery. This type of battery features heavier plates than standard batteries.

During normal cruising and mooring operations the battery switches should all be in the "on" position. Each battery circuit is protected from the battery switch back to each battery by a 105 amp resettable breaker. Each battery switch features an "ON" and "OFF" selector switch.

When leaving the vessel turn all battery switches to the off position. The automatic bilge pumps will remain energized even though the battery switches are off.

NOTICE

AVOID POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT FAILURE NEVER TURN THE BATTERY SWITCHES TO THE "OFF" POSITION WHEN THE ENGINES ARE RUNNING. DOING SO WILL DAMAGE THE ENGINE ALTERNATORS.

CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS

Carbon Monoxide known as CO is indeed the silent killer. It is a by-product of combustion. CO is invisible, tasteless, odorless and is produced by all internal combustion engines, heating and cooking appliances.

The most common forms of CO on board vessels are the engines, generator and if applicable, propane heating and cooking devices.

Never operate these devices when people are sleeping. A slight amount of CO in the human body over several hours causes headaches, nausea and symptoms close to food poisoning, motion sickness or flu. High concentrations can be fatal within minutes.

The CO detector uses a mini computer to measure and accumulate CO levels. It uses the principle of “time-weighted averaging” the detector monitors CO concentrations, temperature, humidity and time to calculate COHb levels. To explain COHb, our bodies prefer to absorb CO to oxygen and COHb is the absorbed ratio stated in a percent.

If the detector senses high levels of CO the alarm will sound in a few minutes. If lower levels are sensed, the detector will accumulate the data and sound an alarm when the appropriate level is reached. Read and understand the CO owner's manual in the information pouch.

To turn the CO detector system on:

1. Notice the CO breaker on the 12 volt main DC panel. It must be turned off in a two-step sequence. This is for safety purposes. The system should be always left on so you must flip back the switch before you are able to then deactivate the breaker.

The CO circuitry works to its best performance when continually activated plus it accords advanced warning when entering an area high in CO.

1. When power is applied to the detector, the power indicator (top) will flash on and off, followed by the (red) lower alarm indicator flashing off and on as part of a 8-14 minute warm-up period. The green (top) power indicator will indicate a solid green when the unit has reached correct operating temperature.

CO DETECTOR

1. The test cycle should be activated frequently. Simply press the button. When it is released, the (top) power indicator will flash off and the lower indicator light will flash on. Then, the lower indicator will flash off and the upper indicator light will come back on.

The top indicator light being on solid green indicates normal operation. Refer to the CO detectors owner's manual for an explanation of the test cycle indicators.

1. When an alarm sounds take action immediately. The danger alarm indicator flashes red and the horn beeps 4 times, pauses and repeats the cycle. This indicates a rate of 10% COHb has been reached.

a. Operate reset/silence button.

b. Call your emergency services (911)

c. Immediately move to fresh air. Do not re-enter the vessel. until emergency personnel have arrived, aired the vessel out and the alarm is in a normal condition.

d. After following steps a-c and your alarm reactivates within a 24-hour period call a qualified technician to inspect the vessel. Note that the CO detector will clear when the CO concentration has dropped below 70 ppm.

Equipment Operation

COFFEE MAKER

OVERVIEW

♦ Pause n' Serve- Your coffee maker features a pause and serve control which allows you to interrupt the brewing cycle and pour a cup of coffee before the entire carafe is busy brewing.

To restart the brewing cycle, return carafe to the warming plate (make sure it is completely under the warming plate).

- Do not remove the carafe for more than 30 seconds as the basket may overflow.

◆ On Light- Lets you know when the unit is on for safe operation.

◆ Snap-Out Basket- Easy access for filling and cleaning.

◆ Power Button- Controls power to the unit. It is a push type switch with a momentary contact for cycling on and off.

◆ 1-Hour Automatic Shut-Off- As a safety feature the coffee maker includes an automatic shut-off that is programmed 1 hour after brewing. To restart, simply push the switch again.

HOW IT WORKS

1. Open the hinged water reservoir cover at the top of the coffee maker..

2. Fill the glass carafe with the desired amount of cold water only.

3. Empty the carafe into the water reservoir. Close the hinged top. Place the carafe with the lid in place on the warming plate.

4. Some water is absorbed by the filter and coffee grounds with the ending brewed amount slightly less than the starting amount. Fill the carafe slightly fuller so you end up with the desired brewed amount.

HINTS- GREAT TASTING COFFEE ON BOARD

1. The coffee maker need to be clean. Clean it with household vinegar periodically to remove residue and mineral deposits.

2. Alwalys use fresh, cold water in the unit.

3. Keep opened coffee tightly sealed in the refrigerator to promote fresh coffee.

4. Never reuse coffee grounds since it affects the flavor.

5. Oil droplets may appear on the brewing parts and carafe which normally indicates the unit needs cleaning.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1. Read all instructions carefully. Refer to the coffee maker owner's manual for detailed information.
2. Do not touch hot surfaces. Use handles or knobs.
3. Do not place coffee maker, cord or plug in water or any other liquid.
4. Always unplug the unit when not in use and during any cleaning.
5. Do not move the unit from its location in the vessel.
6. Always use cold water only in the coffee maker.
7. Never try to remove hot brewing hardware since scalding could occur.
8. Do not attempt to make any repairs to the unit. Call an authorized service center.

CARAFE DO'S AND DO NOTS

◆ Do not set a hot carafe on a wet or cold surface.
♦ Do not place hot carafe on or near a flammable surface.
♦ Do not use the carafe on a range top or in a microwave oven.
♦ Do not heat carafe when empty.
- Do discard carafe if handle is loose or if the glass is chipped or cracked.
- Do not clean carafe with steel wool pads, scouring powders, or other abrasive materials.

Do follow the cleaning hints in the maintenance chapter.

♦ Do use the lid on the carafe when carrying liquids.

RECOMMENDED COFFEE AMOUNTS

NUMBER OF CUPS		GROUND COFFEE
2	2 Tbsp. (1 scoop)
4	4 Tbsp. (2 scoops)

Equipment Operation

DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL

The DC (12 volt) distribution panel is located at the vessel's forward engine bulkhead. It serves as an overcurrent protection device for various DC (direct current) components and wiring runs.

It protects the instrumentation wiring through the 80 amp dash main breaker. Various stereo components are fused to the 80 amp cabin main breaker along with the main DC distribution panel. Electronic equipment such as radar, plotter and VHF are protected by the electronics 60 amp breaker. The windlass breaker protects the windlass motor installed at the forward deck.

Note: Should a breaker "pop" find the root cause of the malfunction and repair it before resetting the breaker.

Note: The DC distribution panel inside may house various optional equipment fuses that do not have a breaker for in the panel itself. See the maintenance section for the component fuses found here.

LENAPNOITUBIRTSIDCDPMANITARREKAERB
HMA
NIBACMA	80
WINDLASS	90
ELECTRONICS	60
EGHB PUMP	8
HEWA ARM	5
DWROF PMUHBG	8
OERSYREM	10
WERISSUMP PUMP	2

LENPM16
HMA
NIBACMA	80
WINDLASS	90
ELECTRONICS	60
EGHB PUMP	8
HEWA ARM	5
DVR OF PMUHBG	8
OERS YREM	10
WDRIS SUMP PUMP	2

DVD PLAYER

FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION

① POWER

⑩ ENTER

⑲ TV CH+/DVD REW

② DIRECTION BUTTON

⑪ SOURCE

20 PREVIOUS

③ RESET

⑫ AUDIO INPUT RCH

②1 VOLUME+

④ INDICATOR LIGHT FOR DVD

⑬ AUDIO INPUT LCH

② VOLUME-

⑤ INDICATOR LIGHT FOR TV

⑭ VIDEO INPUT

23 AUDIO

⑥ INDICATOR LIGHT FOR AV INPUT

⑮ PLAY/PAUSE

②4 DISPLAY

⑦ IR

⑯ STOP

25 PAL/NTSC

⑧ EJECT

⑰ MEMORY//NEXT

26 SETUP

⑨ SUBTITLE

18 TV CH-//DVD FF

⑳ MUTE

REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION

28 VIDEO OUTPUT1

③1 14PIN SOCKET

29 VIDEO OUTPUT2

③2 TV ANTENNA INPUT

③0 EXTRA REMOTE SOCKET

Equipment Operation

DVD PLAYER OVERVIEW

This manual covers the basics of the DVD player. For more detailed information refer to the DVD owner's manual.

The DVD receiver is compatible with DVD, SVCD, VCD, CD-R/RW, MP3, and DVCD. 2 video outputs are available for the optional stateroom and mid cabin televisions. The auxiliary inputs on the front panel are used for video games, cam corders or I-pods. The unit features anti-shock and anti-moisture mechanisms.

A remote control is standard with the DVD unit. If the optional televisions are installed, the TV volume can be adjusted through the remote control.

For wiring information see the technical chapter.

DVD PLAYER DISC NOTES

Following are some basic tips for handling and cleaning discs.

Dirty, dusty, scratched or warped discs may not play properly.

Do not place strickers or make scratches on discs.

Do not place discs in direct sunlight or in an extremely hot environment to prevent warping.

Store discs in a protective case when not in use.

When cleaning discs, use a soft cloth. If the disc is extremely dirty moisten the soft cloth with isopropyl (rubbing alcohol).

Never use record cleaners since the disc surface could be damaged.

HOW THE DVD PLAYER WORKS

Turning On The DVD Receiver

The DVD receiver is activated by selecting a source such as the DVD, TV, or AUX.

To play a disc, push the POWER button to activate the DVD receiver. The LED display confirms the unit is activated.

Place the disc into the DVD receiver and it will start to play. If you want an external input, push the power button to turn on the set and push the SOURCE button to select external input 1 or external input 2. You can confirm it through the panel LED.

Play/Pause

Press the button to play a disc or pause playback.

Eject

Press the eject button.

Stop

During playing, press the stop button one time; the DVD player memorizes the location where you stopped (press play button to resume playing form the memorized point). Press the STOP button 2 times to stop playing. Then press PLAY button to start playing at the beginning of the disc.

Number Button

Push the buttons to play the wanted track. If the track is from 1 to 9, you can directly press the number. If the track desired is more than 9, you should use #10 button and the other number buttons together to select the track.

Direction & Enter

Press the DIRECTION button to move the cursor to the select item, and then press the ENTER button to confirm it.

Fast Reverse-Fast Forward

Press the button to select fast forward/fast reverse with different speed.

Zoom

Press the ZOOM button during normal playback to zoom a picture; press the DIRECTION buttons to shift the zoom point. Press the button repeatedly to change the magnification levels.

Repeat

When playing a DVD disc, press the REPEAT button to repeat the title or chapter. When playing VCD or CD disc, press the REPEAT to repeat one track. When playing MP3, press the REPEAT button to repeat folder, all disc or one song.

Search

When playing VCD disc or CD disc, press the SEARCH button to select play according to time. When playing DVD disc, press the SEARCH button to select play according to title or chapter.

Audio

During playing a DVD disc, press the button to select audio language. When playing another disc, press the AUDIO button to select audio channel.

P/N

Press the button to select video output (pal/ntsc/auto)

Display

Press the DISPLAY button to show the current playback information on the front panel screen.

Vol + / Vol -

Press the Volume button to display the sound loudness.

Mute

Press the MUTE button to silence the sound.

Setup

Press this button to enter setup menu.

Previous Next

When playing a DVD disc, press PREVIOUS to select the last chapter and press NEXT to access next chapter. When playing an MP3 disc, press PREVIOUS to select the last song, press NEXT to access the next song. When playing a CD or VCD disc, press PREVIOUS to select the last track, press NEXT to select the next track.

Title

For DVD discs, press the TITLE button to enter the title menu, press the DIRECTION buttons and PLAY button to select and play (if it is supported by the discs).

Menu/PBC

Press the MENU button to select PBC on or off during playing VCD disc. Press the MENU button to return boot menu during playing DVD disc.

Subtitle

For DVD disc, press this button to select subtitle.

Equipment Operation

Play MP3 Disc

Load MP3 disc. DVD player reads the disc and displays information on the screen. You can use PREVIOUS button and NEXT button to select playing.

Reset

Press the RESET button to restore the default settings. User needs to press the POWER button to restart the unit after reset.

DVD REMOTE CONTROL- TV FUNCTIONS

Use the illustration to the right to help you identify the remote control functions related to the optional television operation.

Search (A.Memo Button)

For channel memory a desired channel can be automatically and quickly accessed in a quick time by pressing the A. MEMO button on the remote control.

Note: A selected channel may not be selected where the RF signal is weak.

Set-Up (Add/Delete

Use this function to delete or memorize a channel you desire. Select a channel you desire by pressing the NUM-BER button and add or erase the channel by pressing the ADD/DEL button.

Vol+Vol-

Press the button to adjust the sound level.

Mute

Press the MUTE button to select MUTE ON or MUTE OFF.

Up/Down

Select the channel desired by pressing adjust up or down buttons in case the channel is already selected (memorized).

REMOTE CONTROL DESCRIPTION

① POWER
② SOURCE
③ P/N
④ SEARCH(A.MEMO)
⑤ MENU/PBC
⑥ UP/TV CH+
⑦ LEFT
⑧ PREVIOUS
⑨ NEXT
⑩ FAST FORWARD

⑪ FAST REVERSE
⑫ AUDIO
⑬ TITLE
⑭ REPEAT
⑮ DISP
⑯ EJECT
⑰ NUMBER BUTTONS
⑱ ENTER
⑲ SETUP(ADD/DEL)
20 MUTE

② RIGHT
② DOWN/TV CH-
23 VOLUME+
②4 VOLUME-
25 STOP
26 PLAY/PAUSE
⑳ SUBTITLE
28 PROGRAM
29 ANGLE
30 ZOOM

Equipment Operation

DVD PLAYER FUNCTION SETUP

General Set Up

This menu can be used to choose audio language, subtitle language, OSD language, and DVD menu language. You need to set up these items when you begin to play a DVD disc. When you start to play a DVD disc, the DVD player will automatically choose a default language if it contains the language. See the DVD owner's manual for more detailed function operations.

• You can press SETUP button on the remote control to bring up this setup menu.
  ◆ Use UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select the item you desire to change.
  ◆ Use LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to change your setting.
  ◆ Use UP/DOWN arrow buttons to exit the item you want.
  ◆ Use UP/DOWN arrow buttons to page icon and highlight it. Use LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to change setup menu page.
• After finishing your setting, you can choose SETUP to exit and save these modifications into memory.

OSD Language

This item is used to select the OSD (On-screen display) language.

Screen Saver

This item is used to open/close screen saver.

◆ Open: Screen saver will automatically be excuted if the screen keeps still for fifteen minutes.
◆ Close: Screen saver would not be used.

Load Setup Def:

This item is used to restore all menus as manufacturer's defaults, except anything related to the parent control sub item. Use reset.

Language SetUp

◆ Menu: When you start to play a DVD disc, the player will automatically select its default menu language from English, French, Russian, Japanese, or German.
◆ Audio: When you start to play a DVD disc, the player will automatically select its default audio language from English, French, Russian, Japanese, or German.
◆ Subtitle: When you start to play a DVD disc, the default subtitle of this player will automatically be displayed. Languages can then be chosen from English, French, Russian, Japanese, or German.

Video SetUp

◆ TV Screen: The picture that appears on the optional vessel television depends on the picture mode your TV is set to:

4:3 LETTER BOX refers to pictures where black bands appear at the top and bottom.

16:9 WIDE SCREEN for wide screen TV (Full Mode)

- TV Output: This item is used to select a TV signal system to match the television. It includes AUTO, NTSC, and PAL.

◆ Scan Mode: INTERLACED (Interlaced scanning) The default setting of the DVD player is interlaced.

◆ Brightness: This item is used to adjust the BRIGHTNESS of the screen. Press ENTER button to enter the brightness.

Press LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to adjust brightness. Press UP/DOWN arrow buttons to exit.

◆ Contrast: This item is used to adjust the CONTRAST to your screen.

Press ENTER button to begin this item.

Press LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to adjust contrast.

Press UP/DOWN arrow buttons to enter.

◆ Saturation: This item adjusts the saturation level to your screen.

Press ENTER button to enter this item.

Press LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to adjust saturation.

Press UP/DOWN arrow buttons to exit.

Audio SetUp

◆ Channel: For 2 channel stereo select stereo.

For 2 channel left/right select left and right channel.

◆ Digital Output:

Set: Each DVD disc has its own audio output options. You can set up the DVD's Digital Audio Output according to your speaker system.

DOLBY: Select LPCM and BITSTREAM & OFF.

DTS: Select LPCM and BITSTREAM output & OFF.

MPEG: Select LPCM and BITSTREAM output and OFF.

PCM: Select LPCMM 48KHZ and LPCM 96KHZ output.

DIGITAL OUTPUT: Turn digital output ON & OFF. HDCD UP SAMPLE: Turn HDCD up sample ON & OFF.

BACK: Return to AUDIO SETUP MENU.

Security Setup

◆ Parental Control: The parental control is a rating system similar to movies. This assists in controlling the types of DVD that your family watches.

For example, you can edit out violent scenes that are unsuitable for children.

Use UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select PASSWORD item and enter old-4 digit right security code.

Use UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select PARENTAL CONTROL, and use LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons the parental control level.

Press UP/DOWN arrow buttons to exit.

Note: You can not play DVD discs rated higher than the level you selected unless you cancel the parental control function. This feature works with DVD discs that have been assigned a rating.

Equipment Operation

Changing Parental Control Password

◆ Use UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select PASSWORD item.
♦ Enter old 4 digit security code.
- Now enter new 4 digit security code.
◆ Re-enter the new 4 digit security code to confirm it.
◆ Press the UP/DOWN arrow button to exit.

Note: The new 4 digit security code will take effect after closing the SETUP menu. It is necessary to stop the disc playing if you want to enter the PREFERENCES MENU ITEM. In PREFERENCES MENU ITEM, the system default password is 0000.

DOOR-CABIN ENTRY

Keep the cabin door completely closed when the boat is moving. When docked, the cabin entry door can be held open by flipping the door stop 180 degrees. This will prohibit the door from accidentally closing, a great feature with children on board. The built-in screen door functions independently on its own track. With the screen door closed and the hatch screens in place cross ventilation can move air throughout the boat more rapidly. The finer mesh screen helps keep insects out.

CABIN ENTRY STEP DRAIN

DOOR-TRANSOM

Equipment Operation

FLOORING- CHERRY & HOLLY

Cherry & holly flooring is featured in the salon. This type of wood flooring adds durability and a planked nautical appearance to the cabin. Be careful not to drop objects on the flooring or to scratch the surface. Use mild soap and water with a soft cloth for spot cleaning. Periodically use a wood floor cleaning kit you can purchase at a box store. Do not use any harsh cleaners or abrasives on the floor.

The transom door must be closed at all times the boat is moving. To enter and exit the cockpit, lift the door by the stainless steel framework. Momentarily hold the door up while you pull it toward the bow.

There is a safety mechanism in the door hinge that causes resistance if the door is pushed aft when the door is properly closed.

HATCHES

The hatch features a locked position for sealing the cabin shut during cruising and for general security.

To lock the hatch first grab the handle and turn it so it engages the side of the seal ring as shown.

Push the lock mechanism to engage the handle in the locked position.

To unlock the hatch pull the handle away from the seal ring (in line with adjuster) or 90 degrees from the locked position.

To open the hatch make sure the hatch is unlocked. Then push the rod up and lock at desired angle with the adjuster.

A screen is provided to protect against insects. Secure the screen by turning the tabs at a 90 degree angle to the screen framework.

ISOLATOR-GALVANIC

Typical Hookup for Dual 30 Amp/120 Volt Inlets

OVERVIEW

The galvanic isolator connects to your electric/bonding (Green wire) between shore ground and the vessel's grounding system. The purpose of the galvanic isolator is to allow the bonding system to be isolated electrically from the dock and other vessels at low voltages (below 1.4 volts) but to keep it connected to the shore power ground at high voltage potentials. This is so the vessel's zincs protect only the vessel they are on. You may have heard the term "zinc saver" a term often used to describe a galvanic isolator

There is a monitor that connects to your vessel's electrical/bonding system for about 20 seconds out of a day. Each time the vessel is connected to AC shore power or the monitor is activated by the push to test button, or every 3 hours after that the monitor performs a series of tests.

1. Polarity test
2. Ground wire continuity and galvanic isolator integrity test.

The test results are visible on the display panel which is mounted inside the AC/DC distribution panel.

Equipment Operation

The monitor and the galvanic isolator are located behind the AC/DC panels. Never try to access these parts with the shore power cords connected. Remove the shore power cords from the receptacles.

OPERATION

NOTICE

IN THE EVENT OF AN INDICATION OF REVERSE POLARITY, AN ISOLATOR FAILURE, OR GROUND WIRE FAILURE, DISCONNECT THE AC SHORE POWER CORD IMMEDIATELY!

Automatic Operation

Be sure the main AC panel breaker is in the “off” position. Attach both ends of the vessel shore power cord, one end to the dockside receptacle and the other to the shore power inlet receptacle.

Turn on the dockside breaker. The presence of AC on the inside side of the main breaker panel will activate the monitor. After the monitor cycles through its self-test it will display a condition of polarity, the shore ground wire, and condition of the galvanic isolator. The test sequence takes about 20 seconds. The monitor will repeat this test automatically every 3 hours.

A “FAIL” indication on the remote display of either the ground wire or the galvanic isolator is an indication of an ungrounded bonding system and should be considered a very dangerous situation. Because of the possibility of high AC voltages on the bonding system it is highly recommended that the vessel’s shore power cord be disconnected until a professional can determine and repair the fault.

Manual Operation

To operate the monitor manually press the "TEST" button on the display panel, wait for the test to complete (about 5 seconds) and read the displayed test results.

What The Tests Results Mean

The display consists of 6 LED's, three green and three red. The three green LED's should be lit to show proper polarity, good ground wire continuity, and a functioning galvanic isolator.

A reverse polarity red LED indicates that the line and neutral wires are reversed. Unless you have had recent electrical work done on your shore power system, this is typically a fault of the dockside receptacle. This needs to be corrected as it enhances the chance of accidentally having 120 volts AC on the vessel's grounding system.

Note: Because of how the ground wire testing is done, a reverse polarity hook-up will also show a “FAIL” to the ground wire. By rectifying the reverse polarity, the ground wire problem will most likely not be an issue.

Ground Wire Red

Indicates that the ground wire (green wire) is not connected to the shore correctly. The fault can be caused by the green wire being open or disconnected, by a bad connection at the galvanic isolator, shore power cord plug, dockside plug or even the metal tip of the plug itself not making good contact. It can also be caused by the ground wire not being connected to the neutral back on the dockside receptacle.

Galvanic Isolator Red

Indicates a failure of the galvanic isolator. The galvanic isolator can fail as a short or an open circuit. A short will no longer isolate the boat in a low DC manner and will increase erosion of your zincs. An open circuit eliminates AC ground protection to your bonding system which could be life threatening. If the galvanic isolator shows a “FAIL” it should be replaced immediately.

LIGHTING- CABIN

Your vessel features various styles of lighting such as ceiling, hanging locker, reading and flourescent types. Each lighting fixture requires specific bulb types and replacement procedures. Read and understand the following warning.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY! HALOGEN & XENON LIGHT BULBS DEVELOP EXTREMELY HOT TEMPERATURES. NEVER TRY TO REMOVE A HOT LIGHT BULB SINCE IT COULD CAUSE SKIN BURNS. WAIT FOR THE BULB TO COOL BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE IT.

Note: The bulbs listed in the following pages can be ordered through a Regal dealer or may be available at speciality lighting or box stores.

CEILING LIGHTS

The ceiling lights use halogen bulbs which are known for their visibility. They radiate extremely high temperatures close to the fixture. Never touch a hot fixture or bulb.

To change a ceiling light bulb follow these steps:

◆ Using a sharp object such as a small slotted screw-driver, slide it between the lens cover and the light base.

◆ Pull down on the lens cover to access the bulb.

◆ Remove the defective bulb.

◆ Replace the bulb with a 12 volt, #10WXM halogen type.

◆ Line up the space in the lens cover/body with the notched area of the light base.

◆ Push the prongs on the lens cover/body upward until they seat into the light base.

Equipment Operation

HANGING LOCKER LIGHTS

To change a hanging locker light bulb follow these steps:

◆ Remove the lens cover from the lamp base. There is a tab on the bottom of the lens cover. Push the lens cover at this point to remove the lens cover.

◆ Remove the defective bulb.

◆ Replace the bulb with a 12 volt halogen lamp type #563.

◆ Reinstall the lens cover by snapping it in place.

READING LIGHTS

To change a reading light bulb follow these steps:

◆ Remove the lens cover from the lamp base by turning the lens cover counterclockwise slightly and while in this position pull the lens cover out at the lamp body notches.

◆ Remove the defective bulb.

◆ Replace with a 12 volt halogen bulb # 10WXH.

◆ Reistall the lens cover by first lining it up with the notches on the lamp body. Let the lens cover/body enter the notched area and then lock it in place by turning it clockwise.

FLOURESCENT GALLEY LIGHT

To change the flourescent light bulb follow these steps:

◆ Remove the lens cover from the lamp base by grasping the lens on the far side. With both hands pull up on the lens to detach it.

◆ Turn the bulb until both tabs on the bulb line up vertically. Pull down on the bulb to release it from the lamp body at both ends.

◆ Replace the bulb with a Thin Lite Cool White # F8T5-CW-HG.

Equipment Operation

MICROWAVE OVEN

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1. Read all the instructions before using the microwave.

2. Some products such as whole eggs and sealed containers such as closed glass jars are able to explode and should not be used in the microwave.

3. Do not use corrosive chemicals or vapors in this oven.

4. Use close supervision when used by children.

5. Do not overcook food. Keep a close watch on the oven if paper, plastic or other combustible materials are placed in the oven to facilitate cooking.

6. Remove wire twist-ties from products before placing in oven.

7. If materials in oven should ignite, keep oven door closed and turn the breaker off at the ship's AC panel.

8. Do not use the microwave for storage purposes.

9. Do not leave anything in an unused microwave.

10. Do not service the microwave yourself. Call an authorized service center. See the microwave owner's manual for a listing of repair stations.

11. Liquids such as coffee, tea & water are able to be heated beyond the normal boiling point without appearing to be boiling. Liquids such as this could boil over when the container is disturbed or a utensil is inserted in the liquid.

a. Do not overheat liquids.
b. Do not use straight-necked containers with narrow necks.
c. Stir the liquid before & halfway through cooking it.
d. After heating let the container stand a few minutes.
e. Use care when inserting utensils in the liquid.

1. Do not heat oil or fat for deep-frying. Oil temperatures are difficult to control in a microwave oven.
2. Pierce skins of foods with heavy skins before cooking such as potatoes, whole squash, apples and chestnuts.
3. After heating baby feeding bottles the temperature should be checked before serving to infants.
4. Cooking utensils may become hot because of heat transferred from the food. Use of potholders is recommended.
5. Do not cover or block any openings of the microwave.
6. Use only thermometers specifically designed for microwave ovens.
7. When cleaning the microwave use mild, nonabrasive soaps or detergents applied with a soft cloth. Do not use any metal based scrubbers or harsh cleaners.

UTENSILS GUIDE

This section covers recommended utensils, ones with limited use for short periods, and those that should not be used in the microwave.

Recommended Utensils

◆ Microwave browning dish- Use to brown the exterior of small items such as steaks, chops, or pancakes. Follow the browning dish instructions.

◆ Microwaveable plastic wrap- Use to retain steam. Leave a small opening for some steam to escape and avoid placing it directly on the food.

◆ Paper towels and napkins- Use for short periods of heating and covering; these absorb excess moisture and prevent splattering. Do not use recycled paper towels, which may contain metal and may ignite.

◆ Glass and glass-ceramic bowels & dishes- Use for heating and cooking.

◆ Paper plates & cups- Use for short periods of heating and covering. Do not use recycled paper, which may contain metal and could ignite.

◆ Wax paper- Use as a cover to prevent spattering.

♦ Thermometers- Use only lthose labeled “Microwave safe” and follow all directions. Check the food in several places. Conventional thermometers may be used on microw food once the food has been removed from the oven.

Equipment Operation

Limited Use

♦ Aluminum foil- Use narrow strips of foil to prevent overcooking of exposed areas. Using too much foil can damage your oven. Keep a distance of 1" between aluminum foil and the cavity.
♦ Ceramic, porcelain, and stoneware- Use these if they are labeled “Microwave Safe”.
♦ Plastic- Use only if labeled “Microwave Safe”. Other plastics can melt.
◆ Straw, wicker and wood- Use only for short-term heating such as warming dinner rolls for a few seconds; baskets and bowls may be flammable.

Not Recommended

◆ Glass jars & bottles- Regular glass is too thin to be used in the microwave. It can shatter and cause injury and damage.
◆ Paper bags- These are a fire hazard, except for popcorn bags that are designed for microwave use.
◆ Styrofoam plates and cups- These can melt and leave an unhealthy residue on the food.
♦ Plastic storage and food containers- Containers such as margarine tubs can melt in the oven.
◆ Metal utensils- These can damage your microwave oven. Remove all metal before cooking.

COOKING TECHNIQUES

Stirring

Stir foods such as casseroles and vegetables while cooking to distribute heat equally. Food at the outside of the dish absorbs more energy and heats more quickly, so stir form the outside to the center. The oven will turn off when you open the door to stir your food.

Arrangement

Arrange unevenly shaped foods, such as chicken pieces or chops, with the thicker, meatier parts toward the outside of the turntable where they receive more microwaveable energy. To prevent over cooking, place delicate areas, such as asparagus tips, toward the center of the turntable.

Sheilding

Shield food with narrow strips of aluminum foil to prevent overcooking. Areas that need shielding include poultry wing tips, the ends of poultry legs, and corners of square baking dishes. Use only small amounts of foil. Larger amounts can damage your oven.

Turning

Turn foods over midway through cooking to expose all parts to microwave energy especially with roast type foods.

Standing

Let foods stand to complete cooking, especially foods such as cakes and whole vegetables. Roasts need this time to complete cooking in the center without overdcooking the outer areas. Stir all liquids when cooking is complete. Let liquids stand a moment before serving. When heating baby food, stir well at removal and test the temperature before serving.

Adding Moisture

Microwave energy is attracted to water molecules. Food that is uneven in moisture content should be covered or allowed to stand so that the heat disperses evenly. Add a small amount of water to dry food to help it cook.

NOTICE

TO CHECK A DISH FOR SAFE MICROWAVE COOKING PLACE THE EMPTY DISH IN THE OVEN AND MICROWAVE FOR 30 SECONDS ON HIGH. A HOT DISH IS NOT USABLE.

Touch to start or stop cooking.

Reset

Clears all previous settings if touched before cooking starts.

Beeps During Oven Settings

One beep- Oven accepts the entry.

Two beeps- Oven does not accept entry, check and try again.

Setting The Clock

Touch the CLOCK pad.

Use the number pads to enter the correct time. You must touch at least three numbers to set the clock (one for hour and two for minutes).

Touch the CLOCK pad again.

Note: This is a 12 hour clock. When the microwave is first plugged in or when power resumes after a power interruption, the display will show ENTER CLOCK TIME, if you prefer to not have the clock displayed, touch RESET pad. You can check the clock time during cooking by touching the CLOCK pad.

Setting The Oven Timer

Touch the TIMER pad.

Enter the amount of time you want to count down by touching the number pads. Digit time is in minutes and seconds and set left to right. Set one digit (a 4 for 4 seconds) or up to four digits (2405 for 24 minutes, 5 seconds).

Touch START/STOP PAD.

Note: Time countdown can be viewed in display for 3 seconds before clock or cooking time is returned to display.

Touch TIMER and then touch RESET to cancel TIMER during timing process.

Setting Cooking Times & Power Levels

One stage cooking- Use the number pads to set a cooking time. You can set a cooking time from one second to 99 minutes and 99 seconds. If you are setting a time greater than 1 minute, your must enter numbers for both minutes and seconds. For example, to set 20 minutes, enter 2,0,0,0.

If you want to set a power level other than 100% power, touch POWER, then use the number pads to enter the power level. You can set the power level from 1 to 9. Touch START/STOP to start cooking.

TNESE SLEVELREWOP
Number Pad	% Of Power
9	90
8	80
7	70
6	60
5	50
4	40
3	30
2	20
1	10

Two stage cooking- Some recepies require different stages of cooking at different temperatures.

1. Set stage 1: Follow steps 1 and 2 in "One stage cooking". Do not touch START/STOP pad.

2. Set stage 2: Touch COOK pad then enter proper cooking time and (lower) power level.

Most 2-stage recipes use lower power for second stage.

1. Touch START/STOP pad.

Note: After time has elapsed, 4 beeps sound and END appears indisplay. Touch the RESET pad or open oven door to clear END before starting another coooking function.

Setting "Speed Defrost"

Touch SPEED DEFROST pad.

Enter desired defrosting time by touching correct number pads. Digital timer sets minutes and seconds from left to right so a single digit can be set (5 for 5 seconds) or up to 4 digits (2405 for 24 minutes 5 seconds).

Note: After time has elapsed four beeps sound and END appears in display. Touch RESET pad or open door to clear END before starting another cooking function.

After setting SPEED DEFROST, oven can be programmed to automatically switch to one or two-stage cooking.

PEROTSTIGIDELGNISESEHTESUcooking, follow steps above. Before touching START/STOP pad, touch COOK pad, enter time and power level. Then touch START/STOP pad.

B. For speed defrost and two-stage cooking, follow steps above. Before touching START/STOP pad, enter two-stage cooking programs.

Setting "Cook By Weight"

Touch COOK BY WEIGHT pad.

Enter one-digit code by touching the correct number pad. Enter weight.

Touch START/STOP PAD.

Note: Your microwave oven makes cooking easy. You set the type and weight of food, and the oven automatically sets the cooking time and power level.

"COOK BY WEIGHT" CODE
Code	Type	Max. Weight
1	Beef	5 lb. 16 oz.
2	Mutton	5 lb. 16 oz.
3	Pork	5 lb. 4 oz.

Equipment Operation

Meat must be defrosted and at refrigerated temperature. Weight must be in pounds and ounces.

Ounce weights less than 10 must be preceded by a O. If label gives weight in pounds only, change the fraction of a pound to ounces using the table below.

Turn food over when oven beeps twice.

Touch START/STOP pad to resume defrosting.

After total defrosting time, 4 beeps sound and END appears in the display. Touch RESET or open oven door to clear END before starting another cooking function.

Let meat stand a few minutes before carving.

Setting "Safety Lock"

The safety lock feature prevents unsupervised operation by children.

To set, press and hold RESET pad for 3 seconds, LOCK indicator lights.

To cancel, press and hold RESET pad for 3 seconds, LOCK indicator light goes off.

To Stop The Oven While It Is Operating

Touch START/STOP pad.

You can restart oven by touching START/STOP pad.

UGTouchRESET to erase all instructions.

Open the door.

You can restart the oven by closing the door and touching START/STOP pad.

0 Note: Oven stops operating when door is opened.

OTDNSECNUO
Fractions Of A Pound	Ounces
30abL
900	1
501	2
101	3
702	4
482	5
043	6
644	7
354	8
965	9
.60 to .65	10
.66 to .71	11
.72 to .78	12
.79 to .84	13
.85 to .90	14
.91 to .97	15
above .97	go to next even

ABOUT "QUICK COOK" SETTINGS

“QUICK COOK” allows you to cook or reheat food automatically without entering power level or time. When setting “quick cook”, check visual guide on pad for correct setting. Three “quick cook” settings allow you to cook several amounts of the same food.

These include the "FROZEN DINNER", "BAKED POTATO" and "BEVERAGE".

After you touch these pads, ENTER AMT appears in the display. In each “Quick Cook” category, smaller size food is set by touching the pad once. One dot below picture of smaller-size food signifies one touch of the pad.

The large size can be set by touching the picture pad twice. Two dots below the picture of large size food signifies to touches of the pad.

Setting "Popcorn"

Touch POPCORN pad.

CODE and 2:50 appears in the display. POPCORN automatically sets cooking time for a 3 to 3 1/2 oz. bag of microwave popcorn.

Touch START/STOP pad.

Note: To reset POPCORN time: Tap POPCORN pad twice. ENTER TIME appears in display. Touch number pads to enter minutes and seconds. Touch START/STOP pad. This new cooking time will remain whenever you touch the POPCORN pad until you reset it.

Setting "Baked Potato"

For 4 to 6 oz. potatoes:

Touch BAKED POTATO pad once.

Enter number of potatoes by touching number pads from 1 to 4. Cooking times for small-medium potatoes are as follows:

1 potato: 4 min. 20 sec.

2 potatoes: 8 min. 10 sec.

1. potatoes: 12 min. 00 sec.

2. potatoes: 16 min. 00 sec.

Touch START/STOP pad.

For the large 8 to 10 oz. potatoes:

Tap BAKED POTATO twice.

Enter number of potatoes by touching number pads from

1 to 4. Cooking times for large potatoes are as follows:

1 potato: 6 min. 25 sec.

2 potatoes: 12 min. 00 sec.

3 potatoes: 17 min. 00 sec.

4 potatoes: 22 min. 00 sec.

Touch START/STOP pad.

Setting "Pizza"

Reheating a slice of leftover pizza (or 2 thin slices):

Touch PIZZA pad once. CODE and 1:20 (1 min. 20 sec.) appears.

Touch START/STOP pad.

Setting "Beverage"

For 5 to 7 oz. coffee cups:

Touch BEVERAGE pad once.

Enter number of cups by touching number pads from 1 to 4. Cooking times for coffee cups are as follows:

1 cup: 1 min. 30 sec.

2 cups: 2 min. 50 sec.

3 cups: 4 min. 10 sec.

4 cups: 5 min. 30 sec.

Touch START/STOP pad.

For the larger 10 to 12 oz. coffee cups:

Tap BEVERAGE pad twice.

Enter number of mugs by touching number pads 1 to 4.

Cooking times for coffee mugs are as follows:

1 mug: 2 min. 40 sec.

2 mugs: 4 min. 30 sec.

3 mugs: 6 min. 20 sec.

4 mugs: 8 min. 10 sec.

Touch START/STOP pad.

Equipment Operation

Setting "Frozen Dinner"

Microwaving one or two small (7 -9 oz.) frozen dinners: Touch FROZEN DINNER pad once.

For 1 entree, just touch START/STOP. For 2 entrees, touch the number pad "2". Cooking times for small-size entrees are as follows:

1 entree: 5 min. 55 sec.

2 entrees: 11 min. 00 sec.

Touch START/STOP pad.

Microwaving one large (10 to 12 oz.) frozen dinner:

Tap FROZEN DINNER pad twice.

For 1 entree, just touch START/STOP. For 2 entrees touch the number pad "2". Cooking times for large entrees are as follows:

1 entree: 12 min. 00 sec.

2 entrees: 20 min. 00 sec.

Touch START/STOP pad.

Setting "Reheat"

Touch REHEAT pad. CODE and 4:10 (4 min. 10 sec.) appears.

Touch START/STOP pad.

Note: This last setting lets you reheat a dinner plate of chilled leftovers with good results.

MONITOR-WATER/WASTE

To read either the fresh water or waste water monitor panel the breaker on the main DC panel must be activated.

The fresh water monitor displays the amount of potable water in the system. There are sensors located in the tank itself that send a signal to the display panel when activated. Press the top portion of the toggle switch and read the gauge display.

The waste portion of the display shows the amount of waste water in the holding tank. There are sensors located in the tank itself that send a signal to the display panel when activated. Press the bottom portion of the toggle switch for determine the tank level via the gauge display.

This portion of the system needs to be monitored periodically to prevent the system from being over full which could cause equipment damage and/or a possible leak in the vessel.

If the waste system is determined to be full it can be emptied by connecting a marina pump-out hose to the waste fitting located on the deck. The pump out device will actually suck out all the waste much like a vacuum cleaner operates. This is most frequently and best way to eliminate the vessel's weight.

An alternative method which can be used in International waters only is to pump the waste overboard using a seacock. Notice the key switch portion of the monitor. If your vessel is equipped with an overboard discharge pump (macerator) you can use it to grind up the waste and send it through the hull bottom. Make sure the waste seacock is open and you are legal to pump overboard. Turn the macerator breaker on and then energize the monitor panel key switch.

Be sure to turn the seacock off and secure it with a tie wrap after the pump-out cycle.

PORTLIGHTS

Portlights provide cabin cross ventilation. To open turn the latches port or starboard until the portlight cover clears. Lift the black handle to control the amount of fresh air. To close shut the portlight cover and turn the latches.A screen is provided to protect against insects.

Equipment Operation

RANGE

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Before using your ceramic cook top range read the following instructions and safety information.

1. Do not attempt to repair the range yourself. Contact a local service center or return the unit to the factory. If the unit needs to be removed make sure the breaker is turned off on the A/C distribution panel before the range is removed.

2. Do not use water to extinguish a grease fire. Smother fire with dry chemical or foam-type extinguisher. Store an extinguisher where it can be quickly reached in an emergency.

3. Use only dry potholders. A wet potholder on a hot surface can produce burns from steam. Never use towels as a potholder.

4.Do not use the cook top to heat the cabin.

1. Never touch the burners, or surrounding areas. These areas could cause serious burns.

2. Do not wear loose fitting garments while using the cook top.

3. Do not store items of interest to children either above or near the cook top, children climbing on the cook top to reach items could be seriously injured.

4. Do not leave the cook top unattended with the heat setting on high heat. Boil over may create smoke or a fire. The utensil handle should be turned inward to prevent accidental spillage. The utensil handle should not extend over adjacent heating elements.
5. Pot retention devices such as a railing should be used to secure the utensil to the cook top. They are available through your dealer or directly from Kenyon.
6. Do not use the cook top if the glass is broken.
7. Never let electrical cords cross the stove surface.

! WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY! NEVER ALLOW SMALL CHILDREN NEAR THE COOK TOP UNATTENDED!

! WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY! OBSERVE ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WHILE USING THE COOK TOP.

OVERVIEW

Your Kenyon cook top features an easy-to-use surface with 6" burners that stays clean and looks new with minimum effort. A series of electric heating coils are suspended beneath the ceramic glass. The design of the burners directs the heat up through the glass providing efficient cooking.

The glass surrounding the burners remains much cooler even while cooking on high settings.

There are thermal limiters on each burner to keep the element from overheating. The limiters will reduce the wattage to the element if a pot boils dry, if no utensil is uesd at all or if an improper utensil is used.

The burner controls are designed to provide infinitely variable control of the heat output by alternately switching on and off the electric element at different cycles.

Excellent control of very small heat input is available at low dial settings, while still being able to deliver full output at high heat settings.

GENERAL OPERATION

Cooking Utensils

Your existing utensils will probably work fine on your ceramic glass cook top. Here are a few tips to get the most out of your utensils used on the cook top.

The utensils should be slightly concave or designed with a flat bottom. Although glass and other types of cookware can be used, metal cookware with thick bottoms will generally conduct the best heat.

Use utensils of the correct diameter only. The base of the pot or pan should be about as wide as the cooking zone on which it is being used- not much wider or narrower. This will provide maximum heating efficiency and give you the shortest boiling times.

Make sure that both the cook top panel and the bottom of your utensil are clean and dry before using. Doing so will help prevent scratches and stains.

Knobs And Indicator Lights

Your cooking area controls are called infinite by name. This type of control has an unlimited selection of heat settings. The control settings begin at low and increase heat output as you turn the knob clockwise.

There are several lights which provide an indication of burner operation and hot surfaces (safety light). The lights are located next to the control knobs. When the control is in the “on” position a red light is lit indicating which burner is energized.

For your safety there is a

“hot” safety light. When lit, this indicates that some part of the cooking surface is too hot to touch. Do not place articles other than cooking utensils on the cooking surface while this “hot” indicator

Refer to the maintenance section for cleaning information.

Do not use a sponge or dish towel to wipe off the cook top. This may leave a film of detergent or other debris that could cause discoloration the next time the cook top is heated.

Do not let anything that melts such as plastics, aluminum foil, or sugar come in contact with your cook top surface when it is hot. Should something melt onto the surface immediately move it to a cool area of the cook top with a razor blade scraper, and then remove it from the cook top.

Equipment Operation

REFRIGERATOR

OVERVIEW

Your refrigerator is designed to operate in the tough marine environment. It can withstand a heel angle up to 30 degrees for a short time which makes it very adaptable for marine use. A few tips regarding the refrigerator:

1. The refrigerator runs on DC current. Turn on the breaker at the ship's AC/DC service panel before activating the refrigerator.
2. Unnecessary opening of the refrigerator door will increase power consumption.
3. Keep the inside of the unit clean and dry.
4. Remove any water that may collect on the shelf under the freezer compartment.
5. When leaving the vessel for extended periods of time s turn the breaker off at the ship's service panel. Remove any food from the unit. Prop the door open slightly before leaving the vessel. This helps air out the fridge.
6. Note: The unit will keep food cold 5-6 hours without any DC power providing the food is chilled already.
7. It is important that the fridge compressor/condensor is well ventilated and that cooler air can enter from the bottom and warm air can exit the top of the unit. Never block any of the ventilation areas.

TEMPERATURE SETTING

Your refrigerator is equipped with a manually controlled infinitely-variable thermostat.

Turn the thermostat clockwise to lower the temperature and counterclockwise to raise the temperature and to activate the on-off switch. A slight spring resistance is noticeable at the on-off switch.

DEFROSTING

The refrigerator requires defrosting when the frost layer is around 1/8".

To defrost do the following:

1. Turn the thermostat off.
2. Store the food and beverages from the refrigerator in a iced down cooler.
3. Do not use sharp metal objects to remove the accumulated ice. Let the fridge deice under normal cabin temperatures.
4. Restart the fridge after the unit is completely defrosted. Be sure to clean and dry the unit.
5. Empty the drip tray below the freezer compartment as often as needed in the defrosting cycle.

SHOWER SUMP PUMP

The gray water system is made up of any sink, shower, or in some cases equipment run-off water. The system flows through the shower sump pump, then to a manifold collector located in the mid cabin area and finally overboard via a thru-hull fitting. The different hoses routed to and from the pump are indicated below.

Manifold Collector

The grey water manifold collector exits all used water exiting from the shower sump pump which includes several sources. The automatic float switch pumps grey water to the manilold. It is located behind the mid cabin port bulkhead.

Normally it would not require any special service unless there was blockage somewhere in the system or a hose leak developed at the manifold. All hoses exit the vessel outside through the port aft thru-hull fitting.

Equipment Operation

SLEEPER/SOFA-SALON

Eating Table Set-Up

The salon sofa becomes the designated eating area using the cockpit table. In addition, the sofa utilizes a lounger feature and is convertible to a sleeper.

To use as an eating area install the long leg normally stored under the sofa cushion. Attach the cockpit table and tighten up the adjuster knob on the underside of the table.

Sleeper Conversion

To use as a sleeper follow these steps:

1. Remove the cushions to access the bed framework.
2. Pull up on each of the legs until they are vertical.
3. Pull up on the aft bed framework and it will hinge up and over on to the floor. Ensure that all legs are locked in a vertical position.
4. Reinsert the cushions to complete the sleeper conversion.

Sleeper/Mid Cabin

The mid cabin features storage under the cushions and an access to equipment such as the water heater, fresh water pump/filter and the Vacuflush® vent filter.

To use the sleeper:

1. Lift the cushion to the right of the cabin entrance.
2. Notice the hinged cushion underneath with the steel bar. Pull this cushion up and over to lock in place under the left cushion.
3. Reinstall the right top cushion and the sleeper is complete.

Sofa Lounger

To use as a sofa lounger follow these steps:

1. Pull on the activator latch. As you pull the foot rest will pop out and up.
2. To close the foot rest, simply push down with a quick motion of the legs until you hear it snap in place.
3. The latch is located in the cabinet beside the sofa.

Equipment Operation

SEAT-AFT BENCH

The aft bench seat is fully collapsible into the aft deck. To set up the seat do the following:

1. Lift up on the seat backrest with a brisk motion to free the backrest ball from the deck socket retainer. See illustration A.

2. Flip up the backrest to expose the seat framework and legs.

3. Pull each leg up toward the seat outside until they seat in the open position. Ensure they are fully extended. See illustration B and C.

4. Pull the framework toward the bow and the seat bottom will pivot into place. Recheck the legs for a full extension.

5. To break down the seat grasp the seat bottom in the middle and lift it with one hand while pulling the seat backrest up. This will allow the seat to pivot back into the deck.

6. Push each leg inward until they lay flat.

7. Push the seat backrest to the aft with a brisk motion to secure the ball into the socket which holds the seat in place against the deck. See illustration D.

STEREO/CD PLAYER

The Kenwood stereo features 50 watt power, CD player, with Mirage speakers. The CD player accepts all types of CD's except the 3" size.

Basic stereo features are covered in this manual. For more detailed information, refer to the stereo manufacturer's manual in the owner's information packet.

OVERVIEW

GENERAL FEATURES

Power

To energize the stereo, first turn on the stereo breaker located on the main DC panel. This is turn supplies 12 volts to the stereo unit.

Next, press the SRC button.

To deactivate the unit, press the SRC button and hold it down for 1 second.

Selecting the Source

Press the SCR button. The display will show:

"Tuner" for AM-FM

“CD CH” for disc player

"Media" for iPod

"Sirius" for Sirius satellite radio

Volume

Turn the volume knob clockwise to increase the volume. Turn the volume knob counterclockwise to decrease the volume.

To rapidly turn down the volume, press the ATT button. Each time the button is pressed the Attenuator turn on and off. When its on, the ATT indicator blinks.

Equipment Operation

System Q

When playing different types of music this feature let's you recall the best sounding preset.

Select the source to set by pressing the SRC button.

Select the sound type by pressing the Q button. Each time the button is pressed the sound setting changes.

Sound Setting Display

Natural "Natural"

Rock "Rock"

Top 40 "Top 40"

Pops "Pops"

Jazz "Jazz"

Easy "Easy"

Each setting value is changed with the speaker setting.

First, select the speaker type with the speaker setting.

When the value is set up by Audio Control "user" displays.

Audio Control

Select the source for adjustment by pressing the SRC button.

Enter the audio control mode by pressing the VOLUME knob.

Select the audio item for adjustment by pressing the VOLUME knob. Each time the button is pressed the items that can be adjusted switch as shown below:

Adjustment Item Display Range

Base level Bas L -8 to +8

Mid level Mid L -8 to +8

Treble level Tre L -8 to +8

Balance Bal Left 15-Right 15

Fader Fad Rear 15-Front 15

Exit the audio control mode by volume control mode.

Audio Setup

Setting the sound system up, such as volume offset and loudness.

Select the source for adjustment by pressing the SRC button.

Enter the audio setup mode by pressing the VOLUME knob for at least 1 second..

Select the audio item for adjustment by pressing the VOLUME knob for at least 1 second.. Each time the button is pressed the items that can be adjusted switch as shown.

Adjustment Item Display Range

Voume Offset V-OFF -8 to +0

Loudness Loud ON-OFF

Volume offset- Sets each source's volume as a difference from the basic volume.

Loudness- Compensates for low and high tones during low volume. When loudness is on, loud indicator is on.

Exit audio setup by pressing the volume knob for 1 sec.

Speaker Setting

Fine tuning so that the System Q value is optimal when setting the speaker type.

Enter stand-by by pressing the SRC button. Select the standby display.

Enter speaker setting mode. Press the volume knob.

Select the speaker type by turning the volume knob.

Each time you turn the knob, the setting alternates between the settings shown below:

Speaker Type	Display
OFF	SP Off
For 5 by 4 speaker	SP 5/4
For 6 by 9 speaker	SP 69/6
For OEM speaker	SP OEM

Exit speaker setting mode by pressing the volume knob.

Switching Display

Changing the information displayed.

Enter Switching Display mode by pressing the control knob

for at least 1 second

“DISP SEL” is displayed.

Select the display item

Push the control knob toward >> or >>.

In Tuner source

Information

Display

Frequency "Freq"

Clock "Clock"

In CD & External disc source

Information

Display

Disc Title "D Title"

Track Title "T Title"

Track Number & Play Time "P-Time"

Clock "Clock"

In Audio file source

Information

Display

Song Title & Artist Name "Title"

Album & Artist Name "Album"

Folder Name "Folder"

File Name "File"

Track Number & Play Time "P-Time"

Clock "Clock"

In Standby/Auxiliary input source

Information

Display

Source Name "SRC Name"

Clock "Clock"

Exit Switching Display mode by pressing the control knob. If the contents of the information cannot be displayed, Play Time frequency is displayed.

Album name cannot be displayed in WMA file.

Dimmer Control

You can lower the brightness of the display by using the dimmer function.

Press the DIM button for at least 1 second.

Each time you press the button for 1 second, the Dimmer control turns ON and OFF.

When the Dimmer control is ON, "DIM ON" is displayed.

Theft Deterrent Faceplate

The faceplate of the unit can be detached to deter theft.

Remove the faceplate by pressing the Release button.

The faceplate unlocks, allowing you to detach it.

The faceplate is a precision piece of equipment and can be damaged by shocks or jolts.

Keep the faceplate in the faceplate case when deattached.

Do not expose the faceplate or its case to direct sunlight or excessive humidity or heat. Keep them away from dusty environments and splashing water.

Install the faceplate by aligning the projections on the unit with the grooves on the faceplate.

Push the faceplate in until it clicks. The face plate at this point is locked in place.

Telephone Mute

The audio system automatically mutes when a call comes in.

When a call comes in

"Call is displayed"

The audio system pauses.

Equipment Operation

Listening to the audio during a call

Press the SRC button.

The "Call" display disappears and the audio system comes back on.

When the call ends

Hang up the phone.

The "Call" display disappears and the audio system comes back ON.

To use the TELE feature, you need to hook up the MUTE wire to your telephone using a commercial telephone accessory. Refer to connection wires to terminals in the Kenwood stereo manual.

TUNING FEATURES

TUNING

Selecting the station.

First select the tuner source by pressing the SRC button. Select the tuner display.

Select the band.

Push the CONTROL knob towards FM or AM.

Each time you push the knob toward FM, it switches between FM1, FM2, or FM3 bands.

Tune up or down a band.

Push the CONTROL knob towards<< or >>.

During reception of stereo stations the "ST" indicator is energized

Tuning Mode

Choose the tuning mode.

Press the AUTO button.

Each time you press the auto button, the TUNING mode alternates between the modes as shown below.

Tuning Mode

Display

Operation

Auto Seek "AUTO1" Auto station

search

Preset station seek "AUTO 2 Search in the or

der of the stations

in the Preset

memory

Manual "MANUAL" Normal manual

tuning control

Station Preset Memory

This feature permits you to insert stations in memory.

Select the band.

Push the CONTROL knob towards FM or AM.

Select the frequency to put in memory.

Push the CONTROL knob towards >> or <<.

Put the frequency in the memory

Press the desired 1-6 button for at least 2 seconds.

The preset number display blinks 1 time.

On eace band, 1 station can be put in the memory on each 1-6 button.

Auto Memory Entry

This feature permits you to insert stations with good reception in memory automatically.

Select the band for AUTO MEMORY ENTRY.

Push the CONTROL knob towards FM or AM.

Open auto Memory Entry by pressing the AME button for at least 2 seconds.

When 6 stations that can be received are put in the memory Auto Memory Entry codes.

Preset Tuning

This feature permits you to recall stations in memory.

Select the band.

Push the CONTROL knob towards FM or AM.

Recall the station.

Press the desired 1-6 button.

Equipment Operation

PLAYING CD'S & AUDIO FILES

CD/AUDIO FILES/EXTERNAL DISC CONTROL FEATURES

Playing CD'S & Audio Files

When a disc is inserted press the SRC button.

Select the "CD" display.

When a CD is inserted, the "IN" indicator is lit.

Pause & Play

Press the CONTROL knob.

Each time you press the knob, the audio pauses or plays.

Eject the CD

Press the UP button. Refer to page 7 of the Kenwood manual to review, section covering MP3 & WMA for the audio file by models you can play.

Playing External Discs

This feature permits playing discs with the optional stacked CD changer. An amplifier and woofer are a part of this upgrade package.

Press the SRC button.

Select the display for the disc player you want to play.

Display examples:

Display Disc Player

"CD CH" CD Changer

"MD CH" MD Changer

Pause & Play

Press the CONTROL knob.

Each time you press the knob, the audio pauses or plays. Disc 10 is played as "0".

The functions that can be used and the information that can be displayed will differ depending on the external disc players being connected.

Fast Forwarding & Reversing

To fast forward hold down the >> button with the CONTROL knob. Release the button at this point to play the CD.

To reverse hold down on the << button with the CONTROL knob. Release the button at this point to play the CD.

Track/File Search

This feature searches for a song on the disc or in the audio file folder.

Push the CONTROL knob towards >> or<<.

Disc Search/File Search

This feature searches for a song on the disc or in the audio file folder.

Push the CONTROL knob towards FM or AM.

Disc Search/Folder Search

This feature selects the disc set in the disc changer or the folder recorded on the audio file media.

Push the CONTROL knob towards FM or AM.

Direct Track/File Search

Doing a Track/File search by entering the track/file number.

Enter the track/file number.

Press the number buttons on the remote control.

Do track/file search.

Press the << or >> button.

Cancelling a direct track/file search by pressing the >II button.

Direct Disc Search

This feature performs a disc search by entering the disc number.

Enter the disc number.

Press the number buttons on the remote control.

Do disc search.

Press the (+) or (-) button.

Press the >II button to cancel the direct disc search.

Track File/Disc/Folder Repeat

This feature replays a song either from a disc in the disc changer or the audio file you are listening to.

Press the "REP" button.

Each time you press the button, the Repeat Play alternates between the modes shown below:

In CD & external disc source:

Repeat Play Display

Track Repeat "TRACK REP"

Disc Repeat (In Changer) "DISC REP"

Off "REP OFF"

In audio file source:

Repeat Play Display

File Repeat "FILE REP"

Folder Repeat "FOLD REP"

Off "REP OFF"

Scan Play

This feature permits playing the first part of each song on the disc or audio folder you are listening to and searches for the song desired.

Start scan play by pressing the SCAN button.

"Trac SCN"/"FILE SCN" is displayed.

Release it when the song you want to hear is played.

Press the SCAN button.

Equipment Operation

Random Play

Play all the songs on the disc or file folder in random order.

Press the "RDM" button.

Each time you press the button, the Random Play turns ON or OFF.

When the RANDOM mode is ON, "DISC RDM"/"FOLD RDM" is displayed.

When you push the CONTROL knob toward >> the next random song starts.

Folder Select

Select quickly the folder you want to hear.

Enter Folder Select mode.

Press the F.SEL button.

“FOLD SEL” is displayed.

During select mode the folder information is displayed on the screen.

Select the folder level.

Push the CONTROL knob toward FM or AM.

With the FM of the control knob, you move 1 level down and with the AM of the control knob, 1 level up.

Selecting a folder in the same level.

Push the CONTROL knob toward >> or <<.

With the << of the CONTROL knob, you move to the previous folder, and with the >> of the CONTROL knob, to the next folder.

Returning to the top level.

Press the 3 button.

Decide the folder to play.

Press the CONTROL knob.

The folder select mode releases, and the audio file in the folder being displayed plays.

To cancel the folder select mode, press the FSEL button.

Text/Title Scroll

Scrolling the displayed CD text, audio file text or MD title.

Push the CONTROL knob toward FM for at least 2 seconds.

MENU SYSTEM

MENU SYSTEM FEATURES

Exit Menu mode.

Press the MENU button.

Note: For activating and deactivating security codes, manual clock adjustment, Sirius display and Auxiliary input information see the Kenwood owner's manual.

Menu System

This feature permits setting beep sounds during operation, etc, functions.

The basic operation of the menu system is outlined here. For more expanded information, see the Kenwood stereo manual.

Enter Menu mode.

Press the MENU button for at least 1 second.

"MENU" is displayed.

Select the Menu item.

Push the CONTROL knob towards FM or AM.

When you want to set the beep sound, select the "BEEP" display.

Set the Menu item.

Push the CONTROL knob toward << or >>.

When you select "BEEP" each time you push the knob it alternates between "BEEP ON" or BEEP OFF". Select one of them as the setting.

Equipment Operation

REMOTE CONTROL

INSTALLING BATTERIES

Loading And Replacing Batteries

Use two "AA" batteries.

Slide the cover aft on the remote case with a downward pressure to remove the cover.

Install the batteries with the batteries polarity as shown above. On the remote case the polarity should be marked for proper battery installation.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY! STORE UNUSED BATTERIES OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN TO PREVENT ACCIDENTIAL SWALLOWING OF BATTERIES.

NOTICE

DO NOT SET THE REMOTE CONTROL IN HOT PLACES SUCH AS ABOVE THE HELM TO PREVENT OVERHEATING!

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Basic Operations

VOL buttons

Used to adjust the volume.

SRC button

Each time this button is pressed, the source alternates.

For the source alternating order refer to selecting the source.

ATT button

Turns the volume down quickly.

When the button is pressed again, the volume returns to the previous level.

Audio Control

AUD button

Selects the audio item to be adjusted

VOL buttons

Adjusts the audio item.

Refer to audio control for the correct operation procedures.

In Tuner Source

FM/AM buttons

Selects the band.

Each time you press the FM button, the band alternates between the FM1, FM2, and FM3 bands.

/>> buttons

Turn up or down band.

(0)-(9) buttons

Press buttons 1 to 6 to recall preset stations.

In Disc Source

/<< buttons

Used forward and backward to track files.

+/- buttons

Used forward and backward between disc/folders

II button

Each time you press the button, the song pauses or plays.

(0)-(9) buttons

When in direct track/file search and direct disc search, enters the track/file/disc number.

In Sirius Tuner Source

FM button

Selects the preset band.

<</>> buttons

Searches up or down channels.

(0)-(9) buttons

Press buttons 1-6 to recall preset channels.

Direct/OK button

Enters and cancels the direct access tuning mode.

Refer to the instruction manual of SIRIUS satellite radio tuner for the direct assessing of the tuning function.

Equipment Operation

STEREOCONTROLS AT WHEEL

Earlier Version

Basic stereo controls are mounted at the steering wheel which permits the captain's hands to remain on the wheel while making selected adjustments to the stereo system.

To operate use the following instructions:

1. To turn the unit on press the volume up and seek up buttons simultaneously.
2. To turn the unit off press the volume down and seek down buttons simultaneously.
3. To turn the volume up press the up arrow.
4. To turn the volume down press the down arrow.
5. To find a station up range press the seek up button.
6. To find a station down range press the seek down button.

In Disc Mode:

To play the next selection press the seek up button.

To play the last selection press the seek down button.

STEREO REMOTE

Besides the steering wheel stereo controls, there is a stereo remote normally mounted at the transom door walk-thru. It features controls that permit basic operation of stereo functions away from the main unit. You can control volume, stations, and modes of operation such as the CD player.

Later Version

TELEVISION SYSTEM OVERVIEW

ANTENNAS

The antenna switch includes two buttons which choose the proper antenna for dockside and at sea operation.

1. At dockside, most often the shore antenna switch should be activated. For this switch to work the TV cord needs to be plugged in the vessel's transom electrical inlet and run to the dockside connection. With the shore antenna pressed the televisions use the local marina signal.

1. At sea, the ship's antenna switch should be activated which in turn uses a signal from the saucer shaped antenna mounted on the radar arch. In addition to the switch being activated, turn on the TV antenna breaker

at the main DC control panel. Also, this operation works well in temporary moorings or at a marina without complete hook-ups.

1. To deactivate either antenna switches, simply depress the switch all the way and release.

TELEVISION BASICS

All televisions sets on board your vessel are powered by the same TV breaker located on the 12 volt main DC distribution panel. Each television can be operated through the DVD player and each set can view the same DVD and hear the audio or operate independently.

The television flat screen monitor located in the salon (if equipped) is connected to various audio and video connections for DVD enhancement. The unit has been pre-programmed at the factory. It features a non-glare screen and remote control.

If your vessel features the E-display plotter the information on the plotter can also be viewed on the salon television flat screen monitor.

This manual will point out the basic operation of the LCD (flat screen) salon television monitor. For detailed data on any of the sets on board refer to the manufacturer's manual located in the owner's packet.

Equipment Operation

TYPICAL MONITOR CONTROL PANEL

The following information applies to all LCD flat screen television monitors. Refer to the antenna switch information on the opposite page for the proper connection depending where the vessel is moored.

The vessel DVD player has been pre-wired at the factory through the monitor and therefore is ready to view and play using the flat screen monitor. Also, a VCR, video camcorder, digital camera and home video games can be used with the system. Refer to the illustrations on the following pages and/or the television owner's manual for further in-depth information.

To operate the television(s) follow these recommendations:

1. For docked vessels, first make sure the shore power locker reverse polarity indicator is not lighted and the AC shore power inlet breaker is energized.
2. Check for line voltage at the ship's AC panel. We recommend turning on the converter to keep the batteries charged while the vessel is docked.
3. Check the antenna switch for the shore position.
4. At the 12 volt DC distribution panel check for line voltage. Flip the television switch/breaker to the "on" position. The monitor is now is ready to be activated by the remote control.
5. For vessels at sea, use steps 3 and 4 but activate the antenna ship's position.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

! CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK!

DO NOT REMOVE COVER

AT TELEVISION REAR.

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING

TO QUALIFIED PRESONNEL ONLY.

NOTICE

WHEN LEFT FOR EXTENDED PERIODS

TURN THE TELEVISION BREAKER

TO THE OFF POSITION

TO HELP PREVENT

POWER SURGES OR LIGHTNING

DAMAGE.

NOTICE

IF TV FEELS COLD TO THE TOUCH

THERE MAY BE A SMALL FLICKER

WHEN IT IS ACTIVATED.

THIS IS NORMAL.

NOTICE

THE FLUORESCENT LAMP USED IN

THIS TELEVISION CONTAINS A SMALL

AMOUNT OF MERCURY.

DISPOSE OF THIS PRODUCT

IN AN ENVIRONMENTAL FRIENDLY

MANNER USING LOCAL GUIDELINES.

LG TELEVISION FRONT CONTROLS

Equipment Operation

LG TELEVISION REAR CONNECTION CHOICES

LG TELEVISION DVD CONNECTIONS (1 TO 3 TV'S)

Equipment Operation

LG TELEVISION DIGITAL CONNECTIONS

DTV Setup

- To watch digitally broadcast programs, purchase and connect a digital set-top box.

Connections

Connect the digital set-top box video outputs to the COMPONENT (Y, PB, PR) jacks and connect the digital set-top box audio outputs to the AUDIO jacks. (or, Connect the set-top box with the D-sub output socket to PC INPUT socket on the set and audio cable of the set-top box to the PC SOUND. (15LC1R•))

Viewing Setup

1. Turn on the digital set-top box. (Refer to the owner's manual for the digital set-top box.)
2. Use the INPUT button on the remote control to select Component or RGB-DTV (15LC1R•).

PC Setup (15LC1R• only)

- After setup, be sure to select RGB-PC source on TV.

Connections

1. Set the monitor output resolution on the PC before connecting to the TV.
2. Connect the TV to the PC with the PC cable.
3. Connect the PC audio output to the TV's PC SOUND input.

Viewing Setup

1. Turn on the PC.
2. Use the INPUT button on the remote control to select RGB-PC.

Monitor Display Specifications

MODE	Resolution	Horizontal Frequency(kHz)	Vertical Frequency(Hz)
VGA	640x480	31.4	60
SVGA	800x600	35.1	56
	800x600	37.8	60
XGA	1024x768	48.3	60

NOTES

a. For optimum picture quality, use standard 1024x768@60Hz computer output at a 60Hz refresh rate. Using other formats (VGA, SVGA, etc.) or refresh rates may result in reduced picture quality. (To change the computer video output format, please refer to the operating manual for the computer you are using).
b. If the message "Out of range" appears on the screen, adjust the PC output to a format listed in the 'Monitor Display Specifications' chart above.
c. The synchronization input form for Horizontal and Vertical frequencies is separate.

DPM (Display Power Management) mode

If the PC goes to power saving mode, the monitor automatically switches to DPM mode. If you don't use the PC cable provided, DPM mode may not work.

LG TELEVISION-INVERTER

Since the television flat screen monitors are powered at 120 volts AC an inverter is used to change DC to AC voltage.

Depending on which television options were purchased by the customer there may be 3 different inverters used in selected locations.

For the salon television an inverter is found at the ceiling behind the head light muff. To access the inverter the muff ceiling light trim rings and light bulbs must be removed to find the muff screws.

The forward stateroom television inverter is located under the ceiling light muff at the front of the head ceiling. The screws can be accessed by removing the light trim rings and light bulbs.

The mid cabin television inverter is located in the portside storage locker for easy accessibility.

There is a 15 amp fuse installed in the male socket connector to protect the wiring. Normally there is no service required of the inverter unless there is a lightning equipment strike.

There is a low-battery warning inside the inverter that can sound a beep indicating low DC battery voltage. If the ship's batteries continue to discharge the inverter will automatically turn itself off.

INVERTER PARTS DESCRIPTION

Equipment Operation

REMOTE CONTROL

A remote control is provided to operate the multi-functions of the television monitor system.

A few recommendations on the remote control:

1. Do not expose the remote control to shock. Do not expose the control to liquid, or place the control in high humidity.
2. Do not expose the remote control to direct sunlight. The heat could deform the control itself.
3. The remote control eye may not work properly if it is under direct sunlight or strong lighting. If these conditions exist, change the angle of the monitor or the lighting or move the control closer to the monitor.

REMOTE CONTROL BATTERIES

CAUTION RISK OF CHEMICAL LEAKAGE AND/OR EXPLOSION! FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS BELOW FOR THE SAFE USE OF BATTERIES.

1. Be sure to follow the correct polarity of the batteries when loading them into the remote control. Both the batteries and the remote control provide directions for correct installation. If unsure refer to the monitor owner's manual.
2. Since different types of batteries possess their own characteristics do not mix different types of batteries.
3. Do not mix new and old batteries. Old batteries have the potential to leak chemicals and the can weaken the power of the new batteries when mixed together.
4. When batteries become weak remove them from the remote to help stop any chemical leakage that may occur.
5. Leaking battery chemicals can cause a skin rash. Wipe with a cloth.
6. If the vessel is not expected to be used for an extended period of time remove the batteries from the remote control.
7. If the remote control should show signs of chemical leaks or corrosion wipe any chemical off with a dry cloth and use a emery board to clean any corroded terminals.

REMOTE CONTROL KEY PUSH BUTTONS

- When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.

Installing Batteries

• Open the battery compartment cover on the back side and insert the batteries with correct polarity.
• Use two 1.5V batteries of AAA type. Don't mix used batteries with new batteries.

Equipment Operation

TV Operation Overview

1. First, make all equipment connections. Plug the AC Adapter into the TV, then plug the AC Adapter into a power outlet. At this time, the TV is switched to standby mode.
2. In standby mode, press the POWER, TV, CH (▲,▼), INPUT or number button on the remote control or ON/OFF, CH (▲,▼), INPUT button located on the TV to turn the TV on.
3. Select the viewing source by pressing INPUT.
4. Note: See page 18 if you have not auto programmed the TV to receive channels in your local broadcast area.
5. After viewing, press the POWER button on the remote control or ON/OFF located on the TV. The TV reverts to standby mode.

NOTE

- If you want to turn the TV off, press the on/off button located on the TV. If you intend to be away on vacation, disconnect the power plug from the wall power outlet.

Menu Language Selection

- The menus can be shown on the screen in the selected language. First select your language.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the SPECIAL menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Language.
3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select your desired language. From this point on, the on-screen menus will be shown in the language of your choice.
4. Press the ENTER button to save.

LG TELEVISION-CHANNEL MENU OPTIONS

Memorizing the Channels with EZ scan

- For Auto program to work, the programming source must be connected to the TV and the TV must be receiving programming signals either over-the-air or from a cable-type service provider.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the CHANNEL menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select EZ Scan.
3. Press the ▶ button to begin the channel search.

- Wait for auto program to complete the channel search cycle before choosing a channel. The TV scans for over-the-air channels and then channels provided by a cable service.

NOTES

• When the channel search is complete, use the ▲ / ▼ buttons to review the memorized channels.
• If you press the MENU or EXIT button in auto programming, the function will stop and only channels programming up to that time will remain.
• Auto program function can memorize only the channels which are being received at that time.

Add/Delete Channels with Manual Program

- You can manually include or erase individual channels.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the CHANNEL menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Manual program.
3. Press the ▶ button and then use ◀ / ▶ button to select a channel you want to add to memory or erase.
4. Press the ▼ button and then use ◀ /▶ button to select Memory (add) or Erase (delete).
5. Press the ENTER button to save. The current channel is added to Memory or Erased from the channel list.

The current channel number is displayed.

Adjust frequency with Manual Program

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ /▼ button to select the CHANNEL menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Manual program.
3. Press the ▼ button to select Fine and then use ◀ /▶ button to adjust frequency from -50 to 50.
4. Press the ENTER button to save.

The current frequency is displayed.

Equipment Operation

LG TELEVISION-CHANNEL MENU OPTIONS (CONTINUED)

Favorite Channels Setup

- Favorite Channel lets you quickly tune in up to 8 channels of your choice without having to wait for the TV to scan through all the in-between channels.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the CHANNEL menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Favorite channel.
3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the first favorite channel position.
4. Use the ◀ /▶ button to set the desired channel number for first favorite channel.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 to memorize other channels.
6. Press the ENTER button to save.

• To tune to a favorite channel, press the FAV button repeatedly. The 8 favorite channels appear on the screen one-by-one

LG TELEVISION-PICTURE MENU OPTIONS

Picture Menu Options

EZ Video

- This function adjusts the TV for the best picture appearance.

1. Press the VIDEO button repeatedly to select the picture appearance setup option as shown below.

• You can also adjust EZ Video in the PICTURE menu.
• Clear, Optimum and Soft are preset for good picture quality at the factory and cannot be changed.

ACC (Auto Color Control)

- Selecting a factory setting colour set.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the PICTURE menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select ACC.
3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select User.
4. Press the ▶ button and then ▲ / ▼ button to select a color setting on the ACC menu: Cool, Normal, Warm or User (Red, Green, Blue).
5. Press the ENTER button to save.

Manual Picture Control

- You can adjust picture contrast, brightness, color, sharpness and tint to the levels you prefer.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ /▼ button to select the PICTURE menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select EZ Video.
3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select User and then press the ◀ button.
4. Use ▲ / ▼ button to select the desired picture option (Contrast, Brightness, Color, Sharpness, Tint).

5. Use the ◀ /▶ button to make appropriate adjustments.

6. Contrast, Brightness, Color, and Sharpness are adjustable from 0 to 100.
   • Tint is adjustable from R 50 to G 50.

7. Press the ENTER button to save.

Equipment Operation

LG TELEVISION-SOUND MENU OPTIONS

Sound Menu Options

EZ Audio

• This function lets you enjoy the best sound without any special adjustment because the TV selects the appropriate sound option based on the program content.
• Use the AUDIO button to select the appropriate sound setup as shown below.

- You can also adjust EZ Audio in the SOUND menu.

Equalizer Adjustments

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the SOUND menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select EZ Audio.
3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select User.
4. Press the ▶ button and then use ◀ / ▶ button to select the band you want to adjust. Then, use ▲ / ▼ button to adjust the band level.
5. Press the ENTER button to save.

AVL (Auto Volume Leveler)

- AVL maintains an equal volume level automatically even if the channel is changed.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the SOUND menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select AVL.
3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to to select On or Off.
4. Press the ENTER button to save.

LG TELEVISION-SOUND MENU OPTIONS CONTINUED

Sound Menu Options continued

Sound Balance

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ /▼ button to select the SOUND menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Balance.
3. Press the ▶ button and then use ◀ / ▶ button to adjust the sound balance.

• Balance is adjustable from Left 50 to Right 50.

1. Press the ENTER button to save.

Stereo/SAP Broadcasts Setup

• The TV can receive MTS stereo programs and any SAP (Secondary Audio Program) that accompanies the stereo program, if the broadcaster transmits an additional sound signal as well as the original one.
• Mono: The primary language is heard from left and right speakers. Signal mode is mono.
• Stereo: The primary language is heard from left and right speakers. Signal mode is stereo.

• SAP: The secondary language is heard from left and right speakers.

• Press the MTS button repeatedly.

• Select mono sound mode if the signal is not clear or in poor signal reception areas.
• Stereo, SAP mode are available only if included on the broadcast signal.

Equipment Operation

LG TELEVISION-TIMER MENU OPTIONS

Timer Menu Options

Auto Clock Setup

• The time is set automatically through from a PBS broadcast signal.
• The PBS channel signal includes information for the correct time and daylight saving time.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the TIMER menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Clock.
3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Auto.
4. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the time zone for your viewing area. Your choices are: Auto, E.S.T. (Eastern Standard Time), C.S.T. (Central Standard Time), M.S.T. (Mountain Standard Time), P.S.T. (Pacific Standard Time), Alaska, and Hawaii.
5. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to set PBS channel.
6. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to set D.S.T. (Daylight Savings Time) Auto, Off or On, depending on whether or not your viewing area observes Daylight Savings Time.
7. Press the ENTER button to save.

Manual Clock Setup

- If the time on the clock is incorrect, reset the clock manually.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the TIMER menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Clock.
3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Manual.
4. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to set the hour.
5. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to set the minutes.
6. Press the ENTER button to save.

LG TELEVISION-TIMER MENU OPTIONS CONTINUED

Timer Menu Options continued

On/Off Timer Setup

• Timer function operates only if current time is set.
• Off-Timer function overrides On-Timer function if they are set to the same time.
• The TV must be in standby mode for the On-Timer to work.

• If you don't press any button within 2 hours after turning on the TV with the On-Timer function, the TV will automatically revert to standby mode.

• Press the MENU button and then use ▲ /▼ button to select the TIMER menu.

• Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Off timer or On timer.
• Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to set the hour.
• Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ /▼ button to set the minutes.

• For On timer function only:
  Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ /▼ button to set the channel at turn-on. Then, press the ▶ button and then use ▲ /▼ button to set the turn-on sound level.

• Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ /▼ button to select On or Off.

- Off: Off timer/On timer will not work. On: Off timer/On timer are active.

1. Press the ENTER button to save.

Sleep Timer Setup

- The Sleep Timer turns the TV off at a preset time.

1. Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to select the number of minutes. First the 'O' --- Min.' option appears on the screen, followed by the following sleep timer options: 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120, 180, and 240 minutes.
2. When the number of minutes you want is displayed on the screen, press the ENTER button. The timer begins to count down from the number of minutes selected.
3. To check the remaining minutes before the TV turns off, press the SLEEP button once.
4. To cancel the Sleep Timer, press the SLEEP button repeatedly until '∅> — Min.' appears.

Auto off

- If Auto off is active and there is no input signal, the TV switches to Standby mode automatically after 10 minutes.

1. Press the menu button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the TIMER menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Auto off.
3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ /▼ button to select On or Off.
4. Press the ENTER button to save.

Equipment Operation

LG TELEVISION-SPECIAL MENU OPTIONS

Special Menu Options

Closed Captions

Closed captioning is a process which converts the audio portion of a television program into written words which then appear as subtitles on the television screen. Closed captions allow viewers to read the dialogue and narration of television programs.

Using Closed Captions

Captions are the subtitles of the dialogue and narration of television programs. For prerecorded programs, program dialogue can be arranged into captions in advance. Its possible to caption a live program by using a process called real-time captioning, which creates captions instantly. Real-time captioning is normally done by professional reporters using a machine shorthand system and computer for translation into English.

Captioning is an effective system for the hearing-impaired, and it can also aid in teaching language skills.

• The picture at left shows a typical caption.

Caption Tips

• Not all TV broadcasts include closed caption signals.
• Sometimes TV stations broadcast four different caption signals on the same channel. By selecting From CC1 to CC4, you can choose which signal you view. CC1 is usually the signal with the captions, while Another mode might show demonstration or programming information.

• Your TV might not receive caption signals normally in the following situations.

• Poor reception conditions are encountered:

- IGNITION:

Picture may flutter, drift, suffer from black spots, or horizontal streaking. Usually caused by interference from automobile ignition systems, neon lamps, electrical drills, and other electrical appliances.

- GHOSTS:

Ghosts are caused when the TV signal splits and follows two paths. One is the direct path and the other is reflected off tall buildings, hills or other objects. Changing the direction or position of the antenna may improve reception.

- SNOW:

If your receiver is located at the weak, fringe area of a TV signal, your picture may be marred by small dots. It may be necessary to install a special antenna to improve the picture.

1. An old, bad, or illegally recorded tape is being played.
2. Strong, random signals from a car or airplane interfere with the TV signal.
3. The signal from the antenna is weak.
4. The program wasn't captioned when it was produced, transmitted, or taped.

LG TELEVISION-SPECIAL MENU OPTIONS CONTINUED

Special Menu Options continued

Select Mode

- Inputs can be set for TV, Video or RGB-PC mode. Video mode is used when a video cassette recorder (VCR), or other equipment is connected to the set.

1. Press the MENU button and then ▲ / ▼ button to select the SPECIAL menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then ▲ / ▼ button to select Input.
3. Press the ▶ button and then ▲ / ▼ button to select TV, Video, Component, RGB-DTV or RGB-PC.

• Video: VCR connected to the VIDEO IN socket of the set.
- Component: DVD connected to the COMPONENT sockets on the back of set.
- RGB-DTV: SET TOP connected to the PC INPUT and PC SOUND socket of the set. (15LC1R*)
- RGB-PC: PERSONAL COMPUTER connected to the PC socket of the set. (15LC1R*)

1. Press the ENTER button to save.

Key lock

• The TV can be set up so that it can only be used with the remote control.

• This feature can prevent unauthorized viewing.

• Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the SPECIAL menu.

• Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Key lock.
• Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select On or Off.
• Press the ENTER button to save.

- In Key lock 'On', if the set is turned off, press the On/Off, CH ▲ / ▼, INPUT button on the set or POWER, CH ▲ / ▼, TV, INPUT or NUMBER button on the remote control.

Equipment Operation

LG TELEVISION-SPECIAL MENU OPTIONS CONTINUED

Power indicator

- Use this function to set the power indicator on the front side of the product to On or Off. If you set On at any time, the power indicator will automatically be turned on. Although you select Off, set front light turns on for a moment when the set turns on.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the SPECIAL menu.

2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Power indicator.

3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select On or Off.

4. Press the ENTER button to save.

Caption/Text

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ /▼ button to select the SPECIAL menu.

2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Caption/Text.

3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select caption: CC1, CC2, CC3, CC4, Text1, Text2, Text3, or Text4.

• CAPTION

The term for the words that scroll across the bottom of the TV screen; usually the audio portion of the program provided for the hearing impaired.

• TEXT

The term for the words that appear in a large black frame and almost cover the entire screen; usually messages provided by the broadcaster.

1. Press the ENTER button to save.

- Use the CC button repeatedly to select Caption.

Captions

- Select On from Captions menu in order to adjust the Caption/Text menu.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the SPECIAL menu.

2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Captions.

3. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select On or Off.

4. Press the ENTER button to save.

LG TELEVISION-LOCK MENU OPTIONS

Lock Menu Options

Parental Control can be used to block specific channels, ratings and other viewing sources.

The Parental Control Function (V-Chip) is used to block program viewing based on the ratings sent by the broadcast station. The default setting is to allow all programs to be viewed. Viewing can be blocked by the type of program and by the categories chosen to be blocked. It is also possible to block all program viewing for a time period. To use this function, the following must be set:

1. Ratings and categories to be blocked.
2. Set a password
3. Enable the lock

V-Chip rating and categories

Rating guidelines are provided by broadcast stations. Most television programs and television movies can be blocked by TV Rating and/or Individual Categories. Movies that have been shown at the theaters or direct-to-video movies use the Movie Rating System (MPAA) only.

For Movies previously shown in theaters :

Movie Ratings :

• G and Above (general audience)
• PG and Above (parental guidance suggested)
• PG-13 and Above (13 years and older)
• R and above (restricted)
• NC-17 and Above (18 years and older)
• X (adult)
- Unblocked

If you set PG-13 and Above: G and PG movies will be available, PG-13, R, NC-17 and X will be blocked.

For Television programs including made-for-TV movies:

General TV Ratings:

• TV-G and Above (general audience) (individual categories do not apply)
  • TV-PG and Above (parental guidance suggested)
  • TV-14 and Above (14 years and older)
  • TV-MA (mature audience)
  • Unblocked

Children TV Ratings:

• TV-Y and Above (youth) (individual content categories do not apply)
• TV-Y7 (youth, 7 years and up)
- Untlocked

Content Categories:

• Dialog - sexual dialogue (applies to TV-PG and Above, TV-14)
  • Language - adult language (applies to TV-PG and Above, TV-14 and Above, TV-MA)
  • Sex scenes - sexual situations (applies to TV-PG and Above, TV-14 and Above, TV-MA)
  • Violence (applies to TV-PG and Above, TV-14 and Above, TV-MA)
  • F Violence - fantasy violence (applies only to TV-Y7)

For Canadian English/French language rating system:

Canadian English language rating system:

• C and Above (Children)
• C8+ (8 years and older)
• G and Above (General programming. Suitable for all audiences.)
• PG and Above (Parental guidance suggested)
- 14+ (Viewer 14 years and older)
• 18+ (Adult programming)
- Unblocked

Canadian French language rating system:

• G and Above (General)
• B ans+ (8 years and older)
• 13 ane+ (13 years and older)
• 16 ans4 (16 years and older)
• 18 ans+ (Adults only)
- Unblocked

Equipment Operation

LG TELEVISION-LOCK MENU OPTIONS CONTINUED

Lock Menu Setup

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the Special menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select Parental. Then, press the ▶ button.

- If Lock is already set, enter the password requested.

- The TV is set with the initial password "0-0-0-0".

1. Setting Lock on/off:

Press the ▲ / ▼ button to select Lock on/off.

Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select on or off.

1. Set password:

Press the ▲ /▼ button to select Set password.

Press the ▶ button and then enter a four digit password. Enter it again when requested.

1. Press the ▲ / ▼ button to select type of blocking to be set.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select type of ratings to block.

- Age block, and Content block, and Canadian (option) menus, also have sub menus. So, repeat steps 4 and 5 in the sub menu, to set the types of blocking and ratings.

- Aux block function is not available for use in Component, RGB-DTV, RGB-PC mode.

LG TELEVISION-SCREEN MENU OPTIONS (15LCR ONLY)

Screen Menu Options (15LC1R* only)

- After setup, be sure to select RGB-PC source to see the PC image on TV screen.

1. Press the MENU button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select the SCREEN menu.
2. Press the ▶ button and then use ▲ / ▼ button to select desired item.
3. Use the ◀ / ▶ button to make appropriate adjustments.

• H-position/V-position

Adjusts picture left/right and up/down.

The adjustment ranges of H-Position is 0\~100.

(Based on the input mode, the adjustment range may change.)

- Clock

Minimizes any vertical bars or stripes appearing on the screen background.

The adjustment range is 0\~100. (Based on the input mode, the adjustment range may change.)

- Phase

Remove any horizontal noise and clear up or sharpen the character images.

The range adjustment is 0\~100. (Based on the input mode, the adjustment range may change.)

- Auto-configure

Automatically adjusts the screen position, clock, and clock phase.

(The displayed image will disappear for a few seconds while Auto-configuration is in progress.)

- Reset

Returns to the default settings programmed at the factory; default settings cannot be changed.

1. Press the ENTER button to save.

Equipment Operation

TOILET-VACUFLUSH® HEAD

Vacuum Toilet- The Vacuflush® toilet operates in a different way from other marine toilets. The system uses around 16 ounces per flush plus a simple vacuum to complete each flush which is a substantial water savings over other systems. The toilet is connected to a pressurized fresh water supply. Fresh water is the key to an odor-free bathroom compartment. Selected other systems use intake water from wherever the vessel is sitting which may carry an odor. The Vacuflush® units are equipped with a special vacuum breaker which prevents the possible contamination of the potable water system.

Vacuum Tank- This tank stores the vacuum energy used in the system. When a switch senses a drop in the vacuum it automatically energizes the pump to upgrade the vacuum. This process in on-going between flushes.

Vacuum Pump- This unique bellows style pump is designed to handle solids without a problem. It uses two duckbill valves on each side of the pump chamber to prevent backfkow of waste and vacuum.

Vacuum Generator- This unit houses the vacuum pump and tank in one unit. It is compact over other units.

Holding Tank- Unit features polyethylene composition 50% thicker than other holding tanks. A deodorant additive is required to keep the holding tank odor-free.

In-Line Vent Filter- The vent filter is located above the holding tank. It helps keep the boat's waste vent system sanitized. Heavier-than-air malodors accumulate in the holding tank. The filter uses special charged filter media to remove the odors before they become offensive. Replace the filter each year. Contact your Regal dealer.

Fresh Water and Waste Monitor- Your vessel uses a fresh water and waste monitor panel to display the levels in each system. See the information earlier in this chapter.

Overboard Discharge Pump- An optional overboard discharge pump vacates waste through the deck waste fitting or a seacock (only used beyond the 3 mile limit in the U.S).

The Vacuflush® head uses a combination of vacuum suction and water flow from the fresh water tank to clear the head of waste. Before using the Vacuflush system turn the head circuit breaker to the “on” position at the main DC control panel.

Make sure that there is always a small amount of water left in the toilet head bowl. This acts as a trap and will reduce unwanted odors.

Before leaving the boat for an extended period, flush the head for at least 10 seconds. This ensures that waste has cleared the sanitation transfer hose and has entered the holding tank.

Waste left within the transfer hose tends to dry out and harden. This could restrict the internal size of the hose and hamper future operation. The system components including the hose are formulated for the transfer of sanitary waste only. Do not allow the following items

in the system: Strong acid or caustics such as drain openers, petroleum solvents or fuels, alcohol based products such as antifreeze and pine oil products along with sanitary napkins and baby diapers.

System vacuum is monitored by a switch located on the outside of the vacuum generator's tank. When the switch senses a vacuum drop, it automatically signals the pump to energize and bring the vacuum back to the operating level. This is normally a two minute process. In a properly operating system, the stored vacuum will "leak" down between flushes, causing the vacuum pump to run for a short period. This is normal. The pump should not run for more than once every (3) hours after the last flush.

To operate the Vacuflush® head:

1. Activate the head breaker on the main DC panel.

2. Activate the fresh water system breaker on the main DC panel since the fresh water tank is the main water source for the Vacuflush® system.

3. Lift the toilet lever until the desired water level is reached. Generally the system requires more water for solid liquid waste. See figure 1.

1. To flush the toilet, press the flush lever in one swift motion down to the floor until contents in the bowl disappear. A distinct popping noise is normal when flushing action begins and the vacuum seal is broken. Hold the lever down for at least 3 seconds. If flush lever is accidentally released before waste clears the bowl, do not try to flush toilet again until vacuum pump stops running. A small amount of water should remain in the bowl after flushing. See figure 2.

2. Do not dispose of sanitary napkins or other non-dissolving items in the toilet. Do not attempt to flush facial tissue, wet strength tissue, paper towels, or excessive quantities of toilet paper down the toilet. These types of items do not dissolve and cause plugging of the system. See figure 3.

3. Make sure all passengers are aware of the toilet operation.

4. If using holding tank deodorant, use the approved ones for the system.

5. See the maintenance section for cleaning and routine inspection items.

Equipment Operation

EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT

ARCH/RADAR

The masthead light hinges up from the radar arch. Simply tighten the knob to hod in the proper position. Make sure the light is as vertical as possible. When used as part of the navigation lights, the front is lighted. When anchoring, both front and rear positions are lighted for 360 degree visibil-

ity.

The radar arch offers a environment to mount the boat's antennas for the best reception. The round saucer looking antenna is the television antenna. The other antenna is for the GPS/Plotter and is mounted on the starboard radar arch. The arch contains speakers and arch lights controlled by the switch panel located at

the transom door.

The 3760 features one bilge pump and float switch in the aft bilge and a second set located in the forward bilge. They are operated through the dash switches. There are separate switches marked forward and aft bilge pumps.

In the “off” position both switches are connected into the automatic float switch. In this “auto” position if the boat takes on water, the bilge pumps will activate and pump excess water overboard. The center switch area lights up when activated.

Periodically check the grates for debris and spray the units down with water. Make sure a steady stream of water exits the through hull fitting indicating the hose from the bilge pump itself is debris free.

Equipment Operation

CANVAS

Following is an overview of the canvas system. The canvas parts consist of the bimini top, side curtains, aft curtain, windscreen plus bimini and aft connector canvas along with bows and hardware.

The canvas requires a set installation procedure which will make the job easier and faster to accomplish. Sometimes a second person can help in certain parts of the process. Once the skipper has gained experience he will find some shortcuts to the entire process to ease installation. Normal installation requires no special tools.

Never fold canvas parts with the clear vinyl windows such as windscreens, side or aft curtains since they could be damaged. This is especially true in colder climates. Roll all canvas parts and make sure the vinyl windows are dry to prevent debris forming on the window material. Also, store in a clean, dry environment. A little bit of silicone spray on the zippers and vasoline on any snaps periodically helps canvas parts go together easier.

Bimini Top/Windscreen Connector

The bimini top normally sets at an angle position when not in use. To set up the bimini top:

1. Unzip the top boot and store it for future use.
2. Pull the bimini top forward to unfold the entire top.

3. Install the bimini turnbuckles to top of arch.

4. Push in the forward inner bow support locking pin and rest it on the top of the outer bow for initial adjustment. Do the same with the other side. See drawing B.

5. Connect the port and starboard lower forward bows to the clevis connectors and lock with the clevis pin. See drawing C.

6. Leave the 2 adjustment straps disconnected at this time.

7. Notice the arch bow. Secure it to the arch turndowns on both port and starboard sides. See drawing A.

8. Pull the bimini canvas to stern. Find the zipper on the bimini connector canvas and proceed to zip the bimini top to the arch connector canvas pulling the top as required to assist in installing it.

9. Next, install the bimini windscreen by zipping it up to the bimini top. To ease snapping the windscreen to the deck snaps it may be easier by unzipping the flaps to ease snap installation and you may have to stand on a step. Make sure the cabin door is shut to prevent falling. Rezip the flaps shut.

10. To take the slack out of the bimini top at this time notice the two forward canvas bows. There are two hole adjusters in the outside bow. Put the bow in the bottom hole for tightening up the canvas by pulling down on the bows. Do the same with the other forward bow for the final bimini top adjustment. Connect the adjustment straps and fine tune.

Side Curtains

The side curtains may be marked with colored tags. Red is port and green is starboard. First, zip the side curtain to the bimini top. Next, unzip the flaps to access the deck snaps easier. Rezip the flaps shut.

Aft Curtain

Zip the aft curtain to the aft connector canvas. Then snap it completely around the stern deck. It may be easier to accomplish the above task with the flap zipped out in order to reach all the snaps. Finally, rezip the flap shut.

Equipment Operation

CANVAS-HARD TOP

1 Identify your pieces five (5) pieces. Center, Port and Starboard Windscreen, Port/Starboard side curtain

Make sure the forward valance is snapped down. Note: Canvas labels will be on the inside.

Zip all five panels on the valance. Start zippers only 10" inches, no specific order. Close all vertical zippers about 10" inches.

Fasten exterior snaps to the windshield from the outside. Complete all top and vertical zippers.

Fasten interior snaps to the windshield from the inside.

Make sure all velcro-overlaps are laying down to prevent water intrusion.

View of a completed Forward Enclosure

1 Identify your Five (5) AFT pieces. Walk through, center and port AFT curtain, and port and starboard AFT-side curtains.

Zip all three (3) panels on the valance. Start zippers only 10" inches, no specific order. Close all vertical zippers about 10" inches.

Fasten all snaps to the boat from the inside or on the outside as required.

Install all bungee cords from the outside.

Complete all top and vertical zippers. Snap flap on the inside port.

View of a completed AFT Enclosure

Top View of your canvas package.

Equipment Operation

CARPET-COCKPIT

The cockpit carpet features an Aqua Trac tread that keeps it in place. The carpet does not show dirt easy and quickly cleans up. It is stitched with a protective edging to prevent any unraveling.

When not in use roll the carpet and store in a clean, dry place. Do not fold the carpet as the creases may deform the appearance and it may take awhile to lay flat.

COMPASS

The compass is set by the manufacturer to ensure its accuracy. If in doubt it can be zeroed in by using a non-magnetic screwdriver and turning the compensator screws as recommended. A compass can be checked while underway for variance and deviation by comparing your heading with a nautical chart. Compass error is part of the calculation. Refer to the compass manual in the owner's information packet for compensating details.

ELECTRONICS-GENERAL

The 3760 features several electronic components matched to your vessel as for compatibility. These include the RAY 215 VHF, ST60 depth sounder and C80 GPS/plotter.

As a part of continually upgrading our product line Regal reserves the right to change specifications, components and vendors at any time.

This manual serves as an introduction to the on board electronics components. The general information included will enable the captain to bring his equipment "up and running". Manuals for each of the electronic components should be referenced for specific detailed operations.

ELECTRONICS-ST60 DEPTH INSTRUMENT

The ST60 depth instrument is installed as standard equipment on the 3760. It features accurate depth information, in either feet, meters, or fathoms, on a high quality liquid crystal display (LCD). It is constructed in a weather-proofed case.

The basic information is provided in this owner's manual. along with a quick-start guide.

The ST60 is protected by a 5 amp breaker located on the panel beneath the helm area.

Never bottom paint the Airmar transducer since it will not work properly. It is located in the bilge just behind the main forward engine bulkhead.

The ST60 should be already calibrated upon vessel delivery. You may want to change certain modes to your individual needs such as the shallow water alarm, etc. If the instrument should need recalibration, see chapter 4 of the ST60 owner's manual.

Note: The ST60 depth sounder on this vessel is a stand alone instrument and is not integrated through the GPS/Plotter. It is connected only to its relevant transducer. It does not display information from, or provide information to, any other instruments.

Equipment Operation

Adjust backlighting & contrast

Switch off & on

Raymarine®

aymarine [phone] Call Fee: 838-526-5520 [phone] Date: December 2015
Rajamarico Intl, QacyPoint, Northbound Road, Portsmouth, Hampshire POS LTD. UK Rajamarico, Inc., 27 Manchester Street, Mammuck, 58103054, USA
Socumare number: 80116-1

General operation

Equipment Operation

ST60 Operation Basics

Switching on and off

All the time that power is applied to the instrument, you can use the depth button to switch the instrument off and on as follows.

• To switch the instrument off, hold down the depth button for approximately 5 seconds. After this time, a switch off count down of 4 seconds occurs. Keep the depth button pressed during this period, to switch off the instrument.
• To switch the instrument back on, hold down the depth button for approximately 1 second.

When the power supply is switched off, none of the instrument buttons (including depth) has any effect.

Notes: (1) Each time power to the instrument is switched on, the instrument is initially in the on condition. You do not need to use the depth button to switch the instrument on.
(2) When the instrument is on, the operation of the depth button will perform other operating functions, as described below.

Normal operation

Use the flow charts in this Chapter to operate your ST60+ Depth instrument. The flow charts show the sequence of button presses and displays for the various operating tasks. All button presses are momentary unless otherwise stated.

Depth information

When power is switched on, the depth button gives you access to the current depth, minimum depth and maximum depth readings. Refer to the Depth information flow diagram (below) to access the information you want.

You can reset the MIN and MAX values by pressing the reset button for 3 seconds.

Operating with fishfinder products

Depth information is normally obtained from the Depth transducer, fitted as part of the ST60+ Depth system. However, when the ST60+ Depth instrument is connected to a SeaTalk system to which a compatible fishfinder is also connected, the depth information is provided by the fishfinder all the time the fishfinder is switched on.

Current depth

The current depth is shown in either FEET, FATHOMS or METRES. You can select the units you want during User calibration.

The current depth screen also displays depth-trend indicator arrows to show whether the depth is increasing or decreasing. A rising sea-bed is indicated by n and a lowering sea-bed by v.

If there is no depth signal from the transducer for more than 30 seconds, the last known depth is displayed and LAST flashes at the top of the screen. If depth information is not received from the transducer or from SeaTalk, then dashes are displayed.

Minimum & maximum depth

The minimum and maximum depth values are reset at power up. You can also reset each one manually to the current depth, by holding in the reset button for 3 seconds.

The screens show the maximum/minimum depth since the last reset, but time out to the current depth screen if no user action occurs for 8 seconds.

Alarms

An alarm condition occurs if:

• The depth is less than the SHALLOW or SHALLOW anchor level.
• The depth is more than the DEEP anchor level.
• The DEEP level value is crossed (when the seabed rising or falling).

An alarm condition is indicated by an audible beep and a flashing alarm symbol (▲) on the display. The display will also show the relevant caption, either SHALLOW or DEEP, and for anchor alarms an anchor symbol (▲).

When the instrument is operating as a master, you can check the alarm levels and if necessary set them up (see Depth alarms flow chart). To do this, use the alarm button to select the required alarm level, then:

• To enable or disable the alarm, hold in the reset button for 1 second. If an alarm is disabled, the associated screen shows an OFF legend.
- To change the value of the alarm level, press the offset and reset buttons together to enter adjust mode, then use these buttons individually to set the required value.

Depth offsets

WARNING: Use the correct depth offset

The use of the correct depth offset is critical to the safety of the vessel. If incorrect offset values are applied, this could result in misleading depth information being displayed with a consequent risk of running aground. Take great care to ensure you set the correct value, as described in Chapter 4, Calibration.

Depths are measured from the transducer to the sea bed. However, offsets to the actual distances measured can be applied during calibration (see Chapter 4 Calibration), so that the displayed depth reading represents either the depth from the keel or the depth from the waterline (W/L).

To see the offsets applied on your vessel, press the offset button. If the instrument is operating as a master, the display will show the size of the offset (either positive or negative) and the appropriate legend:

• When the offset is a positive value, the legend W/L is displayed.
• When the offset is a negative value, the legend KEEL is displayed.
• When the offset is zero, the legend OFFSET is displayed. With zero offset applied, the displayed depth reading is measured from the transducer.

Display settings

Illumination

When the instrument is first powered up, the display illumination is set to its lowest (courtesy) level, to facilitate initial access to the buttons. To adjust the level of illumination:

1. Hold down the depth button for approximately one second, to enter the illumination-adjust mode.
2. There are four preset illumination levels. Momentarily press the depth button to cycle through these levels until you reach the level you want.
3. Press any other button to leave the illumination-adjust mode.

Note: The display will time out to normal operation 7 seconds after the last button press.

Contrast

To adjust the display contrast:

1. Enter the illumination-adjust mode as described above.
2. Hold down the depth button for a further two seconds approximately, to enter the contrast-adjust mode.
3. There are four preset contrast settings. Momentarily press the depth button to cycle through these settings until you achieve optimum display quality.
4. Press any other button to leave the contrast-adjust mode.

Note: The display will time out to normal operation 7 seconds after the last button press.

Equipment Operation

ELECTRONICS- "C" SERIES GPS PLOTTER

The “C” series display by Raymarine® is used as standard equipment. It features basic navigaiton, radar, monitoring a course, fishfinder and Navtex capabilities.

To use the "C" series display:

1. Make sure the battery switches are energized. The switches are located under the aft circular seat cushion.

2. Activate the electronics switch at the helm switch panel located at the starboard coaming panel.

3. In this manual a series of cards are used to show the basic operations of the unit. Refer to the Raymarine® operator's manual for more detailed information.

General Operation

The control panel

Card No. 1

General Operation Using the controls

Card No. 2

How do the controls work?

Buttons

• Access system functions or change what you see on-screen. Within the text of this document they are written in bold capitals e.g. WPTS/MOB.
• Press and hold to access short cuts - see individual buttons on facing page.

Example:

This example shows the series of button and soft key presses required to change the waypoint default symbol or group.

Soft keys

• They change depending on application or function being performed.
• Press and hold MENU to display help information for the currently displayed soft keys.
• Press the corresponding key (below the screen) to select.
• Further soft keys may be displayed. If a key has several options, each press will highlight the next option.
• If a key displays a single value or a slider above, use the rotary control to adjust.
• Within the text of this document they are written in capitals e.g. SORT LIST.

This process of pressing buttons and soft keys to navigate to the required function, is simplified within this guide and represented by a strip e.g.

The Cursor

The Cursor appears on the screen as a white cross.

To make it easier to locate on screen, the cursor changes to a circle with a cross in it, when it is moved after a 10 second period of inactivity.

The cursor is context-sensitive. When it is placed over an object e.g. a waypoint or chart feature, it changes color and a label or information associated with the object is displayed. When you place the cursor over certain items, the soft keys change to enable you to access related operations.

Simulator:

To practice using your Display without data from a GPS scanner or fishfinder, switch on the simulator via the System Setup menu.

General Operation Setting up the display

Card No. 3

How do I select how the applications are displayed?

The applications are shown using a combination of page sets, pages and windows. There are five page sets each containing five pages with a combination of windows and applications in each. These sets can be edited to define the combination that suits your particular needs.

Any changes you make will be saved to the system. You can change these preferences as many times as you wish.

(1, 2, 3 or 4 windows)

How do I select the Page Set?

Note: Alternatively you can display the Select Page Set screen via the Menu key.

How do I select a Page?

Note: Alternatively, repeatedly press PAGE until the required page is highlighted.

How do I select a Window?

To temporarily maximise active window:

Press ACTIVE again to return to multiple windows mode.

? More information See the 'General Operation' chapter of the Reference Manual

General Operation Using CompactFlash cards

Card No. 4

CAUTION

CompactFlash Card

In order to protect your C-Series Display and CompactFlash cards from irreparable damage, please adhere to the following:

• Fit the card the correct way around. DO NOT force.
- Ensure card door is firmly closed at all times.
- DO NOT use a metallic instrument (e.g. screwdriver or pliers) to aid card removal.
- Follow the correct procedure for removing a card (see below).
• DO NOT remove card during either a read or write operation.

How do I insert a CompactFlash card?

1. Check that you are using the correct type of card. Raymarine recommend Navionics Chart cards or SANDISK CompactFlash cards.
2. Open the chart card door, located on the front left of the display.
3. Insert the card as shown, with the lip of the card facing inwards. It should position easily. If it does not, DO NOT force it, check the direction in which the lip is facing.
4. Gently press the card home and then firmly click the chart card door shut.

How do I remove a CompactFlash card?

... with the unit powered

1. Press MENU. The Setup menu is displayed.
2. Use trackpad (up/down) to highlight and then (right) to select CF CARD REMOVAL. The system will now complete its checks.
3. When instructed to do so, open the chart card door and remove the card.
4. Firmly click the chart door shut and press OK twice.

... with the unit powered down

1. Open the chart card door.
2. Grip the card and pull to remove it from its slot.
3. Firmly click the chart card door shut.

What can I see? Understanding the chart

Card No. 5

What can I use the chart for?

• Find where you are.
• Interpret your surroundings.
• Place waypoints at specific locations.
• Navigate to a specific point.
  • Monitor where you are going.
• Record where you have been.
  • Measure the distance between two points.
  ● Build and follow routes.
• Manage and edit routes and tracks.
• Distinguish between fixed & moving objects (radar overlay).

How do I move around the chart?

• Press RANGE (OUT) to see a larger area of the chart.
• Press RANGE (IN) to see a smaller area in more detail.

To pan the chart:

• Moves cursor. When cursor reaches window edge, chart pans to a different area.
• Press and hold to pan larger areas.

How do I find where I am on the chart?

If you cannot find your boat symbol :

The boat symbol indicates your position.

The screen automatically pans to your boat's position and re-activiates the motion mode (see Card 6)

Equipment Operation

What can I see? Using the chart ...

Card No. 6

FIND SHIP CURSOR	GOTO	ROUTES	TRACKS	PRESENTATION

Viewing detail on the chart

How do I change the chart orientation?

The orientation of the chart refers to the relationship between the chart and the direction you are travelling in. It is used in conjunction with motion mode (see below) to control how your boat and chart relate to one another and how they are displayed on screen. The default mode is North Up (N-UP). This displays your chart with true north upwards. As your heading changes the boat symbol moves accordingly.

If desired, you can change the orientation mode to:

• Head Up (H-Up) - displays chart with boat's current heading upwards. As heading changes, boat symbol remains fixed
• Course Up (C-Up) - chart picture stabilized, current course upwards. Boat symbol moves as heading changes.

To change the orientation mode:

How do I change how my boat moves on the chart?

How your boat moves on the screen is referred to as the motion mode. The default setting for the chart is Relative Motion. This means that your boat is fixed on the screen and the chart moves relative to your boat i.e.

If desired, you can change the motion mode to:

● True (TM) - the chart is fixed and the boat moves in true perspective to fixed landmasses on the screen.
- Autorange (AR) - selects and maintains the largest possible scale of chart that will display both the boat and the target waypoint. This option is not available when radar/charet synchronization is ON.

To change the orientation mode:

NOTE: When you pan the chart or toggle FIND SHIP/CURSOR to CURSOR, the motion mode is suspended.

What can I see?

Displaying additional information

Card No. 7

Viewing object information

You can now:

• Locate the nearest waypoint, port, port service, tidal and current stations, wreck or obstruction, to the selected position.
• Search for a named port.

- View detailed data for the selected port, tidal or current station.

Finding nearby features and services:

Displaying tidal and current details:

Equipment Operation

Basic Navigation Working with Waypoints

Card No. 8

What is a waypoint?

A waypoint is a position marked on a chart, radar or fishfinder screen to indicate a site (for fishing, diving etc), or as a position to go to. You can place a waypoint at the cursor position, your boat's position or at a specified position. Waypoints are represented in chart or radar applications as an 'X' (default) and by a vertical line labeled WPT in Fishfinder. Active waypoints are displayed on CDI windows. The details of each waypoint are stored in a waypoint list (1000 waypoints maximum). Waypoints can be renamed, edited, grouped, or erased, as necessary. To make full use of waypoint features, ensure your display is receiving heading and position data. We recommend that you regularly back-up your waypoints by archiving them to a CompactFlash card. Waypoints can also be transferred to another NMEA compatible instrument.

How do I place a waypoint?

... at the cursor?

... at the vessel?

Alternatively, press WPTS/MOB twice.

How do I navigate to a point?

CAUTION

Always check that your route to a waypoint is safe before travelling towards it.

How do I navigate to a waypoint?

...using the waypoint list?

...using the cursor?

Place cursor over waypoint.

To stop navigation to a waypoint:

Can I edit a waypoint?

Once a waypoint has been placed it can be edited in as variety of ways. You can:

- Change the waypoint details - Move a waypoint. - Change the default group or symbol - Erase a waypoint

Basic Navigation How do I get to a point?

Card No. 9

What is a route?

A route is made up of a series of waypoints. These waypoints can either be placed specifically for that route and/or you can use existing waypoints. You can save a route for future use or follow it immediately (Quick Route). Routes are stored in a route list. Routes can be named, edited, erased and archived. After routes have been created you can choose which ones are displayed on your chart.

How do I build a route by placing waypoints on screen?

How do I follow a route?

... from the start of route

Position cursor over any leg of required route

... from a selected waypoint within route

Position cursor over appropriate waypoint

Equipment Operation

Basic Navigation How do I get to a point?

Card No. 9

What is a route?

A route is made up of a series of waypoints. These waypoints can either be placed specifically for that route and/or you can use existing waypoints. You can save a route for future use or follow it immediately (Quick Route). Routes are stored in a route list. Routes can be named, edited, erased and archived. After routes have been created you can choose which ones are displayed on your chart.

How do I build a route by placing waypoints on screen?

How do I follow a route?

... from the start of route

What is around me? Avoiding a collision

Card No. 11

VRM/EBL	TARGET TRACKING	GAIN	ENHANCE ECHOES	PRESENTATION

How can the radar help me avoid a collision?

You can set up your C-Series Display to sound an alarm when anything comes within a pre-set range of the boat. These guard zones allow you to take any necessary action to avoid a collision.

Guard zones

A sector or circular zone fixed with respect to the Ships Heading Marker (SHM). If the SHM moves, or the centre is offset, or the range scale changes, the zone moves accordingly.

What does a guard zone display?

IMPORTANT

A guard zone:

• Will only operate when a whole zone is displayed on screen, or displayed by offsetting the centre.
• Is inactive for 10 seconds after it is placed or re-sized, to avoid inappropriate alarms.

How do I set up a circular guard zone?

1. Select guard zone function:

1. Select guard zone option:

How do I distinguish between fixed and moving objects?

To switch radar overlay on/off:

You can overlay radar image data on your chart allowing better distinction between fixed objects and other marine traffic.

With a 2D chart window active:

To switch chart/radar synchronization on/off

For best results, also switch on chart/radar synchronization.

With a 2D chart window active:

Equipment Operation

What is around me?

Using MARPA....

Card No. 12

MONITOR IN ZONES	ACQUIRE TARGET	MARPA & AIS OPTIONS	MARPA LIST	AIS LIST

What is MARPA?

Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (MARPA) functions are used for target tracking and risk analysis. MARPA improves your standards of collision avoidance by obtaining detailed information for up to 10 targets, and provides continuous and rapid situation evaluation.

MARPA tracks the selected targets and calculates target bearing, range, true speed, course, Closest Point of Approach (CPA), and Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA). Each tracked target can be displayed with a CPA graphic depicting the approximate target speed (vector length) and course (vector direction). Alternatively, move the cursor over the target to display the range and CPA. You can now access bearing and speed. Each target is continually assessed. An alarm sounds if a target becomes dangerous or lost.

NOTE: For MARPA to operate, fast heading data is required.

How do I set up the MARPA functions?

How do I acquire a MARPA target?

How do I view details of MARPA targets?

How do I cancel MARPA target(s)?

What is around me? Using AIS

Card No. 13

VRM/EBL	TARGET TRACKING	GAIN	ENHANCE ECHOES	PRESENTATION

What is AIS?

AIS uses digital radio signals to broadcast 'realtime' information between vessels and shore based stations via dedicated VHF frequencies. This information is used to identify and track vessels in the surrounding area and to provide collision avoidance data. AIS will augment your radar application, as it can operate in radar blind spots.

In order to use the AIS feature, you will need a GPS and compass for timing and position information together with data from a suitable AIS receiver.

How do I display AIS?

On chart windows:

On radar windows:

How is AIS data displayed?

The AIS system displays other AIS equipped vessels in the surrounding area as targets overlaid on a chart or radar window. Up to 100 targets are displayed and are scaled according to the size of the vessel. A vector indicates the direction of travel of the vessel. As the vessel's status changes, the symbol for the target will change accordingly.

You can view detailed AIS data, safety critical target information, alarm messages (ALR) and safety related messages (SRM). You can also set up a safe zone.

How do I view target information?

How do I view detailed AIS data?

AIS target symbols

Sleeping target

• Target not activated, dangerous or lost.

Activated target

• Target activated i.e. AIS vector displayed.
- Vector line (optional) shows predicted distance travelled within given time.

Selected target

• Target selected with cursor.
- Can activate the target and view detailed data.

Dangerous target

• Targets within specified distance (CPA) or time (TCPA).
• Dangerous target alarm sounds and target flashes.

Uncertain target

• Calculated CPA/TCPA value uncertain.

Lost target

• When signal of a dangerous AIS target not received for 10 seconds.
• Target orientated in COG or CSE direction as appropriate.
  • Alarm sounds and target flashes

WARNING:

Smaller vessels do not have to be fitted with AIS and whilst it is mandatory for larger commercial vessels to carry AIS, its use is not. You should not assume that your AIS will display ALL vessels in your area.

Equipment Operation

Where am I?

Monitoring a course....

Card No. 14

How do I monitor my course?....

• Your course is shown on the chart application whilst motion mode is active.
• Using COG and heading vectors (Press DATA - CHART VECTORS - COG/HDG VECTORS).
• Use the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI). With your display receiving accurate heading and position information, you can monitor your course and accurately steer to a target waypoint.

What does the CDI show me?....

The CDI gives a graphical representation of your boat's course. This 'rolling road' format represents a width of sea equal to the Cross Track Error (XTE) limits that you have specified in the Setup menu. As you travel towards the target waypoint, the checkered pattern moves down the screen to simulate movement at a rate proportional to your boat's speed.

What do the steering instructions tell me?

On course

• Boat on center line.
• Zero XTE

Off course

• Boat off center line.
• Correction arrow(s) indicate direction to steer to maintain course to target waypoint.
  ● The greater the XTE, the more arrows.

What's under the boat? Understanding the fishfinder

Card No. 15

TRANSDUCER SETTINGS	ZOOM	BOTTOM LOCK	A-SCOPE	PRESENTATION

What's under the boat?

The fishfinder application, when connected to a suitable Digital Sounder Module (DSM) and transducer, will help you to see fish, bottom structure and underwater obstructions. The image scrolls from right to left at an automatically selected range and frequency to provide a record of the echoes seen. You can mark with a waypoint any positions of interest that you may wish to return to. These waypoints are added to the waypoint list and can be used by other applications.

What can I see on the screen?

How do I interpret the bottom?

A thin line indicates a hard bottom (sand)

A wide line indicates a soft bottom (mud or seaweed cover)

Peaks and troughs, indicate an uneven or rocky bottom or a wreck

Dark layers indicate strong signals; lighter layers weaker signals.

What influences target display?

The shape and size of echoes indicating targets, is influenced by a combination of:

• Boat speed - flatter at slower speeds
  ● Target depth - larger near the surface

● Transducer frequency - broader at lower frequencies

● Target size - larger targets return larger echoes

Equipment Operation

1. After you have selected the other ship's MMSI number, the radio prompts you for the working channel you wish to communicate on. The large character display shows the last used channel number and a "W" appears in the small channel display. Using the Channel Select (CH) knob on the front panel, select the desired working channel for the Individual Call.
2. Press the DSC/PRI key once. The TX indicator on the LCD flashes, indicating the RAY215 is ready to transmit.
3. Press the PTT key to send the digital "packet" of information. The radio waits for an acknowledgment from the targeted ship or station.
4. If the target station acknowledges, a tone sounds and "ACK" illuminates on the LCD. After 2 seconds, the RAY215 switches to the previously selected working channel.

or

If the call is not acknowledged, exit the DSC mode by pressing the 16/9 key.

• Monitoring data and engines
- Navtex

Card No. 17

How do I monitor data?

NAVIGATION

WAYPOINT

ROUTE

FISHING

SAILING

Ves Pos25°45'.940N080°09'.718W	GOTO CURSOR220°T1.28nm	TFG--h--m--s	VMG Wpt.-,-kt
Depth78.8ft	Cog Sog286°T0.0kt	Heading293°T	Speed0.0kt
Set Drift355°T0.0kt	XTE0.00nmSteer >	Trip0.00nm	Local Time01:42:12

The data application enables you to view numeric data generated by the system or by instruments available on NMEA 0183, SeaTalk, Seata ² , NMEA 2000 and SeaTalk ^hs . This information is displayed in a series of panels which contain data relating to a particular function or activity. These can be reconfigured to your needs.

Press the appropriate soft key to select the panel of your choice

How do I monitor the engine(s)?

ENGINE

ENGINE & FUEL

FUEL RESOURCES

ENGINE & RESOURCES

TWIN ENGINE

The engine monitor application enables you to view data from up to three compatible engines. The information is displayed in a series of panels which contain data relating to engine, fuel and fuel resources. These can be reconfigured to your needs. Press the appropriate soft key to select the panel of your choice.

To view data from 3 engines, change the 'No. of engine' setting in the Panel Setup Menu.

Navtex

If connected to a Navtex receiver, you can use your display to view weather forecasts and marine warnings. Details of these alerts are displayed whenever an incoming message is received for the alert categories you have specified. After you have read the message you can either erase it or save it to the database (100 maximum). To select the alert categories or to sort the message list, refer to the 'Weather (Navtex)' chapter of your Reference Manual

Viewing saved messages

Equipment Operation

ELECTRONICS-VHF RADIO W/FIST MICROPHONE

The Ray 215 VHF has been built to withstand the harsh marine environment and features the following:

1. Digital Selective Calling for individual ship's calls, all ship's calls and distress calls built into the microphone.
2. Submersible fist style microphone with 16/9 button.
3. Easy to use dedicated keys. Rotary knobs for channel, volume and squelch adjustments.
4. Dual station option.

The VHF radio is protected by a 10 amp breaker located on the panel beneath the steering wheel. If the breaker should "pop" find the root cause of the problem before resetting it.

CONTROLS-OVERVIEW

Several of the front panel keys at the base station serve multiple purposes. For the most part, the function indicted on the first line of the key is accessed by pressing and releasing that key. The function indicated on the second line of the key is accessed by pressing and holding down the key for 2 seconds.

1. CH (Channel Selection Knob)

This knob selects the active channel. Turning the knob clockwise increments the channel number. Turing the knob counterwise decrements the channel.

2. VOLUME/PWR Knob

This knob switches power on and off and controls the audio volume. From the OFF position, rotating the knob clockwise until it clicks powers on the radio. Continuing to turn the knob colckwise, the volume increases. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, the volume decreases. Continuing to turn the knob counterclockwise, the unit clicks off.

3. SQUELCH Knob

This knob controls the squelch sensitivity level. Rotating the knob clockwise increases the squelch level. Rotating the knob counterclockwise decreases the squelch.

Control Layout/LCD Display

Several of the keys on the front panel of the base station serve multiple purposes. For the most part, the function indicated on the first line of the key is accessed by pressing and releasing that key. The function indicated on the second line of the key is accessed by pressing and holding the key for two seconds.

① CH (Channel Selection) Knob

This knob selects the active channel. Turning the knob clockwise increments the channel number. Turning the knob counterclockwise decrements the channel.

The knob is also used to select values and functions in DSC mode.

② VOLUME/PWR Knob

This knob switches power on and off and controls the audio volume. From the OFF position, rotating the knob clockwise until it "clicks" powers ON the radio. Continuing to turn the knob clockwise, the volume increases. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, the volume decreases. Continuing to turn the knob counterclockwise, the unit "clicks" OFF.

The upper bar graph on the LCD displays the volume level.

③ SQUELCH Knob

This knob controls the squelch sensitivity level. Rotating the knob clockwise increases the squelch level. Rotating the knob counterclockwise decreases the squelch.

④ SCAN/ MEM Key

This key starts or stops All Scan and Memory Scan Modes. The key also places favorite channels into the radio's memory for quick selection.

Pressing and holding SCAN/MEM for 3 seconds stores into memory the currently displayed channel and illuminates the MEM indicator on the LCD. If the current channel has already been stored, pressing SCAN/MEM removes the channel from memory and extinguishes the MEM indicator.

Pressing and releasing SCAN/MEM when no channels have been entered into memory initiates a scan of all available channels. The SCAN indicator illuminates on the LCD.

When at least one channel has been programmed into memory, pressing and releasing SCAN/MEM causes the MEM and SCAN indicators to flash for 3 seconds. If the key is pressed again while these indicators are flashing, the radio enters All Scan mode. However, if the 3 seconds expire before pressing the key a second time, the radio initiates a scan of only those channels programmed into memory.

Pressing the SCAN/MEM key during All Scan or Memory Scan terminates the scan.

⑤ WX/INT Key

Pressing and releasing WX/INT switches between the Weather channel and the last used marine channel. Pressing and releasing WX/INT while in the Dual Watch mode places the unit in Tri-Watch mode. While in either Weather or Tri-Watch modes, the WX indicator illuminates on the LCD.

Pressing and holding WX/INT for 2 seconds switches between the US, Canadian, and International frequency groups. While in the International Frequency mode, the INT indicator illuminates on the LCD. While in the Canadian mode, the CAN indicator illuminates. There is no indicator for US mode.

⑥ MON/ 1/25 Key

Pressing and releasing MON/1/25 initiates the Dual-Watch Monitor mode.

Equipment Operation

Pressing and holding MON/1/25 for 2 seconds toggles the output power between 1 and 25 watts. While in the 1 Watt mode, the 1W indicator illuminates on the LCD.

Pressing this key while holding PTT overrides the 1W output setting. See the Frequency tables in Section 6 for the affected channels.

⑦

Pressing and releasing 16/9 switches the radio between the current channel and the Priority Channel (9 or 16).

Pressing and holding 16/9 for 2 seconds toggles the Priority Channel between 16 and 9.

8

D/L / I.C. Key

Pressing and releasing D/L / I.C. switches receiver sensitivity between Distant (full) and Local (desensitized) modes.

While in the Local mode, the DESENS indicator is illuminated.

Holding D/L / I.C. for 2 seconds toggles on and off the Intercom function between the microphone on the base station and an optional remote Full Function Handset. Press PTT to converse with the other station.

⑨

DSC/ PRI Key

Pressing and releasing the DSC/PRI and D/L / I.C. keys simultaneously places the radio in DSC mode, which is used to make Individual Ships Calls, Group Calls, All Ships Calls, and Distress Calls.

DSC mode may be exited at any time by pressing the 16/9 key.

Pressing and holding DSC/PRI for 2 consecutive seconds returns Priority control from an optional Second Station Full Function Handset to the base station. This feature is for immediately taking radio operation control from the second station in case of an emergency.

10

DIM Key

Pressing this key once starts Dimmer mode, which adjusts the brightness of LCD's backlight.

Each successive press of the DIM key switches the brightness from Off, to Low, to Medium, to High, then back to Off.

⑪

PTT Key (Fist Microphone)

Pressing the PTT (Push To Talk) key enables the radio's transmitter. PTT key operation is disabled when the selected channel is either a Weather channel or a disallowed channel.

The radio is equipped with a 5 minute timeout timer as a safety feature. After the PTT has been held continuously for 5 minutes, transmission is discontinued and an alarm sounded until PTT is released.

⑫

Trackpad UP Key (Fist Microphone)

This key increments the channel number by 1 each time it is pressed. If pressed and held, the channel increments at a rate of 10 channels per second.

13

Trackpad DOWN Key (Fist Microphone)

This key decrements the channel number by 1 each time it is pressed. If pressed and held, the channel decrements at a rate of 10 channels per second.

14

16/9 Key (Fist Microphone)

Has the same function as the 16/9 key on the front panel controls.

15

DISTRESS Key (under hinged door on rear of microphone)

The DISTRESS key sends a DSC Distress Call when pressed and held for 5 seconds.

3.2.2 LCD Display

The following describes the functional characters on the RAY215's LCD.

Figure 3-2 LCD Display Layout

①

NMEA indicator

Appears in every operation mode when valid NMEA data is being received.

② DSC indicator

Appears when the radio is in the DSC mode.

③ ACK indicator

Appears when receiving an acknowledgement to a DSC Individual or Distress Call.

④ INT indicator

Appears when the International frequency group is selected.

⑤ CAN indicator

Appears when the Canadian frequency group is selected.

⑥ TX indicator

Appears during transmission.

⑦ 1W indicator

Appears when the current transmission output is set at 1W. (The indicator is extinguished when the output is set at 25W.)

⑧ MEM indicator

Appears when a channel on the display is stored in memory and during a Memory Scan operation.

⑨ SCAN indicator

Appears during a scan operation.

⑩ DESENS indicator

Appears when the radio is in the Desensitized (local) mode.

⑪ MON indicator

Appears when the radio is in the Dual Watch or Tri-Watch Monitor mode.

⑫ WX indicator

Appears when the radio is in the Weather Channel or Tri-Watch modes.

⑬ REMOTE indicator

Appears when the optional, remote Full Function Handset has the priority operation.

⑭ Channel display (Large)

Displays the current channel number.

⑮ Channel display (Small)

Displays the Priority Channel number while the radio is in the Monitor mode and function indicators during DSC mode.

⑯ VOL indicator (in bar graph)

Represents the current sound volume level. A louder volume displays a larger number of segments in the bar graph.

⑰ SQL indicator (in bar graph)

Represents the current squelch level. A deeper squelch displays a larger number of segments in the bar graph.

Operating Procedures

3.3.1 Turning the Power On

Rotate the VOLUME/PWR knob clockwise to turn the radio on.

3.3.2 Setting the Squelch

Rotate the SQUELCH knob counterclockwise until audio is heard. Rotate clockwise until the squelch "quiets".

3.3.3 Setting the Volume

With audio present, rotate the VOLUME knob clockwise for the desired volume level.

3.3.4 Setting the Power Output

Press the MON/1/25 key for two seconds to toggle between 1 watt output and 25 watts output. When the 1W indicator is displayed, the output power is 1 watt. If 1W is extinguished, 25 watts is being output.

The choice of power output is dependent upon the distance of transmission and transmitting conditions. In certain US harbors and on certain channels, the FCC requires the power to be limited to 1 Watt. On these "required" channels, the radio automatically selects 1 watt power output when the channel is selected.

3.3.5 Setting the Channel

To select the appropriate channel, rotate the CH (Channel Select) Knob clockwise/counterclockwise or use the Channel UP/DOWN keys on the microphone.

Equipment Operation

3.3.6 Setting the Frequency Mode

The frequency modes available are US, International, and Canadian. If the CAN and INT indicators are not illuminated, then US channels are selected.

If in US mode, pressing and holding the WX/INT key for 2 seconds will select Canadian channels (CAN will illuminate).

If in Canadian mode and WX/INT is pressed for 2 seconds, INT will display and International channels are selected.

If WX/INT is pressed for 2 seconds while INT is illuminated, INT will disappear and US channels are selected.

3.3.7 Transmitting

Press the Push-To-Talk key (PTT) and speak into the microphone using a clear normal voice. If the current channel is a Weather Channel or a TX prohibited channel, an alarm will sound when PTT is pressed indicating such a transmission is not permitted.

As per FCC rules, if PTT is pressed and held enabling the transmitter continuously for 5 minutes, the RAY215 will automatically disable the transmitter. Once PTT is released, the transmitter will be re-enabled.

3.3.8 Selecting a Weather Channel

The US National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) broadcasts continuous weather reports and severe weather alerts, as needed. The RAY215 is programmed to receive 10 NOAA weather channels and sound an alarm if a weather alert is received.

The Weather Channels consist of Channel 0 through Channel 9. Press the WX/INT key once to enter the Weather mode and use either the Channel Select (CH) knob or Channel UP/DOWN Trackpad on the microphone to select the desired weather channel. While the Weather Channel is active, the WX indicator appears in the LCD display.

Note: Weather operation is available only in US frequency mode and can only be heard in the US and Canada.

3.3.9 Priority Channel

Either channel 16 or 9 can be programmed as the Priority Channel. To switch to the currently programmed Priority Channel at any time, press the 16/9 key once.

To change the Priority Channel, press the 16/9 key once to switch to the Priority Channel, then press and hold the 16/9 key until a tone is heard. When the Priority Channel is active, a "P" appears in the small character display.

3.3.10 Desensitized Reception (Local Mode)

You can set the RAY215 to reduce the receiving sensitivity in high traffic areas to decrease unwanted reception. This is also known as local mode.

To select this mode, press and release the D/L key. While the desensitize function (local mode) is active, the DESENS indicator appears in the LCD display. To return to full receiver sensitivity (distant mode), again press and release the D/L key.

3.3.11 Channel Memory

The RAY215 can store any US, Canadian, or International Channel. The stored channels are the ones scanned in the Memory Scan mode.

To store a channel in memory, select the desired channel with the CH knob and press and hold the SCAN/MEM key for 2 seconds. A tone sounds and the MEM indicator is displayed. (Weather channels can not be stored into memory).

To clear a channel from memory, select the memory channel and press and hold the SCAN/MEM key for 2 seconds. The MEM indicator extinguishes, indicating that channel is no longer stored in memory.

3.3.12 Resetting Factory Defaults

You can reset many radio settings back to their factory defaults:

• Erase any channels stored in memory for the Memory Scan function
• Erase any MMSI numbers stored in the base station for Individual Ship's Call
• Turn OFF the backlight on the base station and Full Function Handset
• Return to US channels, if INT or CAN are selected
• Return the Weather Channel to channel 0
• Return the Priority channel to channel 16

This will NOT erase the Own Ship's MMSI ID number for your vessel nor will it erase the PHNBOOK entries made with the Full Function Handset.

To perform the memory reset:

1. Turn the radio OFF.
2. Press and hold the SCAN/MEM key.
3. While continuing to hold the SCAN/MEM key, turn the radio ON. The LCD remains blank for 2 seconds, CL appears momentarily, then the unit switches to channel 16.

3.3.13 Scan Modes

The RAY215 is equipped with two types of scan options: All Scan and Memory Scan. How these options are initiated is dependent upon whether there are any channels stored in memory. Channel 70 is also monitored during Scan mode.

All Scan Mode

If no channels are stored in memory when the SCAN/MEM key is pressed, the radio begins scanning all channels (except weather channels) as long as no signal is received. If a signal is received, the scan stops on the receiving channel as long as it is present. If the signal is lost for five seconds, the radio resumes scanning. SCAN is displayed on the LCD while the Scan mode is active.

If the SCAN/MEM key is pressed again while SCAN is flashing, the All Scan Standby state is suspended and the unit returns to the normal state. To cancel the scan mode, press the SCAN/MEM key once.

Memory Scan Mode

If one or more channels are stored in memory when the SCAN/MEM key is pressed, SCAN and MEM begin to flash simultaneously on the LCD. If no other key is pressed within three seconds, SCAN and MEM stop flashing and the radio begins scanning all channels currently stored in memory. As with All Scan, if a signal is received, the scan stops on the receiving channel until the signal is lost for five seconds, then the radio resumes scanning. To cancel memory scan, press and release SCAN/MEM.

If there are channels stored in memory but All Scan operation is desired, press SCAN/MEM again within the 3 second period while the SCAN and MEM indicators are flashing.

3.3.14 Monitor Mode

The RAY215 is equipped with 2 types of monitor operations: Dual Watch and Tri-Watch.

Dual Watch Mode

Dual Watch monitors the selected working channel and the programmed Priority Channel. To initiate Dual Watch, first select the working channel to be monitored, then press the MON/1/25 key once. The selected working channel and the Priority channel (16 or 9) are monitored for traffic.

If a signal is received on the working or Priority channel, the radio monitors that channel as long as a signal is present. Dual Watch will resume if the signal is lost for 3 seconds. To exit the Dual Watch mode, press the MON/1/25 key to revert to the last used working channel or the 16/9 key to revert to the programmed Priority channel.

Tri-Watch Mode

Tri-Watch monitors the selected working channel, the programmed Priority Channel, and the last used Weather Channel for the Weather Alert Tone. To initiate Tri-Watch, initiate the Dual Watch mode and press the WX/INT key. The WX indicator illuminates on the LCD to indicate the Weather Channel is also being monitored.

Operation is the same as Dual Watch except that if a Weather Alert Tone is received, the radio simultaneously sounds an alarm tone, WX flashes, and the NOAA Weather Alert is monitored.

To exit the Tri-Watch mode, press the MON/1/25 key to switch to the last used working channel or the 16/9 key to switch to the programmed Priority channel. To revert to Dual Watch mode, press the WX/INT key.

3.3.15 LCD Backlight Function

Pressing this key twice starts Dimmer mode, which adjusts the brightness of LCD's backlight. Each successive press of the DIM key switches the brightness from Off, to Low, to Medium, to High, then back to Off.

After the key has not been pressed for 5 consecutive seconds, the currently selected brightness level is stored in memory.

Equipment Operation

3.3.16 NMEA Operation

The RAY215 can receive valid position and time information, which are transmitted during a DSC Distress call. This data can be communicated via NMEA 0183 from a GPS, fishfinder, radar, or any device that outputs GPS sentences. If the radio does not detect the positional data, it provides different alerts urging you to find and correct the fault. The optional Full Function Handset enables you to manually input this data using the L/L ENT function, as described in Section 4.5.3.2.

If a GPS device is not connected via NMEA, the radio emits a 5-second-long staccato alert tone and flashes the NMEA indicator 2 minutes after power up. This occurs every time the unit is turned on. The alarm is required by safety regulations and cannot be disabled.

Operation at Power Up

At power up, the radio monitors the NMEA line for 1 minute. If a signal is detected on NMEA, the radio determines whether the data is valid. If valid, the data is input, the NMEA indicator is displayed on handsets, and the radio enters normal operation mode.

If no GPS signal is detected on NMEA after the 1 minute monitoring period, a 5-second-long staccato alert tone is emitted and the NMEA indicator flashes. All the position fields are set to 9's and the time and date fields are set to 8's. The message NO GPS appears in the NAVSTAT screen, although no positional data is displayed.

If at a later time valid data is received on NMEA, the data is input, the NMEA indicator is displayed solid (no longer flashing), and the radio enters normal operation mode.

Operation When the Signal is Lost or Becomes Invalid

If positional data that was previously detected becomes invalid or is no longer detected, the radio monitors the NMEA line for 1 minute for it to be restored.

If a signal is restored on the NMEA line and the radio determines the data is valid, the data is input, the NMEA indicator remains illuminated, and the radio re-enters normal operation mode.

However, if no signal is detected, the NMEA indicator flashes and a 5-second-long staccato alert tone is emitted. The last received positional data is retained in memory and can be viewed in the NAVSTAT screen.

The message NO GPS appears in NAVSTAT in the position where the type of device used to be. The NMEA indicator continues to flash until valid positional data is received. If valid positional data (from the same source) is later restored, the NMEA indicator is again displayed solid.

Operation When No Signal Detected for 4 Hours

If no valid positional data is received or input manually within 4 hours of the previous alert, the NMEA indicator continues to flash and the staccato alert tone is again emitted. This pattern is repeated every 4 hours if no positional data has been detected. If no manual input was made during the previous 23.5 hours, all the position fields are set to 9's and the time and date fields are set to 8's.

3.3.17 Digital Selective Calling (DSC)

The Digital Selective Calling (DSC) protocol is a globally applied system used to send and receive digital Distress calls as well as Individual and All Ships calls on channel 70, the dedicated DSC channel for Marine VHF. For a Distress call transmission, your RAY215 takes the position and time information from the input NMEA data along with your Maritime Mobile Station Identifier (MMSI) and converts it into a digital "packet". When transmitted, this digital information lets other ships and shore stations know where you are and that you are in a Distress situation.

Communications in DSC mode include the following:

1. Transmitting/Receiving an Individual Call
2. Transmitting/Receiving an All Ships Call
3. Transmitting/Receiving a Distress Call (without designating type)
4. Receiving a Distress Relay Call (without designating type)

Individual, All Ships and Group DSC calls come in three varieties: ROUTINE for normal calls, SAFETY for advisory alerts, and URGENCY for assistance when life is not in immediate danger. To enable DSC mode, press and release the DSC/PRI and D/L/ I.C. keys simultaneously. The DSC indicator illuminates and a tone sounds. Since the Distress Call (enabled by pressing and holding the Distress Key for 4 consecutive seconds) automatically selects the DSC mode, it is not necessary to press the DSC/PRI and D/L/ I.C. to make a distress call.

When a DSC call is received, the radio automatically enters DSC mode if you are currently on a selected working channel, in the Monitor mode, or in the Scan mode. You will not receive a DSC call if the radio is transmitting or receiving a non-DSC call.

Note: You must program the ship's MMSI number before the radio can enter the DSC mode. See Section 3.3.17.1 below.

3.3.17.1 MMSI Number Setup

You must enter your Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) number in the RAY215 before the DSC system will be operational. You can request an MMSI number from the FCC when you apply for a radio license.

If your vessel does not require a license, you may obtain an MMSI by contacting either BoatUS (www.boatus.com) or MariTEL (www.maritelusa.com).

Once you have received your MMSI number, enter it into the radio as follows:

1. Press and hold the DSC/PRI and D/L / I.C. keys simultaneously for 2 seconds to enter DSC mode. A tone sounds, the DSC indicator appears, "0" is displayed in the large character display, and "1" is displayed in the small character display.
   Note: If an MMSI number is already in memory, the MMSI entry scrolls across the display, one digit at a time.
2. Rotate the Channel Select (CH) knob until the first digit of your MMS1 number appears in the large character display. (Channel UP/DOWN keys on the microphone are disabled during this process).
3. Press the DSC/PRI key once to accept. The small character display now shows a "2", designating the second digit in your MMSI number.
4. Rotate the Channel Select (CH) knob until the second digit of your MMSI number appears in the large channel display.
5. Press the DSC/PRI key once to accept.
6. Enter all 9 digits of the MMSI number in the same way.

Once the 9th digit has been entered and accepted, the RAY215 plays back the 9 digits (one digit at a time) just entered for proper entry verification.

Note: Ensure the MMSI number entered is correct with this verification playback. Once the number is accepted as outlined in the next step, it cannot be changed except by Raymarine factory representatives.

1. If the number is verified as correct, press and hold the DSC/PRI key for 2 seconds and a tone sounds. Your MMSI number has now been stored in memory.

If the number is incorrect, press the DSC/PRI key once and release. The radio will revert to the beginning of the entry process to start over again. This step can be repeated as many times as required until the number is entered correctly.

3.3.17.2 Individual Ship's Call

An Individual Ship's Call is a DSC call made to a specific ship identified by its MMSI number. There are three types: ROUTINE for normal calls, SAFETY for advisory alerts, and URGENCY for assistance when life is not in immediate danger.

The RAY215 can receive all three types of Individual calls but can only transmit ROUTINE Individual calls. As with any DSC operation, the call is made on channel 70.

Equipment Operation

Sending an Individual Ship's Call

The RAY215 can only send a Routine Individual Call. The MMSI number of the ship to which the Individual Call is to be sent can be input manually or selected from a phonebook listing in memory. This section includes instructions for using both methods and for adding numbers to the phonebook.

Using a manually input MMSI number

1. Press and release the DSC/PRI and D/L / I.C. keys simultaneously to place the unit in DSC mode. "70" appears in the large channel display, the DSC indicator illuminates, and "in" appears in the small channel display to designate individual call.
2. Press and release the DSC/PRI key. The DSC indicator appears, "0" is displayed in the large character display, and "1" is displayed in the small character display.
3. Rotate the Channel Select (CH) knob until the first digit of your MMSI number appears in the large character display. (Channel UP/DOWN keys on the microphone are disabled during this process).
4. Press the DSC/PRI key once to accept. The small character display now shows a "2", designating the second digit in the other ship's MMSI number.
5. Rotate the Channel Select (CH) knob until the second digit of the other ship's MMSI number appears in the large channel display.
6. Press the DSC/PRI key once to accept.
7. Enter all 9 digits of the MMSI number in the same way.
8. Once the 9th digit has been entered and accepted, the RAY215 plays back the 9 digits just entered for proper entry verification.
   If the number is incorrect, press the DSC/PRI key once and release. The radio will revert to the beginning of the entry process to start over again. This step can be repeated as many times as required until the number is entered correctly.
9. When the MMSI number is verified as correct, press and hold the DSC/PRI key for 2 seconds to verify.

Note: The operation is cancelled if the 16/9 key is pressed or if no keys are pressed for 60 seconds during any part of this process.

1. After you have selected the other ship's MMSI number, the radio prompts you for the working channel you wish to communicate on. The large character display shows the last used channel number and a "W" appears in the small channel display. Using the Channel Select (CH) knob on the front panel, select the desired working channel for the Individual Call.

2. Press the DSC/PRI key once. The TX indicator on the LCD flashes, indicating the RAY215 is ready to transmit.

3. Press the PTT key to send the digital "packet" of information. The radio waits for an acknowledgment from the targeted ship or station.

4. If the target station acknowledges, a tone sounds and "ACK" illuminates on the LCD. After 2 seconds, the RAY215 switches to the previously selected working channel.

or

If the call is not acknowledged, exit the DSC mode by pressing the 16/9 key.

See the Raymarine® manual for information on using a MMSI number selected from a phonebook.

Receiving an Individual Ship's Call

When an Individual Ship's Call is received, the radio automatically enters DSC mode if you are currently on a selected working channel, in the Monitor mode, or in the Scan mode.

If a received signal is confirmed to be addressed to your own station, an acknowledging signal is sent back. If the received signal is not addressed to your own station, the unit remains in its previous mode without sending an acknowledging signal.

When receiving Individual Ship's Call

1. If your station is targeted for an Individual Ship's Call, a tone sounds and the unit automatically switches to DSC mode. TX flashes on the LCD and one of the following categories of Individual Ship's Calls flashes in the small number display:

"Ir" for ROUTINE Individual Ship's Call "IS" for SAFETY Individual Ship's Call "IU" for URGENCY Individual Ship's Call

1. To acknowledge the incoming Individual Ship's Call, press the PTT key. The acknowledge is transmitted and your RAY215 automatically selects the working channel specified by the originating ship or station.
2. If you do not wish to acknowledge the call, press the 16/9 key to exit the DSC mode.

3.3.17.3 All Ships Call

The All Ships Call is used to send out a message to all ships in range that you need assistance but the situation is not serious enough for a Distress Call. This call should only be used if hailing for assistance on channel 9 or 16 fails. There are three types of All Ships Calls: ROUTINE for normal calls, SAFETY for advisory alerts, and URGENCY for assistance when life is not in immediate danger. The RAY215 can transmit and receive all three types of these calls. As with any DSC operation, the call is made on channel 70. Then, after the All Ships Call is sent or received, the radio automatically selects channel 16.

Sending an All Ships Call

1. Press and release the DSC/PRI and D/L / I.C. keys simultaneously to enter the DSC mode.
2. Rotate the Channel Select (CH) knob on the front panel to select the desired type of call. The following appears in the small channel display:

"Ar" for ROUTINE All Ships Call "AS" for SAFETY All Ships Call "AU" for URGENCY All Ships Call

1. Press and release the DSC/PRI key and TX begins to flash.
2. Press the PTT key to transmit the All Ships Call. The radio switches to Channel 16.
3. Any station responding to your call converses on Channel 16.

Equipment Operation

Receiving an All Ships Call

If you are currently on a selected working channel, in the Monitor mode, or in the Scan mode, the radio automatically enters DSC mode when an All Ships Call is received. The type of call is displayed in the small channel display and an alarm is sounded.

Press the DSC/PRI key once and the radio automatically selects channel 16. There is no acknowledge required for an All Ships Call. If you do not wish to accept the call, press the 16/9 key to exit the DSC mode.

3.3.17.4 Group Call

The Group Call feature sends transmissions that are only received by radios that share a common Group MMSI number.

The RAY215 requires an optional Full Function Handset to program in the Group MMSI number. For this reason, a RAY215 equipped with only a Fist Microphone cannot send or receive Group Calls.

If you have used an optional Full Function Handset to program in the Group MMS1 number, you may use a RAY215 equipped with a Fist Microphone to receive Group Calls, even if the Full Function Handset is no longer attached. However, you cannot send Group Calls without the Full Function Handset.

If you are currently on a selected working channel, in the Monitor mode, or in the Scan mode when a Group Call is received, the radio automatically enters DSC mode, sounds an alarm, and displays the type of call as follows:

"Gr" for ROUTINE Group Call

"GS" for SAFETY Group Call

"GU" for URGENCY Group Call

As with any DSC operation, the call is made on channel 70. If a received signal is confirmed to be addressed to the group that your station belongs to, the radio switches to DSC receiving mode and does not send back an acknowledgment. If the received signal is not addressed to the group that your station belongs to, the unit returns to the mode before receiving the Group Call.

After receiving a Group Call, press and release the DSC key to accept the call. The unit switches to channel 16 and extinguishes the DSC indicator, indicating the unit has exited the DSC mode.

The large channel display indicates the working channel and the small channel display is extinguished. If you do not wish to acknowledge the call, press the 16/9 key to exit the DSC mode.

3.3.17.5 Distress Call

A Distress Call allows you to send out a digital "packet" of data at high power that includes your position, time, and MMSI number. All ships and stations outfitted with the correct type of DSC equipment will be able to pinpoint your position and either relay the information or respond directly. Using the Distress key overrides all other functions.

Sending a Distress Call

1. On the back of the microphone, lift the door marked DISTRESS.
2. Press and hold the red Distress key for 5 seconds. After 1 second, the LCD displays a countdown from four to zero, beeping every second.
3. When the countdown has completed, the radio enters the DSC mode, sounds a loud alarm, and sends the digital information at high power. Once transmitted, the radio monitors channel 70 for a Distress acknowledge but also monitors channel 16 for emergency traffic.

Note: When a Distress Call is sent, the unit emits a VERY LOUD distress alarm tone. To mute the alarm without interrupting the Distress Call, press the DSC/PRI key on the RAY215 base station. The radio will remain in DSC mode.

1. The Distress Call is automatically re-transmitted every 3.5 to 4 minutes as long as you remain in DSC mode. The radio continues to transmit until either an acknowledge is received or the DSC mode is manually exited by pressing the 16/9 key. The ACK indicator flashes, indicating the radio is monitoring for an acknowledge.
2. If a receiving station has Distress acknowledge capability and sends an acknowledge to you, the DSC tone sounds and the ACK indicator appears solid for 1 second. Next, the radio exits the DSC mode and switches to channel 16 for voice communications.

Receiving a Distress Call

When a DSC Distress call is received, the radio automatically enters DSC mode if you are currently on a selected working channel, in the Monitor mode, or in the Scan mode. You will not receive a DSC call if the radio is transmitting or receiving a non-DSC call.

1. When receiving a Distress Call signal, the unit sounds an alarm tone and enters the DSC mode. A "d" flashes in the small channel display for Distress.
2. Press the DSC/PRI key. The radio accepts the call, silences the alarm, and switches to channel 16.

Note: When a Distress Call is received, the unit emits a VERY LOUD distress alarm tone. Pressing the DSC/PRI key on the base station mutes this alarm but does NOT cancel the Distress Call.

1. The RAY215 does not have the ability to acknowledge or relay a DSC Distress Call so once the Distress Call is received, you should attempt to contact the vessel in distress on channel 16 and attempt to render assistance.

3.3.17.6 Distress Relay Call

Sometimes a ship's distress call can be relayed from another ship or a shore station. The RAY215 can only receive a Relayed Distress call; it cannot initiate one.

If the radio is active on a working channel, in the Monitor mode or in the Scan mode when a Distress Relay Call is received, the unit automatically enters DSC mode and emits an alarm tone. The DSC indicator illuminates, 70 is indicated on the large channel display, and "dr" flashes on the small channel display.

Press and release DSC/PRI. The unit switches to channel 16. "16" appears as the working channel on the large channel display while the small channel display is extinguished. The DSC indicator is also extinguished, indicating the unit has exited the DSC mode.

Note: When a Distress Call is received, the unit emits a VERY LOUD distress alarm tone. Pressing the DSC/PRI key on the base station mutes this alarm but does NOT cancel the Distress Call.

The alert tone continues to sound until DSC/PRI is pressed to accept the call or 16/9 is pressed to exit the DSC mode.

Equipment Operation

Miscellaneous Operation Information

Operator License

An Operator License is not required to operate a VHF Marine Radio within US territorial waters. However, a license is required to operate the radio if you dock in a foreign port (including Canada and Mexico) or leave a foreign port to dock in a U.S. port. You can request a Restricted Radiotelephone Operator Permit from the FCC by filing Form 753.

Remember:

• Maintain a radio watch on Channel 16. Channel 16 is used for distress and safety purposes only.
  • VHF Channel 70 is used only for Digital Selective Calling (DSC). It can not be used for general-purpose calling.
• Your VHF transceiver has a high low power switch. Use low power whenever feasible. Unnecessary high-power operations can interfere with other important communications.
  • Always use your radio call sign at the beginning and end of each transmission.
• Be sure only qualified persons operate your radio. You are responsible for control of your radio. Know the rules.
• Limit calls to other vessels to 30 seconds. If you receive no reply, wait 2 minutes; then try again. Keep communications brief and avoid chit-chat.
• Never transmit false distress messages, and never use profanity on the air.

Other Reminders:

• You can obtain a station license and call sign by completing FCC Form 605 and mailing it with the required fee (if required) to the FCC.
• You need a radio operator license to operate a VHF Marine Radio only if you plan to dock in a foreign port or leave a foreign port to dock in a U.S. port.
• Your radio license is not transferable. If you sell your boat, request the FCC to cancel your station license.
• If you replace your radio, you do not need to change your license unless the new radio operates on another frequency band. If you install equipment to operate on another frequency band, apply for modification of your license.

VHF Channel Usage Guide Information

Emergency

Channel 16

III

• Your ship is sinking, or on fire
  • Someone has been lost overboard
  • There exists grave and imminent danger

Use this distress procedure:

• Select Channel 16
  • Say "Mayday, Mayday, Mayday!"
  • Give call sign and boat name
  • Give location of boat
  • Describe emergency
• If no answer, repeat; then try another channel

Caution

Every ship at sea is to obliged to give absolute priority to radio communications relating to ships in distress - it is vital that false distress calls or messages not be broadcast.

Calling

Channel 16, 9, and Working Channel

If - you wish to establish communications with another station
And -you know which working channel the station is monitoring
Then - initiate the call directly on that working channel
If -you wish to establish communications with another station
And -you do not know what working channel the station may be monitoring
Then - initiate the call on channel 16. After contact is made switch to a working channel.

Note: Due to congestion on channel 16 caused by frequent hailing of other vessels, the FCC has approved channel 9 as a second hailing channel.

U.S. Coast Guard

Channel 22A

Vessels: Any

Use: Working channel for exchange of communications with stations of the U.S. Coast Guard
Between. Ship to U.S. Coast Guard ship, coast to aircraft stations
Compress: U.S. Coast Guard does not regularly monitor this channel. Establish contact on channel 16 and shift to channel 22A as directed.

Port Operations

Channels: IA, 5A, 12, 14, 20A, 65A, 66A, 73, 74, 77

Vessels: Any

Use: Messages relating to the operational handling, movement and safety of vessels in or near ports, locks and waterways.
Between: Ship-to ship or ship-to-coast
Comments: Channel 77 is limited to communications to and from commercial pilots concerning the movement and docking of vessels.
Note: Channels 11, 12, 13 and 14 are used for vessels traffic service on the Great Lakes St. Lawrence Seaway and designated major ports.

Navigation

Channel: 13

Vessels: Any

Use: Safety Communications pertaining to the maneuvering of vessels or the directing of vessel movements

Ship-to ship and secondarily ship-to-coast

This is commonly called the Bridge-to-Bridge channel. Large vessels and towboats depend on this channel for their safe navigation. Railway or highway bridges which open for slip navigation often operate on this channel.

Bridge-to-Bridge stations must reduce power to one watt for routine operations.

Non commercial (Boat Operations)

Channels: 9, 68, 69, 71, 72, 78A

Vessels: Recreational boats and any others not used primarily for commercial transport.

Use: Communications pertaining to the needs of the vessel (i.e., fishing, rendezvous, maneuvers, berthing, scheduling of repairs, provisioning, etc.)

Between: Ship-to-slip or ship to limited coast stations

Comments: Channel 72 may not be used for ship to coast communications. Channel 9 is shared with Commercial users.

If you regularly monitor one of these channels with a second receiver, please notify frequently-called stations of this practice. Help reduce congestion on channel 16.

Monitoring

Channel 16 and Working Channel

When - your VHF station is turned on and it is not being used to exchange communications

You Must - monitor channel 16

As an operating convenience, many stations employ a second receiver so that they can monitor a working channel and channel 16 simultaneously.

Intership Safety

Channel: 6

Vessels: Any

Use: Communicating navigational and weather warnings to other ships

Communicating with U.S. Coast Guard stations or other vessels during search and rescue operations

Between: Ship-to-ship only

Comments. Do not use for routine communications. This is a safety channel.

Equipment Operation

Commercial

Channels:

7A,8,9,10,11,18A,19A,67,79A,80A,88A

Vessels:

Those used primarily for commercial transport of persons or goods, or engaged in servicing other vessels

Use:	Communications pertaining to the purpose for which the vessel is used

Between:

Commercial transport vessels (ship-to-ship) or between commercial transport vessels and limited coast stations

Channel 8, 67 and 88A may not be used for ship-to-coast communications:

Recreational boats are not permitted to use these channels

Marine Operator

Channels:

24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 84, 85, 86, 87

Vessels:

Any

Use:	To place a telephone call to any location in the world or to a vessel outside of your transmitting range

Between:

Vessels and public coast stations

Comments:

Contact the marine operator on the channel assigned to your navigating area. If unable to determine this channel, use channel 16.

Be patient. Do not interrupt calls in progress. Avoid excessive calling if the operator does not answer - give the operator a chance to reply.

Weather

Channels:

WX0—WX9

Vessels:

Any

Use:	Continuous weather information from NOAA (National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration)

Between:

One-way broadcast from NOAA to any interested parties

Comments:

Receive only. You are not permitted to transmit on these frequencies.

PHONETIC ALPHABET:

To help make call letters more clearly understood, and to assist in spelling out similar sounding or unfamiliar words, radiotelephone users employ the international phonetic alphabet.

State Control

Channel:

17

Vessels:

State and local government

Use:	Coordination, regulation and control of boating activities and the rendering of assistance to vessels.

Between

Ship and coast stations associated with state and local governments.

Environmental

Channel:

15

Vessels:

Any (receive only)

Use:	Broadcast of information concerning the environmental conditions in which vessels operate - weather, sea conditions, time signals, notices to mariner, hazards to navigation

Between:

One-way broadcast from coast to ship stations

Note:

Currently used for Class C EPIRB emergency signals.

Phonetic Alphabet:

A - ALPHA

B - BRAVO

C - CHARLIE

D - DELTA

E - ECHO

F - FOX-TROT

G - GOLF

H - HOTEL

I - INDIA

J - JULIET

K - KILO

L - LIMA

M - MIKE

N - NOVEMBER

O - OSCAR

P - PAPA

Q - QUEBEC

R - ROMEO

S - SIERRA

T - TANGO

U - UNIFORM

V - VICTOR

W - WHISKEY

X - X-RAY

Y - YANKEE

Z - ZULU

FIRE EXTINGUISHER- AUTOMATIC

OVERVIEW

The Fireboy automatic fire extinguishing system is located in the bilge at the forward engine bulkhead. See the illustration. The system uses a environmentally friendly agent FE-241 which has been approved by the EPA to replace the old Halon agent. This system is formulated only for use in the engine space or bilge of your vessel. FE-241 is to be used with gasoline fuel systems only since the agent will not “stall” diesel engines. This could cause a fire to reflash.

OPERATION-AUTOMATIC

Fireboy systems are not nor are they intended to be explosion suppression devices. Boat owner's still need to take normal precautions for checking gasoline fumes and using blowers.

Read the information in chapter 4 regarding the dash installed portion of the fire extinguisher system. When the system actuation starts you may hear a loud sound simiar to that of small arms fire, followed by a rushing air sound. The system will show actuation whenever the ignition key is ON and the indicator light is OFF. The actual actuation time when a fire occurs is dependent on the severity of the fire.

When the automatic fire extinguisher activates IMMEDIATELY SHUT DOWN ALL ENGINES, POWERED VENTILATION (BLOWER), ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND EXTINGUISH ALL SMOKING MATERIALS. DO NOT OPEN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT IMMEDIATELY.

Allow the agent to “soak” the compartment for a period of time and wait for hot metals and any fuels to cool before inspecting for the fire cause. Premature opening of the engine compartment allows an in-rushing of oxygen and could result in a flash-back. When the engine compartment is opened have approved portable fire extinguishers ready to use.

OPERATION-MANUAL

If a fire has started in the engine compartment where the Fireboy is located, DO NOT WAIT FOR AUTOMATIC ACTIVATION. Release the system manually. Close any opened hatches leading to the engine compartment, shut down all forced ventilation devices, engines, generators and electrical components. Remove the safety pin from the "Fire" T-handle, and pull firmly and release. A loud "rushing" or air" sound will be heard. Complete discharge will take several seconds. DO NOT OPEN THE COMPARTMENT IMMEDIATELY! Keep the compartment closed for a period of time sufficient to allow the agent to soak all areas of the protected space. This allows hot metals to cool.

Equipment Operation

Premature opening of the compartment could cause a reflash. When opening the engine compartment for inspection have hand held portable extinguishers ready.

Inspect the pressure gauge and system before and after each outing. Refer to the maintenance chapter for caring for your fire extinguisher system.

The illustration opposite shows the actuator not discharged at the top and one which has been discharged at the bottom.

HATCH-ENGINE

One of the unique features of your vessel is the engine hatch. It opens with a hydraulic actuator from the rear which makes periodic bilge and equipment inspections much easier.

Also, there is a diamond plated aluminum stairway that leads into the compartment. For additional room the step unit can be set aside.

The engine compartment can be reached by pressing the hatch switch at the helm. At the starboard rear cockpit there is a second switch. See the illustration below.

You can activate the lights in the engine room (sometimes called the bilge), by activating the bilge light switch. All switches on the auxiliary panel are protected by breakers mounted on the lower switch panel.

There is a day hatch for checking engine oil, etc. If the batteries are “dead” the main hatch can be opened by first accessing the bilge through the auxiliary hatch. Pull the “C” clip. Then pull the hatch pin until it releases from the retainer. Push the hatch up. Secure to prevent the hatch from falling backward. See the illustration.

Equipment Operation

HEATER-HOT WATER

The hot water heater features an eleven gallon capacity and has recirculating ability to keep water warm during cruising. This is accomplished by a set of hoses connected between the hot water tank and the circulating engine water pump. Engine coolant runs through a heat exchanger which keeps the tank water warm when the engines are running.

To initially fill the hot water heater, ensure the boat's fresh water tank is full. When the tank is full water will be ejected from the deck vent. At the DC side of the main ship's AC/DC panel, turn the fresh water pump to the "on" position. Make sure the water heater is full of water by opening a hot water faucet until a steady stream flows out. With the generator running or the shore power connected, switch on the hot water heater at the AC side of the ship's service panel. The heating element will now begin to heat the hot water tank.

Should the hot water heater reset button need resetting, turn off the hot water breaker at the AC side of the main control panel. Then remove the panel cover to expose the reset button. Press the red reset button. After refastening the access panel, flip on the hot water breaker to continue the systems operation.

Should the need arise there is a drain valve located in the rear of the heater. Make sure the water is cold before attempting to open the valve. The valve runs through the shower sump pump and then overboard. Never try to adjust the thermostat or open the drain valve before turning off the AC breaker. Contact a marine professional for further information.

! CAUTION

TO AVOID POSSIBLE BODILY INJURY DUE TO ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT TRY TO OPEN UP THE HOT WATER TANK COMPONENTS WHILE THE AC POWER IS ACTIVATED. TURN HOT WATER BREAKER OFF AT THE MAIN AC PANEL.

HIGH WATER ALARM

The high-water alarm warns the skipper of a possible emergency in the bilge area. There is an automatic float switch installed in the center bilge. If the water rises over a predetermined level the switch sends a signal to the alarm at the helm which will sound.

If the alarm sounds stop the vessel and turn off the engines. Investigate the problem to determine the cause. Possible causes are:

1. Leaking engine and stern drive hoses.
2. Leaking around underwater gear (V-drive).
3. Leaking mufflers or exhaust hoses.
4. Hole in hull.
5. Leaking fresh water or waste tank.

Equipment Operation

MARKERS-FOR SLINGS

Sling markers are located on the forward and aft deck near the rub rail. These markers provide a safe location to locate straps to lift the boat. This location is even more critical with V-drive boats because of the driveshafts. Not using the sling marker locations could cause damage to the boat and or underwater gear.

As a precaution, make sure they tie a line between both straps as they lift the vessel to provide extra protection against the straps moving forward or backward.

PUMP-FRESH WATER

Your vessel features a variable speed fresh water pressure pump. It is important not to operate the pump unless there is water in the fresh water tank. The pump is controlled by a breaker on the main DC control panel. Energizing the switch allows the pump to build the water pressure in the distribution lines to 35 psi's.

When the pump reaches a level of 35 psi the pump should automatically shut off. If the system drops below a certain pressure then the variable speed pump will restart. If the pump cycles on and off with no water being used, a leak in the water system is likely. See the maintenance chapter for filter and other routine inspections.

Equipment Operation

SHOWER-TRANSOM

A shower is located in the cockpit on the starboard side near the transom door. The showerhead features a flexible extended hose with hot and cold water. Like residential plumbing, the red knob denotes hot and blue knob is cold. When using this feature balance the hot and cold knobs to achieve a safe operating temperature before using the showerhead for rinsing purposes.

SEAT-AFT BENCH

The aft bench seat is fully collapsible into the aft deck. To set up the seat do the following:

1. Lift up on the seat backrest with a brisk motion to free the backrest ball from the deck socket retainer. See illustration A.

2. Flip up the backrest to expose the seat framework and legs.

3. Pull each leg up toward the seat outside until they seat in the open position. Ensure they are fully extended. See illustration B.& C.

4. Pull the framework toward the bow and the seat bottom will pivot into place. Recheck the legs for a full extension.

5. To break down the seat grasp the seat bottom in the middle and lift it with one hand while pulling the seat backrest up. This will allow the seat to pivot back into the deck.

6. Push each leg inward until they lay flat.

7. Push the seat backrest to the aft with a brisk motion to secure the ball into the socket which holds the seat in place against the deck. See illustration D.

Equipment Operation

SEAT- HELM ADJUSTMENT

The double-wide helm seat features a leaning bolster that is great for docking and cruising. By flipping the seat cushion up more room is provided for standing while cruising. For docking sitting on the bolster seat provides additional bow visibility.

Fore and aft movement is controlled by a bar under the seat front. Pull the bar toward the center of the boat and move the seat fore or aft according to the direction desired. Release the adjuster and it will lock in the closest detent.

SPOTLIGHT

The optional "5" spotlight/floodlight uses a high-powered, dual focus sealed beam bulb. With an output of 72,000 candlepower, the unit can illuminate objects up to 1/4 mile away. Notwithstanding, the 30,000 candlepower spotlight is perfect for docking or mooring.

The unit rotates up to 350 degrees and as a vertical arc of 70 degrees and features an easy to use "joystick" style remote control. The spotlight uses a 12 volt operating system and is constructed of stainless steel or chromed brass for years of carefree service.

The spotlight control panel uses a 2 way switch to control the type of light output. To control the direction a 4 position joystick style switch is used.

The 2 way switch in the center position is "off". In the "up" position the light output is a spotlight. In the "down" position the light output is a floodlight.

To move the light upward press and hold the joystick "up". To move the light downward press and hold the joystick "down".

To move the light counterclockwise press and hold the joystick to port until the desired directional movement is achieved.

To move the light clockwise press and hold the joystick to starboard until the desired directional movement is achieved.

When trailering the boat, turn the lens so it faces the stern of the boat to help prevent a broken lens due to unidentified highway debris.

Equipment Operation

SUNPAD/CHAISE LOUNGE

The sunpad is a feature that should be used only when the boat is stopped since passengers must not be on the deck of the vessel while moving to avoid falling overboard.

To use the chaise lounge portion of the sunpad, pull up on the framework from a side position. Then pull the chaise lounge adjuster to stern which will lock it in an angled position. See the illustration. Make sure the cushion is completely snapped down to prevent it from coming loose and blowing off the deck.

SWIM PLATFORM

WARNING! MAXIMUM CAPACITY OF SWIM PLATFORM 750 POUNDS 453 KG

The extended swim platform is used with the ladder for people to enter and exit the water. Never dive from the platform. Make sure you do not exceed the platform weight capacity label found inside

the ladder cover or in the owner's packet.

Periodically inspect all swim platform fasteners found under the platform.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! DO NOT OPERATE THE VESSEL WITH PEOPLE ON TOP OR HOLDING ON TO THE SWIM PLATFORM STRUCTURE OR HARDWARE.

SWIM LADDER

When using the swim ladder, open the hatch and slide the ladder out to the end of the travel. Then flip the ladder over and let down gently. Make sure you keep your hands and fingers clear of any moving ladder parts especially the hinged top. Close the hatch cover at this point. Insist that only one person use the ladder at a time and that people do not use the any part of the outdrive to climb on the swim platform or ladder. Bodily injury could occur from falling or slipping into the water or propeller blades.

WARNING

TO AVOID BODILY INJURY TURN THE ENGINES AND GENERATOR OFF AND REMOVE THE IGNITION KEYS WHILE PEOPLE ARE SWIMMING NEAR THE VESSEL, USING THE SWIM PLATFORM OR LADDER.

Equipment Operation

TABLE-COCKPIT

To set up the cockpit table follow these steps:

1. Open the engine compartment. Lift the table from its designated storage area just forward of the starboard engine. The table if desired for day cruising can be stored under the circular seat.

2. Lift the forward most circular seat cushion to access the table pedestal base.

3. Turn the T-handle counterclockwise to release the pedestal base. See illustration A.

4. There is a threaded plate in the cockpit floor at the center of the circular seat where the cockpit table will be secured. See illustration B.

5. Place the pedestal base over the threaded floor plate and rotate the T-handle clockwise until the unit is tight. See illustration C.

1. The table leg is located under the circular seat. Place the table leg into the table receiver which is located on the bottom of the table. See illustration D.

2. Turn the table receiver knob until it is tight against the leg.

3. Insert the table and leg into the pedestal base. Check for tightness. See illustration D.

4. Push the adjuster rod which moves the table fore and aft for proper spacing.

Cockpit Table-Underside

Equipment Operation

WASH DOWN-FRESH WATER

The fresh water wash down is located on the forward deck at the forward port storage locker.

It consists of a cold water faucet. When the vessel is hooked up through the dockside water inlet the fresh water wash down operates using city water. Away from the mooring the vessel fresh water tank is its source.

To use connect a hose and nozzle to the faucet and turn the faucet handle. This feature is especially valuable for washing off salt spray or debris from the deck surface along with brightworks such as railings and deck components.

WATER INLET-DOCKSIDE

The dockside water inlet is located on the transom. It allows a dockside hose to be connected to the inlet valve hose bib. With the hose connected a valve inside the water inlet bypasses the boat's fresh water tank saving the on board water for cruising needs.

There is a regulator inside the water inlet that permits water pressures up to 35 psi's to enter the boat.

This eliminates excessive water pressure from bursting water lines and causing leaks in the boat's water system.

WINDLASS

WINDLASS-SAFETY WARNINGS

◆ Ensure that limbs, fingers, hair and clothing are kept clear of the windlass and anchor during operation.

◆ Check to see that there are no swimmers or divers nearby before dropping the anchor.

◆ Remove the handle from the gipsy when operating the windlass from the foot controls or helm switch power.

◆ Always turn the windlass power supply to the “off” position when not in use.

◆ While at anchor, the load on the chain/rope must be transferred to a cleat.

◆ Do not use a windlass as a holding device for towing.

◆ Never use a windlass to lift a person, boat, etc.

◆ Check to make sure the permit switch is locked when the windlass is not in use.

◆ Remove the anchor safety lanyard before powering up the windlass.

◆ Fasten the anchor safety lanyard immediately after the anchor is positioned at the bow.

◆ Do not attempt to pull a load greater than the rated load of the windlass.

◆ Always use the vessel's engines to aid anchor recovery.

♦ Refer the the windlass manufacturer's owner manual for more detailed operating and maintenance information.

Equipment Operation

WINDLASS OPERATION

A Lewmar® Concept 1 series windlass features a chain, line, and anchor. There are dual operating foot controls on the forward deck. These foot controls operate the anchor up or down by pressing the appropriate foot switch.. The deck foot controls work independently of the helm switch. See the illustration for location.

The helm switch is located at the starboard switch panel. It can be identified by its red lock-out button. Note that the lock-out button in the "off" position prevents the windlass from accidentally letting the anchor out. The lock-out switch must be activated in order to permit usage of the windlass helm switch. In the normal switch position the lock-out switch is in the "off" position. To deactivate the lock-out feature of this switch first press the red button down. At the same time with another finger press the top section of the lock-out switch until the switch snaps to the "on" position.

Rope	Gypsy No.	Chain	Gypsy No.	Rope
1/2" (12 -14mm)	000	1/4" ACCO G40 1/4" ACCO BBB 7mm ISO		N:A
1/2" - 5/8" (12 ±16mm)	001	8mm DIN765 8mm ISO	201	1/2" - 5/8" (12 -16mm)
1/2" - 5/8" (12 -16mm)	002	5/16" ACCO G40 9.5mm ISO 10mm DIN 766	202	5/8" (16mm)
5/8" (16mm)	003	10mm ISO 3/8" ACCO G40	203	5/8" (16mm)
N/A		12mm ISO 13mm DIN768 7/16" ACCO G40	204	3/4" (18 - 20mm)

The windlass switch to the right of the lock-out switch is now ready for operation. There is a foot control shut off switch located in the starboard bow locker. When this switch is in the "off" position both deck foot controls along with the helm windlass switch can not be used.

NOTICE

THE ANCHOR SAFETY LANYARD MUST BE RELEASED FOR THE ANCHOR TO BE OPERATED THROUGH THE WINDLASS CONTROL. RECONNECT ANCHOR LANYARD AFTER RETRIEVING ANCHOR.

Keep all body parts and loose clothing clear of the chain and gypsy to avoid personal injury. The windlass should not be the only means of releasing the anchor. Never use the windlass under power with the emergency handle inserted into the clutch nut or gypsy cap.

To let out the anchor make sure the gypsy is tight (insert the handle in the gipsy hole and turn clockwise; gypsy cover will tighten up) and the safety lanyard is released from the anchor chain. Use the down foot control or the helm switch to let the anchor out while backing down slightly in reverse.

We recommend that the vessel's engines are running and are used in reverse slightly to break the anchor loose instead of the windlass. Once loose, press the up foot control switch or use the helm switch to retrieve the anchor. As the anchor approaches the boat slow the retrieving process down so the bow is not damaged by the rising anchor. Maintain sufficient chain tension to control the vessel and prevent the bow from swinging. Be sure you use the engines to first break the anchor free from the bottom. Watch the anchor as it approaches the bow to avoid damage.

To let out the anchor with the emergency handle, insert the handle in the gypsy. Unlock the gypsy just enough so the anchor will begin to let itself out.

To retrieve the anchor with the emergency handle turn off the cut-out switch in the forward locker. Tighten the gypsy by inserting the handle into the square hole. Crank the handle in a clockwise direction to bring the anchor up. Some resistance will be felt because you are turning the motor as well as retrieving the anchor.

Before maintenance is performed, remove the chain from the gypsy and rope from the drum. Periodically spray down the outer casting of the anchor windlass. Use only chain and spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer.

A 90 amp breaker located at the DC distribution panel protects the windlass motor. The windlass circuit is protected by a 3 amp in-line fuse located at the deck relay near the bow. When replacing this fuse be sure the fuse is of the slow blow type.

Equipment Operation

WINDSHIELD-CENTER LATCH

WIPER-WINDSHIELD

The center windshield must be latched while the vessel is in motion. To latch the center windshield, turn the two locks to a full horizontal position. When the boat is at mooring open the center windshield and let it rest on the magnet which secures the windshield.

The pantographic wiper holds the blade against the tempered windshield glass for improved windshield wiping. Do not operate the wiper with a dry windshield.

Blades can be ordered through your Regal dealer or a marine supply center.

The wiper motor is accessed by removing the inside hatch deck ring and the screws under the lights at the center headline panel.

VALVES-FUEL TANK/GENERATOR

Fuel Tank Selector Valves

The fuel tank selector valves are found on the port engine bulkhead on stern drive models or at the transom area with V-drive boats. The system controls the flow of fuel from both fuel tanks.

When one tank is close to empty, you need to change to the other tank to balance the fuel levels. Failure do to this could cause the engines to injest air through the lines causing a lean fuel condition.

Set the valves to the desired fuel flow by turning them in the proper direction. You can feel the valves seat in the detented position. When leaving the vessel, turn off both fuel selector valves.

Engine Fuel Selector Valves

Generator Fuel Valve

The generator valve functions like the fuel selector valve. Monitor the fuel gauge so both fuel tanks stay fairly even when using the generator. When one fuel tank is quite a bit lower than the other fuel tank, just change the fuel selector valve. When leaving the vessel, turn off the generator fuel control valve.

Generator Fuel Valve

Optional Equipment

Equipment Operation

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT-OVERVIEW

The 3760 features various components as optional equipment. This chapter breaks down selected optional equipment and provides general operating information.

Selected optional equipment is listed in alphabetical order by nouns to help you find it easier.

More detailed information can be found in the manufacturer's owner's manual or possibly on the internet.

Equipment or vendors may change during a boat's life cycle as we are constantly upgrading our product line. Regal at any time retains the right to change vendors, equipment, specifications and other technical data.

A quick reference listing for optional equipment is found on the next page.

Optional Equipment Component Page #

Bottom Paint 155

Cablemaster System 156

Camera Monitoring System 158

Electronics- Autopilot 159

Electronics- "E" Series GPS/Plotter 163

Electronics-Radar 173

Gas Vapor Detector 178

Generator 179

Hard Top 190

Neutra-Salt System 192

Overboard Discharge Pump (Macerator) 193

Refrigerator/Icemaker Combo 194

Stereo CD Changer 197

Amplifier & Woofer 198

iPod Adapter 199

Performance Package 201

Sirius Satellite Radio 202

Sirius Marine Weather 203

Teak Inlay Swim Platform 205

Underwater Lighting 206

Vacuum System 207

Equipment Operation

BOTTOM PAINT

As a factory option two coats of “Trinidad” bottom paint are applied to your vessel. This Pettit Paint Company product provides top-of-the-line antifouling protection. It contains the highest percentage of cuprous oxide to aggressively combat even the worst tropical conditions. This product will help reduce annual hull maintenance. Trinidad’s hard epoxy base produces the most durable finish for long lasting performance. If your vessel is left in the water the paint provides effective year round service.

Periodically check the bottom of the boat for growth. The vendor recommends scrubing the bottom with a soft brush to remove anything from the antifouling surface. This scrubbing is particularly important with boats that are idle for extended periods.

Note: When touching up the bottom with Trinidad epoxy paint wait at least 3 days before relaunching the vessel. Always leave at least 1 1/2" between any metal objects and the bottom paint to help prevent electrolysis. See the illustration.

NOTICE

CONTACT YOUR ENGINE MANUFACTURER FOR THEIR POLICY REGARDING PAINTING STERN DRIVES.

REGAL DOES NOT USE BOTTOM PAINT ON STERN DRIVE UNITS.

1 1/2" Clearance For Electrolysis Protection

CABLEMASTER SYSTEM

The optional Glendinning cablemaster system on the 3760 is designed to eliminate the paying out and coiling up of your shore power cable. Just flip a switch or use the remote control to let cable out or in. There is a storage container for the automatic coiling of the 30 amp cable. used on your vessel. See the illustration for a full description of cablemaster parts:

Overview

The cablemaster system on your 3760 consists of two main components; the hause pipe and power unit. See the illustration.

The chromed hause pipe is designed to accommodate 30 or 50 amp cable through the power plug cover. The unit will pull in or let out up to 75' of coiled cable quickly. Within the hause pipe there is a neoprene gasket which helps prevent the entrance of water and cleans the cord as it is retracted in the boat.

When the cable is retracted completely, the plug cover actuates the in-limit switch which is mounted on the face of the gasket plate inside the hause pipe.

The drive motor, reduction gears, guide roller assembly and the relay comprise the power unit. A clamp holds the hause pipe in place. The main cable of the unit travels freely which allows the cable to be manually payed in or out.

The out-switch is located in the guide roller assembly. The nylon safety collar, which is installed around the shore power cable, activates the out-limit switch. This collar also serves as a mechanical stopping device should the limit switch fail or should the shore power cable be forcibly pulled out.

Equipment Operation

How To Use Cablemaster System

To extend the cable:

1. Flip the power switch to the “out” or up position or activate the “out” button on the remote control. Grasp the power cord plug.
2. Walk to the dock power source and plug the shore power cord intothe receptacle.
3. Cablemaster will automatically shut itself off when the cable has been fully extended. If you do not need the entire cable length turn the power switch to the "off" position. Flip the power switch to the "in" position or use the remote control.
4. Turn power switch to the “off” position when the correct length of cable is retracted. Make sure the cable is not under strain or in the water. In coastal areas allow for tide changes.

To retract the cable:

1. Disconnect the shore power cord from the dockside power source.
2. While holding the power cord, walk toward Cablemaster unit.
3. Flip the power switch to the "in" or down position at the cablemaster unit or remote control.
4. Cablemaster will automatically shut itself off when the cable has been fully retracted.

NOTICE

DO NOT MOVE VESSEL UNTIL CABLES ARE FULLY RETRACTED.

The cablemaster unit should be able to pay in and out the cable without any slippage or any undue strain. Some assistance may be required on long out runs or multiple bend situations.

Retracting the power cord should not be any problem.

Refer to the maintenance chapter for information regarding friction adjustment between the main pulley and the shore power cable.

Note: Each cablemaster cord is protected by a 15 ampre in-line fuse located inside the DC distribution panel. This panel is found at the forward engine bulkhead.

Before attempting to open the DC distribution front panel turn off all DC battery switches.

They are located inside the cockpit circular seat under the aft cushion. Use a screwdriver to remove the screws holding the front panel. Carefully lift the front panel forward to access the in-line fuses.

You will see the fuses behind the front cover. They are connected through the breaker marked DASH.

CAMERA MONITORING SYSTEM

Overview

This option features three Raymarine® CAM100 day and night vision cameras. Two cameras are mounted on the hardtop or arch facing aft to assist docking operations. The third camera is in the salon. The cameras can be monitored from the helm “E” series GPS/plotter or from the salon television.

The Raymarine® cameras are a high quality 550 TVL horizontal resolution color unit with 14 infra-red light emitting diodes (LED's) offering superior clear viewing in pitch black darkness. The lights radiate a blue output. The units run on 12 volt power.

The cameras are part of the video display on the “E” series plotter. The cameras can be adjusted 90 degrees vertically and can be rotated 360 degrees.

Operation

You can set-up the GPS/plotter display page to view all 3 cameras at once. See the instructions below.

A. With the power on select OK.

B. Choose MENU.

C. Choose PAGE SET.

D. Choose CUSTOM.

E. Choose EDIT PAGE SET.

F. Select the layout (page type you want; for example fourths, thirds, etc.) with arrow pad from the selections on the display. Select OK when finished.

G. Choose the application (video w/camera icon) that you want to view in the window.

H. Exit- Push OK button. Cameras should be ready.

Once the display is set-up as outlined above each time you want to view the cameras from the display do the following:

1. Press the red power button on the GPS/Plotter display to energize the display.

2. Select "VIDEO" 2-4 on the display to view the cameras. Three of the four videos are designated for the cameras. Video 1 is vacant for add-on equipment such as a DVD player to be viewed from the display.

To view the cameras from the salon television turn on the TV set. At the television remote control choose the "MEDIA" button. The cameras should appear on the screen.

If the set picture seems to be oblong you can adjust the picture format by pressing the "SRC" button. For viewing cameras the 4:3 format is correct. When watching regular television programming switch to the 16:9 format.

Equipment Operation

ELECTRONICS- AUTOPILOT

Autopilot Key Components

The computer is mounted under the helm. The autopilot system is protected by a breaker located at the helm breaker panel.

Overview

The Raymarine® autopilot is a Regal option available only on V-drive or IPS vessels. It uses the standard steering system to distribute fluid through a drive unit (hydraulic pump) as required to the steering ram and finally to the rudder which turns as directed through the SmartPilot Controller and computer.

The SmartPilot is a helm mounted component. It sends course information to the computer (as inputed by the skipper) and to the rudder position sensor which results in steering changes to hold a programmed course.

A fluxgate compass mounted through the computer recognizes changes in direction quickly and the information is used by the computer to make course signal changes. The fluxgate is the priority compass. Other compasses data connected to the system will receive a lower status.

Operation

The autopilot operation is presented here in a series of quick reference cards. Basic information is provided in the following pages; more detailed information is found in the manufacturer's operation manual. The controller operates in the following modes:

1. Standby- SmartPilot off. Captain has control of vessel.

2. Auto- SmartPilot steers the boat to maintain a locked heading.

3. Track- SmartPilot steers the boat to maintain a track between two waypoints created on a navigational aid.

4. Wind Vane- SmartPilot steers the boat to maintain a course relative to a true or apparent wind angle.

5. Automatic Track- In Auto & Wind Vane modes.

6. Waypoint Advance Feature- In Track mode.

Below are the basic directions for the SmartPilot Controller buttons which is mounted on the helm.

All the buttons are confirmed with a short beep. Besides the single-task buttons, there are several dual-task button operations.

To power up the SmartPilot Controller do the following:

1. Turn the battery switches under the cockpit circular aft seat cushion to the "on" position.

2. Turn the electronics switch to the "ON" position at the starboard helm switch panel.

3. On the SmartPilot controller press the STANDBY button for manual control. The SmartPilot Controller always powers up in the stand-by mode showing the boat's current fluxgate compass heading.

Once energized follow the Quick Start Guide to program basic course information into the system. For more advanced information refer to the Raymarine® owner's manual.

ST2000 CONTROLLER BUTTON FUNCTIONS

Equipment Operation

Autopilot response controls course keeping accuracy. Higher response settings keep a tighter course but increase the amount of drive activity and battery use. Set to a level appropriate for your needs

Use -1 or +1 to adjust response level. Press disp to return to previous mode.

N.B. Refer to section 1.5 of the ST6002 Operating Guide for full details

Use disp to adjust lighting level. Wait 10 sec to return to previous mode.

Equipment Operation

ELECTRONICS- "E" SERIES PLOTTER

The optional “F” series display by Raymarine® features basic navigaiton, radar, monitoring courses, fishfinder, Navtex capabilities, Sirius weather data, viewing video images, and 3D charting.

To use the "E" series display:

1. Make sure the battery switches are energized. The switches are located under the aft circular seat cushion.

2. Activate the electronics switch at the helm switch panel located at the starboard coaming panel.

3. Press the red power switch to energize the plotter.

4. In this manual a series of cards are used to show the advanced operations of the "E" series unit. Several of the basic training cards are shown. For more basic operation information refer back to the "C" series plotter. Refer to the Raymarine® operator's manual for more detailed information.

Viewing the GPS/Plotter On Salon Television

1. Follow steps 1-3 as noted earlier on this page to power up the plotter.

2. Use the page and active keys to select the page and window.

3. Power up the salon television with the remote control.

4. Find and select "MEDIA" on the remote control.

5. The display on the plotter should now be able to be viewed on the television.

6. To get a true shape verses the oblong shape that may appear on the television press the "SRC" button. Now change from the 16:9 format to the 4:3 format. Press the "SRC" button on remote to exit.

General Operation

The control panel

Card No. 1

Equipment Operation

General Operation Using the controls

Card No. 2

How do the controls work?

Buttons

• Access system functions or change what you see on-screen. Within the text of this document they are written in bold capitals e.g. WPTS/MOB.
• Press and hold to access short cuts - see individual buttons on facing page.

Example:

This example shows the series of button and soft key presses required to change the waypoint default symbol or group.

Soft keys

• They change depending on application or function being performed.
• Press and hold MENU to display help information for the currently displayed soft keys.
• Press the corresponding key (below the screen) to select.
• Further soft keys may be displayed. If a key has several options, each press will highlight the next option.
• If a key displays a single value or a slider above, use the rotary control to adjust.
• Within the text of this document they are written in capitals e.g. SORT LIST.

This process of pressing buttons and soft keys to navigate to the required function, is simplified within this guide and represented by a strip e.g.

The Cursor

The Cursor appears on the screen as a white cross.

To make it easier to locate on screen, the cursor changes to a circle with a cross in it, when it is moved after a 10 second period of inactivity.

The cursor is context-sensitive. When it is placed over an object e.g. a waypoint or chart feature, it changes color and a label or information associated with the object is displayed. When you place the cursor over certain items, the soft keys change to enable you to access related operations.

General Operation Setting up the display

Card No. 3

How do I select how the applications are displayed?

The applications are shown using a combination of page sets, pages and windows. There are five page sets each containing five pages with a combination of windows and applications in each. These sets can be edited to define the combination that suits your particular needs.

Any changes you make will be saved to the system. You can change these preferences as many times as you wish.

(1,2,3 or 4 windows)

How do I select the Page Set?

Note: Alternatively you can display the Select Page Set screen via the Menu key.

How do I select a Page?

Note: Alternatively, repeatedly press PAGE until the required page is highlighted.

How do I select a Window?

To temporarily maximise active window:

Press ACTIVE again to return to multiple windows mode.

Equipment Operation

What can I see?

Displaying additional information

Card No. 7

Viewing object information

You can now:

• Locate the nearest waypoint, port, port service, tidal and current stations, wreck or obstruction, to the selected position.
• Search for a named port.

Finding nearby features and services:

Displaying port services:

Displaying tidal and current details:

What can I see?

Displaying additional information (continued)

Card No. 8

How do I display a panoramic photo?

If you are using a suitable chart card, you can display a panoramic photo(s) of many ports and marinas. The availability of photos is indicated by the camera symbol on the chart. This symbol is placed where the photo was taken and the angle of the shot is indicated by the camera symbol.

How do I display pilot book information?

This will enable you to view detailed information normally contained in an almanac..

1. 

How do I display aerial photo overlay?

3D - Aerial photo overlay can be switched off via the 3D Chart Setup Menu.

The aerial photo overlay feature will help you to interpret your environment and its features. If you are using a suitable chart card, this overlay will appear by default on 3D chart windows and can be applied to individual 2D chart windows when required.

Applying aerial photo overlay to a 2D chart:

2D - Adjust the opaqueness level using the rotary control. Specify land only or land/sea overlay via the cartographic menu.

Equipment Operation

What can I use the 3D chart for?

If you are using a suitable chart card you will be able to:

- Display a 3D view of land, sea & features.

- Interpret your surroundings.

● Synchronize the 2D and 3D chart.

- Locate where you are.

● Monitor where you are going.

- Go to an existing waypoint.

- Navigate a route.

How do I move around the 3D chart?

• Press RANGE (OUT) to see a larger area of the chart.
• Press RANGE (IN) to see a smaller area in more detail.

To pan the 3d chart:

● To pan a 3D chart to a different area

To adjust rotation/pitch

1. Select rotate or pitch:

Or

ADJUST ROTATE PITCH Toggle control to required function

1. Adjust the rotation/pitch:

Rotates the view or changes the vertical angle of view.

Changing the view on the 3D chart

To enhance objects and make it easier to see their shape and position:

How do I find where I am on the 3D chart?

Your position:

If you cannot see your boat symbol:

The 3D chart automatically redraws with the boat in forward looking view at your current position.

How do I change the motion mode?

Active motion mode

Default mode when 3D chart opened and there is a valid fix. Shows aerial view from above your boat.

Planning mode:

To view an area of the chart you are not currently in. The boat may not remain on the screen.

To change to planning mode and pan to the area of the 3D chart you want to view:

Using aerial photographs

The aerial photograph overlay helps you to interpret features in your environment. This option is accessed via the 3D Chart Setup menu.

Synchronize 3D chart with 2D chart

Equipment Operation

Navtex and Sirius Weather Data

Card No. 21

Navtex

If connected to a Navtex receiver, you can use your display to view navigation, meteorological and search and rescue alerts. You can choose which category of alerts will automatically be displayed when one is received by your display. After you have read the message you can either erase it or save it to the database (100 maximum). You can view the list of saved messages at any time. Messages are viewed and alerts set-up via the Setup Menu option Navtex Messages.

Viewing saved messages

The Sirius Weather application (USA only)

To run the Sirius Weather application you will need to purchase an SR100 weather receiver and a subscription to Sirius weather.

Once connected, the weather application superimposes historical, current and forecasted weather graphics and environmental conditions on the world map and provides textual forecasts and warnings. These help you to determine the actual conditions in your vicinity or at a particular location.

As in the chart application, use the cursor to move around the map and view different locations, and the range button to zoom in and out.

To re-center the map on your boat use the FIND SHIP soft key.

Note: As with all weather services, the information presented is advisory only and you should be aware that errors may occur.

Weather symbols (USA only)

Equipment Operation

ELECTRONICS- 4KW CLOSED RADOME & OPEN ARRAY RADAR

Both the Closed Radome and Open Array optional radar units are compatible with both “C” and “E” GPS/Plotters. Both deliver peak performance on Regal boats. All hardtop boats feature the Open Array unit. The basic operations are covered in this manual by a series of cards. Refer to reference manual for more detailed instructions. Both radar systems are protected by a breaker labeled radar plotter at the helm breaker panel. To use either radar unit the electronics breaker at the main DC distribution panel must be energized. Turn on either the “C” or “E” plotter at the red power button at the plotter display.

What is around me? Understanding the radar

Card No. 13

VRM/EBL	TARGET TRACKING	GAIN	ENHANCE ECHOES...	PRESENTATION

What does the radar show me?....

Typically your boat's position is at the centre of the display, and its dead ahead bearing is indicated by a vertical heading line, known as the Ship's Heading Marker (SHM).

Remember that the radar picture may vary from visual observations that you make; a nearby small object may appear the same size on the screen as a distant large object. However, with experience the approximate size of different objects can be determined by the relative size and brightness of the echoes.

How do I measure distances, ranges and bearings with the radar?

VRMs

Align a VRM on a target to display its range from your boat:

e.g.

ADJUST VRM 1.800nm

EBLs

Align an EBL on a target to display its bearing relative to your boat's heading:

e.g.

ADJUST EBL 30.0°S

Combined VRM/EBL

Combine a VRM and EBL to measure range and bearing of specified target. e.g.

ADJUST VRM1.800nm

ADJUST EBL30.0 ° S

Range rings

Use the range rings to gauge the approximate distances between two points or from your boat.

Note: Range/bearing also displayed when VRM/EBL selected with the cursor.

Equipment Operation

What is around me? Avoiding a collision

Card No. 14

How can the radar help me avoid a collision?

You can set up your E-Series Display to sound an alarm when anything comes within a pre-set range of the boat. These guard zones allow you to take any necessary action to avoid a collision.

Guard zones

A sector or circular zone fixed with respect to the Ships Heading Marker (SHM). If the SHM moves, or the centre is offset, or the range scale changes, the zone moves accordingly.

What does a guard zone display?

IMPORTANT

A guard zone:

• Will only operate when a whole zone is displayed on screen, or displayed by offsetting the centre.
• Is inactive for 10 seconds after it is placed or re-sized, to avoid inappropriate alarms.

How do I set up a circular guard zone?

1. Select guard zone function:

1. Select guard zone option:

How do I distinguish between fixed and moving objects?

To switch radar overlay on/off:

You can overlay radar image data on your chart allowing better distinction between fixed objects and other marine traffic.

With a 2D chart window active:

To switch chart/radar synchronization on/off

For best results, also switch on chart/radar synchronization.

With a 2D chart window active:

To change scanner range in this mode:

What is around me?

Using MARPA....

Card No. 15

MONITOR IN ZONES	ACQUIRE TARGET	MARPA & AIS OPTIONS	MARPA LIST	AIS LIST

What is MARPA?

Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (MARPA) functions are used for target tracking and risk analysis. MARPA improves your standards of collision avoidance by obtaining detailed information for up to 10 targets, and provides continuous and rapid situation evaluation.

MARPA tracks the selected targets and calculates target bearing, range, true speed, course, Closest Point of Approach (CPA), and Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA). Each tracked target can be displayed with a CPA graphic depicting the approximate target speed (vector length) and course (vector direction). Alternatively, move the cursor over the target to display the range and CPA. You can now access bearing and speed. Each target is continually assessed. An alarm sounds if a target becomes dangerous or lost.

NOTE: For MARPA to operate, fast heading data is required.

How do I set up the MARPA functions?

How do I acquire a MARPA target?

MARPA target symbols

Target being acquired

Safe target

Dangerous target

How do I view details of MARPA targets?

Tracked targets with data listed.

How do I cancel MARPA target(s)?

Equipment Operation

What is AIS?

AIS uses digital radio signals to broadcast 'realtime' information between vessels and shore based stations via dedicated VHF frequencies. This information is used to identify and track vessels in the surrounding area and to provide collision avoidance data. AIS will augment your radar application, as it can operate in radar blind spots.

In order to use the AIS feature, you will need a GPS and compass for timing and position information together with data from a suitable AIS receiver.

How do I display AIS?

How is AIS data displayed?

The AIS system displays other AIS equipped vessels in the surrounding area as targets overlaid on a chart or radar window. Up to 100 targets are displayed and are scaled according to the size of the vessel. A vector indicates the direction of travel of the vessel. As the vessel's status changes, the symbol for the target will change accordingly.

You can view detailed AIS data, safety critical target information, alarm messages (ALR) and safety related messages (SRM). You can also set up a safe zone.

AIS target symbols

Sleeping target

• Target not activated, dangerous or lost.

Activated target

• Target activated i.e. AIS vector displayed.
- Vector line (optional) shows predicted distance travelled within given time.

Selected target

• Target selected with cursor.
- Can activate the target and view detailed data.

Dangerous target

• Targets within specified distance (CPA) or time (TCPA).
- Dangerous target alarm sounds and target flashes.

Uncertain target

• Calculated CPA/TCPA value uncertain.

Lost target

• When signal of a dangerous AIS target not received for 10 seconds.
• Target orientated in COG or CSE direction as appropriate.
  • Alarm sounds and target flashes

How do I view target information?

How do I view detailed AIS data?

WARNING:

Smaller vessels do not have to be fitted with AIS and whilst it is mandatory for larger commercial vessels to carry AIS, its use is not. You should not assume that your AIS will display ALL vessels in your area.

GAS VAPOR DETECTOR

Overview

The gas vapor detector option monitors the engine compartment for accumulations of gasoline vapors. In the event of vapors, an alarm will sound at the helm.

The operator must take immediate action to avoid the possibility of an explosion. Do not turn on any electrical components until the source is identified and repaired.

Check all possible gasoline lines and fittings for leaks along with the engine and generator fuel systems. Gasoline vapors normally will collect low in the engine compartment.

Operation

The display panel on the gas vapor detector gauge contains three windows.

1. The left window is a green power on indicator.
2. The right window is an opening for the Var-a-brite light intensity indicator.
3. The center window is the red warning indicator.

The gas vapor detector is protected by a 5 amp breaker located on the helm breaker panel.

The unit is “on” at all times as long as the breaker has power and in the monitor mode, as indicated by the green indicator light.

Upon power up, the green power on the LED will come on and the red warning LED may light momentarily to indicate a warm-up period for the sensor. The alarm horn will not come on during this period.

Should a vapor build up reach 10-20% of LEL (Lower Explosion Limit) the red warning LED will light indicating a detection of fumes. Should this condition last longer than 10 seconds, the alarm horn will sound. This alarm will continue as long as there are vapors present.

The alarm horn may be silenced by pressing the “mute” switch, but the red warning LED will remain on until the vapor problem has been corrected.

NOTICE

THE VAPOR PROBLEM SHOULD NEVER BE CONSIDERED CORRECTED UNTIL THE RED WARNING LIGHT GOES OUT.

If the red LED light begins to glow softly and/or intermittently, it is an indication that a gasoline vapor build-up is beginning to occur and you can anticipate a full alarm momentarily.

In The Event Of An Alarm

Immediately evacuate all passengers and crew from the cabin of the vessel. If a fire or explosion should occur, the probability of injury will be greatly reduced if no one is in the cabin. All passengers must put on their life jackets immediately.

It is important to understand, however, that an alarm would not have occurred unless a problem existed. Carefully check all gas hoses, lines and fittings for leakage.

Equipment Operation

GENERATOR-GAS/DIESEL

OVERVIEW

As optional equipment, Regal installs a 7.3 Kw Kohler gas or 8 Kw diesel generator. The units features a sound shield enclosure for lower decibels and a digital controller for diagnostics and system monitoring.

Information enclosed here represents the latest at the time of print. More detailed information can be found in the Kohler generator operating manual, by visiting KohlerPowerSystems.com, or by calling toll free 1-800-544-2444.

Carefully read and follow all procedures and safety instructions to ensure proper equipment operation and to avoid bodily injury. Reference the Kohler service requirements which can be located in the maintenance chapter.

Note: Where diesel generator information differs from gasoline generators special notation is made by bolded and slanted type.

OPERATION

Perform the following inspections and checks before each startup, as designated, and at regular intervals as noted in the service schedule.

1. Air Inlets- Check for clean and unclogged air inlets.
2. Air Shrouding- Ensure the sound shield is securely fastened and positioned correctly.
3. Backfire Flame Arrestor- Check for a clean flame arrestor to prevent unfiltered air from entering generator.

4. Battery- Check for proper electrolyte level. Make sure all battery connections are secure.

5. Coolant Level- Check the reservoir for proper levels.

6. Exhaust System- Check for exhaust leaks and blockages. Check the silencer and piping condition and check for tight exhaust component connections.

Inspect the exhaust parts (exhaust manifold, catalyst, exhaust hose, hose clamps, silencer and outlet flapper) for cracks, leaks and corrosion.

◆ Check hoses for cracks, softness, dents, or leaks. Replace as necessary..
◆ Check for corroded or broken metal parts. Replace as necessary.
◆ Check for loose, missing or corroded hose clamps. Replace or tighten the hose clamps and hangers as needed.

◆ Check that the exhaust outlet is unobstructed.

◆ Visually inspect for exhaust leaks (blowby). Check for carbon or soot residue on exhaust parts which indicate an exhaust leak. Seal leaks as needed.

◆ Ensure the CO detector on the vessel is functional and energized when the generator is running.

DANGER

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH DUE TO CO POISONING! NEVER OPERATE THE GENERATOR WITHOUT A FUNCTIONING CO DETECTOR.

◆ Fuel Level- Check your fuel tank levels.
♦ Oil Level- Keep the oil level topped off with the correct type and even with the dipstick top mark.

◆ On diesel generators the water separator filter should be checked for moisture and debris which will be located at the bottom of the sediment bowl. Drain as needed and retighten all hardware. Dispose properly of all fluids and rags.

♦ Operating Area- Check for anything that could block the flow of air. Keep the air intake area clean. Never leave tools, rags, or debris on or near the generator set.

♦ Seawater Pump Priming- To prime the pump:

1. Close the seacock.
2. Remove the hose from the water filter outlet.
3. Fill the hose and seawater pump with clean water.
4. Reconnect the hose to the water filter outlet.

5. Open the seacock.

6. Confirm the seawater pump operation on startup as indicated by water discharge from the exhaust outlet.

Under normal conditions the consumer should not need to prime the seawater pump unless the boat has been out of the water for extended periods.

Equipment Operation

Digital Control Station

The digital control is found only at the generator itself and works independently of the generator control located at the ship's main distribution DC panel. The digital control is useful when service work is being performed on the unit and saves traveling from the bilge to the salon to start the generator.

The digital control main features are as follows:

1. Display panel- shows running time. Acts like an hour meter. In addition, display shows various fault conditions.

2. Buttons to change factory set information.

3. Master switch- This 3 way switch provides an auxiliary location for the customer to start the generator for service intentions. The 3 switch positions are:

A. Center position- OFF

B. Port position- RUN (Used to start the generator at the unit; slight delay in starting when you press the run position while the computer starts the unit)

C. Starboard position- AUTO (This is the position the master switch must be in to start the unit from the DC distribution panel in the salon). Be sure to turn the switch back to auto before reinstalling the sound shield or the generator will not start from the ship's distribution panel.

NOTICE

ON GAS GENERATORS ENSURE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ABOVE THE DIGITAL CONTROL IS UP

WHICH IS THE "ON" POSITION.

THIS PROVIDES A PATH FOR THE ELECTRICTY TO REACH THE SHIP'S AC DISTRIBUTION PANEL.

On diesel generators the circuit breaker is located behind an access panel found below the digital control. See the diesel generator parts description illustration.

Generator- Pre-Start Procedure

To start the generator from either the engine compartment or the ship's distribution panel do the following:

1. Make sure the generator seacock is in the "open" position.
2. Make sure the generator fuel selector valve is on.

On diesel generators there is a fuel supply shut-off valve located on the port fuel tank. Make sure it is in the "on" position, before attempting to start the diesel generator.

3.. Operate the blowers for at least 4 minutes before attempting to start the generator and check the engine compartment for gasoline fumes. Keep the blower on until the generator is shut down.
4. At the ship's AC panel make sure the transfer breaker is in the "OFF" position.
5. At the ship's DC distribution push the start toggle switch "up" which will crank over the generator. Release the toggle switch when the generator starts.

If you are starting the generator at the unit (engine compartment), push the "run" portion of the master switch until the generator starts. Again, ensure that the breaker located above the digital control is in up which is the "on" position. See the illustration at the end of the chapter for circuit breaker exact location.

1. Let the generator warm up by letting it run for several minutes.
2. During this warm up period make sure there is water exiting the generator exhaust located at the hullside.

Generator- Stop Procedure

To stop the generator from the unit itself or from the ship's distribution panel do the following:

1. Turn all A/C equipment breakers to the "off" position.
2. Push the transfer bar up and turn off the transfer breaker.
3. Let the generator idle for a few minutes to cool the unit down.
4. To stop the generator from the unit itself, flip the master switch to the "off" position.

From the ship's distribution panel find the start/stop switch. Push the switch down until the generator stops.

Equipment Operation

1. Spark plug (also one located on the nonservice side)
2. Oil fill
3. Overflow tube
4. Pressure cap (coolant fill location after draining coolant)
5. Seawater pressure switch (appears as auxiliary fault on ADC)
6. Lifting eye
7. Heat exchanger
8. Anticorrosion zinc anode
9. AC circuit breaker
10. AC load lead connector (nonservice side)
11. Nameplate (top)
12. Customer interface connection (nonservice side)
13. Fuses (F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, and F7) (see Section 2.7.2)
14. Runtime hour display
15. Advanced Digital Control (ADC 2100)
16. CO sensor module

17. Generator set master switch

18. Catalyst assembly, water outlet/exhaust outlet (nonservice side)

19. Seawater drain (remove plate for service)
20. Seawater pump (water inlet)
21. Cooling air inlet
22. Fuel filter/fuel inlet
23. Fuel pump
24. Fuel pump/cooler
25. Oil check
26. Coolant drain (remove hose clamp to drain coolant)
27. Oil drain valve
28. Lube oil filter
29. Coolant overflow bottle (daily coolant check/fill location)
30. Air intake silencer/backfire flame arrestor

DIESEL GENERATOR PARTS DESCRIPTION

1. ADC 2100 Control
2. Run-C#/Reset-Auto switch
3. Nameplate
4. Mixing elbow (water outlet/exhaust outlet), far side
5. Air intake silencer/cleaner
6. Lifting eye
7. Coolant overflow bottle (location varies by model)
   B. Fuel feed pump
8. Oil check/dipstick
9. Coolant pressure cap
   11 Coolant overflow tube
10. Oil fill (engine top)
11. Lube oil filter
12. Fuel filter
13. Oil fill (front gear cover)
14. Seawater pump and water inlet
15. Oil drain valve and hose
16. Strain relief for the load lead cable
17. Alternator coding air inlet
18. AC circuit breaker panel
19. Anticorrosion zinc anode (seawater drain)
20. Belt guard
21. V-belts
22. Engine coolant drain (all models except
23. Heat exchanger (all models except 13-24EOZD &
24. Heat exchanger (13-24EOZD & 11-20EFOZD models, Internal to exhaust manifold)
25. Seawater drain (13-24EOZD & 11-20EFOZD models)
26. Engine coolant drain (13-24EOZD & 11-20EFOZD models)

Equipment Operation

Generator- Fault Shutdowns

The generator unit shuts down automatically under the fault conditions on the following pages. The display panel at the unit will show a default code.

The generator cannot be restarted until the fault condition is corrected and the controller is reset. See the shutdown code listing on the next page.

The high engine temperature switch automatically resets when the generator cools down. However, the fault does not clear until the controller is reset.

The controller displays a fault warning code but the generator does not shut down under the conditions shown below in the illustration.

FAULT WARNING CODES- NO SHUTDOWN

Code	Fault	Description	Check
CO-4	Carbon monoxide warning	Fault code is displayed if the presence of CO is detected because of the time-weighted average presence of CO. Activates the CO cabin alarms.	Ensure windows are open for proper ventilation.Operate the blower to expel dangerous fumes.Move the vessel away from other vessels (as another vessel may be the source for the presence of the CO).Check the generator exhaust system (see Section 3.6).Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service if problem continues.
CO-5	Carbon monoxide warning	Fault code is displayed if the presence of CO is detected. Warning occurs if the sensor detects acceptable but increasing CO levels.	Ensure windows are open for ventilation.Operate the blower to expel dangerous fumes.Move the vessel away from other vessels (as another vessel may be the source for the presence of the CO).Check the generator exhaust system (see Section 3.6).Generator service for emissions required.Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service if problem continues.
CO-6	Carbon monoxide sensor warning	Fault code is displayed if the CO sensor is inoperative.	Replace the CO sensor.Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service if problem continues.
HB	High battery voltage warning	Fault code is displayed if the engine starting battery voltage rises above 16 VDC for a 12 VDC system or above 30 VDC for a 24 VDC system for more than 2 seconds when the engine is not running. This fault condition does not inhibit engine starting.The fault condition clears when the battery voltage returns to a voltage within the limits for more than 2 seconds.	Check the battery rating and condition.
LB	Low battery voltage warning	Fault code is displayed if the engine starting battery voltage falls below 9.5 VDC for a 12 VDC system or below 16 VDC for a 24 VDC system for more than 2 seconds when the engine is not running. This fault condition does not inhibit engine starting.The fault condition clears when the battery voltage returns to a voltage within the limits for more than 2 seconds.	Check the battery rating and condition.Charge or replace the battery.

FAULT SHUTDOWN CODES

Code	Fault	Description	Check
AF	Auxiliary fault input shutdown	Input from a customer-supplied switch that closes when the fault is active. Shutdown occurs 0.3 seconds after the fault is detected. This protection becomes active 3-seconds after crank disconnect.	Check the cause of the auxiliary fault.
CO-1	Carbon monoxide shutdown	Sensor fault shutdown occurs because of the presence of CO.	Immediate service required. Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service.Ensure windows are open for proper ventilation.Operate the blower to expel dangerous fumes.Move the vessel away from other vessels (as another vessel may be the source for the presence of the CO).Check the generator exhaust system (see Section 3.6).
CO-2	Carbon monoxide shutdown	Shutdown occurs because of the presence of CO or deteriorating emission-control components (such as the catalyst).	Immediate service required. Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service.Ensure windows are open for proper ventilation.Operate the blower to expel dangerous fumes.Move the vessel away from other vessels (as another vessel may be the source for the presence of the CO).Check the generator exhaust system (see Section 3.6).
CO-3	Carbon monoxide sensor shutdown	Shutdown occurs if communication is lost between the CO sensor and the ADC.	Check the connections to the CO sensor.If connections are okay, replace the CO sensor.Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service.
HE	High engine temperature shutdown	Shutdown occurs if the engine coolant temperature exceeds the maximum temperature for more than 5 seconds. This protection becomes active after the engine reaches the crank disconnect speed.Note: The high engine temperature shutdown functions only when the coolant level is in the operating range.	Check for a low engine coolant level.
LOC	Loss of coolant shutdown	Shutdown occurs 5 seconds after a loss of coolant condition is detected. This protection becomes active 10 seconds after the engine has reached its stated crank disconnect speed and remains active as long as the generator run command is active.	Check for a clogged seawater intake or sea strainer.Check for a damaged seawater pump impeller.
LOP	Low oil pressure shutdown	Shutdown occurs if a low oil pressure condition exists for more than 5 seconds. This protection becomes active 30 seconds after the engine has reached crank disconnect speed (30 second inhibit).Note: The low oil pressure shutdown does not protect against low oil level. Check the oil level at the engine.	Check for leaks in the lubrication system.Check the oil level and add oil if the level is low.
OC	Overcrank shutdown	Shutdown occurs after 3 unsuccessful starting attempts. The crank cycle is set for three starting attempts.	Check the fuel supply and battery.If there is no output voltage, check the line circuit breaker. Also check for loose connections.Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service if problem continues.
OF	Overfrequency shutdown	Shutdown occurs when the governed frequency exceeds 110% of the system's frequency setpoint for more than 5 seconds. This protection becomes active 10 seconds after engine start (10 second inhibit).	Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service if problem continues.
OS	Overspeed shutdown	Shutdown occurs if the engine speed exceeds 115% of the normal running speed for more than 0.3 seconds.	Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service if problem continues.
OU	Overvoltage shutdown	Shutdown occurs if the voltage exceeds 120% of the voltage regulator setpoint for more than 2 seconds.	Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service if problem continues.
UF	Underfrequency shutdown	Shutdown occurs when the governed frequency falls below 90% of the system's frequency setpoint for more than 5 seconds. This protection becomes active 10 seconds after engine start (10-second inhibit).	Reduce the load and restart the generator set.Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service if problem continues.
UU	Undervoltage shutdown	Shutdown occurs if the voltage falls below 80% of the voltage regulator setpoint for more than 10 seconds.	Reduce the load and restart the generator set.Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service if problem continues.
SCF0	Controller error	Indicates a software or communication problem within the ADC 2100.	Contact an authorized distributor/dealer for service if problem continues.

Equipment Operation

Generator- Fault Shutdowns

Always identify and correct the cause of a fault as shown on the opposite page before resetting the controller at the generator unit. When a fault shutdown occurs follow this procedure to reset the controller.

1. Move the generator set master switch to the "OFF/RESET" position.
2. Disconnect the generator unit from the load using the line circuit breaker. The circuit breaker is located above the digital controller at the generator unit. See the safety warnings at the beginning of this chapter. Refer to illustration A.
3. Identify and correct the cause of the fault shutdown. See the safety warnings at the beginning of this chapter.
4. Start the generator set by moving the generator set master switch to the "RUN" position. Test run the generator to make sure the fault has been corrected.
5. Shut the generator off by moving the generator set master switch to the OFF/RESET position.
6. Reconnect the generator line to the load by turning on the generator circuit breaker located above the digital controller.
7. Move the generator set master switch to the AUTO position for startup.

Fuse Identification

Label	Fuse	Amps
F1	Auxiliary Winding	10
F2	Controller	10
F3	Protects Switch Wiring From Genset to Dist. Panel	10
F4	Coils/Injectors	15
F5	ECM, O2 Sensor, and Fuel Pumps	15
F6	Voltage Regulator and Battery Charging Alternator	15
F7	Starter Motor and Crank Solenoid	20

Generator- Gasoline Fuel System Bleeding

The gasoline generator fuel system may in the course of normal operations require bleeding. This could be caused by:

1. Running out of gasoline at the generator.
2. Clogged fuel filter
3. Poor grade gasoline
4. Vapor lock

WARNING

FIRE OR EXPLOSION

CAN CAUSE BODILY INJURY OR DEATH!

DO NOT SMOKE OR PERMIT FLAMES

OR SPARKS NEAR FUELS

OR THE FUEL SYSTEM.

To bleed air from the gasoline generator fuel systemuse the following procedure with the sound shield removed.

1. Press and hold the Select button on the Advanced Digital Control (ADC).
2. While holding the Select button, move the generator master switch to the RUN position.
3. Keep holding the Select button until step 6. The ADC software version and then FUEL will appear on the ADC's LED display.
4. Remove the cap from the location shown in illustration.
5. Hold the bleed tool (part number GM46327) on to the bleed point to remove air from the line.
6. When fuel begins to drip from the hose (on the bleed tool) release the SELECT button and replace the cap.

1. LED display
2. Select button
3. Generator set master switch

ADC 2100 Control

2

1. Blood point (with the cap removed)
2. Blood tool (with fuel drain hose attached)

Bleed Location

Equipment Operation

Generator- Diesel Fuel System Overview

Air can accumulate in the generator fuel system and cause starting failures or rough operation. Causes during normal operation of the vessel may require the system be bled.

1. Operating the generator unit until it runs out of fuel.
2. Developing air leaks between the fuel tank and the engine mounted fuel pump.
3. Replacing the fuel filter.

Generator- Diesel Fuel System Bleeding

To bleed air from the diesel generator fuel system use the following procedure with the sound shield removed:

1. Loosen the fuel filter screw at position 1 per the illustration.
2. Initiate the auto/start sequence until fuel, free of air bubbles, flows from the vent screw at position 1. Tighten the screw.
3. Loosen the fuel filter screw at position 2.
4. Initiate the auto/start sequence until fuel, free of air bubbles, flows from the vent screw at position 2. Tighten the screw.
5. Loosen the fuel injection pump screw at position 5.
6. Initiate the auto/start sequence until fuel, free of air bubbles, flows from the vent screw at position 5. Tighten the screw.

HARD TOP

As an option the hard top is a fiberglass unit which provides a stable mounting platform for radar and various aftermarket components. It provides shade and protection from the elements.

The hard top features lighting which is energized from the cockpit aft panel or from the helm. There is an access area integrated into the ceiling for routing wiring.

The canvas attaches to the forward and aft hard top. The canvas is Sunbrella which is a 100% solution dyed fabric.

Regal features a clear vinyl sheet called Strataglass as part of the hard top canvas enclosure. Strataglass is a premium, flexible coated sheeting engineered to resist the damaging effects from the sun's rays, environmental fall-out, and scratching from handling. It blocks out 100% of the spectrum of UV light.

Several hints to extend the life of Strataglass:

1. Always roll the curtains for storage. Never fold them as they will be damaged.

2. Do not use RAINEX on Strataglass as it will eventually dull the surface and presents a orange peel effect.

3. Do not use cleaners, polishes, scratch removers, or any other product made for regular, uncoated vinyl.

4. Do not handle Strataglass with sunscreen on your hands! This will permanently cloud the material where handled.

5. Never use a wash & wax product on Strataglass.

6. Never use harsh cleaners like Simple Green or pine based solutions as they will dull the curtains quickly.

7. Strataglass recommends IMAR which are specially made products for Strataglass. IMAR Strataglass Protective Polish, IMAR Strataglass Protective Cleaner and mild soap preferably IMAR Yacht Soap Concentrate.

8. Strataglass recommends using IMAR Strataglass Protective Polish every 2 to 3 months (every 4 to 6 weeks in areas of high fallout). In the interim, use IMAR Strataglass Protective Cleaner frequently.

9. All new vinyl can develop impressions in itself. If possible leave the enclosure canvas up. If completely removed, enclosures must be interleaved with either acid-free paper (available from framing shops) or old sheets (the best choice) to prevent “pooling” in the clear glass, vinyl seasons over time and becomes less impressionable. Roll all curtains down and fasten in place nightly to keep perfect appearance.

Review at www.strataglass.com

Cleaning Strataglass

Flush thoroughly to cool the surface and rinse away environmental abrasives. Wash with IMAR Yacht Soap Concentrate, or other equally gentle and high quality soap. Do not use Simple Green or pine based cleaners as they will dull the surface. Apply soapy water to a clear vinyl section of the curtain with a special surface washing mitt or soft cotton cloths. Throughly rinse the soapy solution with fresh water and completely dry the curtains with a high quality chamois. (Swobbit.com makes several tools to make these tasks easier). Your clear vinyl curtains should be washed whenever your boat is washed.

Equipment Operation

After washing the curtains, apply IMAR Strataglass Protective Polish sparingly with small, light circular motions using a soft cotton cloth. Finally, lightly buff to a high shine.

HARD TOP PARTS DESCRIPTION

NEUTRA-SALT SYSTEM

Neutra-Salt Engine Flushing System is available as an option on Volvo gasoline engines only. It's purpose is to flush salt deposits that develop in the engine cooling systems. It is intended for engines that operate in brackish or salt water areas only. The system is not intended for fresh water use.

! CAUTION

THE NEUTRA-SALT SOLUTION WILL FREEZE. IF FREEZING CONDITIONS ARE POSSIBLE DRAIN THE ENTIRE SYSTEM.

The Neutra-Salt solution leaves a corrosion inhibiting coating on all metal engine parts. The solution travels into the engine through a solenoid (after a rocker switch is activated) and a set of connecting hoses. The manufacturer recommends using the system at the end of each boating outing. Extra solution (Volvo #41103103 available in quarts and gallons) should be available from your Regal dealer.

FILL & TEST SYSTEM

1. Pour the quart bottle of Neutra-Salt concentrate into the reservoir. Wear protective eye-wear & gloves since the concentrate may cause an eye irritation. In case of contact, flush eyes throughly with water for 15 minutes.
2. Mark the fluid level on the reservoir. To prevent hearing loss, avoid prolonged exposure to the audible alarm on the engine, particularly in confined spaces. The alarm can reach 120 decibles.
3. Re-connect the power supply.
4. Connect water supply (flushette) so that the engine can be run.
5. Start the engine. Run at idle.

1. Hold the rocker switch on for 45 seconds. Turn the engine off and then release the switch.

2. Check the reservoir, the fluid level should have dropped 1/4".

3. Hold the rocker switch on for 45 seconds. Turn the engine off and then release the switch.

4. Check the reservoir, the fluid level should have dropped 1/4".

If the reservoir does not drop 1/4" it may be necessary to repeat steps 1-6. Run the engine at 1500-2000 rpm's to help begin the fluid flow. For normal operation, run engine at idle.

1. If the fluid is still not flowing from the reservoir, check the following;

a. Check hoses for knicks and leaking clamps.

b. Check the vent hole in the reservoir cap for blockage.

c. Check that the solenoid opens when the switch is on and key is on run.

d. Check the fuse.

e. Check the solenoid connection.

f. Check for a secure ground connection.

Equipment Operation

OVERBOARD DISCHARGE PUMP (MACERATOR)

The overboard discharge pump (macerator)) can be used to pump out the holding tank in international waters.

When the monitor panel key is energized to the full start position, the macerator engages to pump the tank waste overboard. Again, make sure it is legal to pump the waste overboard before you start the operation. Also, open the waste seacock located in the sump. The pump can be disconnected from the 2 union fittings that hold it for maintenance purposes.

The pump is rated for 40 minutes continuous operation. Do not flush paper or feminine hygiene products into the waste system. Keep toilet tissue usage to a minimum. Do not use bleach or toilet cleaners in the waste system. Use only maine approved products. Rinse and flush the holding tank after each pump out. This will dilute any residual waste, and help prevent blockage and reduce odors.

The macerator is protected by a 7.5 amp fuse located in-line at the pump itself. For extended cruising it is recommended to carry extra pump fuses along with an extra impeller. The impeller grinds up the waste as it passes through the macerator.

FRESH WATER & WASTE MONITOR WITH OVERBOARD DISCHARGE

OVERVIEW

◆ The U-line refrigerator-icemaker produces up to 18 pounds of ice daily. The removable ice bucket stores up to 13 pounds of ice.

- It runs on 120 volts AC voltage.

◆ The unit requires up to 18 amps to start and runs after initial start-up on 2.5 amps.

◆ The refrigerator capacity is 2.1 cubic feet.

◆ Travel door pin helps keep door secured in rough seas.

◆ Icemaker conserves water. Only uses 2 1/4 gallons to produce 18 pounds of ice.

◆ In door storage- 2 shelves expand bottle storage.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1. Shock Hazard- Never attempt to repair or perform maintenance on the unit until the breaker has been turned off.

2. When defrosting do not use any type of heater to melt the ice. Trying to speed up the defrosting with a heater can cause personal injury and damage to the inner lining.

3. Never use an ice pick or other sharp object since they can damage the unit or the inner liner.

4. Never obstruct the front air intake grilles. Keep the grille clean.

5. Failure to clean the condensor every 3 months could cause the unit to fail.

6. In freezing climates take the necessary steps to turn the incoming water off and purge the lines. The inlet water valve is accessible by removing the 2 grate screws. It is located on the starboard side of the unit.

Equipment Operation

OPERATION

On initial start-up all units are shipped with controls that are preset and do not require any adjustments.

The unit should be allowed to run overnight prior to loading the refrigerator/icemaker combo with food and liquids. Always throw

away all ice cubes made during the first three hours of operation.

To begin operating the icemaker circuit turn the icemaker breaker to the "ON" position at the ship's distribution panel. The breaker is a 15 ampre capacity. To start the unit, press the on portion of the switch located at the bottom center around the grate.

To adjust the temperature turn the knob clockwise as shown in the illustration. Allow time for the temperature to adjust. Factors which affect the internal temperatures of the cabinet include:

√ Temperature setting
√ Air temperature where the unit is installed
√ Number of times and length of time door is opened
√ Unit in direct sunlight or near a heat source

Icemaker

During periods of limited usage or high surrounding temperatures, it is common for ice cubes to fuse together. Shake the bucket to break apart cubes. If the icemaker is not used regularly, the ice bucket should be emptied periodically to ensure fresh cubes.

It is common for ice cubes to appear cloudy. This is caused by air being trapped in the water due to fast freezing. It has nothing to do with the health, taste, or chemical make-up of the water. It is the same air that you find in each glass of water you drink.

The ice bucket can be removed for emptying and cleaning. To remove the ice bucket, raise the bin arm and remove the bucket from the ice compartment. See the illustration. Use the ice bucket for ice storage only.

When the icemaker bucket is full, the ice making mechanism will shut off. However, the refrigeration system will continue to cool and maintain the cube supply. Ice production may be interrupted by raising the bin arm into an upright and locked position. The unit will maintain temperature for ice storage.

If you are not intending to use the ice maker and turn the water supply valve off, you must raise the bin arm of the ice maker. Failure to do so may result in damage to the water valve.

Normal Operating Sounds

Your refrigerator/icemaker combo features rigid foam insulated cabinets to provide high thermal efficiency and maximum sound reduction for its internal working components. In spite of this, the unit still may make some unfamiliar sounds.

Normal operating sounds may be more noticeable because of the unit's environment. Hard surfaces such as fiberglass floors have a tendency to reflect normal appliance operating noises.

Common refrigeration components, and a brief description of the normal operating sounds they make, are listed below.

Note: Your unit may not contain all of the components listed.

√ Compressor- The compressor makes a humming or pulsing sound during normal operation.
√ Evaporator- Refrigerant flowing through this unit may sound like boiling water.
√ Condensor Fan- May hear air moving through it.
√ Water Valve- At each cycle, a buzzing sound is heard.

Periods Of Non-Use

During extended periods of non-use take the following precautions. See chapter 10 for winterization information.

1. Turn off the 15 amp icemaker breaker at the ship's AC distribution panel.
2. Turn the unit to the "OFF" position at the power valve.
3. Raise the bin arm to turn the icemaker off.

4. Empty the refrigerator of all items. Clean the interior of the unit with a mild non-abrasive detergent and warm water solution applied with a soft sponge or soft cloth. Rinse with warm water and a soft sponge. For rust spots use Bon-Ami®or Barkeepers Friend Cleanser® See chapter 8 for further cleaning and maintenance information.

5. Prop the door open. The unit will manually defrost.

Equipment Operation

STEREO/ CD CHANGER/AMP/WOOFER

The CD changer features a 6 stack capacity. It is located in the cabinet directly below the AC/DC panel. The system can be played through the stereo unit. See the stereo DISC instructions earlier in this chapter for specific operation.

Before using the CD changer make note of the following information referencing the above illustration.

1. The disc magazine holds up to 6 discs. Make sure the magazine is positioned with the “disc” symbol on top. Pull the tray out by the corner projection provided.

2. Place each CD disc on a separate tray with the label facing upwards. Insert the magazine until it locks in place. Check the CD's and the trays for proper insertion. The CD discs are numbered from 1 to 6.

Take care to make sure to insert the trays into the correct grooves in the magazine and to insert the CD discs properly into the tray grooves. Failure to follow this procedure could lead to disc or equipment malfunction.

Insert all the trays even though some may not contain a CD disc or a malfunction may occur.

NOTICE

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO USE A 3 INCH DISC

WITH AN ADAPTER

SINCE IT WILL NOT EJECT

FROM THE MAGAZINE.

1. Open the CD changer door by sliding the panel to the right.
2. Insert the magazine into the changer until it clicks.
3. Close the CD changer door. This prevents dust and dirt from being drawn into the unit.
4. To eject the magazine for CD access, open the magazine panel door and press the EJECT button.

Be sure the magazine door is completely open or the changer could be damaged when the eject cycle is activated.

Since this CD changer is text-capable, make sure the O-N switch is always in the N position. In this mode, the disc titles and track titles provided by the CD text function can be displayed.

AMPLIFIER/WOOFER

As part of the CD changer option package a 200 watt amplifier is included. It is located in the salon cabinet near the CD changer unit.

In theory there is a P control blue wire that runs from the CD receiver through the amplifier to the speakers to boost the output.

As the CD receiver volume is extended the amplifier output automatically rises to increase the speaker amplification.

To protect the amplifier unit, there are two 5 amp fuses embodied in the amplifier. To protect the stereo wiring there is a 30 amp fuse at the forward engine bulkhead.

At the amplifier there is a power indicator that lights when the power is in the “ON” position. If the power indicator does not light there could be a short-circuited speaker wire, speaker wire grounded, loss of continuity in the ground circuit wiring or an overheated amplifier.

The 10" subwoofer in the salon features a dual voice coil to handle maximum power output. To adjust the woofer sound as part of the overall speaker adjustment use the AUDIO CONTROL and AUDIO SETUP modes as described in the stereo CD receiver earlier in this chapter. The subwoofer has no individual adjustment.

SUB WOOFER AMPLIFIER CONNECTIONS

Equipment Operation

iPOD ADAPTER

The iPod adapter option is prewired to fit most iPods. It is located in the locker under the AC/DC panel.

To use your iPod:

Operation

1. Connect the iPod into the adapter cord. The unit plays the music you have previously downloaded from your computer through the stereo receiver.
2. Energize the iPod.
3. At the CD receiver, press the SRC button until "MEDIA" appears on the faceplate.
4. Adjust the volume control on the receiver to the desired level.

The iPOD adapter supplies power to the connected iPOD and charges its battery while playing music as long as the CD receiver is energized.

Forward Search/Reverse Search For Song Selection

Press and hold << or>> button on the CD receiver.

Pausing A Song

Press >II button on the CD receiver.

Display Items On CD Receiver

The receiver displays the following items corresponding to the music items of the iPOD.

1. Browsing (music menu) items:

Displayed in the first part of the disc title display area.

1. Title names:

Displayed in the second part of the disc title display area.

1. Title number:

Displayed in the disc number display area. Titles in the list are numbered in order and the title number displayed corresponds to the selected title.

1. Song name:

Displayed in the track title display area.

1. Number of songs:

Displayed in the track number display area. Song names in the list are numbered in order and the song's number displayed corresponds to the selected song.

Selecting Browsing (music nenu item)

Press SCAN button on CD receiver.

The browsing items are selected in the order shown below. After selection the first song will begin to play..

Browsing Items Display
Playlists PLY
Artists ART
Albums ALB

Selecting A Title

Press FM or AM button on the CD receiver.

Pressing the FM button changes the title to the next one. Pressing the AM button changes the previous one.

When any title is selected, the first song in the selected title will begin to play. Tiltle number 1 in playlist corresponds to the songs in browsing music menu items.

Selecting A Song

Press the << or >> button on the CD receiver. Pressing << button plays the previous song. Pressing the >> button plays the next song.

Direct Searching

You can select a title or song quickly by directly entering the number of title or track on the remote control of the CD receiver.

1. Enter the number of a title or track using number keyson the remote control.

2. If you search for a title press the FM or AM button on the remote control. If you search for a track press the << button or >> button on the remote control.

Shuffling And Playing All Your Songs

You can set the iPOD to play songs in random order.

1. Play a title number 1 in playlist.
2. Turn on the shuffling function by pressing the RDM button on the CD receiver.
3. Start shuffling by pressing the >> button on the CD receiver. During the shuffling playback, title numbers are displayed in the order determined by shuffling.

Repeating A Song

You can set your iPOD to repeat the currently playing song.

1. Play a song you want to repeat.
2. Start repeating by pressing the REP button on the CD receiver.

Equipment Operation

PERFORMANCE PACKAGE

The optional stereo performance package consists of 2 additional speakers and a second 400 watt amplifier to drive the system. The amplifier is located behind the AC/DC distribution panel.

The amplifier is protected by a 30 amp fuse located on the unit itself. To protect the performance package circuit wiring a 30 amp fuse is located behind the AC/DC panel.

TYPICAL AMPLIFIER

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO

This 2006 option is currently available on all Regal models. Sirius satellite radio features over 120 channels of music entertainment completely commercial-free along with sports and news channels. Sirius emphasizes the music and entertainment you want. Channels use the most updated digital filtering available for the clearest sound. Sirius uses three satellites flying over the United States for coast to coast coverage with high elevation angles. The result is a clearer line of sight and less signal blocking. The system consists of the Kenwood stereo receiver (sometimes called the head unit), Kenwood Sirius radio tuner and antenna. With these components and an active account (6 month initial free subscription initialized by your Regal dealer on delivery) your Sirius system should be activated.

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ACTIVATION

It is the delivering dealer's responsibility to activate the account for the new owner. Following are the activation steps to be taken:

A. Unit must be completely installed and the antenna must have a clear view of the sky.

B. Turn on the radio and go to satellite mode.

C. Confirm reception by tuning to SIRIUS WEATHER & EMERGENCY/CHANNEL 184. If you are not receiving Channel 184, please refer to the radio manufacturer owner's manual.

1. For standard KDC stereo receivers-In Sirius mode, hold menu button for 2 seconds until menu appears. When you release the menu button "BEEP ON" will appear on the display. Use the AM/FM buttons to tab through the menu selections until you come to ESN (4th menu selection), the ESN number then will scroll across the display.

For optional performance package KTS stereo receivers-In Sirius mode depress "Menu" button for a few seconds to display menu. Press the AM button, the ESN number will then be displayed. The ESN is the last menu item selection and the AM button will take you directly to the bottom of the list.

D. Call SIRIUS customer care at 1-888-539-7474 or 1-888-580-7234 to activate.

E. Please have the customer's name, address, phone number and the SIRIUS ID#ESN available for the agent.

Sirius Marine Weather Antenna

Equipment Operation

SIRIUS MARINE WEATHER

This option provides peace of mind and safety by allowing the captain to access the latest weather information through satellite. The data can be viewed through the "E" series GPS/Plotter (option) at the helm or the salon television.

The service provides comprehensive weather data and state-of-the-art forecasting including buoy reports, WSI NOWRad® (nationwide high-resolution weather radar imagery) to anticipate coming trouble and high-resolution sea surface temperatures that can help fisherman. Subscribers can use the SIRIUS satellite footprint which blankets 48 contiguous states, most of Canada and Mexico; and waters extending hundreds of miles into the Atlantic and Pacific oceans, the Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean.

SIRIUS MARINE WEATHER ACTIVATION

1. Power up the receiver by activating the power button on the "E" series GPS/Plotter.
2. Dial 1-800-869-5480 to activate the service. Note that the dealer normally carries out this operation. Regal supplies a 6 month subscription for the customer.
3. Be prepared with your billing information, subscription preferences and the SIRIUS ID# for your receiver.
4. The SIRIUS ID# of your receiver will be viewable via the "E" series GPS/Plotter.

OVERVIEW

The following information is for United States weather only. A Navtex receiver must be used for worldwide weather.

The weather application superimposes historical, live and forecasted weather graphics and their associated weather data on the “E” series GPS/Plotter. All this information allows the skipper to determine the actual conditions in his vicinity or at another location. Weather forecasts and warnings, detailing current and preferred conditions are updated often using the WSI NOWRad® system.

For types of warnings, watches and advisories, please refer to the NOAA website at www.nws.noaa.gov

OPERATION

To operate SIRIUS marine weather:

1. The Raymarine SR100 receiver must be up and running. Also, it will not work in a covered boat house or dwelling.
2. The "E" series GPS/Plotter must be energized.
3. For your vessel to be displayed and for weather reports to be available at your position, you will need a fix for your boat's position and be within US coastal waters.
4. You must customize a page to include a weather application. The weather application is not part of the pre-configured page sets. See the next page for set-up.
5. Specify the weather elements you want to display.
6. When you open the weather application, a map is displayed. If you have fixed a position for your vessel, the map will be centered on your boat.
7. Use the cursor to move around the map and view different locations. Use the range button to zoom in and out. For re-centering the map on your boat, use the FIND SHIP soft key.

Weather Application Set-Up

To customize a page on the "E" series GPS/Plotter for weather do the following:

1. Press and hold the "PAGE" key until the "SELECT PAGE SET" box appears.
2. Using either the rotary knob or the directional pad, select the page set to which you wish to add weather.
3. Press the soft key labeled "EDIT PAGE SET", then press the soft key that corresponds with the page you wish to edit.
4. At this point, you will be able to change the page layout using the directional pad and reconfigure all windows in the page or you can leave the layout the same by pressing OK.
5. Press the "ACTIVE" key repeatedly until a red box appears around the application for the selected window (in this case, weather).
6. When your page is set up with the desired set of applications, press "OK".

Note: Once you actually start to manipulate the pages, on screen instructions will guide you through the process.

Reconfiguring For Weather Application

Editing A Page Set

Sirius Marine Weather Map(Typical)

Equipment Operation

TEAK INLAY FOR SWIM PLATFORM

The teak inlay used on the swim platform provides a genuine wood appearance. Wash down with water as needed. Use teak cleaning and sealing products to keep in tip top shape and protection from the severe marine environment.

! WARNING

AVOID BODILY INJURY FROM FALLING!WHEN APPLYING TEAK CLEANINGPRODUCTS TO THE INLAYTHE SURFACE MAY BECOME SLIPPERY.WIPE DOWN TEAK THROUGHLY ANDLET DRY BEFORE STEPPING ON IT.

UNDERWATER LIGHTING

OVERVIEW

The underwater light option provides high output, long life and low heat emission. They are made from a high impact resistant polycarbonate housing. The lights are installed under the transom for maximum efficiency. Their beam is blue for increased underwater penetration.

OPERATION

The underwater lights are energized through the accessory switch located at the starboard helm switch panel. The lights are protected by a 5 amp in-line fuse located at the transom area.

Equipment Operation

As an option the RM-120 vacuum system is installed under the center aft cushion in the mid cabin. There is a netted bag of hoses and various vacuum attachments.

SAFETY WARNINGS:

1. This is a dry vacuum system. Do not use on wet surfaces.

2. Never operate the vacuum without filters and bags in place.

3. Use careful monitoring when children are around. Do not let the vacuum cleaner be used as a toy.

4. Do not try to repair the vacuum as the unit is sealed. Return the unit to InterVac or an authorized repair center for proper repairs.

5. Use only as described in this manual. Use only factory attachments and bags.

6. Do not use with any blocked openings. When the secondary filter becomes dirty, rinse in warm water or replace the filter. Filters must be completely dry before using.

7. Never drop or put any object into any opening.

8. Turn off the accessory breaker at the ship's AC panel to deactivate the vacuum cleaner.

9. Keep all body parts and clothing away from all moving parts.

10. Do not pick up anything that is burning or smoking such as cigarettes, matches, hot ashes or sharp objects. Do not use without dust bag or filters in place.

11. Do not attempt to operate or start the unit with a wet hose.

12. Do not store objects close to the vacuum unit.

13. Do not pick up flammable or combustible liquids such as gasoline, or use in areas where they might be present such as the bilge.

14. Do not step on the hose, nozzles or pull hard on the hose.

OPERATION

1. To operate the vacuum, the accessory breaker on the main ship's main AC panel must be turned to the "ON" position.
2. Lift the inlet cover on the vacuum unit.
3. Insert the hose cuff (one with the metal band) with a slight twist and the vacuum cleaner should start.
4. To remove, turn hose in either direction while pulling the hose toward you and the vacuum cleaner will stop.

Replacing Exhaust Filter

Note:

If the motor stops the thermal protector on the unit will reset automatically after about 1/2 hour. This is normal for the vacuum cleaner.

If The Motor Stops Suddenly:

1. The most common cause is a clogged hose. Try to unclog the hose with a long object or by shaking the hose until the debris falls out.
2. The bag is overfilled and fine dust has clogged the bag.
3. The vacuum cleaning tools are clogged.
4. The motor (exhaust) filter is dirty and should be cleaned or replaced.
5. While the vacuum cleaner is being used keep the cushion up to provide additional air to the unit. This will help the unit from shutting down.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

COSMETIC CARE

This chapter covers the care and maintenance of your Regal boat. Many cosmetic care topics are described and expanded in the following pages along with major equipment and systems. As always, refer to the manufacturer's owner's manual for detailed

procedures, parts and component warranty information. Since this chapter is so large we have supplied a table of contents for easier use. Also, the equipment is listed in alphabetical order for your convenience.

See the table of contents on the next page.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

COSMETIC CARE

Bilge-Engine Compartment 3

Bottom Paint 3

Cabinets 4

Canvas 4

Sunbrella Cleaning Instructions 5

Clear Vinyl, Zipper & Snap Care 5

Strataglass Clear Vinyl Care 6

Carpet 7

Corian 7

Docked/Moored Vessels 8

Fabrics-Interior 8

Fiberglass & Gelcoat 9

Flooring 11

Gauges/Switch Panels 11

Hull/Deck 12

Plastics 12

Range 13

Refrigerator/Icemaker Combo 13

Spotlight 14

Stainless Steel 14

Stains 15

Upholstery 16

VacuFlush® Toilet System 17

MAINTENANCE

Air Conditioner 18

Antenna (GPS) 21

Batteries 22

Battery Charger 23

Battery Parallel Switch 25

Battery Switch Panel 25

Bilge Pump/Float Switch 26

Blowers 26

Cablemaster System 27

Camera Monitoring System 28

Carbon Monoxide Detectors 29

Compass 29

DVD Player 30

Door-Cabin Entry 31

Electronics 31

Fire Extinguishing System 32

Fuel System 33

Gas Vapor Detector 34

Ground Fault Outlet 34

Heater-Hot Water 35

High Water Alarm 35

Horn 36

Plumbing Connections 37

Pump-Fresh Water 38

Pump-Overboard Discharge 38

Refrigerator 39

Refrigerator/Icemaker Combo 39

Sirius Marine Weather 42

Shower Sump Pump 42

Stereo/CD Changer/DVD/TV 43

Stereo Controls In Steering Wheel 43

Television Flat Screen Monitor 44

Trim Tabs 44

VacuFlush® Head System 45

Windlass 46

Vacuum Cleaner 48

Stern Drive Propulsion Maintenance 49

V-Drive Propulsion Maintenance 94

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

BILGE/ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Always keep the bilge pumped out and free of accumulated debris. If the engine compartment becomes oily find the cause of the problem. It is usually related to engine oil lines, oil filter or possibly a leaking gasket or O ring.

A periodic bilge cleaning with a brush and a bilge cleaner (purchase at a marina or supplier) will be helpful in maintaining a clean and safe bilge since accumulated dirt and fluids could cause someone to fall.

Check the fuel system including all hoses, tanks and connectors for possible leaks and deterioration. A stained area normally could suggest a hose or connection leak.

Inspect all wiring including connectors and hangers for tightness. Clean fuel filters as suggested by the engine manufacturer.

Check all engine and water/waste hoses for tightness and deterioration. Tighten all hose clamps as needed.

Check all battery hardware and terminal connections. Fill the battery cells with distilled water (wet-cell type only) to the battery manufacturer's suggested level.

With stern drive propulsion check the transom area for loose hardware and steering system parts. Look for any rust stain areas which indicate a leak.

With inboard propulsion check the rudder for leaks along with the driveshaft seals and any other hull fittings. Check all hoses for deterioration.

Do not use any flammable products.

BOTTOM PAINT

Bottom paint normally accumulates a bit of algae and slime over a period of time even more so if the vessel is not used. Most of this can be wiped off with a turkish towel or a piece of rug while the boat is in the water. Stay away from using a stiff bristle brush, wire brushes or abrasive materials.

One way to inspect the bottom is to have the boat slinged out. Make sure the straps are evenly lined up with the sling markers on the deck. Look for scraps in the gelcoat along with any damaged or worn propulsion hardware. The hull bottom should be inspected annually, and repainted if necessary by your Regal dealer.

CABINETS

Interior cabinetry features a sprayed lacquer clear coat finish. Use a soft cloth and warm water to clean stains and finger marks. Stay away from any abrasive compounds, harsh chemicals and scrubbers.

CANVAS

Boat canvas is in most cases subjected to more severe punishment than practically any other type of material. Moisture, dirt and chemicals from industrial fallout, heat, ultraviolet rays and salt water are all factors which accelerate the deterioration of your boat canvas. These elements can cause serious damage if left unchecked.

The boat top and other canvas supplied on your Regal boat are manufactured from top quality materials to provide you with years of trouble free service. The following information on the care, cleaning and proper storage of the fabrics and fasteners that make up your marine canvas is being provided to help you maintain the appearance and ease of operation.

Sunbrella is used on most Regal tops, aft curtains, camper enclosures, bow tonneaus and cockpit covers. Sunbrella is a woven fabric made from 100% solution dyed acrylic fiber. It is color fast and will withstand long term exposure to the sun (ultraviolet rays) without excessive fading.

Sunbrella is a woven fabric. Even though it is treated with water repellency some “misting” through the fabric is typical. With new canvas, the greatest potential for leakage is through the sewn seams. Because Sunbrella and the long term thread used is synthetic, the holes created by sewing will not swell up and seal when exposed to water as cotton does. Usually the movement of the fabric in use will move the fibers enough to seal the holes. You may apply Apseal or Uniseal to the seams to speed up this process.

When the canvas is new, the fit will normally be tight. It is designed this way because Sunbrella stretches as it ages. The initial tight fit allows for a suitable fit for the life of the canvas. The Sunbrella fit will vary slightly in the heat, cold, and rain.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

SUNBRELLA CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS

Sunbrella should be cleaned regularly before substances such as dirt, roof particles, etc., are allowed to accumulate on and become embedded in the fabric. The fabric can be cleaned without being removed from the boat. Simply brush off any loose dirt, hose down, and clean with a mild solution of natural soap in lukewarm water. Rinse thoroughly to remove soap. DO NOT USE DE-TERGENTS! Allow to air dry.

For heavily soiled fabric, remove the top from the frame. Soak the fabric in a solution that has been mixed to the following proportions.: 1/2 cup of Clorox bleach and 1/4 cup of Ivory or Lux soap (liquid or soap) per each gallon of lukewarm water. Allow the fabric to soak until the bleach has killed the mildew and the stains can be brushed out with a common kitchen scrub brush. Rinse the fabric thoroughly in cold water to remove all the soap. This may require several rinsings. Incomplete rinsing can cause deterioration of sewing threads and prohibit the fabric from being properly retreated. Allow the fabric to dry completely.

DO NOT STEAM PRESS OR DRY IN AN ELECTRIC OR GAS DRYER! Excessive heat can damage and shrink the fabric since it is heat sensitive.

This method of cleaning may remove part of the water and stain repellents that was applied to the fabric during its manufacture. It is recommended to retreat with such water repellency products as Apseal and Uniseal. We do not recommend any wax based treatments such as Thompson's Water Seal or any of the silicone products such as SC-15 or Aqua-Tite. Wax based products prevent the fabric from breathing, and encourage mildew growth while the silicone products interact with the original fluorocarbon finish and seem to cause a rapid loss of water repellency. Scotchguard has not been found to be very effective for restoring water repellents to Sunbrella. It seems to work well in the short run, but doesn't maintain its' performance very long.

CLEAR VINYL, ZIPPER & SNAP CARE

Never store canvas wet or in an unventilated, moist area. Always roll the canvas instead of folding. This is of particular importance on side curtains or any other part with the clear vinyl “glass”. Roll the top carefully around the bows and cover with the storage boot provided.

The clear vinyl “glass” used in side curtains, aft curtains, visors, and camper enclosures is very susceptible to heat and cold. Keep vinyl curtains from touching metal tubing to minimize burning the vinyl.

If the boat is stored with top, side curtains and aft curtain in place, heat build up inside the boat may discolor the vinyl.

To clean the clear “vinyl” glass, use a solution of Ivory or Lux soap, liquid or flakes, and lukewarm water. Allow to air dry. Never use any type of abrasive cleaner as it will scratch the “vinyl” glass. There are many cleaners and scratch removers on the market specifically for clear vinyl. Handle the clear curtains carefully. They are soft and prone to scratching.

Canvas parts are designed with zippers. When zippers are new they can be a little difficult to use. Zip carefully without forcing the zipper or the material. They will loosen with use. A zipper lubricant may be used to help new zippers as well as maintaining used ones. The most vulnerable part of the zipper is the starts. Use care when starting the zipper.

Canvas snap fasteners should be unsnapped as close to the button as possible. Never remove canvas by pulling roughly on the edge of the material. This can damage the canvas as well as the fasteners. Use petroleum jelly on snaps to keep them from developing corrosion especially in harsh environments.

"STRATAGLASS" CLEAR VINYL CARE- USED ON HARD TOP OPTIONS

A special feature used with Regal hardtop models is the clear vinyl called “Strataglass”. This high quality product used on our hardtop options features a scratch resistant coating, near-perfect visual clarity, resistance to fallout, runoff and overspray besides longevity over other types of clear vinyl canvas.

Use only the products and procedures recommended by Strataglass. These include IMAR Yacht detailing products sold by dealers only. You can locate the closest retail dealer at [e-mail] or call Integrated Logistics, Inc. at 703-330-4693.

"STRATAGLASS" DO'S AND DON'TS

Please read and understand the following information regarding Strataglass. The manufacturer recommends using only IMAR Strataglass protective polish, IMAR Strataglass protective cleaner, and mild soap (preferably IMAR yacht soap concentrate) on Strataglass.

Under no circumstances use other harsh cleaning products like Simple Green and Orpine which will dull the curtains quickly.

NEVER use a wash and wax product on Strataglass.

Using any other products will void the factory warranty. Use of Rainex on Strataglass appears to work for a short time but then dulls the surface and presents and “orange peel” look. Do not use Rainex.

Use of cleaners, polishes, scratch removers, or any other product made for regular, uncoated vinyl will damage Strataglass. Do not use these products.

Do not handle Strataglass (or any other vinyl) with sunscreen on your hands. This will permanently cloud the vinyl where handled.

"STRATAGLASS CARE"

New: 3M Adhesive remover may be used to remove any glue. Final clean with IMAR Strataglass protective cleaner. Use IMAR Strataglass protective polish as the final step to provide a base protection and good watershed.

Use IMAR Strataglass protective polish every 2 to 3 months (every 4 to 6 weeks in areas of high fallout). In the interim, use IMAR Strataglass protective cleaner frequently.

Note: All new vinyl can easily get impressions in itself. If possible leave new enclosures extended in place. If completely removed, enclosures must be interleaved with either acid-free paper (available from framing shops) or oldsheets (best choice) to prevent “pooling” in the glass. Vinyl seasons over time and becomes less impressionable. Roll all curtains down and fasten in place nightly to keep perfect appearance.

Cleaning: Flush thoroughly to cool the surface and rinse away environmental abrasives. Wash with IMAR Yacht Soap Concentrate, or other equally gentle and high quality soap. Do not use Simple Green, Orpine or any other harsh cleaner as they will dull the surface. Apply the soapy water to the clear vinyl section of the curtain with special purpose washing mitt or soft cotton cloths. Thoroughly rinse the soapy solution with fresh water and completely dry the curtains with a high quality chamois (Swobbit.com makes several tools to make these tasks easier).

Your clear vinyl hardtop curtains should be washed whenever your boat is washed. After washing the curtains, apply IMAR Strataglass protective polish sparingly with small clean soft cotton cloth. Allow the polish to dry and then remove with a clean soft cotton cloth. Finally, light buff to a sparkling shine. For routine maintenance between polishing, use IMAR Strataglass protective cleaner. Insure the clear vinyl panels are free of abrasives. Very lightly mist a soft dry cloth. Lightly and briskly rub a manageable area and then lightly buff dry with another clean cloth.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

CARPET

Use approved carpet cleaners only. Always try on a test area first. Many spots and spills can be removed using a cleaner combined with a clean, white terry towel. Try not to soak an area excessively and do not use solvents because most interior carpet is rubber backed and glued in place. Solvents will break down the backing and fibers. To store carpet, roll it tightly. This will keep the carpet from developing wrinkles which result from folding carpet.

CORIAN®

Regal has chosen Corian countertop material because of its elegance and durability. Periodic maintenance will ensure its beauty. Corian withstands heat much better than ordinary countertop materials but you must still use a hot pad or trivet when taking materials directly out of the oven or stove top to protect from damaging the surface. Avoid cutting directly on the surface.

Another feature of Corian countertops is that it is a non-porous. Therefore, dirt and germs do not penetrate it. Corian will not support the growth of germs and mildew. To disinfect, wipe the surface with diluted household bleach with a ratio of 1 part bleach to 1 part water. To clean the surface of water marks, wipe it down with soap and water and towel dry. For stains use soapy water or ammonia based cleaners. You can use a green Scotch-Brite pad to remove stubborn stains.

Corian is a matte or satin finish. To remove scratches and nicks, sand the surface with 180-220 grit sandpaper until the nick is gone. To restore the finish use an abrasive cleanser and a green Scotch-Brite pad. If you wrap the sandpaper around a block of wood while sanding it will help. Sand the areas flat instead of creating hills and valleys.

DOCKED/MOORED VESSELS

If your vessel is permanently docked in salt or fresh water the bottom will eventually collect various types of marine growth. Besides not being attractive the boat will lose running speed due to this buildup.

To prevent this situation pull the boat out and clean the bottom with a soft bristle brush and a solution of mild soap and water.

Have your Regal dealer paint the bottom with a good quality of bottom paint matched to your waterway for maximum protection. Be sure to leave at least 1 1/2" around all objects for galvanic corrosion. Check with your engine manufacturer before attempting to paint any engine stern drive areas for vessels with stern drive propulsion..

FABRICS-INTERIOR

Clean flat good interior fabrics with dry cleaning fluid style cleaners approved for use with soft fabrics. Allow adequate ventilation and follow the label instructions carefully. Use a soft cleanser with feldspar to clean stubborn marks or stains on wallpaper. Normal interior vinyl such as the headliner and head need a mild soap and water solution. Rinse immediately with clean water and wipe dry. Always test an area with a cleaner before applying it to a larger area.

NOTICE

WIRE BRUSHES, SCOURING PADS, OR OTHER ABRASIVE TYPE MATERIALS AND SOLUTIONS SHOULD NEVER BE USED ON THE HULL OR DECK OF YOUR BOAT.

THEY CREATE SMALL SCRATCH MARKS THAT WILL COLLECT MARINE GROWTH AND OTHER FOREIGN MATERIALS.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

FIBERGLASS & GELCOAT

CAUTION

AVOID BODILY INJURY! WAXED GELCOAT SURFACES CAN BE VERY SLIPPERY. DO NOT WAX NORMALLY USED AREAS OF THE DECK, LINER, OR GUNWHALES. DO NOT WAX ANY TEX- TURED OR NON-SKID SURFACES SUCH AS FLOORS, WALKWAYS, STEPS, LADDERS OR SWIM PLATFORMS. ALWAYS WEAR NON-SLIP FOOTWEAR WHILE ON BOARD THE VESSEL.

Routine maintenance is the only practical way to keep the surface of your boat looking shiny and new. Most objects left outdoors will gradually deteriorate from exposure to the sun, water, dust and pollution. Such outdoor exposure can cause your boat's gelcoated surface to change or fade. Darker colors tend to fade more rapidly than lighter colors because they absorb more of the sun's rays (ultraviolet and infrared).

Basic maintenance includes monthly washing of the boat's surface to remove normal accumulation of soil and stain. Use a mild detergent such as dishwasher powder or liquid. Do not use automatic dishwasher detergent. Avoid any kind of alkaline cleaners such as trisodium phosphate (TSP), abrasives, bleaches and ammonia. For best results use cleaners that are recommended for fiberglass.

It is recommended that you wax the gelcoat surface twice yearly to prevent loss of gloss and to protect the finish. Use only waxes for fiberglass and follow the label instructions. Apply a 3' x 3' section at a time using clean applicator cloths or a buffing bonnet. When a haze develops, use a power buffer at low speeds (1200-2000 rpm) to remove the haze. Keep the buffer moving to avoid heat build-up. Never wax gelcoat in direct sun. When the washing and waxing as recommended does not restore the shine it may be necessary to use a fine rubbing compound. Do not apply rubbing compound in direct sunlight. A power buffer at low speed does an excellent job to remove impurities from the gel coat that cause dulling. Use light pressure and keep the buffer moving. Re-wax after compounding to buff the surface.

“Hairline cracks” or “spider webbing” could develop in the gelcoat surface of a hull or deck. This can be caused by impact or other factors. Small air pockets or gouges may also occur through normal wear. These do not affect the strength of the hull or deck and can be repaired by yourself, a marine professional or a Regal dealer.

The affected area should be chipped or sanded away and a thin layer of color matched gelcoat applied. This layer is then sanded smooth and buffed to its original luster.

Most minor scratches, nicks, and dents can be removed by compounding the surface. Marine type compounds can be found at most auto body supply stores.

Specify a number 25 which is a coarser compound up to a number 55 being less coarse. Various glazes and polishes are available as needed. Ask your marine professional or Regal dealer for more information. Fiberglass hulls are strong but they can be damaged. A fiberglass hull has virtually no internal stresses. Thus when a part is broken or punctured, the rest of the hull retains its original shape. A severe blow will either be absorbed or result in a definite localized break. A break of this nature should be checked and repaired by a marine professional or a Regal dealer.

MINOR REPAIRS

You will need the following materials for minor repairs:

• Gelcoat
• Clear Liquid Catalyst
• Putty Knife
• Razor Blade
  • Fine Sandpaper (400,600,1000)
• Wax Paper (to cover repair area)

WARNING

AVOID BODILY INJURY! GELCOAT & FIBERGLASS RESIN ARE FLAMMABLE WORK IN A WELL VENTILATED AREA FREE FROM OPEN FLAMES. DO NOT SMOKE!

For minor repairs refer to the following procedure:

1. Clean the area to be repaired and get rid of any wax or grease residues.
2. Clean out scratches, chips, and nicks.

3. Sand area to be repaired so gelcoat will bond.

4. In a separate container, measure only the amount of gelcoat you will need. Mix a ratio of 2% ratio of catalyst to the amount of gelcoat being used (a spoonful of gelcoat will require only a drop or two of catalyst). Do not pour any unused portions of the gelcoat/catalyst mixture back into either original container.

5. Apply gelcoat to area leaving a slight lift above the surface.
6. Cover the area with wax paper. It will help the mixture to set up faster.
7. Remove wax paper and shave off any extra gelcoat with a razor blade.
8. After the area is shaved smooth, start with the 400, 600, and finally 1000 grit sand papers.
9. Buff the area with compound, polish and a finish wax. You may notice a difference between the repaired area and the original finish due to the natural weathering process.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

FLOORING

Always vacuum up any coarse debris on the Cherry & Holly flooring to prevent scratches and embedded particles in the flooring.

After removing large debris use a mop with a special cover (sold in box stores) for wood flooring

care. These products contain alcohol ingredients which assist in drying a floor quickly. Simply spray the cleaner on the pad and apply in a straight line back and forth with the wood grain. Let dry. Do not use excessive amounts of cleaner on the pad. Mist the cleaner on the pad for even coverage.

Do not use harsh cleaners, chemicals or brushes on the floor since they will scratch it.

GAUGES/SWITCH PANELS

For normal dirt and dust accumulation clean with soft cloth and warm water. Dry with soft cloth or chamois.

Near salt water environments salt deposits can build up on the instrument bezels and faces. Use a soft damp cloth to remove the deposits. Do not use abrasives or rough, dirty cloths to wipe instruments.

Follow the same procedure for all switch panels. Do not use any of the following on panels:

1. Lacquer Thinner
2. Dry Cleaning Fluid
3. Acetone
4. Carbon Tetrachloride
5. Benzine
6. Silicone Spray
7. Gasoline

Sometimes gauges develop condensation inside their faces. in high humidity environments. To eliminate the condensation droplets, energize the instrument lighting and the heat over a short period of time will evaporate the gauge condensation.

HULL/DECK

HULL BOTTOM

Never use wire brushes or highly abrasive scouring pads on your hull bottom. It could damage the gel coat surface or the bottom paint. The bottom of your boat needs to be clean since the build up of natural coatings from water or marine life can potentially create drag and affect boat performance. Use a turkish towel or for heavier build-up a piece of rug to clean the bottom.

HULL/DECK

For normal dirt and insect residue find a soft bristle brush on a long telescopic handle at an automotive store. A good brush is designed with a curved soft base to protect objects it comes in contact with while scrubbing. Rinse down the hull with a hose to loosen up the dirt. Use a mild soap solution in a bucket. Use up and down strokes to clean the hull sides. Rinse off until all residue is removed.

PLASTICS

Use plastic cleaners and polishes recommended for marine use only. Use proper applicators. Read all instructions carefully. Test the product in a small area first. Use a soft rag and always rinse the surface with water. Ammonia based cleaners and abrasives will damage plastic parts.

NOTICE

NEVER CLEAN PLASTIC SURFACES WITH A DRY CLOTH OR GLASS CLEANING SOLUTIONS CONTAINING AMMONIA. NEVER USE SOLVENTS OR WIPE WITH ABRASIVES.

CAUTION

AVOID BODILY INJURY! GELCOAT SURFACES CAN BE VERY SLIPPERY. ALWAYS WEAR NON-SLIP FOOTWEAR WHILE ON BOARD THE VESSEL. ALWAYS RINSE SURFACES ADEQUATELY TO AVOID SLIPPING ON SOAPY SURFACES!

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

RANGE

Clean the cook top before you use it for the first time. A thorough cleaning with a recommended cleaner such as Cerama-Brite Cook Top Cleaner will put a clean shiny coating on the cook top before its initial use.

Always remove food spills, grease splatters, and metal rub-off from utensils. First, use a razor blade scraper to remove all spillovers. Then clean the cook top with a paper towel or a clean soft cloth and a recommended cleaner. After using any cleaner always wipe the cook top with a clean, damp cloth (to avoid burned-on cleanser residue) and wipe dry.

Do not use your dish towel or sponge to wipe off the cook top. This may leave a film of detergent of other matter that can cause discoloration the next time the cook top is heated.

Avoid abrasive scouring powders of any kind. Also, avoid using plastic, nylon or metal cleaning pads. They may scratch or melt onto the cook top. Avoid chemical cleaners such as chlorine bleach, ammonia, hydrofluoric acid or chemical oven cleaners. They may etch or discolor the surface.

Do not let anything that melts- such as plastics, aluminum foil, or sugar to come in contact with your cook top surfacewhen it is hot. Should something melt onto the surface, immediately move it to a cool area of your cook top with a razor blade scraper, and then remove it from the cook top as soon as possible.

Surfaces may be cleaned with a mild detergent and warm water solution. Do not use solvent-based or abrasive cleaners. Use a soft sponge and rinse with clean water. Wipe with a soft, clean towel to prevent water spotting.

INTERIOR CLEANING

Disconnect power to the unit by turning the icemaker breaker at the ship's AC panel to the off position. Clean the interior and all removed components using a mild non-abrasive detergent and warm water solution applied with a soft sponge or non-abrasive cloth. Rinse the interior using a soft sponge and clean water.

SPOTLIGHT

The spotlight lens should be wiped with a clean, dry soft cloth to remove any debris such as bugs, salt spray or general dirt. Read the manufacturer's literature for more information.

STAINLESS STEEL

Keep all stainless steel and other metal parts rinsed and wiped dry. To maintain their finish polish the stainless steel and other bright works at least annually. Use a good quality auto wax to protect the stainless steel surfaces. A soft sponge works well to apply the wax or cheese cloth. In salty environments, rinse and wipe down stainless steel immediately after cruising to avoid salt deposit build-up and possible metal pitting.

Do not use harsh solvents or cleaners on stainless steel. Do not use steel wool or wire brushes. They will damage the finish.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

STAINS

Below is a listing of normal stains and clean-up methods. The sooner the stain is removed there is less chance of permanent residue on the surface.

Do not use wire brushes, solvents or harsh chemicals on any stain. Damage to the surface will occur.

FREQUENT STAINS CLEAN-UP STEPS

1 2 3

Coffee, Tea, Chocolate...... B

Permanent Marker*...... E B C

Household Dirt...... A B

Grease...... D B

Ketchup, Tomato Products...... A B

Latex Paint.... A B

Oil Base Paint.... D B

Mustard.... A B C

Suntan Oil.... A B

Asphalt/Road Tar...... D B

Crayon...... D B

Engine Oil...... B

Spray Paint...... B

Chewing Gum...... D A

Shoe Polish*...... D B

Ballpoint Pen*...... E B A

Lipstick...... A B

Eycshadow...... E B

Mildew ^* C B A

Wet Leaves *...... C B A

A= Soft brush; warm soapy water/rinse/ dry

B= Fantastik cleaner

C= One tablespoon ammonia, 1/4 cup of hydrogen

peroxide, 3/4 cup of warm water/ rinse/dry

D= Scrape off residue ( use ice to lift gum)

E= Denatured alcohol/rinse/dry

* These products contain dyes which leave permanent stains.

UPHOLSTERY

Cockpit vinyl- requires periodic cleaning to maintain a neat appearance and to prevent the build up of dirt and contaminants that may stain and reduce the vinyl life if they are not removed. The frequency of cleaning depends on the amount of use and conditions to which the vinyl is subjected.

Most common stains can be cleaned using warm, soapy water and clear rinses. Scrubbing with a soft bristle brush will help loosen soiled material from embossed surfaces and under welting. If the stains are not removed with the above method use a mild cleaner such as Fantastic. This cleaner should be used only as needed and not the normal means.

With more stubborn stains, rubbing alcohol or mineral spirits may be tried cautiously. Widespread solvent use can severely damage or discolor vinyl.

Try to remove stains immediately before they have a chance to penetrate the surface of the vinyl.

Powdered abrasives, steel wool, or industrial strength cleaners are not recommended for cleaning our vinyl. Lacquer solvents will cause immediate damage. Dilute chlorine bleach before using. Do not wax the vinyl as it may cause cracking. Always wear protective gloves and make sure there is sufficient ventilation when cleaning vinyl. Wear eye protection.

Remember that suntan oil will damage vinyl. Use suntan lotion instead of suntan oil. Exposure to the sun is a natural enemy of vinyl upholstery. For maximum life, use a cockpit cover when the vessel is moored, docked or stored.

Ultra Leather- interior vinyl used in the salon sofa, salon seating arrangements, and both mid and forward berths. It can be identified for it's softer leather touch over a firmer cockpit vinyl.

Clean Ultra Leather by following the information below.

1. Remove the stain immediately.
2. Spot clean with mild soap and water.
3. Air dry or dry quickly with warm setting of a hair dryer.
4. For stubborn stains, use mild solvent.
5. For tougher stains Fantastik® and Formula 409® brand spray cleaner have been shown to be successful.
6. 'Disinfect with a 5:1 beach solution.

For the following stains, a mild detergent may be used. Blot or wipe stains immediately.

A. Ketchup, Mayonnaise
B. Butter
C. Red Wine, Liquor
D. Coffee, Tea, Coca-Cola®
E. Make-Up, Face Cream, Lipstick
F. Machine Oil
G. Urine, Blood
H. Steak Sauce, Soy Sauce
I. Chocolate
J. Milk

Ballpoint Pen Removal Instructions

1. Wipe the stain off with ethanol (rubbing alcohol).
2. Prepare a solution of 50% non-chlorinated bleach, 50% water.
3. Place a thin line of tissue over the ink stain.
4. Apply the non-chlorinated bleach solution to the tissue. Be sure not to saturate the tissue.
5. Cover tissue with polyethylene film (plastic wrap) to prevent the non-chlorinated bleach solution from drying.
6. Check on stain repeatedly.
7. Do not leave the non-chlorinated beach solution on for more than 1 hour.
   When the stain looks almost gone, remove the tissue and wash the stain with water.
8. To neutralize the bleached area, place tissues on the bleached area and apply 15% hydrogen peroxide solution.
9. Leave on for 30 minutes, & then remove the tissues.
10. Remove the peroxide residue with water.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

The VacuFlush® system requires periodic cleaning for maximum sanitation and operational efficiency. Clean the bowl with a cleaner such as Bon Ami which will not abrade the toilet bowl lining. Do not use chlorine solvents or caustic chemicals, such as the drain openers because the various system seals may be damaged.

MAINTENANCE

This section covers maintenance procedures on standard and selected optional equipment.

AIR CONDITIONER:

Before each outing inspect the thru-hull fitting for leaks. Make sure the seacock is open. Also, the sea water strainer located in the bilge should be checked periodically for foreign objects and accumulated debris. To clean the stainer, unscrew the seacock fasteners by turning counterclockwise, remove the wire strainer, and blow it out if possible with compressed air. Reinstall the strainer, make sure the gasket on the top of the seacock is centered, and tighten the fasteners. Check for leaks since sucking air into the system could cause the seawater pump to malfunction. See the illustration.

Inspect the air filter monthly. The air conditioner filter is located in the return air grille framework in the cabinet below the AC/DC cabinet. To clean the filter remove it and rinse with plenty of fresh water. See the equipment operation chapter for more information.

Check the AC hose output located on the hull side insuring there is a full discharge when the AC pump is running. If there is little or no discharge shutdown the unit and immediately find the cause of the problem.

Periodically check the drain located at the compressor to make sure the entrance to the hose at the AC pan is not clogged with foreign matter.

If clogging occurs, blow out the hose with compressed air and pour in a bleach/water solution at 5/1 parts water to bleach.

WARNING

TO PREVENT BODILY INJURY OR DEATH! DISCONNECT THE A/C BREAKER AT THE MAIN A/C PANEL BEFORE OPENING ANY COVER ON THE A/C UNIT.

REVERSING VALVES

All reverse cycle units use a reversing valve: the valve must be energized periodically to keep the internal parts moving freely. To do this, switch the AC unit into heat for a few seconds once a month.

SEAWATER STRAINER

Check the AC pump for proper seawater flow by cleaning the seacock strainer basket. Check the overboard discharge for adequate water flow. Check seawater intake speed scoop for obstructions. Make sure hoses are not looped, kinked or crushed.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

TYPICAL AC SYSTEM

CONDENSOR COIL CLEANING

Note: If desired, call an air conditioning expert to do the periodic maintenance on the system

1. With the system turned off at the ship's AC electrical panel, disconnect the inlet and outlet connections of the condensor coil.

2. Use chemical resistant hoses (MAS white PVC 5/8" I.D., etc.) to connect the inlet of the condensor coil to the outlet of a chemical resistant, submersible pump (MAS P-500 pump, etc.) and let the hose connected to the coil outlet flow freely into the container mentioned below.

3. Place a strainer or piece of screen over the inlet of the pump and submerse the pump into a container filled with a 5% solution of muriatic or hydrochloric acid and fresh water or use a premixed over-the-counter solution. Use as large a container as possible to hold the solution (2 to 5 gallons).

1. Power the pump and circulate the solution through the condensor coil for 15-45 minutes depending on the size of the coils and the extent of the contamination. Visual inspection of the solution in the container should indicate when the contamination removal has stopped.

2. Circulate fresh water through the coil to flush any residual acid from the system.

3. Restart the system and check operational parameters to ensure thorough cleaning has taken place. Additional cleaning may be necessary with extreme contamination.

NOTICE

FOR THE PURPOSE OF PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT, DISPOSE OF ANY CONTAMINATED ACID SOLUTIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH FEDERAL, STATE AND/OR LOCAL REGULATIONS

RETURN AIR FILTERS

Check the return air filter located below the AC/DC salon cabinet monthly and clean as necessary. To clean the filter, remove it from the unit, rinse with water, air dry and reinstall.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

ANTENNA (GPS)

There is a lithium battery (CR 2032) in a holder on the main circuit board of the GPS antenna. If replacement is necessary, notify an authorized Raymarine® dealer of factory repair center.

These batteries are specified to last 3 to 5 years. Even with a low battery, the unit will get a fix; it may just be a bit slower to lock on if power is cycled on the unit.

BATTERIES

Frequently check your battery terminals for corrosion build-up. If you find a greenish, powdery substance, remove the cable connections and clean both the terminals and the connectors with a wire brush. When the cleaning is finished reconnect the battery cables and coat the terminals with an approved grease or petroleum jelly to help prevent further corrosion. Check the electrolyte level at least every 30 days, more often in hot weather. The level should be maintained between the top of the battery plates and the bottom of the fill cap opening. Add distilled water as needed after charging the batteries. Do not overfill because sulfuric acid could run over and cause burns or an explosion.

Batteries should be charged outside the boat. Do not smoke or bring flames near a battery that is being or has recently been charged. The hydrogen gas generated by battery charging is highly explosive.

Set the batteries on a block of wood not concrete since the batteries will lose their charge if left on a cement surface.

Do not allow a metal object or loose wires to spark across battery posts while working close to the battery. Contact across terminals will cause a short circuit and electrical burns, explosion or personal injury.

Tighten all battery connectors securely. Check their tightness by pulling on the connectors. They should not move from their tightened position. Be sure to reinstall the positive boot over the battery terminal after tightening the battery post connection. While using the boat, keep an eye on the volt meters to monitor the charge level of each battery bank. Monitor the charge with the engines turned off (static condition).

The engine alternators recharge the batteries. A fully charged battery will indicate between 12 and 14 volts on the voltmeter. Readings below this could indicate a dead battery cell or a charging system malfunction which should be checked by a marine professional.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

BATTERY CHARGER

Periodically check the battery charger terminal connectors for tightness. Be sure the shore power is disconnected and the battery positive and negative terminals are unhooked before checking any terminals.

To replace a fuse on the battery charger:

1. Make sure the power is off. Then remove the cover.
2. The AC fuse is located above the AC terminal block. The DC fuses are located above the DC output terminals. Use the exact type and rating fuse. See illustration on the next page.
3. Replace the cover.
4. Reapply the power.

BATTERY CHARGER FUSE LOCATION UNDER COVER

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

BATTERY PARALLEL SWITCH

If the battery parallel switch fails to operate, check the breaker located above the push button switch. Always find the cause of the problem before resetting the circuit breaker.

A second area to investigate is the battery solenoid located at the forward engine bulkhead. When the switch is pressed the solenoid energizes the appropriate second battery for additional engine cranking capability.

Normally if you hear a solenoid click it is operating properly. Check all solenoid and battery connections for tightness.

BATTERY SWITCH PANEL

If the battery switch panel should lose power to one of the batteries, check the 105 amp breaker located on the panel. These breakers protect the battery circuitry. Always find the cause of the problem before resetting the circuit breaker.

Remember that there is a forward and aft bilge pump on the vessel. Periodically check the grates for debris and spray the units down with water. Make sure that a steady stream of water exits the through hull fitting indicating the hose from the bilge pump itself is clear.

Periodically check all hoses, clamps and electrical connections for tightness.

BLOWERS

The vessel features 2 ventilation blowers in the bilge, one for each engine. The generator if equipped is tied into the engine blowers. Check the blower hoses to ensure they are fastened in the bilge properly, there are no holes in them and they are not crushed shut. Hoses can crush if it is stepped on or a heavy object rests on the hose. The hose connected to the blower needs to be 3/4 the way down in the bilge to evacuate fumes properly. All vents need to be checked for debris.

Make sure the blower motor is securely fastened and all hose clamps, tie wraps and electrical connections are tight.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

CABLEMASTER SYSTEM

Experience has shown that when only a partial length of the Cablemaster power cable is regularly used, the cable may be subject to sharper than normal coiling which in turn causes undue “kinking” of the cable. To relieve this condition, routinely pay the cable out completely and stretch it on any smooth surface. Allow the Cablemaster to then retract the cable into the storage area.

At least annually, check all AC and DC wiring connections to be sure they are secure and free of corrosion. Check the neoprene covers on the in-limit switch and power switch to be sure they are free of cracks or fracture.

Periodically, inspect the exterior jacket of your shore power cable for nicks or cuts. If your shore power cable is dirty DO NOT USE any cleaner that will leave a waxy film on the shore power cable. This film will cause slippage between the Cablemaster's main pulley and your shore power cable. It is recommended to use a mild soap and water to clean your cable.

CABLE ADJUSTMENT

Shore power cable diameters vary from one cable manufacturer to another, the Cablemaster's main pulley is split in half and proper friction adjustment between the cable and the main pulley is necessary at the time of installation and major part replacement.

Too tight an adjustment will overload the motor. On the other hand, too loose an adjustment will result in slippage of the cable or no cable movement.

The Cablemaster should pay in and out the cable without any slippage or any undue strain depending on the installation, and distance from the hawse pipe to the Cablemaster. Some assistance will be required when extending power cord on long runs or multiple bend extensions.

To adjust the friction between the main pulley and the power cable follow these instructions:

1. Remove the 1/4" nuts and lockwashers from the face of the main pulley and remove the outer pulley half.

2. *Remove or add only equal amounts of spacers for each bolt.

3. Replace the pulley half and secure the nuts.

* When adjusting the pulley friction, only add (decreases tension) or remove (increases tension) one spacer from each bolt before checking the unit for the correct pulley friction. One spacer makes a substantial difference in cable tension.

CABLEMASTER PULLEY ADJUSTMENT

CAMERA MONITORING SYSTEM

The optional cameras themselves are a sealed unit and require no maintenance. The camera system on the other hand needs periodic maintenance as outlined below:

1. Examine all cables for signs of damage such as chafing, cuts or nicks.
2. Check all cables for tight connections.
3. Make sure the cameras are adjusted for the desired view.
4. Spray the camera and lens with fresh water and wipe with a soft lint-free cloth to remove salt deposits and debris.

Note: A 5 amp quick blow fuse protects the camera system. It is located inside the DC distribution panel. Access the panel by removing the screws at the panel front.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS

Use the following procedure monthly or when leaving the vessel for extended periods. Normal maintenance should include frequent checking for the green power light glowing with the warning indicator and audible horn off. Each detector should be returned to the manufacturer each year for recertification. Refer to the owner's information packet and chapter 1 for more information. The CO detectors are located in the salon, forward and mid-berths.

TYPICAL CO DETECTOR

COMPASS

Normally the compass needs no special maintenance unless different equipment has been installed at the helm or existing equipment has been removed. This all effects the magnetic fields in a compass. A qualified compass professional must adjust the compass from the helm station. Note: do not try to adjust the compass yourself!

Keep the plexiglass dome free from dust and salt deposits by wiping it with a soft damp cloth. A good car paste wax periodically will help protect the instrument from the environment.

When not in use keep the compass protected with a cover. If the compass becomes erratic, sluggish or there is a lose of liquid it should be serviced by a repair station. See your compass operator's manual.

DVD PLAYER

To remove the DVD from the cabinet;

1. Detach the front panel.
2. Insert the keys at both sides of the unit as shown. Make sure the keys are installed completely into the unit.
3. Pull on the keys and the DVD player will retract from the case. Be aware that the wiring harness is only so long so you will need to watch any video and audio cables as the unit is pulled out.

Periodically clean your DVD discs with a cleaner that you can obtain at most electronic box stores. This will help keep dust and dirt out of the internal mechanism and will prolong life.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

DOOR-CABIN ENTRY

Periodically clean the lower door tracks since debris can clog the track resulting in a door that may jerk instead of slide to open or close. Use a vacuum or a soft damp cloth Lubicate the latch and lock mechanism sparingly with liquid graphite. A tube that comes with the product. Stick the tube in the key hole and squirt in the graphite. Wipe off any excess with a soft cloth.

ELECTRONICS

Since there are no user-serviceable parts on any Raymarine product it should be serviced only by Raymarine service technicians.

Some products generate high voltages, and so never handle the cables/connectors when power is being applied to the equipment.

When powered up, all electrical equipment produces electromagnetic fields. These can cause adjacent pieces of equipment to interact with one another, with a consequent adverse effect on operation. In order to minimize these effects and enable you to get the best possible performance from your Raymarine equipment, guidelines are given in the installation instructions, to enable you to ensure minimum interaction between different items of equipment, i.e. ensure optimum Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).

Always report any EMC-related problem to your nearest Raymarine® dealer.

In some installations, it may not be possible to prevent the equipment from being affected by external influences. In general this will not damage the equipment but it can lead to spurious resetting action, or momentarily may result in faulty operation.

Certain atmospheric conditions may cause condensation to form on the instrument window. This will not harm the instrument and can be cleared up by increasing the illumination setting.

Periodically clean your electronic display screen with a soft damp cloth. Do not use any harsh chemicals, solvents or abrasive materials to clean the instrument.

FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM-AUTOMATIC

Should the indicator light fail to come ON when the ignition key is in the ON position check the 20 amp ignition breaker at the key switch. The fire extinguisher system is protected through this circuit.

Inspect the pressure gauge before each outing. The illustration shows the ready and discharge condition of the acutuator. Remove and weigh the unit (minus brackets) every 6 months on an accurate scale (Do not use any hand held scales). If weight is below that shown on the unit nameplate, it must be removed from service immediately. If leakage is suspected, brush liquid soap on all points of possible leaks, or submerge entire unit in clean fresh water and watch carefully for 5 or 10 minutes.

Leaks will appear as tiny bubbles. If leakage is found return to the factory immediately for repair or replacement. Remember the two most important requirements to assure full charge and reliability of your Fireboy System are:

1. Visual inspection of the gauge and the actuator to determine if it has actuated.

2. Weighing to determine the true contents of the agent in the system.

All models from 75 cubic feet are rechargeable. Recharging is possible only if the unit has leaked out verses losing agent due to a fire.

Should the indicator light fail to come ON when the ignition key is ON, first check the pressure gauge and actuator to see if the unit has discharged. If not check the breaker.

Next, using a continuity tester, check the electrical pressure switch on the system bottle itself. Pull the molded rubber connector off by pulling straight away from the manifold, and place the probes of the continuity tester directly on the spade connectors. This pressure switch should have a closed circuit.

Next, check the continuity of the entire wiring circuit. The indicator lamp is an LED (light emitting diode) and cannot be tested with a continuity tester.

A simple method to test LED'S is to remove the lamp and touch the red wire to the + terminal and the black wire to the - terminal of an ordinary 9 volt battery. Should the indicator lamp be faulty, replacement lamps are available from Fireboy. Should the continuity of the pressure switch indicate an open circuit, the system will have to be returned to the factory for either replacement or repair.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

FUEL SYSTEM

Periodically inspect the fuel tank components for loose clamps at the vent, fill and feed locations. Examine each hose for signs of deterioration and leakage. Check the fuel sender for loose bolts, nuts, and leaks at all areas of contact. Also, inspect the fuel tank for signs of leakage or abrasion. Tighten all components as needed.

Do not remove the spring and ball assembly in the antisiphon valve. It can be cleaned with compressed air. Should the component be faulty (normally a fuel surge problem at mid to high speed ranges) replace it. Check the fuel fill pipe hose connection at the deck using the access plate which can be removed for inspection.

Make sure the black ground wire is tightly secured. For further information, contact your closest Regal dealer or marine professional.

Typical Fuel Tank Fittings

GAS VAPOR DETECTOR

TESTING THE SYSTEM

The M-1 gas vapor detector can be tested for electrical continuity by pressing the "TEST" switch. The red LED will come on. The light will glow as long as the switch is held down. If the test switch is held down longer than 10 seconds, the horn will sound and the "MUTE" switch must be pressed to silence the horn.

Unplug the sensor wire from the display head while the unit is powered up. The red LED will illuminate and within 10-15 seconds the alarm horn will sound. If warning red LED fails to come on and horn fails to sound remove display immediately and return direct to manufacturer for repair or replacement.

FUNCTIONAL SENSOR TESTING

To test sensor use a butane lighter with the striker wheel removed. Hold the lighter to the sensor and press down on the lever to release the butane. In 3 to 4 seconds the warning light will come on. In about 10 seconds the alarm horn will sound. Remove lighter from the sensor. Mute the alarm horn and within several seconds the warning light will shut off.

Note: The M-1 alarm may be muted with the "MUTE" button, but the problem should not be considered cleared until the alarm light goes out.

The factory recommends replacing the sensor every 3 years due to the hostile marine environment.

The most likely problem that will be encountered is continuous alarming. If this should occur, and you are positive that there is no gas fumes present, check for recent use of solvent, paint or paint thinner, polish, etc. If none of these vapors are present, the next step is to thoroughly check the sensor wires for loose connections, broken wies, and water or oil contamination. Since the sensors are normally part of a closed system, broken wires will cause the alarm to sound.

GROUND FAULT OUTLET:

The GFI outlets should be tested monthly. To test them, depress the reset button. Then press the test button. The reset button should pop out.

If it does not, contact a qualified electrician or marine professional to replace the device.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

HEATER-HOT WATER

A. The most important maintenance factor with the hot water heater is that it is winterized with Winterban (RV anti-freeze) in colder climates. Use the water heater drain valve to vacate water from the tank. The water will automatically drain into the shower sump pump and then will be sent overboard. Make sure the water heater breaker is turned off before any winterization is started to prevent the element from being burned out.

B. If the system is constantly being used in warmer climates it is a good idea to periodically drain the hot water valve for 30 seconds or so to eliminate any scale that has built up inside the hot water heater. Turn the breaker off just as a precaution.

C. The hot water heater and heat exchanger parts are made of aluminum. If engine flushing is required by the manufacturer be sure to disconnect the heat exchanger from the system temporarily.. The caustic chemicals will damage the hot water heater aluminum parts. Re-plumb the heat exchanger back after engine flushing.

D. Test the T& P valve periodically to make sure it works properly. Its purpose is to let off excess water vapor (steam) if the thermostat should stick and a critical temperature situation develops within the tank. Pull on the valve to test it. The water will vacate to the shower sump pump and then overboard.

HIGH WATER ALARM

The high water alarm float is located in the forward bilge. Periodic maintenance consists of visually inspecting the float grate cover for debris and removing any accumulation.

HORN

The air horn features an air pump located behind the AC/DC panel. It emits a sound that can be heard much louder than the typical electrical horn. This extra distance can be useful in ship to ship crossings especially when foul weather is present. Check the air pump periodically for loose fasteners.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

PLUMBING CONNECTORS

All black plumbing connections to the red and blue fresh water lines require special instructions when they are to be removed or replaced. Be sure to turn off the water before starting any plumbing repairs.

1. To remove a tee, 90 degree, or straight fitting first remove the cap on the end of the fitting by using a slotted screwdriver. Insert the screwdriver in the cap slot and turn 90 degrees. Cap will release from the fitting.

1. Push the connector and collar together. Hold the collar next to the connector with your finger. Pull and the connector/collar will release itself from the water line.

To reinstall a plumbing connection to a water line make sure the line is cut off square and the end is smooth. This will aid in ensuring a leakproof connection.

1. Install the cap on the supply line. You may need to use a slotted screwdriver to remove the cap from a new fitting.

2. Simply push the fitting on to the supply line until pressure is felt. This ensures it is completely in the fitting.

3. Push the cap on the collar until it snaps in place. Turn on the water pressure and check for leaks.

Note: With the connector in place, a movement between the line and connector is normal.

PUMP-FRESH WATER

The fresh water system in general requires very little maintenance.

1. See the equipment operation chapter defining the recommended seasonal disinfection procedure.
2. The fresh water filter need to be cleaned periodically. Simply remove the hose clamp and unscrew the fresh water filter to access the screen. Rinse the screen off to remove any foreign debris. Be sure to use teflon tape on the pump fitting threads before installing the filter. Reinstall the components and check for leaks.
3. Periodically check all fittings for leaks.
4. In colder climates, use Winterban or its equivalent in all the fresh water system components after draining the system.
5. There is a fuse located at the positive pump wire.

PUMP-OVERBOARD DISCHARGE

If your boat is equipped with an overboard discharge pump pay close attention to what materials are flushed through the waste system as it could become clogged. Do not pump garbage, rags, or sanitary napkins through the overboard discharge pump (macerator). Flush the waste tank and pump with fresh water with each

pump out. Do not run the pump dry or for extended periods of time since the impeller can be damaged.

Pump the waste system out at decommissioning time and rinse fresh water through the entire system periodically to keep the hoses clean of debris especially the pump out hose.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

REFRIGERATOR

The refrigerator periodically needs the compressor coils cleaned. To accomplish this task, make sure the refrigerator circuit breaker is off and all food cleared out. You need to remove the 2 screws through the top of the cabinet and the 4 screws inserted in the bottom of the refrigerator. To access the 4 bottom screws, remove the drawer beneath the refrigerator and use a stubby Phillips screwdriver. Once all the screws are out, you will be able to access the coils at the rear of the unit by pulling the unit out of the cavity. You should be able to disconnect the plug at this point. Set the unit on a stool to clean the coils using a soft brush. Reinstall.

A good time to clean the inside is after defrosting the refrigerator. Once it is to room temperature, clean all surfaces and trays with a soft cloth and mild cleaner. This will help remove any odors. After the unit is turned back insert a small amount of baking powder to help move any odors produced by stored food.

When leaving the boat for extended periods make sure the circuit breaker is off, all material removed from the refrigerator and the door is wedged open.

Before performing any maintenance work on the refrigerator turn off the icemaker breaker at the ship's AC panel.

Never cover the ventilation openings of the refrigerator. Never connect a battery charger directly to the refrigerator.

TO DEFROST THE REFRIGERATOR:

1. Turn the unit off at the ship's AC panel.

2. Remove all products from the interior.

3. Remove the ice bucket and discard ice.

4. Place a towel or other absorbent material on the bottom of the ice bin and bottom of unit.

5. You can speed up the defrost process by filling the ice bucket with warm water, not hot, and place the bucket back into ice maker housing on the towel or other absorbent material and close door to unit.

6. After approximately 1 hour, remove the ice bucket and discard the water.

7. Allow the frost to completely melt naturally. Clean the interior and ice bucket using a mild non-abrasive detergent and warm water solution applied with a soft sponge or non abrasive cloth.

Note: Do not use any solvent-based or abrasive cleaners.

1. Dampen a soft sponge or non-abrasive cloth in clean water and wipe the cabinet interior and ice bucket to remove any detergent residue. Rinse the sponge or cloth in clean water and repeat as needed until the cabinet and ice bucket are clean, then dry interior with a clean dry cloth. Do not place ice bucket in dishwasher.

2. When interior is dry, energize the unit. To safeguard against contaminants in ice, discard the first 3 batches of ice after defrosting.

TO CLEAN CONDENSOR COILS

As part of general maintenance ensure the front grille is free of dust and dirt. The grille provides cooling for the unit and condensor coils.

CAUTION

AVOID BODILY INJURY! DO NOT TOUCH THE CONDENSOR FINS! THE CONDENSOR FINS ARE SHARP. THEY CAN BE EASILY DAMAGED.

NOTICE

DO NOT USE ANY TYPE OF CLEANER ON THE CONDENSOR UNIT.

1. Before performing any maintenance work on the refrigerator/icemaker combo turn off the icemaker breaker at the ship's AC panel.
2. Remove the control knob by pulling it straight out away from the grille.

1. Remove the two screws from the grille.
2. Remove grille and grille cap from the unit.

1. Clean the condensor coils using a soft brush with a "combing" action or vacuum cleaner with a long wand. Do not touch the condensor coils.
2. Make sure the grille cap is behind grille in the slots provided in the grille before attaching grille to unit, and secure but do not overtighten both grille screws.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

ICE MAKER INLET SCREEN

Once per boating season the solenoid valve inlet screen must be cleaned as follows:

1. Turn the icemaker breaker off at the ship's AC panel.
2. Shut off the water to the unit. There is a shut-off valve located behind the grille.
3. Pull the unit out to access the back panel.

1. Disconnect the hose connector from the water solenoid valve.
2. DO NOT remove the inlet screen from the water solenoid valve. Use a tooth brush to gently clean any sediment from the inlet screen.
3. Refasten the water supply hose connector to the water solenoid valve. Tighten the connection securely.
4. Open the water supply valve and check for leaks. Make sure the water supply line is not kinked.
5. Reconnect power to the unit before re-installing.

ICE CUBE THICKNESS ADJUSTMENT

The ice cube size may be adjusted by changing the amount of water injected into the ice maker as follows:

1. Remove the ice maker cover.
2. Locate the adjusting screw on the ice maker control box. The adjusting screw is just below the minus(-) and plus (+) signs on the control box. Make adjustments in small increments. Too large of an adjustment could cause the unit to malfunction such as water overflowing and could cause property damage.
3. Turn the adjusting screw toward the (-) sign (clockwise) for smaller cubes or toward the plus (+) align for larger cubes.
4. Install the ice maker cover assembly.

SIRIUS MARINE WEATHER

Note: Your Sirius SR100 Weather System is a sealed unit. DO NOT remove the cover of the receiver. Adjustments require specialized service procedures and tools only available to qualified service technicians. There are no user serviceable parts of adjustments.

Always turn your weather system off before carrying out routine maintenance.

Peform the following periodically:

1. Examine the cables for signs of damage, such as chafing, cuts, or nicks.

2. Check that the cable connectors are firmly attached and dust caps are fitted to any connection not in use.

SHOWER SUMP PUMP

The shower sump pump shown above is used to collect gray water waste from the sinks or the shower itself. After the liquid reaches a designated height, the sump pump energizes through a float switch and exits waste to a manifold then overboard. This system helps to protect our water supply by not dumping used water overboard. Periodically check the sump pump grate for debris such as hair and soap build up. Check to make sure the automatic float operates freely at all times. Also, clean out the box with a bleach/water solution as needed to kill bacteria. You can back flush using the bleach/water procedure.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

STEREO/CD CHANGER/DVD PLAYER AND TELEVISION

Since most of the same cleaning and maintenance tips overlap on these entertainment components, they will be grouped together.

1. To clean the CD slots in stereos, DVD players use a dry or slightly water moistened swab to remove any buildup of debris. This monthly procedure will assist in preventing the CD discs from being scratched.

2. To clean the faceplates of the various units use a dry soft cloth. If the faceplate is stained badly, use a moist cloth with a neutral cleaner. Do not use harsh, caustic or alcohol based chemicals to keep the letters from coming off the faceplate. Do not use silicone spray or WD-40 since they could damage mechanical parts.

3. If these units will not play CD's properly it they may have developed condensation. Wait 1 hour and retry.

4. Keep all remote controls out of extreme heat and high moisture environments. Change batteries often for best operation.

5. Periodically check CD discs for scratched and dirty ones. Clean the dirty ones with a cleaning kit which can be purchased at most electronic stores.

6. With flat screen televisions, do not attempt to service the unit yourself since high voltage exists.

7. To clean the flat screen display, dampen a soft cloth with water or a mild detergent. The best cleaner is a screen cleaning tissue specifically designed for antistatic coating. Never use flammable cleaning materials or glass cleaners with ammonia since they attack the television screen surface.

STEREO CONTROLS IN WHEEL- REPLACING BATTERIES

LATER MODELS

On 2007 and later models, pull the center steering wheel out to expose the stereo control circuit board and # 2032 lithium battery. Position + side up on a new battery.

EARLIER MODELS

On 2006 models, there is a lithium # 2032 wafer style battery located under the steering wheel center hub. To change the battery do the following:

1. Grasp the top of the steering wheel cover. Pull the cover with equal pressure as shown until it clears the top of the wheel framework.

2. Continue to pull the cover in the middle and bottom cover sections until the cover is off the spoke area.

Note: With the cover loose be careful not to pull on the electrical wires. As needed disconnect them from their connection points.

1. Notice the battery. Be sure to install the new battery with the positive + side up (should be marked).

2. After the battery is installed and the wires are tucked in place, insert the cover over the wheel framework and push down lightly at all edges to seat the cover.

TELEVISION FLAT SCREEN MONITOR TRIM TABS

These cleaning recommendations cover LG and earlier Sharpe TV's installed in the salon, mid cabin and forward stateroom. Regular cleaning of the these units will help extend their life. Turn the power off at the breaker before you begin any cleaning procedure.

Cleaning The Screen

Wet a soft cloth in a mixture of warm water and fabric softener or dish washing detergent. Wring out the cloth until it is almost dry. Wipe the screen to remove dust and debris.

Remove any excess water from the screen and let the screen air-dry before you activate the television breaker and turn the unit on.

Cleaning The Cabinet

Use a soft, lint-free cloth to clean the cabinet off. Again, do not use a wet cloth.

NOTICE

WHEN LEFT FOR EXTENDED PERIODS TURN THE TELEVISION BREAKER TO THE OFF POSITION TO HELP PREVENT POWER SURGES OR LIGHTNING DAMAGE.

NOTICE

TO PROTECT THE INTERNAL TELEVISION COMPONENTS OF THE TELEVISION REMOVE THE TELEVISION FROM THE VESSEL IN FREEZING CLIMATES. SEE CONTACT YOUR REGAL DEALER FOR TECHNICAL SERVICE.

Trim refers to the running angle of the boat while underway to achieve the most efficient planning angle. Check all electrical connections for tightness, corrosion, and chafing. All mechanical trim tab components should be checked periodically. If a malfunctioning tab is suspected, run each tab in and out while someone looks at each tab to make sure it is moving up and down the proper distance. Replace zinc anodes when at one half their life as determined by size. Check anodes twice a month.

Check the fluid in the hydraulic power unit (HPU) to make sure it is at the proper level. The pump is located in the bilge close to the transom. To refill, remove the lexan cover and filler plug. Fill with any type automatic transmission fluid (ATF). The fluid level should be 2" from the reservoir bottom.

The trim tabs may be painted for corrosion protection. Do not paint the anodes as they protect the tabs from galvanic corrosion.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

The VacuFlush® toilet system needs to be cleaned periodically for maximum sanitation and operational efficiency. Clean the bowl with a cleaner such as Bon Ami which will not abrade the toilet bowl lining. Do not use chlorine solvents or caustic chemicals, such as the drain openers because the various system seals may be damaged.

Use the following procedure monthly or when leaving the vessel for extended periods.

1. Fill bowl with water.
2. Add 1 cup of biodegradable powdered laundry detergent.

3. Flush toilet by pressing the pedal for about 2 minutes. Release foot pedal to close flush ball.

4. Completely pump out holding tank. Most marinas use a vacuum hose connected to the deck waste fitting that pulls the waste from the tank. We suggest using a hose after the process and shoot a few bursts of fresh water down the waste fitting at the deck. This helps the residue left from the pump-out process from building up in the waste hose.

If an odor is apparent from the system try the following:

1. Clean the system out using the above procedure.
2. Check to see that the vent from the holding tank to thru-hull fitting is not clogged.
3. Periodically add the correct holding tank deodorant either Secure or Sealand liquid.
4. Replace the in-line vent filter located in the mid cabin equipment locker once per year. This filter can be ordered from a Regal dealer or your local marine supply store. See the illustration.

1. At least annually tighten all hose clamps, check all wire connections, check and tighten all water valve screws, and clean filter screen in water valve.

VACUUM CLEANER

CLEANING STRETCH HOSE

The stretch hose on occasion has a tendency to get clogged, especially if you have pets on board. To clean the hose:

1. Lift the hose up at both ends and dispense some liquid detergent into both ends.
2. With a garden hose, holding both ends still up, fill 3/4 with water.
3. Shake hose up and down, let detergent loosen the dirt and clogged debris.
4. Stretch the hose as far as you can (2 people required) and wash the dirt out with the full pressure of a garden hose. Repeat as necessary.
5. Hang hose up on one end. Let hose drain and dry completely.

NOTICE

DISPOSE OF DEBRIS IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY MANNER.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

WINDLASS

The windlass needs periodic maintenance to keep it in top running condition. Every 6 months the manufacturer recommends that the unit be disassembled and all the above deck parts be washed down with fresh water. Lightly oil (SAE 10) the seal, shaft, cone clutch and spline. Ensure that the base, below the gipsy, is cleaned well and the sealing ring is checked. Grease the threads on the chain pipe cover and stripper screws before re-assembly.

The bearing is self lubricating and should not require servicing.

Below the deck check regularly the condition of the motor/gear box and terminals and re-apply grease when necessary. The motor/gear box is two part epoxy painted to protect it against corrosion as it is constructed of steel and lives in the harshest environment on your craft. If corrosion on the motor is evident, clean and repaint with marine grade oil based enamel paint.

WARNING

TO PREVENT BODILY INJURY REMOVE THE CHAIN FROM WINDLASS BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE.

WINDLASS CONCEPT 1 PARTS LISTING

Item	Description	Qty	Gypsy Capstan	Gypsy Only
1	Motor/Gearbox 12V	1	68000120	68000120
1a	Motor/Gearbox 24V	1	68000121	68000121
1	Motor/Gearbox 12V	1	68000527	68000527
1a	Motor/Gearbox 24V	1	68000538	68000538
2	Spirol clip	1	B7782	B7782
3	Circlip	1	B6126	B6126
4	Delinn Washer	1	65000259	65000259
5	Drive Key	1	65000177	65000177
6	Shaft	1	65000168	65000167
6a	Shaft 6" Extention Kit	1	68000172	68000171
7	Beanrg	1	65000246	65000246
8	Upper Cone	1	N/A	65000171
9	Top Nut Washer	1	N/A	65000262
10	Top nut	1	N/A	65000173
11	Seal Washer	1	65000276	65000276
12	Rubbing Washer	1	65000169	65000169
13	Seal	1	B2580	B2580
14	Lower Cone	1	65000170	65000170
15	Gypsy & Stripper Assy 000	1	68000360	68000360
15a	Gypsy & Stripper Assy 001	1	68000361	68000361
15b	Gypsy & Stripper Assy 002	1	68000362	68000362
15c	Gypsy & Stripper Assy 003	1	68000363	68000363
15d	CSK HD Screw M4x20	3	B0561	B0561
16	Stripper Only 000, 001 & 002	1	65000582	65000582
16a	Stripper Only 003	1	65000583	65000583
17	Base (Grey)	1	65000530	65000530
17a	Base (White)	1	65000566	65000566
17b	Base (Chrome)	1	N/A	N/A
18	Chain pipe cover (Grey)	1	65000531	65000531
18a	Chain pipe cover (White)	1	65000567	65000567
18b	Chain pipe cover (Chrome)	1	N/A	N/A
19	Skt Hd Cap Screw M5x25	1	65000286	65000286
20	Skt Hd Cap Screw M5x40	2	65000287	65000287
21	Drum	1	65000174	N/A
22	Drum Washer	1	65000263	N/A
23	Drum Top Nut	1	65000176	N/A
24	In fill Piece	1	65000543	65000543
25	Skt Hd Cap Screw M6x35	1	65000565	65000565
26	Sealing Gasket (Grey)	1	65000306	65000306
26a	Sealing Gasket (White)	1	65000518	65000518
27	Pawl	1	N/A	N/A
28	Pawl Pillar	1	N/A	N/A
29	Ball Spring Delnn	1	N/A	N/A
30	Pan Hd Screw M5x16	1	N/A	N/A
	ARM KIT	1	68000346	68000346
31	Arm	1	65000540	65000540
32	Spring	1	65000542	65000542
33	Shoulder Screw	1	65000544	65000544

WINDLASS CONCEPT 1 PARTS IDENTIFICATION

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

STERN DRIVE PROPULSION-MAINTENANCE

ENGINE

Each engine package is unique and quite complex. A select portion of basic maintenance items are covered in this chapter including lubrication specifications and basic periodic maintenance procedures. Because of the advanced ignition and fuel injection systems used on marine engines we recommend contacting a Regal dealer for more of the detailed service requirements.

CAUTION

AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE! FOLLOW ALL ENGINE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES AS RECOMMENDED BY THE ENGINE MANUFACTURER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE MAY VOID THE ENGINE AND STERN DRIVE WARRANTY.

CAUTION

AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE! DO NOT RUN ENGINE AT A CONSTANT RPM FOR PROLONGED PERIODS OF TIME DURING BREAK-IN PERIOD. CHECK ENGINE OIL OFTEN.

CAUTION

AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE! DO NOT RUN ENGINE OUT OF WATER UNLESS YOU HAVE AN OPTIONAL FLUSHETTE. FOLLOW MANUFACTURER'S ATTACHING & RUNNING INSTRUCTIONS.

SAFETY FIRST

Be aware of the following safety information before carrying out any engine maintenance:

1. Never carry out any maintenance on the engine if you are unsure of how the procedure should be accomplished.
2. Always read and understand all safety labels and information before attempting to do engine maintenance.
3. Stop the engine and turn off all battery switches and remove all ignition keys from the switch.
4. Do not smoke or use a flame on board the vessel while doing engine maintenance.
5. Make sure you are outfitted properly with tight fitting clothes, hair tucked under a cap, and tools properly stored.
6. Ensure that the entire area is ventilated to allow a constant flow of fresh air.
7. Ensure that all lift equipment is in good condition and all chains and pulleys pull the engine straight up.
8. Make sure the engine is cool before performing engine maintenance to avoid burns.
9. Make sure any parts are replaced with the exact marine replacements. Do not substitute automotive style parts.
10. Read the engine manufacturer's manual and understand it. Call for professional technical assistance if unsure of the procedure or the consequences.
11. Always dispose of waste materials in an environmentally friendly manner.

VOLVO STERN DRIVE ENGINE PARTS IDENTIFICATION

1. Exhaust Overheat Sensors
2. Circuit Breaker and Fuses
3. Engine Cover
4. Flame Arrestor
5. Alternator
6. Exhaust Risers
7. Remote Oil Filter Assembly
8. Remote Oil Filter Out
9. Remote Oil Filter In
10. Engine Oil Filter

11. Oil Dipstick

12. Oil Siphon Tube

13. Automatic Belt Tensioner
14. Serpentine Belt
15. Power Steering Fluid Fill
16. Power Steering Pump
17. Raw Water Pump
18. Raw Water Outlet
19. Raw Water Inlet
20. Engine Water Circulation Pump

21. Fuel Pump (High Pressure)

22. Fuel Pump (Low Pressure)

23. Fuel Filter
24. Running Engine Flush Port
25. Engine Thermostat Housing
26. Spark Plugs
27. Oil Fill Cap
28. Engine Raw Water Drain ¹
29. Starter
30. Exhaust Manifold Water Drain
31. Exhaust Manifold
32. Engine Oil Cooler
33. Knock Sensor

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES-VOLVO ENGINES

Note: All fluid recommendations are based on this manual's printing date. Regal is not responsible for the accuracy of the information since it can change at any time. For more detailed information and procedures check your engine operators manual or call a Regal dealer servicing the product line.

Checking the Engine Oil

LIOENRAHC
weltAnticipatedTemperature	RecommendedSAE Viscosityi0
32 DegreesF & Above	3EAS5W02EAS5W51EAS
O Degrees30TDegrees F	2W02EAS
Bek0Degrees F	WEAS

Volvo 8.1 uses approximately 9 quarts with a oil filter.

* SAE 30 Volvo Penta DuraPlus synthetic motor oil for API Service CE/SG (Volvo # 3851230-7). If the recommended oil is not available, use pure synthetic multi-viscosity oil.

NOTICE

PREVENT ENGINE DAMAGE! DO NOT ALLOW THE CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL TO RECEDE BELOW THE ADD MARK, AND DO NOT FILL ABOVE THE FULL MARK. OVERFILLING RESULTS IN REDUCED ENGINE LIFE, HIGH OPERATING TEMPERATURES, FOAMING & LOSS OF POWER.

Remove the dipstick. from the dipstick tube. The oil level must lie between the A and B marks on the dipstick. Add the recommended oil to maintain the proper level. Do not overfill the engine crankcase as foaming may develop.

Be sure to check the oil level with the engine off. Never force the dipstick in the tube. For an accurate readig always wipe off the dipstick with a clean soft cloth before reinserting it.

After removing the oil fill cap refill the crankcase using the manufacturer's recommended oil. Use a funnel to avoid spills and dispose of all used containers and contaminated oil in an environmentally friendly manner.

Volvo-Changing Engine Oil

Changing engine oil and filter at the recommended maintenance periods is one of the most important aspects of long engine life.

To change the engine oil & filter do the following:

1. Run the engine at idle speed until the temperature gauge reads normal engine temperatures.

2. Turn off the engine and remove the ignition keys.

3. Remove the dipstick. There is a special fitting on the dipstick tube used to connect a hand or electric suction pump.

4. Remove engine oil with the suction pump. Be sure to disconnect the pump and close the fitting securely.

5. Using a filter wrench remove the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise. Be sure to use a container to catch the oil and dispose of properly. Wipe off the oil filter base at the engine side.

6. Apply a small amount of fresh oil to the new oil filter gasket and thread it on the shaft in a clockwise direction. Use a filter wrench to tighten the filter. Normally 3/4 to 1 turn after the filter contacts the base will provide a leakfree position. Do not overtighten the filter.

7. Remove the oil cap and fill the engine crankcase with manufacturer's recommended oil. Do not overfill the crankcase.

8. Install the dipstick and the oil cap.

9. Start the engine. Check immediately for any oil leaks at the oil filter.

10. Remove the oil dipstick and wipe it off with a clean cloth. Reinsert the dipstick and pull it out. Make sure the oil is between the 2 marks. Add as needed.

To remove filter turn in a counterclockwise direction.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo-Checking Power Steering Fluid

1. Check the power steering fluid before each boating outing. Remove the steering reservoir and check the fluid level. If the engine has not been running use the "COLD" mark. Use the "HOT" mark for engines that have been running at normal operating temperature as indicated by the temperature gauge.
2. The fluid should be between the minimum and maximum marks on the dipstick. If needed, fill to the proper level with Volvo Penta Dura Plus Power Trim/Tilt & Steering Fluid. DO NOT OVERFILL THE STEERING PUMP RESERVOIR.
3. Replace the fill cap and tighten securely.

PREVENT STEERING OPERATION IMPAIRMENT OR COMPONENT DAMAGE! NEVER FILL THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM WITH AN UNKNOWN OIL.

When checking the power steering reservoir do not let foreign objects or debris enter the system.

NOTICE

TO FILL THE TRIM, CRANKCASE & POWER STEERING LEVELS WITHOUT SPILLING FLUID PURCHASE A FUNNEL AT AN AUTOMOTIVE STORE WITH A LONGER NECK THAT WILL FIT THE RESERVOIR OPENINGS.

Volvo-Checking / Replacing Engine Sea Water Pump Impeller

Always carry an extra water pump impeller. They are available through your Regal dealer or Volvo repair center. It is a good idea to carry a 1/4" drive socket set in both metric and US units along with a torque wrench with an adapter socket. You will find it very useful in tight spots such as the water pump bolts.

Note: This repair is best done as a preventative maintenance item out of the water. In an emergency be sure to plug the raw water hoses with rags to prevent the vessel from possible sinking.

1. Loosen the hose clamps and remove the hoses from the sea water pump. Sometimes the hoses are seated so it may be necessary to run an object such as a screwdriver around the hose to break it free from the housing.

2. Loosen the 4 screws and remove the housing.

3. Check the impeller for cracks, melted or missing blades.

4. Inspect the O ring for any signs of wear, nicks or cuts.

5. Check the housing for deep grooves which may cause the impeller to lose its prime.

1. Lubricate the pump housing with a non-petroleum based lubricate such as glycerine.

2. Reinstall the impeller in the housing.

3. Lubricate the O ring housing groove. Reinstall the O ring making sure it is seated completely.

4. Install the housing. Line up the bolt holes.

5. Reinstall the housing bolts. Torque as required. Do not overtighten.

6. Install the hoses and hose clamps. Tighten the hose clamps.

7. In the water start the engine and check for leaks.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo-Replacing Engine Thermostat

To replace the engine thermostat do the following:

1. Remove the long and short bolts.

2. Remove the thermostat housing.

3. Remove thermostat and discard.

4. Remove both the large and small O rings. Check for defects.

5. Place new thermostat and O rings in the cross over pipe housing.

6. Reinstall the upper thermostat housing.

7. Reinstall all bolts & washers. Torque to 18-30 foot pounds.

Volvo-Replacing Fuel Filter

The engine fuel filter is a cartridge spin-on type This fine mesh filter traps water and impurities in the fuel system which helps prevent injector problems. The filter needs to be replaced at least once per season to avoid risk of fire or explosion.

Note: Be sure to use the proper containers to catch any fuel spillage. Dispose of used fuel containers and rags in an environmentally friendly fashion. Never leave fuel contaminated rags on board the vessel.

Fuel Safety Warnings

DANGER

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH DUE TO FIRE OR EXPLOSION! DO NOT SMOKE OR PRODUCE ANY SPARKS INTHE ENGINE COMPARTMENT! VENTILATE THE COMPARTMENT AT ALL TIMES!

DANGER

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH DUE TO FIRE OR EXPLOSION! MAKE SURE ALL BATTERY BOOTS ARE SECURED TO AVOID ANY TOOL ARCING WHILE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT.

To change the fuel filter do the following:

1. Turn off the battery switch. Remove the keys from the ignition switches.

2. Using the proper spanner wrench remove the fuel filter by turning it counterclockwise. Use exact replacement Volvo filters.

3. Lightly lubricate the new fuel filter gasket with clean engine oil.

4. Install the new filter following the directions on the filter.

5. Clean up any spilled fuel.

6. Turn on the battery switch.

7. Run the blowers for at least 5 minutes which will assist in ventilating the engine compartment.

8. Start the engine and check for leaks.

9. Smell for fuel fumes in the bilge.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo-Checking Serpentine Belt

Remove the keys from the ignition switches before performing any maintenance procedure. All Volvo engines use a serpentine belt which connects the alternator, raw water pump, idler pulley, and power steering pump.

The serpentine belt tension is automatically controlled and requires no tension adjustments. At least once per year check the belt for wear, cracks, check marks, dry rot, exposed cords, oil or grease.

When the marks C & D line-up it is time to replace the serpentine belt.

Volvo-Checking Engine Alignment

The engine alignment should be checked annually usually when the stern drive is taken off during decommissioning. A special driveshaft is needed for this maintenance procedure available only at Volvo repair centers or marinas where personnel are trained on the latest engine alignment procedures.

Note: Do not attempt the alignment procedure yourself since drive train/engine component damage will result from misalignment.

VOLVO STERN DRIVE CIRCUIT BREAKER, FUSE & RELAY BOX

A Trim Down Relay
B Trim Up Relay
C Starter Relay
D Fuel Pump Relay
E Ignition Relay
F1 Not Used
F2 Not Used

F3 7.5 Amp Fuse (Fuel Pump)
F4 Not Used
F5 15 Amp Fuse (Ignition)
F6 10 Amp Fuse (Trim Control)
F7 40 Amp Fuse (Instrument Panel)
F8 40 Amp Circuit Breaker (Trim Pump)
F9 20 Amp Fuse (Starter)

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

VOLVO GASOLINE RECOMMENDATIONS

Unleaded Gasoline

Use only unleaded fuel with a minimum of 87 octane. If a 89 octane or higher is used you can expect an increase of power on EFI models.

Mid-grade and premium fuels use injector cleaners and additives that protect the fuel system and provide higher performance.

NOTICE

ENGINE DAMAGE RESULTING FROM THE USE OF A LOWER OCTANE GASOLINE THAN 87 AKI IS CONSIDERED MISUSE OF THE ENGINE AND WILL NOT BE COVERED BY THE ENGINE WARRANTY.

NOTICE

DO NOT USE GASOLINE CONTAINING METHANOL. SERIOUS ENGINE DAMAGE WILL RESULT FROM THE CONTINUED USE OF METHANOL FUEL. ANY ENGINE DAMAGE WILL NOT BE COVERED BY THE ENGINE WARRANTY.

DANGER

FUEL LEAKAGE CAN CAUSE A FIRE OR EXPLOSION! INSPECT THE ENTIRE FUEL SYSTEM AT LEAST ANNUALLY FOR LEAKS, DETERIORATED PARTS AND CORROSION.

Alcohol Enhanced Gasoline

An increasing number of gasolines sold today contain alcohol. Ethanol and Methanol are 2 of the most common alcohol additives.

Your marine engine may be operated using gasoline blended with up to 10% ethanol with a minimum octane rating of 87.

Using gasoline containing ethanol the engine will operate leaner. This could cause engine problems such as stalling at idle speeds, harder starting or vapor lock.

Ethanol enhanced fuels attract and hold moisture. Fuel tanks containing moisture can cause corrosion of the tank material. Inspect fuel system annually.

Leaded Gasoline

For EFI models, do not use gasoline with leaded fuel additives since it could block the fuel injectors and cause gasoline leakage.

Check with marinas before purchasing gasoline to find out what additives are blended in their fuel mix.

Use a fuel stabilizer in the fuel system to prevent gum formation and corrosion. When fuel is left in the tank for more than a month or at winter storage times this becomes a preventative maintenance item.

Note: For more information on Volvo fuel recommendations refer to the engine owner's manual, contact your closest Volvo authorized dealer, or visit the Volvo web-site.

RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES-VOLVO STERN DRIVE

The stern drive unit should be checked before each outing. Tilt the drive unit up and check for any debris around the intake and for fish line tangled in the propeller. Check your engine manual and the maintenance schedules near the end of this section for Volvo products.

Volvo-Checking Sterndrive Oil

It is recommended to check the drive oil level on a weekly basis. Before checking the stern drive oil make sure the stern drive is in the full down position. Adjust the trim accordingly.

1. To check the stern drive oil fully thread the dipstick into the hole.

2. At this point, remove the dipstick and make sure the oil level is at the top of the mark as shown above.

3. If the oil level is low, add enough oil to bring the level to the top of the mark on the dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL.

CAUTION

FULLY THREAD OIL DIPSTICK INTO THE OIL LEVEL HOLE IN THE DRIVE UNIT TO PROPERLY CHECK THE OIL LEVEL. AN IMPROPER OIL LEVEL MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS STERNDRIVE COMPONENT DAMAGE.

1. Tighten up the dipstick with a slotted screwdriver.

If the oil color is milky verses amber in appearance there probably is water in the unit normally caused by a leaking seal.

No metal flakes should be present in the oil. If the above conditions exist contact a Regal dealer.

Note: Use only Volvo Penta Synthetic GL5 75W90 Gearcase Lubricant.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo-Draining & Filling Sterndrive Oil

To change the stern drive oil on DP units precedent as follows:

1. Make sure the drive unit is trimmed to the full down position.
2. Remove the propellers. See the section on propellers to acquaint yourself with the hardware involved.

1. The oil drain plug is forward of the propellers. See illustration. 4. Place a gallon or larger container under the gearcase to catch the used oil.
2. Remove the oil drain plug.
3. Remove the

dipstick from the vertical drive housing. This will help the drive oil drain easier and faster.

1. Allow all drive oil to drain.

8.There is a small magnet on the bottom drain plug. Examine it for metal debris. A fine metal powder look is acceptable. Large particles or flaking indicate possible internal drive gear problems. If OK wipe the magnet dry with a soft clean cloth. If not OK take the vessel to your nearest Volvo repair center.

1. Proper oil level is determined when filled by the oil level hole beside the shift mechanism.

To access the oil level hole remove the five screws holding the shift cover. Now remove the oil level plug from the hole. See the illustration.

1. Check magnet for metal.

2. Check o rings on both plugs for nicks and wear. Replace o rings as needed.

3. Fill drive unit with Volvo Penta Synethic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90. You may want to purchase a pump that will fill the unit easier than using tubes of drive oil.

Fill slowly to purge any air in the drive. When oil appears in the oil level hole it is full.

1. Install the top dipstick by hand. Tightly secure the oil level plug to help stop any loss when removing the pump from the drain hole.

2. Install the lower oil drain plug and tighten.

3. Check oil level at dipstick. Fill as

needed. Tighten the oil dipstick to 48-72 inch pounds.

1. Install shift cover and tighten screws to 14-20 foot pounds.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo-Checking the Power Trim/Tilt Fluid Level

reservoir.

1. At least once annually preferably at the start of the boating season check the system fluid level. Begin with the stern drive trimmed in (down) as far as possible.

2. Remove the fill cap on the power trim pump

3. Check the fluid level. It should be between the minimum and maximum marks on the reservoir.

4. If needed add Volvo Penta DuraPlus Power Trim/Tilt and Steering Fluid.

5. Replace the fill cap and tighten securely.

Volvo-Adjusting Power Trim Sending Unit

1. Push trim/tilt switch to the down position. Drive unit must be in a full trim-down position before adjusting the trim sending unit.
2. Loosen the trim gauge sending unit screws on starboard side of gimbal ring.
3. Rotate trim gauge sending unit as required to achieve a "full down" reading on the trim gauge.
4. Tighten trim gauge sending unit screws to 24 inch pounds.

PROPELLERS

Out-of-balance or nicked props will effect performance or cause vibration. Damaged props should be replaced, but those that are chipped or bent can usually be reconditioned by a marine dealer or a propeller repair facility. When cruising, consider carrying a spare set of props on board because many marinas do not carry a full inventory of replacement propellers. Refer to the manufacturer's engine manual for appropriate stern drive propeller replacement.

Be sure to make a note of the propeller diameter and pitch while the vessel is in dry dock. They are pressed into the prop for easy reading.

Make sure the ignition keys are out of the ignition switch and the battery switch in the "off" position before attempting to remove or install propellers.

It is recommended that you wear a pair of leather gloves to protect yourself from sharp propeller blades. With dual propeller units you may be able to use a piece of wood between the top of the gear housing and the propeller to hold it from turning while you are removing the prop nuts and hardware to access the props. Some of these units use 2 lock nuts, one for each propeller. You may need a special socket and rachet set to remove the propeller nuts. Line up the hardware according to its disassembly for reassembly purposes. Refer to the drawings on the following pages showing selected propeller shaft hardware. See the engine manufacturer's owners manual for further information.

Volvo Duo Prop Removal

Special tools are recommended to remove both propellers from the propeller shaft (Volvo P/N 3855516).

1. The ignition key must be in the off position along with the battery switch.

2. Shift the remote control to the forward position to lock the propeller shaft.

3. Remove the aft propeller nut.

4. Remove the aft propeller.

5. Shift the remote control to reverse to lock the propeller shaft.

6. Remove the front propeller nut.

7. Remove the front propeller.

8. Clean the propeller shaft by wiping it off and inspect for any fish line.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo Duo Prop Installation

Coat both shafts with marine grease. Place the remote control in forward position to lock shafts. Install the front propeller.

Install propeller nut. Tighten to 45 ft. lbs. Make sure the chamfered edge of the prop nut is facing forward. Failure to install the prop nut correctly could result in loss of prop or damage.

Shift the remote control to reverse to lock the propeller shaft. Install the rear propeller.

Install the rear propeller nut and tighten it to 50 ft. lbs. Shift the remote control into neutral. Both propellers should turn freely.

STEERING

Your vessel uses rack or rotary style steering systems that feature a mechanical cable with assistance through the engine power steering pump. As you turn the wheel force is applied through the system to a hydraulic cylinder attached at the aft engine and through the engine power steering pump hoses.

With the engine running, check the engine power steering pump levels before each outing. Add the appropriate power steering fluid. Periodically inspect the entire steering system for tightness and signs of wear and leaks including the steering wheel. Lubricate the steering shaft at the engine. Refer to the manufacturer's engine manual for additional information along with the maintenance chart in this chapter.

HELM MOUNTING BRACKET

STEERING CABLE
SAFE-T HELM STEERING SYSTEM

WARNING

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE!

LOOSENING OR LOSS OF ONE OR MORE

FASTENERS MAY CAUSE FAILURE OF THE STEERING SYSTEM

OR DAMAGE TO THE STEERING CABLE, RESULTING IN LOSS

OF STEERING CONTROL. PERIODICALLY INSPECT THE STEERING SYSTEM.

CAUTION

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY

DAMAGE! ABRUPT TURNS ABOVE 30 MPH MAY RESULT IN LOSS OF CONTROL.

STEERING RESPONSE AT HIGH SPEEDS CAN BE VERY SUDDEN.

ABRUBT TURNS MAY CAUSE YOU TO CROSS YOUR OWN WAKE.

JUMPING A WAKE, SUDDEN TURNS, AND INCREASES OR DECREASES IN SPEEDS MAY BE DANGEROUS.

THE OPERATOR MUST MAKE SURE THAT ALL PASSEYGERS ARE SEATED SECURELY BEFORE MAKING SPEED CHANGES.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

ELECTROLYSIS PROTECTION

Sacrificial zinc anodes usually found on the outdrive housing, trim cylinders or propshaft to protect softer metals exposed to the water. Electrolysis attacks the least noble metals first. Because zinc is a less noble metal, it will decompose before other metals. Check these zinc anodes periodically and have them replaced when they are 50% gone.

Zinc is also used to protect metal that is exposed to saltwater. The salt causes a galvanic action that decomposes metals.

ENGINE ALIGNMENT

Stern drives use a rubber splined hub to which the stern drive driveshaft is attached. There is an alignment specification between the engine and outdrive that needs to check periodically normally when the outdrive is removed for service. A shaft is inserted in the transom area and the alignment can be determined by the spline image left on the tool. The engine mounts are then adjusted to permit a spline image 360 degrees around the alignment tool. This specification should be checked after each 50 hours of operation or if the vessel has run aground or hit a submerged object. Alignment should be checked by a Regal dealer or marine professional since a special tool and procedure is required.

Note: These are basic recommendations. Regal is not responsible for the accuracy of the information since it can change at any time. For more detailed information and procedures check your engine operators manual or call a Regal dealer servicing the product line.

Checking Engine Oil

1. Check the engine oil by first allowing the engine to warm up for a short period. Stop the engine and allow about 5 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. This procedure will assure an accurate dipstick reading.
2. Remove the dipstick. Wipe it clean and reinstall it into the dipstick tube. Wait 1 minute to allow any trapped air to vent. (Install dipstick with oil indication marks facing the flywheel end of the engine. Add Mercury/Quicksilver Synthetic Blend MerCruiser Engine Oil 25W-40 to bring the level up to the full or OK points on the oil dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL.
3. Remove the dipstick and note the oil level. Level must be between full or OK range. Add as necessary. Reinstall dipstick into the tube.

NOTICE

ADDING 1 QUART OF ENGINE OIL WILL RAISETHE OIL LEVEL FROM THE ADD MARK TO THE TOP OF THE OK RANGE.

1. When checking or filling the engine crankcase oil ensure that the vessel is level in the water or on a trailer.

For changing the engine oil & filter see the MerCruiser maintenance schedule and engine operation manual or contact your Regal dealer.

To help provide the best protection and optimum engine performance Mercruiser recommends the use of the following oils listed in their order of preference:

1. MerCruiser/Quicksilver Synthetic Blend, NMMA FC-W rated, 4 cycle oil.
2. MerCruiser/Quicksilver 25W40 NMMA FC-W rated oil.
3. A NMMA FC-W rated oil.
4. MerCruiser/Quicksilver 4-cycle 25W40, non FC-W rated oil.
5. A good grade straight weight detergent automotive oil per the operating chart above.

Note: The use of non-detergent oils, multi-viscosity oils (other than as specified) non FC-W oils, low quality oils or oils that contain solid additives are specifically not recommended.

The 6.2 MPI requires with oil filter 4.5 US quarts of oil. The 496 MPI requires with oil filter 9 US quarts of oil.

Note: Ensure that dipstick is installed with oil level indication marks facing the rear of engine (flywheel end).

MerCruiser-Changing Engine Oil

Changing engine oil and filter at the recommended maintenance periods is one of the most important aspects of long engine life.

To change the engine oil & filter do the following:

1. Run the engine at idle speed until the temperature gauge reads normal engine temperatures.
2. Turn off the engine and remove the ignition keys.
3. Remove the dipstick.
4. Remove engine oil with a suction pump. They can be purchased at automotive stores.

1. Using a filter wrench remove the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise. Be sure to use a container to catch the oil and dispose of in an environmentally friendly way. Wipe off the oil filter base on the engine. See the illustration.
2. Apply a small amount of

fresh oil to the new oil filter gasket and thread it on the shaft in a clockwise direction.

Tighten the filter. Normally 3/4 to 1 turn after the filter contacts the base will provide a leakfree position. Do not overtighten the filter.

1. Remove the oil cap and fill the engine crankcase with manufacturer's recommended oil. Do not overfill the crankcase. See the illustration.
2. Install the dipstick and the oil cap.
3. Start the engine. Check immediately for any oil leaks at the oil filter.

1. Remove the oil dipstick and wipe it off with a clean cloth. Reinsert the dipstick and pull it out. Make sure the oil is up to but not over the full or OK range. Add as required.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MerCruiser-Checking Engine Coolant

CAUTION

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE! A SUDDEN LOSS OF PRESSURE COULD CAUSE VERY HOT COOLANT TO BOIL AND VIOLENTLY DISCHARGE. AFTER THE ENGINE HAS COOLED, TURN THE CAP 1/4 OF A TURN WITH A RAG WRAPPED AROUND THE CAP TO ALLOW PRESSURE TO ESCAPE SLOWLY. THEN PUSH THE CAP DOWN COMPLETELY AND TURN CAP COUNTERCLOCKWISE TO REMOVE.

1. Remove the heat exchanger and visually inspect the coolant level.

2. The coolant level in the heat exchanger should be at the bottom of the filler neck. If coolant is low contact an authorized MerCruiser dealer.

3. When reinstalling the pressure cap turn it completely clockwise making sure it seats on the filler neck.

4. With the engine at normal idle speed, check the coolant level in the recovery bottle. See the illustration.

5. The coolant level must be between the "add" and "full" marks.

6. If coolant needed, use MerCruiser Extended Life Antifreeze/Coolant.

7. Add coolant only when the engine is at normal operating temperature.

8. Remove the filler cap from the recovery bottle.

9. Fill to the "FULL" line with MerCruiser Extended Life Antifreezc/Coolant.

10. Install the filler cap.

11. To change the coolant contact an authorized MerCruiser dealer.

Note: Do not use alcohol or methanol based antifreeze or clear water in the system at anytime.

MerCruiser-Checking Power Steering Fluid

1. Stop the engine and center the sterndrive unit.
2. Remove the combo fill cap/dipstick and observe the level.
   a. Proper fluid level with engine at normal operating temperature should be within the warm range.
   b. Proper fluid level with engine cold should be within the cold range.
3. Fill to line with Quicksilver Power Trim & Steering Fluid (Merc#92-802880A1). If you can not see any fluid in the power steering reservoir contact your Regal dealer since a leak must of developed in the system.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MerCruiser-Changing Cool Fuel Module Filter

Generation 3 MerCruiser engines use a water cooled fuel module to help eliminate vapor lock which is caused by a combination of heat and vacuum. As the fuel system vaporizes the gasoline a starving fuel condition develops. This condition is most prevalent in alcohol blended fuels.

To check or change the fuel filter element do the following:

1. Allow the engine to cool down. The engine manufacturer recommends a 12 hour shutdown prior to filter removal.

2. Disconnect the cool fuel module harness at the unit.

3. Energize the key to the start position and leave engaged for 5 seconds. Turn the key to the "OFF" position.

4. Loosen each filter retaining screws from the module unit. Do not remove the filter unit retaining screws from the filter cap.

5. Pull up on the filter assemble handle to loosen the filter.

6. Drain all fuel into the module unit from the fuel filter.

7. Remove the filter cup from the filter cap by rotating the filter cap clockwise while holding the filter cup.

8. Remove the water separator fuel filter from the filter cup and place it in a metal container. Later dispose of filter in an environmentally friendly fashion.

9. Dispose of any debris and water in the filter cup.

10. Install a new water separator filter in the cup. Push down on the filter until completely seated.

11. Install a new O ring on the filter cup.

1. Attach the filter cap to the filter cup by holding the filter cap and turning it in a counterclockwise direction while holding the filter cup stationary, until the filter cap locks in place.

2. Install the fuel filter slowly into the module to prevent spillage.

3. Line up the filler cap screws in the module and hand tighten them.

1. Make sure the filter cap is seated tightly against the module and torque each filter retaining screw.

2. Reconnect the module harness to the engine wiring harness.

3. Ventilate the engine compartment by using th blowers.

4. Start the engine and check for fuel leaks. If leak is present stop the engine immediately and check for leaks around the fuel filter. Clean any spilled fuel. Ventilate the compartment. If leaks continue contact a MerCruiser or Regal dealer for repair assistance.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MerCruiser-Cleaning Flame Arrestor

Note: Make sure the ignition keys are removed before starting this procedure. It is recommended that the battery switches be turned to the "OFF" position.

1. Remove the engine cowling by turning the engine cover knob counterclockwise.

2. Disconnectt and remove the crankcase ventilation hose from the fitting on the flame arrestor and valve cover.

3. Remove the flame arrestor.

4. Clean the flame arrestor with a mild detergent and warm water.

5. Be sure to inspect the flame arrestor for any cracks, holes or areas of deterioration.

6. The flame arrestor must be completely dry before installing. You might shake it abit to remove any trapped water.

7. Clean the ventilation hose with warm water and a mild detergent. Let dry completely.

8. There should be no cracks or deterioration on the ventilation hose.

9. Install the flame arrestor and its bracket. Torque the flame arrestor bracket nuts to 106 inch pounds.

10. Connect the crankcase ventilation hose to the fitting on the flame arrestor and valve cover.

11. Check all connections.

12. Install the engine cover by turning the engine cover knob clockwise until tight.

MerCruiser-Replacing PCV Valve

1. Remove the PCV valve. It is located at the port valve cover.
2. Disconnect the PCV valve from the hose and discard the valve.
3. Install a new PCV valve in the valve cover and reconnect the hose.
4. Push down on the PCV valve to seat it in the valve cover.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MerCruiser-Checking/Changing Serpentine Drive Belt

BELT ROUTING DIAGRAM

1. Use a breaker bar and the correct socket to hold back the tensioner and relieve the belt tension Rotate the tensioner away from the belt until it stops. Illustration A.
2. Remove the belt from the idler pulley and slowly relieve the tension on the breaker bar.
3. Remove the belt and reconnect the new belt according to the belt routing diagram.
4. Use a breaker bar and the correct socket to position the tensioner back to the engine running location and slide the belt over the tensioner pulley. Slowly relieve the tensioner to the belt. Illustration A.

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE! THE BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY CONTAINS A HIGH TENSION SPRING. RELIEVE THE SPRING TENSION AND SNAP THE TENSIONER BACK SLOWLY!

Check the belt for the following conditions; glazed, cracks, excessive wear and frying material. Minor cracks across the belt are acceptable but lengthwise cracks that join across the belt cracks are not acceptable.

Note: If a serpentine belt is to be reused it must be installed in the same direction it came off.

The belt tensioner is designed with cast stops as limit marks. If the tensioner is contacting either of the 2 limits during operation check the mounting brackets and belt length. If the above condition exists, contact your closest MerCruiser or Regal dealer.

Breaker bar with arrow showing direction of movement to relieve tension.

a=breaker bar

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MerCruiser-Circuit Breaker/Fuse Information

The engine electrical circuit provides overload protection with circuit breaker and fuses in key locations. If an overload condition develops a circuit breaker will “pop” and/or a fuse will “blow”.

In either case the root cause of the problem should be found and corrected before replacing the fuse or resetting the circuit breaker.

In an emergency situation if the cause of the overload cannot be determined, disconnect all accessories connected to the engine and instrumentation wiring.

Reset the circuit breaker. If the breaker remains open, the problem has not been corrected.

1. A 50 amp engine circuit breaker protects the engine wiring harness and the power wiring up to the instrumentation. Reset the breaker by pushing "in" on the reset button.

1. Located at the largest post of the solenoid is a 90 amp fuse. It protects the wiring harness should an overload occur. It is an epoxy covered fuse for corrosion and vibraiton purposes. Should this device fail the fuse will not show continuity with a ohm tester.

1. The main power and fuel pump relays control voltage to the engine with the ignition key in the "on" position. Also, voltage to the electric fuel pump is routed through this relay.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MERCRIJSER GASOLINE RECOMMENDATIONS

Unleaded Gasoline

Use only unleaded fuel with a minimum of 87 octane. 89 or 92 octane fuels will provide increased engine performance in the United States and Canada..

Mid-grade and premium fuels use injector cleaners and additives that protect the fuel system and provide higher performance.

NOTICE

ENGINE DAMAGE RESULTING FROM THE USE OF A LOWER OCTANE GASOLINE THAN 87 (R+M) /2 IS CONSIDERED MISUSE OF THE ENGINE AND WILL NOT BE COVERED BY THE ENGINE WARRANTY.

NOTICE

DO NOT USE GASOLINE CONTAINING METHANOL. SERIOUS ENGINE DAMAGE COULD RESULT FROM THE CONTINUED USE OF METHANOL FUEL. ANY ENGINE DAMAGE WILL NOT BE COVERED BY THE ENGINE WARRANTY.

Whenever possible only use alcohol-free gasoline to eliminate the effects of alcohol in gasoline. If alcohol blended fuels are used increased system inspections for leaks and fuel system failures are mandatory. Contact your closest authorized MerCruiser dealer for more information.

Alcohol Enhanced Gasoline

An increasing number of gasolines sold today contain alcohol. Ethanol and methanol are 2 of the most common alcohol additives.

Your marine engine may be operated using gasoline blended with up to 10% ethanol with a minimum octane rating of 87.

Using gasoline containing ethanol will result in a leaner operating engine. This could cause engine problems such as stalling at idle speeds, harder starting or vapor lock.

Ethanol enhanced fuels attract and hold moisture. Fuel tanks containing moisture can cause corrosion of the tank material. Inspect fuel system annually.

Leaded Gasoline

Do not use gasoline with leaded fuel additives since it could block the fuel injectors and cause gasoline leakage. Check with marinas before purchasing gasoline to find out what additives are blended in their fuel mix.

Use a fuel stabilizer in the fuel system to prevent gum formation and corrosion. When fuel is left in the tank for more than a month or at winter storage time fill the tank to prevent condensation entering the fuel tank/system.

Note: For more information on MerCruiser fuel recommendations refer to the engine owner's manual, contact your closest MerCruiser authorized dealer, or visit the Mercury Marine web-site.

RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES-MERCRUISER STERN DRIVE

The stern drive unit should be checked before each outing. Tilt the drive unit up and check for any debris around the intake and for fish line tangled in the propeller. Check your engine manual and the maintenance schedules near the end of this section for MerCruiser products.

MerCruiser-Checking Sterndrive Oil

Note: Be sure to check the drive oil with the engine cold before starting the engine.

1. Check the gear lube oil level at the monitor. Always keep the oil level within the recommended operating range. If oil appears at the bottom of the monitor or if discolored call an authorized MerCruiser dealer.

2. If more than 2 fl. oz. of High Performance Gear Lubricant is required to fill the monitor, a drive seal may have developed a leak. Drive damage could occur. Contact an authorized MerCruiser dealer.

MerCruiser-Changing Stern drive Oil

1. Remove the drive oil monitor from the bracket.
2. Empty the contents into a suitable container for disposal later in an environmentally friendly fashion.
3. Trim the drive to a level position.
4. Remove the gearcase drain screw as shown in illustration A.
5. Catch the oil contents in a suitable container.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

1. Remove the oil vent screw from the vertical drive housing as shown in illustration B. Make sure the oil drains completely.

2. Check the contents of the container for water or discolored oil as this could be a leaky seal problem. Do not refill the unit. Contact your closest authorized MerCruiser dealer.

3. Again, make sure the drive unit is level. Fill the stern drive unit from the bottom gearcase fill plug. Use only Mercury/Quicksilver High Performance Gear Lubricant in the stern drive. If you are using tubes it normally requires around 100.5 ounces to fill the unit completely. Some people prefer to use a pump system.

4. When the lubricant exits the vertical drive fill hole with no air bubbles install the upper fill plug and washer.

5. Continue to fill the drive unit and the monitor will eventually reach the correct operating level. Do not overfill. Once the monitor is filled to operating specifications reinstall the lower fill screw and washer. Tighten securely.

6. Recheck the gear lubricant level at the monitor when the stern drive is cool and the engine is not running.

MerCruiser-Checking Power Trim Fluid

1. Always check the power trim fluid with the stern drive in the full down or in position.

2. The trim pump is located in the engine compartment usually close to the transom. Check the oil level. It must be between the "MIN" and "MAX" levels at the reservoir. Make sure the lubricant is amber color. A milky appearance normally indicates a seal or O ring leak. Contact your closest authorized MerCruiser dealer.

3. Fill the reservoir with power trim and steering fluid.

PROPELLERS

Out-of-balance or nicked props will effect performance or cause vibration. Damaged props should be replaced, but those that are chipped or bent can usually be reconditioned by a marine dealer or a propeller repair facility. When cruising, consider carrying a spare set of props on board because many marinas do not carry a full inventory of replacement propellers. Refer to the manufacturer's engine manual for appropriate stern drive propeller replacement.

Be sure to make a note of the propeller diameter and pitch while the vessel is in dry dock. They are pressed into the prop for easy reading.

Make sure the ignition keys are out of the ignition switch and the battery switch in the "off" position before attempting to remove or install propellers.

With Bravo 3 models the remote control must be in neutral before attempting to remove the propellers and hardware. It is recommended that you wear a pair of leather gloves to protect yourself from sharp propeller blades.

With dual propeller units you may be able to use a piece of wood between the top of the gear housing and the propeller to hold it from turning while you are removing the prop nuts and hardware to access the props.

Some of these units use 2 lock nuts, one for each propeller. You may need a special socket and rachet set to remove the propeller nuts. Line up the hardware according to its disassembly for reassembly purposes.

Refer to the drawings on the following pages showing selected propeller shaft hardware. See the engine manufacturer's owners manual for further information.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY! REMOTE CONTROL MUST BE IN NEUTRAL BEFORE REMOVING OR INSTALLING PROPELLER(S).

MerCruiser-Bravo 3 Propeller Removal

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY! MAKE SURE ENGINE(S) IS OFF AND KEY(S) IS REMOVED FROM IGNITION BEFORE REMOVING/INSTALLING PROPELLERS.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY! PLACE A BLOCK OF 2 X 4 WOOD BETWEEN THE ANTI-VENTILTION PLATE AND PROPELLER(S) TO PROTECT HANDS FROM SHARP PROPELLER BLADES.

Note: The above procedure will also assist in keeping the propeller from turning when tightening the propeller nuts or removing the nuts on disassembly.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

1. Place a block of wood (2 x 4) between the propeller blades and anti-ventilation plate to prevent the propellers from rotating.
2. Remove the bolt and washers securing the propeller shaft anode.
3. Remove the propeller shaft anode.
4. Turn the propeller shaft nut counterclockwise to remove the nut. Use a 1 7/16" deep socket and ratchet.
5. Slide the propeller and thrust hub from the propeller shaft.
6. Turn the front propeller nut counterclockwise to remove the nut. Use a 2 3/4" combination wrench.
7. Slide the propeller and thrust hub from the propeller shaft.
8. Inspect all components.

MerCruiser-Bravo 3 Propeller Installation

1. Slide forward thrust hub on the propeller shaft with the tapered side toward propeller hub (toward end of shaft).
2. Apply a sufficient amount of 2-4-C Lubricant with teflon to all areas of the propeller shaft.
3. Align splines and place the propeller on the shaft.
4. Install and torque the forward prop nut to 100 foot pounds.
5. Slide the aft thrust hub on the propshaft with tapered side toward propeller hub (toward end of shaft).
6. Line up the splines and and place propeller on propeller shaft.
7. Install and torque the rear prop nut to 100 foot pounds.
8. Install the propeller shaft anode over the propeller shaft nut.
9. Place the flat washer on the propeller shaft anode screw.

10. Place the star washer on the propeller shaft anode screw.

11. Apply Locktite Threadlocker 271 to the threads of the propeller shaft anode screw.

12. Secure the propeller shaft anode to the propeller shaft using the propeller shaft anode screw and washers. Torque the screw. to 20 foot pounds.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

STEERING

Your vessel uses rack or rotary style steering systems that feature a mechanical cable with assistance through the engine power steering pump. As you turn the wheel force is applied through the system to a hydraulic cylinder attached at the aft engine and through the engine power steering pump hoses.

With the engine running, check the engine power steering pump levels before each outing. Add the appropriate power steering fluid. Periodically inspect the entire steering system for tightness and signs of wear and leaks including the steering wheel. Lubricate the steering shaft at the engine. Refer to the manufacturer's engine manual for additional information along with the maintenance chart in this chapter.

WARNING

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE! LOOSENING OR LOSS OF ONE OR MORE FASTENERS MAY CAUSE FAILURE OF THE STEERING SYSTEM OR DAMAGE TO THE STEERING CABLE, RESULTING IN LOSS OF STEERING CONTROL. PERIODICALLY INSPECT THE STEERING SYSTEM.

CAUTION

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE! ABRUPT TURNS ABOVE 30 MPH MAY RESULT IN LOSS OF CONTROL. STEERING RESPONSE AT HIGH SPEEDS CAN BE VERY SUDDEN. ABRUBT TURNS MAY CAUSE YOU TO CROSS YOUR OWN WAKE. JUMPING A WAKE, SUDDEN TURNS, AND INCREASES OR DECREASES IN SPEEDS MAY BE DANGEROUS. THE OPERATOR MUST MAKE SURE THAT ALL PASSENGERS ARE SEATED SECURELY BEFORE MAKING SPEED CHANGES.

ELECTROLYSIS PROTECTION

ANODE LOCATION BRAVO 3

Sacrificial zinc anodes are usually found on the outdrive housing, trim cylinders or propshaft to protect softer metals exposed to the water. Electrolysis attacks the least noble metals first. Because zinc is a less noble metal, it will decompose before other metals. Check these zinc anodes periodically and have them replaced when they are 50% eroded.

Zinc is also used to protect metal that is exposed to saltwater. The salt causes a galvanic action that decomposes metals.

ENGINE ALIGNMENT

Stern drives use a rubber splined hub to which the stern drive driveshaft is attached. There is an alignment specification between the engine and outdrive that needs to check periodically normally when the outdrive is removed for service. A shaft is inserted in the transom area and the alignment can be determined by the spline image left on the tool. The engine mounts are then adjusted to permit a spline image 360 degrees around the alignment tool. This specification should be checked after each 50 hours of operation or if the vessel has run aground or hit a submerged object. Alignment should be checked by a Regal dealer or marine professional since a special tool and procedure is required.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MERCRIJSER MAINTENANCE GUIDE

	EACH TRIP	YREVE YREVE 3YREVE YREVE YR
		YLKEEW YEAR YRS. .SHTM )SRH001( )SRH003(				.SRY2	.S
Oil, Engine	*
Oil, Drive	*
Oil, Trimhp	*
Helengit	*
ehsulF Cogli	*
ctaWPick-Ups		*
den		*
lhpufes		*
bnndio		*
dorptuEN			*
Enginoon			*
heUpTtnP				*
enghf&				*
DriOil,Change				*
Fuel Filter,Rha				*
&gretSRemotofio				*
EACH TRIP		YLKEEW	2YREVE SHTM	YREVE YEAR	3YREVE YRS.	2YREVE YRS.	5Y YRS.
,dth &pin Rho				*
mikieb Bearing & Engine Coupler				*
stT e&me MaB				*
Engine Mounts, eucRte				*
Check ignition parts, timing				*
PCV Valve, Rapla				*
Flame Arrestor, naelC				*
tcepsnRts				*
&skaeL Tightness, Exhaust Sys.				*
Disassemble Seawater Pump				*
&skaeL Tightness, Cooling System				*
Clean seawater section, cooling syes				*
Rapda Gb						*
Lube U-joints				*

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

GOLECNANETNIAM/ECIVRES
DATE	FOSRHOIEN	DEMROFRERIAPER/

V-DRIVE PROPULSION-MAINTENANCE

ENGINE

Each engine package is unique and quite complex. A select portion of basic maintenance items are covered in this chapter including lubrication specifications and basic periodic maintenance procedures. Because of the advanced ignition and fuel injection systems used on marine engines we recommend contacting a Regal dealer for more of the detailed service requirements.

CAUTION

AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE! FOLLOW ALL ENGINE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES AS RECOMMENDED BY THE ENGINE MANUFACTURER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE MAY VOID THE ENGINE AND STERN DRIVE WARRANTY.

CAUTION

AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!DO NOT RUN ENGINEAT A CONSTANT RPMFOR PROLONGED PERIODS OF TIMEDURING BREAK-IN PERIOD.CHECK ENGINE OIL OFTEN.

CAUTION

AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!DO NOT RUN ENGINE OUT OF WATERUNLESS YOU HAVE AN OPTIONALFLUSHETTE. FOLLOWMANUFACTURER'S ATTACHING &RUNNING INSTRUCTIONS.

SAFETY FIRST

Be aware of the following safety information before carrying out any engine maintenance:

1. Never carry out any maintenance on the engine if you are unsure of how the procedure should be accomplished.

2. Always read and understand all safety labels and information before attempting to do engine maintenance.

3. Stop the engine and turn off all battery switches and remove all ignition keys from the switch.

4. Do not smoke or use a flame on board the vessel while doing engine maintenance.

5. Make sure you are outfitted properly with tight fitting clothes, hair tucked under a cap, and tools properly stored.

6. Ensure that the entire area is ventilated to allow a constant flow of fresh air.

7. Ensure that all lift equipment is in good condition and all chains and pulleys pull the engine straight up.

8. Make sure the engine is cool before performing engine maintenance to avoid burns.

9. Make sure any parts are replaced with the exact marine replacements. Do not substitute automotive style parts.

10. Read the engine manufacturer's manual and understand it. Call for professional technical assistance if unsure of the procedure or the consequences.

11. Always dispose of waste materials in an environmentally friendly manner.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo- V-Drive Engine Removal

In the event the engine, outdrive or V-drive requires major service where it needs to be removed, consult your Regal dealer. Do not undertake this type of repair yourself.

VOLVO V-DRIVE ENGINE PARTS IDENTIFICATION-FRONT VIEW

1. Exhaust Riser
2. Exhaust Overheat Sensor
3. Circuit Breaker and Fuses
4. Engine Oil Fill Cap
5. Flame Arrestor
6. Alternator
7. Remote Oil Filter Assembly

8. Remote Oil Filter Out

9. Remote Oil Filter In

10. Engine Oil Filter
11. Serpentine Belt
12. Raw Water Pump
13. Raw Water Outlet
14. Raw Water Inlet
15. Heat Exchanger Drain Cap

16. Engine Water Circ. Pump

17. Heat Exchanger

18. Engine Thermostat Housing
19. Heat Exchanger Anode
20. Spark Plugs
21. Oil Dipstick (Engine)
22. Engine Coolant Reservoir
23. Engine Coolant Fill Cap

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

VOLVO V-DRIVE ENGINE PARTS IDENTIFICATION-PORT VIEW

1. Fuel Filter
2. Fuel Pump (High Pressure)

3. Fuel Pump (Low Pressure)

4. Shift Lever

5. Transmission Fluid Dipstick

6. Engine Oil Siphon Tube

7. Engine Raw Water Drain

8. Exhaust Manifold
9. Exhaust Manifold Drain

VOLVO V-DRIVE ENGINE PARTS IDENTIFICATION-STARBOARD VIEW

1. Running Engine Flush Port
2. Transmission Fluid Fill

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES-VOLVO ENGINES

Volvo-Checking V-Drive Engine Oil

LIOETRAHC
wøL Anticipated Temperature	Recommended SAE Viscosity iΩ
32 Degrees F & Above	3EAS5W02EAS5W51EAS
O Degrees 3ΩT Degrees F	2W02EAS
Bek0 Degrees F	WEAS

Volvo 8.1 uses approximately 9 quarts with a oil filter.

* SAE 30 Volvo Penta DuraPlus synthetic motor oil for API Service CF/SH or better. If the recommended oil is not available, use pure synthetic multi-viscosity oil.

Note: All fluid recommendations are based on this manuals printing date. Regal is not responsible for the accuracy of the information since it can change at any time. For more detailed information and procedures check your engine operators manual or call a Regal dealer servicing the product line.

NOTICE

PREVENT ENGINE DAMAGE! DO NOT ALLOW THE CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL TO RECEDE BELOW THE ADD MARK, AND DO NOT FILL ABOVE THE FULL MARK. OVERFILLING RESULTS IN REDUCED ENGINE LIFE, HIGH OPERATING TEMPERATURES, FOAMING & LOSS OF POWER.

Remove the dipstick. from the dipstick tube. The oil level must lie between the A and B marks on the dipstick. Add the recommended oil to maintain the proper level. Do not overfill the engine crankcase as foaming may develop.

Be sure to check the oil level with the engine off. Never force the dipstick in the tube. For an accurate reading always wipe off the dipstick with a clean soft cloth before reinserting it.

After removing the oil fill cap refill the crankcase using the manufacturer's recommended oil. Use a funnel to avoid spills and dispose of all the used containers and contaminated oil in an environmentally friendly manner.

Volvo-Changing V-Drive Engine Oil

Changing engine oil and filter at the recommended maintenance periods is one of the most important aspects of long engine life.

To change the engine oil and filter do the following:

1. Run the engine at idle speed until the temperature gauge reads normal engine temperatures.

2. Turn off the engine and remove the ignition keys.

3. Remove the dipstick. There is a special fitting on the dipstick tube used to connect a hand or electric suction pump.

4. Remove engine oil with the suction pump. Be sure to disconnect the pump and close the fitting securely.

5. Using a filter wrench remove the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise. Be sure to use a container to catch the oil and dispose of properly.. Wipe off the oil filter engine base.

6. Apply a small amount of fresh oil to the new oil filter gasket and thread it on the shaft in a clockwise direction. Use a filter wrench to tighten the filter. Normally 3/4 to 1 turn after the filter contacts the base will provide a leakfree position. Do not overtighten the filter.

7. Remove the oil cap and fill the engine crankcase with manufacturer's recommended oil. Do not overfill the crankcase.

8. Install the dipstick and the oil cap.

9. Start the engine. Check immediately for any oil leaks at the oil filter.

10. Remove the oil dipstick and wipe it off with a clean cloth. Reinsert the dipstick and pull it out. Make sure the oil is between the 2 marks. Add as needed.

To remove filter turn in a counterclockwise direction.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo-Checking / Replacing V-Drive Engine Sea Water Pump Impeller

Always carry an extra water pump impeller. They are available through your Regal dealer or Volvo repair center. It is a good idea to carry a 1/4" drive socket set in both metric and US units along with a torque wrench with an adapter socket. You will find it very useful in tight spots such as the water pump bolts.

Note: This repair is best done as a preventative maintenance item out of the water. In an emergency be sure to plug the raw water hoses with rags to prevent the vessel from possible sinking.

1. Loosen the hose clamps and remove the hoses from the sea water pump. Sometimes the hoses are seated so it may be necessary to run an object such as a screwdriver around the hose to break it free from the housing.

2. Loosen the 4 screws and remove the housing.

3. Check the impeller for cracks, melted or missing blades.

4. Inspect the O ring for any signs of wear, nicks or cuts.

5. Check the housing for deep grooves which may cause the impeller to lose its prime.

1. Lubricate the pump housing with a non-petroleum based lubricate such as glycerine.

2. Reinstall the impeller in the housing.

3. Lubricate the O ring housing groove. Reinstall the O ring making sure it is seated completely.

4. Install the housing. Line up the bolt holes.

5. Reinstall the housing bolts. Torque as required. Do not overtighten.

6. Install the hoses and hose clamps. Tighten the hose clamps.

7. In the water start the engine and check for leaks.

Volvo-Replacing V-Drive Engine Thermostat (Raw Water Cooled)

To replace the engine thermostat do the following:

1. Remove the long and short bolts.

2. Remove the thermostat housing.

3. Remove thermostat and discard.

4. Remove both the large and small O rings. Check for defects.

5. Place new thermostat and O rings in the crossover pipe housing.

6. Reinstall the upper thermostat housing.

7. Reinstall all bolts and washers. Torque to 18-30 foot pounds.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo-Replacing V-Drive Engine Thermostat (Closed Cooling)

1. Loosen and remove the long 1 and short boat 2; save for reuse.

2. Remove upper thermostat housing 3.

3. Remove O ring 4 and thermostat 5, gasket 6 from lower thermostat housing 7. Discard gasket and thermostat. Inspect O ring checking for nicks and any points of seepage.

4. Clean thermostat housing surfaces where the gasket makes contact. Use a gasket scraper as needed for this job making sure all gasket material is removed. (Make sure no material drops into the thermostat housing. One way to do this prior to scraping, place a rag in the lower thermostat housing.

5. Place the new thermostat, gasket, and O ring into the groove in the lower thermostat housing.

6. Replace upper thermostat housing.

7. Install bolts and torque to 18-30 ft. lbs.

Volvo-Replacing V-Drive Engine Fuel Filter

The engine fuel filter is a cartridge spin on type This fine mesh filter traps water and impurities in the fuel system which helps prevent injector problems. The filter needs to be replaced at least once per seacon to avoid risk of fire or explosion.

Note: Be sure to use the proper containers to catch any fuel spillage. Dispose of used fuel containers and rags in an environmentally friendly fashion. Never leave fuel contaminated rags on board the vessel.

Fuel Safety Warnings

DANGER

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH DUE TO FIRE OR EXPLOSION! DO NOT SMOKE OR PRODUCE ANY SPARKS INTHE ENGINE COMPARTMENT! VENTILATE THE COMPARTMENT AT ALL TIMES!

DANGER

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH DUE TO FIRE OR EXPLOSION! MAKE SURE ALL BATTERY BOOTS ARE SECURED TO AVOID ANY TOOL ARCING WHILE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT.

To change the fuel filter do the following:

1. Turn off the battery switch. Remove the keys from the ignition switches.

2. Using the proper spanner wrench remove the fuel filter by turning it counterclockwise. Use exact replacement Volvo filters.

3. Lightly lubricate the new fuel filter gasket with clean engine oil.

4. Install the new filter following the directions on the filter.

5. Clean up any spilled fuel.

6. Turn on the battery switch.

7. Run the blowers for at least 5 minutes which will assist in ventilating the engine compartment.

8. Start the engine and check for leaks.

9. Smell for fuel fumes in the bilge.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo-Cleaning V-Drive Engine Flame Arrestor

Volvo-Electric Fuel Pumps

The 8.1 engine features electronic fuel injection as standard equipment. It delivers the correct amount of fuel to the engine from idle to full throttle conditions. As part of this system is a set of electronic fuel pumps.

A high pressure pump supplies fuel to the injectors. A low pressure pump delivers fuel from the fuel tank to the engine.

The fuel pumps require periodic maintenance. Before each outing check for signs of fuel leakage. If leakage is observed do not attempt to start the engines. Call a Regal or Volvo dealer immediately for service.

Both fuel pumps are protected by a 20 amp fuse. See the circuit breaker, fuse and relay box illustration. If a pump does not function inspect the fuse first.

Note: Using alcohol blended fuels increases the corrosion factor in the fuel system. Even closer monitoring of the fuel system in general besides the fuel pumps is required.

The flame arrestor regulates the air into the engine. It needs periodic inspection and cleaning.

Note: On the 8.1 be very careful when removing the flame arrestor. There is an electronic throttle plate behind the flame arrestor that features moving parts with sharp edges that could cause injuries.

1. Remove the flame arrestor and clean in solvent. Be sure to air dry the parts. Inspect for any damage. Replace as necessary.
2. Reinstall flame arrestor. Make sure it is always fastened securely in place and free from damage.

It must be tightly in place in case there is a backfire in the fuel system. It prevents fuel vapors being expelled into the engine compartment.

NOTICE

PREVENT ENGINE DAMAGE! DO NOT RUN ENGINE OUT OF FUEL OR RUN THE ELECTRIC FUEL PUMPS MORE THAN 20 SECONDS. RUNNING THE ELECTRIC FUEL PUMPS DRY WILL DAMAGE THE FUEL PUMPS.

Volvo-Checking V-Drive Engine Serpentine Belt

Remove the keys from the ignition switches before performing any maintenance procedure. All Volvo engines use a serpentine belt which connects the alternator, raw water pump, idler pulley, and power steering pump.

The serpentine belt tension is adjusted automatically and requires no tension adjustments. At least once per year check the belt for wear, cracks, check marks, dry rot, exposed cords, oil or grease.

When the marks C & D line-up it is time to replace the serpentine belt.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo- Checking V-Drive Engine Mounts

The engines are placed in the boat on a set of metal or wooden platforms called mounts. These rubber isolation mounts keep the engine from moving laterally and athwartships (right angles to the center line). The mounts help reduce the vibration caused by the engine and drive. Periodically, the mount hardware should be checked for tightness. There are 4 mounts on each engine/V-drive propulsion package.

Use a 1/2" drive ratchet and socket. Tighten each mount bolt to the correct torque.

Volvo- Checking V-Drive Engine Exhaust System

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically for the following:

1. Water leaks
2. Loose hose clamps.
3. Burned hoses.

4. Deteriorated hoses.

5. Corrosion or blockage in the exhaust manifolds or risers.

Check the gasket B between points A & C for corrosion. If the walls look thin or corroded replace the components. Water can be injected into the engine if this area is damaged.

Any type of exhaust leak must be repaired before operating your vessel because of carbon monoxide poisoning.

VOLVO V-DRIVE CIRCUIT BREAKER, FUSE & RELAY BOX

A Not Used
B Not Used
C Starter Relay
D Fuel Pump Relay
E Ignition Relay
F1 15 Amp Fuse (EVC)
F2 20 Amp Fuse (ECM)

F3 20 Amp Fuse (Fuel Pump)
F4 15 Amp Fuse (Ignition)
F5 5 Amp Fuse (Ignition Switch)
F6 Not Used
F7 40 Amp Fuse (Instrument Panel)
F8 Not Used
F9 20 Amp Fuse (Starter)

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

VOLVO GASOLINE RECOMMENDATIONS

Unleaded Gasoline

Use only unleaded fuel with a minimum of 87 octane. If a 89 octane or higher is used you can expect an increase of power on EFI models.

Mid-grade and premium fuels use injector cleaners and additives that protect the fuel system and provide higher performance.

NOTICE

ENGINE DAMAGE RESULTING FROM THE USE OF A LOWER OCTANE GASOLINE THAN 87 AKI IS CONSIDERED MISUSE OF THE ENGINE AND WILL NOT BE COVERED BY THE ENGINE WARRANTY.

NOTICE

DO NOT USE GASOLINE CONTAINING METHANOL. SERIOUS ENGINE DAMAGE WILL RESULT FROM THE CONTINUED USE OF METHANOL FUEL. ANY ENGINE DAMAGE WILL NOT BE COVERED BY THE ENGINE WARRANTY.

DANGER

FUEL LEAKAGE CAN CAUSE A FIRE OR EXPLOSION! INSPECT THE ENTIRE FUEL SYSTEM AT LEAST ANNUALLY FOR LEAKS, DETERIORATED PARTS AND CORROSION.

Alcohol Enhanced Gasoline

An increasing number of gasolines sold today contain alcohol. Ethanol and Methanol are 2 of the most common alcohol additives.

Your marine engine may be operated using gasoline blended with up to 10% ethanol with a minimum octane rating of 87.

Using gasoline containing ethanol the engine will operate leaner. This could cause engine problems such as stalling at idle speeds, harder starting or vapor lock.

Ethanol enhanced fuels attract and hold moisture. Fuel tanks containing moisture can cause corrosion of the tank material. Inspect fuel system annually.

Leaded Gasoline

For EFI models do not use gasoline with leaded fuel additives since it could block the fuel injectors and cause gasoline leakage.

Check with marinas before purchasing gasoline to find out what additives are blended in their fuel mix.

Use a fuel stabilizer in the fuel system to prevent gum formation and corrosion. When fuel is left in the tank for more than a month or at winter storage times this becomes a preventative maintenance item.

Note: For more information on Volvo fuel recommendations refer to the engine owner's manual, contact your closest Volvo authorized dealer, or visit the Volvo web-site.

Volvo-Checking V-Drive Engine Transmission Level

The transmission fluid should be checked before each outing. Add only the manufacturer's recommended fluids. Hoses and fasteners should be checked periodically. See the engine owner's manual for more specific information. To check the transmission fluid pull the dipstick and wipe it off with a clean cloth. Reinsert the dipstick and note the reading. If it falls below the mark, fill with Dextron III fluid.

The transmission dry capacity is 4.25 US quarts.

Volvo-Changing V-Drive Engine Transmission Level

The V-drive transmission fluid should be changed at least annually..This procedure should be completed by an authorized Regal dealer.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

PROPELLERS

Out-of-balance or nicked props will effect performance or cause vibration. Damaged props should be replaced, but those that are chipped or bent can usually be reconditioned by a marine dealer or a propeller repair facility. When cruising, carry a spare set of propellers on board because many marinas do not stock a full inventory of replacement propellers. It is also recommended that you carry a spare propeller nut, cotter key and keyway.

Be sure to make a note of both propeller diameter and pitch while the vessel is in dry dock. They are pressed into the prop for easy reading. The port propeller is left hand or turns counterclockwise. The starboard propeller is right hand and turns clockwise. Make sure you do not mix them up.

In an emergency, a propeller blade can be straightened by laying the propeller blade on a 2 x 4 and hammering the bent portion of the blade until straight.

A special prop puller is needed to replace your Regal propellers can be found at most marinas. This puller could be expensive for the average boater to own and its use could cause an injury. It is best to leave inboard propeller changing to a professional. Periodically check the propeller for nicks, etc. Make sure you wear heavy leather gloves as the propeller edges are sharp and may cause injury. Never turn the propeller on the shaft unless the batteries are off at the battery switch and all keys out of the ignition Make sure all replacement parts are the same as original equipment. See the engine manufacturer's owner's manual.

Typical Propeller

Volvo-Changing V-Drive Propellers

Make sure the ignition keys are out of the ignition switch and the battery switch in the "off" position before attempting to remove or install propellers.

It is recommended that you wear a pair of leather gloves to protect yourself from sharp propeller blades.

UNDERWATER HARDWARE

Volto-Checking V-Drive Rudder & Strut

Periodically check the rudder and strut for damage from hitting any submerged object or from running aground, on sand, etc. Check the rudder for straightness and tightness. The rudder packing if leaking into the hull can be adjusted.

Volvo-Checking V-Drive Shaft Seal

This unique shaft seal system is water cooled and eliminates the need to adjust a packing nut to the correct drip amount. It uses a hose from the engine manifold to cool the shaft through the seals and exits the water through the hull bottom.

Periodically, check the hoses to make sure there are no leaks.

For seal replacement call an authorized Regal dealer. Make sure the shaft seal assembly is winterized properly.

Volvo-Adjusting V-Drive Rudder

To tighten the rudder packing first find the 2 nuts located above the rudder shaft. While holding the top adjustment nut turn the bottom jam nut clockwise to loosen it. Then turn the top packing nut until the drip stops. Do not over tighten as the packing can be ruined. Hold the adjustment nut from moving and tighten it properly by turning (counterclockwise) the jam nut against the

adjustment nut. Check the rudder shaft for leaks.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Volvo-Checking V-Drive Seacocks

Volvo- Checking V-Drive Sea Water Strainer

Inspect the thru-hull seacocks before each outing. Make sure the connections between the output hose and the valve are tight. Look for water leaks around the area where the valve and hull meet.

Every 30 days open and close each thru-hull valve several times. This will guard against the valve seizing in the open or closed position. Also, make sure the valve handle is tightly fastened. Secure any loose valve handles.

Before servicing the sea water strainer make sure the appropriate seacock has been closed to prevent water entering the boat. If possible blow out the strainer basket with compressed air or use a metal type brush to remove any accumulated material from the screening material. Make sure the strainer is aligned in the center dimple on reinstallation.

Check all parts for wear and possible leaks including any gasket surfaces. Do not overtighten the strainer wing nuts which could cause strainer body damage. Use original replacement marine parts only. After all parts are reassembled open the seacock and check for leaks.

Notice there is a drain hole in the bottom of the strainer body.

VOLVO V-DRIVE STEERING SYSTEM

The steering system should be checked periodically since a potential hazard could develop using improperly maintained components.

The helm unit should be checked for leaks and hose tightness. Contact your nearest Regal dealer for further information.

Check all the rudder arm parts for tightness. This includes all related tie bars and rudder collar connections. Inspect all packing nuts, cotter keys, nuts and bolts for wear.

Check for fluid leaks and loose hoses periodically. Filling the unit improperly could cause air in the system and possible loss of steering. Contact a Regal dealer for maintenance or follow the steps in the following pages to refill the system.

The system uses a special hydraulic fluid and is filled at the factory. It should be checked at least 2 times a year. There is a fill plug located on the top of the helm. Make sure the fluid level is within a 1/2" of the bottom of the helm fill hole.

The steering cylinder has bleed screws located on the cylinder in the bilge. A special recommended hydraulic fluid (HA 5430) is available through your Regal dealer. It can also be found through a Teleflex/Seastar dealer. In an emergency Dextron II can be used to top off a low system. If the system is leaking fluid it requires immediate attention from a marine professional.

A periodic inspection of all hoses and connections should be made especially at the aft steering cylinder. The steering cylinder has a zerk type fitting that is used to lubricate the pivot of the steering cylinder. Also, inspect the tie bar fasteners for tightness and any cotter keys.

Unlike a mechanical steering system there is no definite end to the travel of the steering wheel. The helm has relief valves that allow the wheel to continue turning after the steering cylinder has reached the end of its travel. This is a normal condition. You will feel a slight increase in effort to turn the wheel once this has occurred.

Additional maintenance information can be found in the manufacturer's owner's manual or on the web-site at www.seastarsteering.com

WARNING

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE! ABRUPT TURNS ABOVE 30 M.P.H. MAY RESULT IN LOSS OF CONTROL. STEERING RESPONSE AT HIGH SPEEDS CAN BE VERY SUDDEN. ABRUBT TURNS MAY CAUSE YOU TO CROSS YOUR OWN WAKE. JUMPING A WAKE, SUDDEN TURNS, AND INCREASES OR DECREASES IN SPEEDS MAY BE DANGEROUS. OPERATOR MUST MAKE SURE THAT ALL PASSENGERS ARE SEATED SECURELY BEFORE MAKING SPEED CHANGES.

Following are other hydraulic fluids approved for the Teleflex/Sea Star hydraulic system.

Texaco HO15

Aero Shell Fluid #41

Esso Univis N15 or J13

Chevron Aviation Fluid A

Mobil Aero HFA

Fluids meeting Mil H5606C specifications

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

VOLVO V-DRIVE HYDRAULIC STEERING

Volvo-Checking V-Drive Hydraulic Steering System

Check the following items at least 2 times a year:

1. All mechanical linkages and connections for tightness.
2. Check for leaks. Turn steering wheel and pressurize to port. Apply enough pressure to exceed pressure relief valve pressure. You will not harm the system While pressure is applied have someone check all port fittings and line connections.
   Repeat the procedure by turning the wheel to starboard. Watch the oil level in the trim pump while pressurizing the steering wheel in either hard over positions. If there is no obvious drop in oil level, air has been removed. If there is an obvious drop in oil level, you are compressing air and further filling and testing is required. Repeat steps If no leaks are obvious, the system is ready for use.
3. Check all hoses for chafing/rubbing marks, and replace as necessary.
4. Check the steering cylinder for nicks and scratches. A damaged cylinder shaft can cause seal failure and leaks. Replacing seals to a damaged cylinder will not stop leaks. A damaged cylinder shaft must be replaced immediately.

WARNING

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE! IF LEAKS ARE FOUND, CORRECT BEFORE USING! FAILURE TO CORRECT A LEAK CAN LOWER OIL LEVEL IN SYSTEM AND RESULT IN LOSS OF STEERING.

Volvo-Filling V-Drive Hydraulic Steering System

The instructions on the following page show you how to fill and purge a single station Teleflex SeaStar hydraulic steering system This procedure is needed only when there is a large leak in the system and an abundance of fluid is lost from the system The procedure requires two people to make sure all air is purged from the system If air remains the system will be spongy and unresponsive.

During the entire filling procedure, oil needs to be visible in the filler tube. Do not allow the oil level to disappear into the helm pump, as this may allow air to enter the system and increase the filling time. 2 quarts of special Teleflex/SeaStar (HA 5430) hydraulic fluid (recommended) is required to fill the entire system noting that it is completely out of fluid..

This procedure requires a fill bottle kit which can be made up. If you put a vent hole in the quart filler container and insert a plastic tube along with something to initially plug the filler bottle hole you will be ready to fill the unit.

Note: You may elect to have your authorized Regal dealer accomplish this task.

In the instructions "bleeder" refers to cylinders fitted with bleed tee fittings. If bleeder tee fittings exist, open bleeder by unscrewing bleed nipple 2 turns.

Without bleeder tee fittings, disconnect hydraulic line from the steering cylinder fitting. The oil level in the helm unit must be set with the cylinder rod fully retracted. If this is not done, a spill at the helm unit will result.

Filling the helm full of oil can be done faster if oil is poured into the helm prior to connecting filler tube and oil bottle to the helm.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

FILLING V-DRIVE HYDRAULIC STEERING

Step 1

• Screw the threaded end of the filler tube into the helm filler hole.
• Remove the cap from the oil bottle and holding upright, screw into the filler tube bottle cap. Poke hole in the bottom of the bottle.

- Fill the helm pump full of oil (Oil should always be visible in the filler tube). Use the next bottle at any time throughout the procedure when the oil level drops in the filler tube. Do not proceed with step two until helm is full of oil.

Step 2

• Turn the steering wheel clockwise until the cylinder rod is fully extended on the left side of the cylinder.
• Open left side bleeder.

Step 3

- Holding the cylinder rod (to prevent it from moving back into the cylinder) turn the steering wheel counter-clockwise until a steady stream of air free oil comes out of the bleeder. (Drain out approx. 1/2 bottle of oil or as required.)

- While continuing to turn the wheel, close the left side bleeder and let go of the cylinder rod.

Step 4

• Continue turning the steering wheel counter-clockwise until the cylinder rod is fully extended to the right. (Steering wheel will come to a stop)
• Open the right bleeder.

Step 5

- Holding the cylinder rod (to prevent it from moving back into the cylinder) turn the steering wheel clockwise until a steady stream of air free oil comes out of bleeder.

- While continuing to turn the wheel, close the right side bleeder and let go of the cylinder rod.

Fill and purge is now complete

ELECTROLYSIS PROTECTION

Sacrificial zinc anodes usually found on the engine driveshaft, rudders, and trim tabs to protect softer metals exposed to the water. Electrolysis attacks the least noble metals first. Because zinc is a less noble metal, it will decompose before other metals. Check these zinc anodes periodically and have them replaced when they are 50% gone.

Zinc is also used to protect metal that is exposed to saltwater. The salt causes a galvanic action that decomposes metals.

VOLVO V-DRIVE ENGINE ALIGNMENT

V-drive engine alignment should be left to a qualified marine technician. Alignment should be checked after the first 50 hours of operation and on an annual basis normally on recomissioning. Also, it should be checked whenever alignment may have shifted due to grounding or striking something underwater, or after the vessel has been lifted or launched. Angular misalignment is corrected using the adjustments in the engine mounts. The coupler faces must be parallel within .002 inch.

Note: Do not attempt the alignment procedure yourself since drive train/engine component damage will result from misalignment. Contact an authorized Regal dealer for more information.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

GOLECNANETNIAM/ECIVRES
DATE	FOSRHOIDEN	DEMROFRERIAPER/

RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES-MERCRUISER V-DRIVE ENGINE

Note: These are basic recommendations. Regal is not responsible for the accuracy of the information since it can change at any time. For more detailed information and procedures check your engine operators manual or call an authorized Regal dealer.

Checking Engine Oil

1. Check the engine oil by first allowing the engine to warm up for a short period. Stop the engine and allow about 5 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. This procedure will assure an accurate dipstick reading.
2. Remove the dipstick. Wipe it clean and reinstall it into the dipstick tube. Wait 1 minute to allow any trapped air to vent. (Install dipstick with oil indication marks facing the flywheel end of the engine. Add Mercury/Quicksilver Synthetic Blend MerCruiser Engine Oil 25W-40 to bring the level up to the full or OK points on the oil dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL.
3. Remove the dipstick and note the oil level. Level must be between full or OK range. Add as necessary. Reinstall dipstick into the tube.

NOTICE

ADDING 1 QUART OF ENGINE OIL WILL RAISETHE OIL LEVEL FROM THE ADD MARK TO THE TOP OF THE OK RANGE.

1. When checking or filling the engine crankcase oil ensure that the vessel is level in the water or on a trailer.

For changing the engine oil & filter see the MerCruiser maintenance schedule and engine operation manual or contact your Regal dealer.

To help provide the best protection and optimum engine performance Mercruiser recommends the use of the following oils listed in their order of preference:

1. MerCruiser/Quicksilver Synthetic Blend, NMMA FC-W rated, 4 cycle oil.
2. MerCruiser/Quicksilver 25W40 NMMA FC-W rated oil.
3. A NMMA FC-W rated oil.
4. MerCruiser/Quicksilver 4-cycle 25W40, non FC-W rated oil.
5. A good grade straight weight detergent automotive oil per the operating chart above.

Note: The use of non-detergent oils, multi-viscosity oils (other than as specified) non FC-W oils, low quality oils or oils that contain solid additives are specifically not recommended.

The 496 MPI requires with oil filter 9 US quarts of oil.

Note: Ensure that dipstick is installed with oil level indication marks facing the rear of engine (flywheel end).

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MerCruiser V-Drive-Changing Engine Oil

Changing engine oil and filter at the recommended maintenance periods is one of the most important aspects of long engine life.

To change the engine oil & filter do the following:

1. Run the engine at idle speed until the temperature gauge reads normal engine temperatures.
2. Turn off the engine and remove the ignition keys.
3. Remove the dipstick.
4. Remove engine oil with a suction pump. They can be purchased at automotive stores.

1. Using a filter wrench remove the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise. Be sure to use a container to catch the oil and dispose of in an environmentally friendly manner. Wipe off the oil filter engine base. See the illustration.
2. Apply a small amount of

fresh oil to the new oil filter gasket and thread it on the shaft in a clockwise direction.

Tighten the filter. Normally 3/4 to 1 turn after the filter contacts the base will provide a leak free position. Do not overtighten the filter.

1. Remove the oil cap and fill the engine crankcase with manufacturer's recommended oil. Do not overfill the crankcase. See the illustration.
2. Install the dipstick and the oil cap.
3. Start the engine. Check immediately for any oil leaks at the oil filter.

1. Remove the oil dipstick and wipe it off with a clean cloth. Reinsert the dipstick and pull it out. Make sure the oil is up to but not over the full or OK range. Add as required.

MerCruiser V-Drive-Checking Engine Coolant

! CAUTION

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE! A SUDDEN LOSS OF PRESSURE COULD CAUSE VERY HOT COOLANT TO BOIL AND VIOLENTLY DISCHARGE. AFTER THE ENGINE HAS COOLED, TURN THE CAP 1/4 OF A TURN WITH A RAG WRAPPED AROUND THE CAP TO ALLOW PRESSURE TO ESCAPE SLOWLY. THEN PUSH THE CAP DOWN COMPLETELY AND TURN CAP COUNTERCLOCKWISE TO REMOVE.

1. Remove the heat exchanger and visually inspect the coolant level.
2. The coolant level in the heat exchanger should be at the bottom of the filler neck. If coolant is low contact an authorized MerCruiser dealer.
3. When reinstalling the pressure cap turn it completely clockwise making sure it seats on the filler neck.
4. With the engine at normal idle speed, check the coolant level in the recovery bottle. See the illustration.

1. The coolant level must be between the "add" and "full" marks.
2. If coolant needed, use MerCruiser Extended Life Antifreeze/Coolant.
3. Add coolant only when the engine is at normal operating temperature.
4. Remove the filler cap from the recovery bottle.
5. Fill to the "FULL" line with MerCruiser Extended Life Antifreeze/Coolant.
6. Install the filler cap.
7. To change the coolant contact an authorized MerCruiser dealer.
   Note: Do not use alcohol or methanol based antifreeze or clear water in the system at anytime.
   Note: Coolant estimated capacity is 19 US quarts.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MerCruiser V-Drive-Changing Cool Fuel Module Folter

Generation 3 MerCruiser engines use a water cooled fuel module to help eliminate vapor lock which is caused by a combination of heat and vacuum. As the fuel system vaporizes the gasoline a starving fuel condition develops. This condition is most prevalent in alcohol blended fuels.

To check or change the fuel filter element do the following:

1. Allow the engine to cool down. The engine manufacturer recommends a 12 hour shutdown prior to filter removal.

2. Disconnect the cool fuel module harness at the unit.

3. Energize the key to the start position and leave engaged for 5 seconds. Turn the key to the "OFF" position.

4. Loosen each filter retaining screws from the module unit. Do not remove the filter unit retaining screws from the filter cap.

5. Pull up on the filter assemble handle to loosen the filter.

6. Drain all fuel into the module unit from the fuel filter.

7. Remove the filter cup from the filter cap by rotating the filter cap clockwise while holding the filter cup.

8. Remove the water separator fuel filter from the filter cup and place it in a metal container. Later dispose of filter in an environmentally friendly fashion.

9. Disposeof any debris and water in the filter cup.

10. Install a new water separator filter in the cup. Push down on the filter until completely seated.

11. Install a new O ring on the filter cup.

1. Attach the filter cap to the filter cup by holding the filter cap and turning it in a counterclockwise direction while holding the filter cup stationary, until the filter cap locks in place.

2. Install the fuel filter slowly into the module to prevent spillage.

3. Line up the filler cap screws in the module and hand tighten them.

1. Make sure the filter cap is seated tightly against the module and torque each filter retaining screw.

2. Reconnect the module harness to the engine wiring harness.

3. Ventilate the engine compartment by using the blowers.

4. Start the engine and check for fuel leaks. If leak is present stop the engine immediately and check for leaks around the fuel filter. Clean any spilled fuel. Ventilate the compartment. If leaks continue contact a MerCruiser or Regal dealer for repair assistance.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MerCruiser V-Drive-Cleaning Flame Arrestor

Note: Make sure the ignition keys are removed before starting this procedure. It is recommended that the battery switches be turned to the "OFF" position.

1. Remove the engine cowling by turning the engine cover knob counterclockwise.
2. Disconnectt and remove the crankcase ventilation hose from the fitting on the flame arrestor and valve cover.
3. Remove the flame arrestor.

4. Clean the flame arrestor with a mild detergent and warm water.

5. Be sure to inspect the flame arrestor for any cracks, holes or areas of deterioration.

6. The flame arrestor must be completely dry before installing. You might shake it abit to remove any trapped water.

7. Clean the ventilation hose with warm water and a mild detergent. Let dry completely.

8. There should be no cracks or deterioration on the ventilation hose.

9. Install the flame arrestor and its bracket. Torque the flame arrestor bracket nuts to 106 inch pounds.

10. Connect the crankcase ventilation hose to the fitting on the flame arrestor and valve cover.

11. Check all connections.

12. Install the engine cover by turning the engine cover knob clockwise until tight.

MerCruiser V-Drive-Checking/Changing Serpentine Drive Belt

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY! MAKE SURE ENGINE IS OFF AND KEY IS REMOVED FROM IGNITION BEFORE INSPECTING SERPENTINE BELT.

BELT ROUTING DIAGRAM

Check the belt for the following conditions; glazed, cracks, excessive wear and frying material. Minor cracks across the belt are acceptable but lengthwise cracks that join across the belt cracks are not acceptable.

Note: If a serpentine belt is to be reused it must be installed in the same direction it came off.

The belt tensioner is designed with cast stops as limit marks. If the tensioner is contacting either of the 2 limits during operation check the mounting brackets and belt length. If the above condition exists, contact your closest authorized MerCruiser or Regal dealer.

CAUTION

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE! THE BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY CONTAINS A HIGH TENSION SPRING. RELIEVE THE SPRING TENSION AND SNAP THE TENSIONER BACK SLOWLY!

1. Use a breaker bar and the correct socket to hold back the tensioner and relieve the belt tension Rotate the tensioner away from the belt until it stops. See Illustration A.

2. Remove the belt from the idler pulley and slowly relieve the tension on the breaker bar.

3. Remove the belt and reconnect the new belt according to the belt routing illustration.

4. Use a breaker bar and the correct socket to position the tensioner back to the engine running location and slide the belt over the tensioner pulley. Slowly relieve the tensioner to the belt. See illustration A.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Breaker bar with arrow showing direction of movement to relieve tension.

a=breaker bar

MerCruiser V-Drive-Circuit Breaker/Fuse Information

The engine electrical circuit provides overload protection with circuit breaker and fuses in key locations. If an overload condition develops a circuit breaker will “pop” and/or a fuse will “blow”.

In either case the root cause of the problem should be found and corrected before replacing the fuse or resetting the circuit breaker.

In an emergency situation if the cause of the overload cannot be determined, disconnect all accessories connected to the engine and instrumentation wiring.

Reset the circuit breaker. If the breaker remains open, the problem has not been corrected.

1. A 50 amp engine circuit breaker protects the engine wiring harness and the power wiring up to the instrumentation. Reset the breaker by pushing "in" on the reset button.

1. Located at the largest post of the solenoid is a 90 amp fuse. It protects the wiring harness should an overload occur. It is an epoxy covered fuse for corrosion and vibraiton purposes. Should this device fail the fuse will not show continuity with an ohm tester.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

1. The main power and fuel pump relays control voltage to the engine with the ignition key in the "on" position. Also, voltage to the electric fuel pump is routed through this relay.

MERCRUISER GASOLINE RECOMMENDATIONS

Unleaded Gasoline

Use only unleaded fuel with a minimum of 87 octane. 89 or 92 octane fuels will provide increased engine performance in the United States and Canada.

Mid-grade and premium fuels use injector cleaners and additives that protect the fuel system and provide higher performance.

NOTICE

ENGINE DAMAGE RESULTING FROM THE USE OF A LOWER OCTANE GASOLINE THAN 87 (R+M) /2 IS CONSIDERED MISUSE OF THE ENGINE AND WILL NOT BE COVERED BY THE ENGINE WARRANTY.

NOTICE

DO NOT USE GASOLINE CONTAINING METHANOL. SERIOUS ENGINE DAMAGE COULD RESULT FROM THE CONTINUED USE OF METHANOL FUEL. ANY ENGINE DAMAGE WILL NOT BE COVERED BY THE ENGINE WARRANTY.

Whenever possible only use alcohol-free gasoline to eliminate the effects of alcohol in gasoline. If alcohol blended fuels are used increased system inspections for leaks and fuel system failures are mandatory. Contact your closest MerCruiser dealer for more information.

Alcohol Enhanced Gasoline

An increasing number of gasolines sold today contain alcohol. Ethanol and methanol are 2 of the most common alcohol additives.

Your marine engine may be operated using gasoline blended with up to 10% ethanol with a minimum octane rating of 87.

Using gasoline containing ethanol will result in a leaner operating engine. This could cause engine problems such as stalling at idle speeds, harder starting or vapor lock.

Ethanol enhanced fuels attract and hold moisture. Fuel tanks containing moisture can cause corrosion of the tank material. Inspect fuel system annually.

Leaded Gasoline

Do not use gasoline with leaded fuel additives since it could block the fuel injectors and cause gasoline leakage. Check with marinas before purchasing gasoline to find out what additives are blended in their fuel mix.

Use a fuel stabilizer in the fuel system to prevent gum formation and corrosion. When fuel is left in the tank for more than a month or at winter storage time fill the tank to prevent condensation entering the fuel tank/system.

Note: For more information on MerCruiser fuel recommendations refer to the engine owner's manual, contact your closest MerCruiser authorized dealer, or visit the Mercury Marine web-site.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES-MERCRUISER V-DRIVE

The V-drive transmission should be checked before each outing and at periodic intervals. Always use the approved fluids. The fluid level can be checked either warm or cold.

MerCruiser V-Drive-Checking Transmission Fluid

Checking while the engine is warm:

Velvet drive transmissions- Stop engine and quickly check fluid level by turning counterclockwise, to remove dipstick. Fluid level should be up to the full mark. If low add specified fluid through dipstick tube on transmissions.

ZF marine transmissions- Stop engine and remove dipstick to check level. If fluid is below top (full) line, add specified fluid through dipstick hole. Do not overfill. Reinstall dipstick with cap fully seated.

Checking while engine is cold:

Note: Cold Fluid Level Check. To ease checking the fluid level the dipstick can be marked or scribed with a cold level mark.

Follow the procedure for the warm fluid level check, then allow the boat to sit overnight.

Important: Be sure to push the dipstick all the way down into the dipstick tube when checking the fluid level.

Remove the dipstick, wipe clean and reinvest.

Remove the dipstick, observe the fluid level and mark the cold fluid level.

Reinstall the dipstick, tighten the T-handle securely. Do not overtighten.

MerCruiser V-Drive-Changing Transmission Fluid

For a complete change of transmission fluid contact an authorized Regal dealer or MerCruiser repair facility.

MerCruiser V-Drive-Checking Shift Cable

MerCruiser V-Drive-Checking Transmission Linkage

Periodically the shift cable assembly needs to be checked for proper lubrication. Use Mercury/Quicksilver Synthetic Blend 4 cycle oil on all pivot points and the cable guide surfaces. Also, check all fasteners for tightness.

Periodically lubricate the transmission detent ball and the holes in the shift lever with Mercruy/Quicksilver Synthetic Blend 4 cycle oil.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MerCruiser V-Drive-Checking Throttle Cable

Periodically lubricate the throttle cable pivot points with Mercruy/Quicksilver Synthetic Blend 4 cycle oil. Also, check all fasteners for tightness.

UNDERWATER HARDWARE

MerCruiser-Checking V-Drive Rudder & Strut

Periodically check the rudder and strut for damage from hitting any submerged object or from running aground, on sand, etc. Check the rudder for straightness and tightness. The rudder packing if leaking into the hull can be adjusted.

MerCruiser-Checking V-Drive Shaft Seal

This unique shaft seal system is water cooled and eliminates the need to adjust a packing nut to the correct drip amount. It uses a hose from the engine manifold to cool the shaft via the seals and exits the water through the hull bottom. Periodically,

check the hoses to make sure there are no leaks. For seal replacement call an authorized Regal dealer. Make sure the shaft seal assembly is winterized properly.

MerCruiser Adjusting V-Drive Rudder

To tighten the rudder packing first find the 2 nuts located above the rudder shaft. While holding the top adjustment nut turn the bottom jam nut clockwise to loosen it. Then turn the top packing nut until the drip stops. Do not over tighten as the packing can be ruined. Hold the adjustment nut from moving and tighten it properly by turning (counterclockwise) the jam nut against the

adjustment nut. Check the rudder shaft for leaks.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MercCruiser-Checking V-Drive Seacocks

MercCruiser- Checking V-Drive Sea Water Strainer

Inspect the thru-hull seacocks before each outing. Make sure the connections between the output hose and the valve are tight. Look for water leaks around the area where the valve and hull meet.

Every 30 days open and close each thru-hull valve several times. This will guard against the valve seizing in the open or closed position. Also, make sure the valve handle is tightly fastened. Secure any loose valve handles.

Before servicing the sea water strainer make sure the appropriate seacock has been closed to prevent water entering the boat. If possible blow out the strainer basket with compressed air or use a metal type brush to remove any accumulated material from the screening material. Make sure the strainer is aligned in the center dimple on reinstallation.

Check all parts for wear and possible leaks including any gasket surfaces. Do not overtighten the strainer wing nuts which could cause strainer body damage. Use original replacement marine parts only. After all parts are reassembled open the seacock and check for leaks.

Notice the drain hole in the bottom of the strainer body.

MERCRIJSER V-DRIVE STEERING SYSTEM

The steering system should be checked periodically since a potential hazard could develop using improperly maintained components.

The helm unit should be checked for leaks and hose tightness. Contact your nearest Regal dealer for further information.

Check all the rudder arm parts for tightness. This includes all related tie bars and rudder collar connections. Inspect all packing nuts, cotter keys, nuts and bolts for wear.

Check for fluid leaks and loose hoses periodically. Filling the unit improperly could cause air in the system and possible loss of steering. Contact a Regal dealer for maintenance or follow the steps in the following pages to refill the system.

The system uses a special hydraulic fluid and is filled at the factory. It should be checked at least 2 times a year. There is a fill plug located on the top of the helm. Make sure the fluid level is within a 1/2" of the bottom of the helm fill hole.

The steering cylinder has bleed screws located on the cylinder in the bilge. A special recommended hydraulic fluid (HA 5430) is available through your Regal dealer. It can also be found through a Teleflex/Seastar dealer. In an emergency Dextron II can be used to top off a low system. If the system is leaking fluid it requires immediate attention from a marine professional.

A periodic inspection of all hoses and connections should be made especially at the aft steering cylinder. The steering cylinder has a zerk type fitting that is used to lubricate the pivot of the steering cylinder. Also, inspect the tie bar fasteners for tightness and any cotter keys.

Unlike a mechanical steering system there is no definite end to the travel of the steering wheel. The helm has relief valves that allow the wheel to continue turning after the steering cylinder has reached the end of its travel. This is a normal condition. You will feel a slight increase in effort to turn the wheel once this has occurred.

Additional maintenance information can be found in the manufacturer's owner's manual or on the web-site at www.seastarsteering.com

WARNING

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE! ABRUPT TURNS ABOVE 30 M.P.H. MAY RESULT IN LOSS OF CONTROL. STEERING RESPONSE AT HIGH SPEEDS CAN BE VERY SUDDEN. ABRUBT TURNS MAY CAUSE YOU TO CROSS YOUR OWN WAKE. JUMPING A WAKE, SUDDEN TURNS, AND INCREASES OR DECREASES IN SPEEDS MAY BE DANGEROUS. OPERATOR MUST MAKE SURE THAT ALL PASSENGERS ARE SEATED SECURELY BEFORE MAKING SPEED CHANGES.

Following are other hydraulic fluids approved for the Teleflex/Sea Star hydraulic system

Texaco HO15

Aero Shell Fluid #41

Esso Univis N15 or J13

Chevron Aviation Fluid A

Mobil Aero HFA

Fluids meeting Mil H5606C specifications

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

MERCRIJSER V-DRIVE HYDRAULIC STEERING

Volvo-Checking V-Drive Hydraulic Steering System

Check the following items at least 2 times a year:

1. All mechanical linkages and connections for tightness.
2. Check for leaks. Turn steering wheel and pressurize to port. Apply enough pressure to exceed pressure relief valve pressure. You will not harm the system While pressure is applied have someone check all port fittings and line connections.
   Repeat the procedure by turning the wheel to starboard. Watch the oil level in the trim pump while pressurizing the steering wheel in either hard over positions. If there is no obvious drop in oil level, air has been removed. If there is an obvious drop in oil level, you are compressing air and further filling and testing is required. Repeat steps If no leaks are obvious, the system is ready for use.
3. Check all hoses for chafing/rubbing marks, and replace as necessary.
4. Check the steering cylinder for nicks and scratches. A damaged cylinder shaft can cause seal failure and leaks. Replacing seals to a damaged cylinder will not stop leaks. A damaged cylinder shaft must be replaced immediately.

WARNING

AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE!

IF LEAKS ARE FOUND, CORRECT BEFORE USING!

FAILURE TO CORRECT A LEAK CAN LOWER OIL LEVEL IN SYSTEM AND RESULT IN LOSS OF STEERING.

Volvo-Filling V-Drive Hydraulic Steering System

The instructions on the following page show you how to fill and purge a single station Teleflex SeaStar hydraulic steering system This procedure is needed only when there is a large leak in the system and an abundance of fluid is lost from the system The procedure requires two people to make sure all air is purged from the system If air remains the system will be spongy and unresponsive.

During the entire filling procedure, oil needs to be visible in the filler tube. Do not allow the oil level to disappear into the helm pump, as this may allow air to enter the system and increase the filling time. 2 quarts of special Teleflex/SeaStar (HA 5430) hydraulic fluid (recommended) is required to fill the entire system noting that it is completely out of fluid..

This procedure requires a fill bottle kit which can be made up. If you put a vent hole in the quart filler container and insert a plastic tube along with something to initially plug the filler bottle hole you will be ready to fill the unit.

Note: You may elect to have your authorized Regal dealer accomplish this task.

In the instructions "bleeder" refers to cylinders fitted with bleed tee fittings. If bleeder tee fittings exist, open bleeder by unscrewing bleed nipple 2 turns.

Without bleeder tee fittings, disconnect hydraulic line from the steering cylinder fitting. The oil level in the helm unit must be set with the cylinder rod fully retracted. If this is not done, a spill at the helm unit will result.

Filling the helm full of oil can be done faster if oil is poured into the helm prior to connecting filler tube and oil bottle to the helm.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

FILLING V-DRIVE HYDRAULIC STEERING

Step 1

• Screw the threaded end of the filler tube into the helm filler hole.
• Remove the cap from the oil bottle and holding upright, screw into the filler tube bottle cap. Poke hole in the bottom of the bottle.

- Fill the helm pump full of oil (Oil should always be visible in the filler tube). Use the next bottle at any time throughout the procedure when the oil level drops in the filler tube. Do not proceed with step two until helm is full of oil.

Step 2

• Turn the steering wheel clockwise until the cylinder rod is fully extended on the left side of the cylinder.
• Open left side bleeder.

Step 3

- Holding the cylinder rod (to prevent it from moving back into the cylinder) turn the steering wheel counter-clockwise until a steady stream of air free oil comes out of the bleeder. (Drain out approx. 1/2 bottle of oil or as required.)

- While continuing to turn the wheel, close the left side bleeder and let go of the cylinder rod.

Step 4

• Continue turning the steering wheel counter-clockwise until the cylinder rod is fully extended to the right. (Steering wheel will come to a stop)
• Open the right bleeder.

Step 5

- Holding the cylinder rod (to prevent it from moving back into the cylinder) turn the steering wheel clockwise until a steady stream of air free oil comes out of bleeder.

- While continuing to turn the wheel, close the right side bleeder and let go of the cylinder rod.

Fill and purge is now complete

ELECTROLYSIS PROTECTION

Sacrificial zinc anodes usually found on the engine driveshaft, rudders, and trim tabs to protect softer metals exposed to the water. Electrolysis attacks the least noble metals first. Because zinc is a less noble metal, it will decompose before other metals. Check these zinc anodes periodically and have them replaced when they are 50% gone.

Zinc is also used to protect metal that is exposed to saltwater. The salt causes a galvanic action that decomposes metals.

MERCRIJSER V-DRIVE ALIGNMENT

V-drive engine alignment should be left to a qualified marine technician. Alignment should be checked after the first 50 hours of operation and on an annual basis normally on recomissioning. Also, it should be checked whenever alignment may have shifted due to grounding or striking something underwater, or after the vessel has been lifted or launched. Angular misalignment is corrected using the adjustments in the engine mounts. The coupler faces must be parallel within .002 inch.

Note: Do not attempt the alignment procedure yourself since drive train/engine component damage will result from misalignment. Contact an authorized Regal dealer for more information.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

GOLECNANETNIAM/ECIVRES
DATE	FOSRHO	DEMROFRERIAPER/

1. Spark plug (also one located on the nonservice side)
2. Oil fill
3. Overflow tube
4. Pressure cap (coolant fill location after draining coolant)
5. Seawater pressure switch (appears as auxiliary fault on ADC)
6. Lifting eye
7. Heat exchanger
8. Anticorrosion zinc anode
9. AC circuit breaker
10. AC load lead connector (nonservice side)
11. Nameplate (top)
12. Customer interface connection (nonservice side)
13. Fuses (F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, and F7) (see Section 2.7.2)
14. Runtime hour display
15. Advanced Digital Control (ADC 2100)
16. CO sensor module

17. Generator set master switch

18. Catalyst assembly, water outlet/exhaust outlet (nonservice side)

19. Seawater drain (remove plate for service)
20. Seawater pump (water inlet)
21. Cooling air inlet
22. Fuel filter/fuel inlet
23. Fuel pump
24. Fuel pump/cooler
25. Oil check
26. Coolant drain (remove hose clamp to drain coolant)
27. Oil drain valve
28. Lube oil filter
29. Coolant overflow bottle (daily coolant check/fill location)
30. Air intake silencer/backfire flame arrestor

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

GAS GENERATOR

Overview

Your vessel may feature a gas generator. Read and become familiar with the generator owner's manual. It provides a variety of operational, safety and troubleshooting information. The output voltage under a full load can be easily periodically checked by observing the AC voltage meter found on the AC/DC panel. The output voltage should be between 110 -120 volts AC (60 hertz-US), and 220- 240 volts AC at (50 hertz- International). Voltages outside these specifications could indicate a generator malfunction. Make sure all fluid levels are checked before starting the generator. The generator seacock handle must be in-line with the seacock and the sea water strainer must be free from debris.

The generator features an automatic shut down system of sensors controlling high exhaust temperature, high water, low oil pressure, and high RPM. If one of these sensors engages, the generator will shut down. The source of the problem then needs to be determined. Use the owner's manual troubleshooting section as a reference. There is a fuel filter in the system that periodically needs checking and cleaning. Refer to the owner's manual.

Disconnect the battery cables before doing any generator maintenance. Inspect and clean the carburetor flame arrestor periodically by blowing off with compressed air. Inspect all fuel system fittings for leakage periodically. Be sure proper ventilation is present when servicing the fuel system components. Inspect all water and heat exchanger fittings periodically for leaks. Repair or replace components as needed. Be sure the generator is completely cold before performing any maintenance on the water system due to possible hot water and or antifreeze filled components. Be sure to catch and dispose of any antifreeze coolant properly. Refer to the generator owner's manual regarding antifreeze recommendations for type and mixture concentrations.

There is a zinc anode located in the raw water part of the heat exchanger. Replace if 50% erroded. It is self-sacrificing thereby reducing the effects of electrolysis to the generator water system.

Check the drive belt deflection with the generator stopped. At the longest span, push down at the center. You should generate a movement of 3/8 to 1/2 inch. Refer to the generator manual for more information.

When refilling the crankcase with oil follow the specifications given in the owner's manual. Dispose of used oil in an environmentally friendly way.

Note: Read and understand the following safety warnings before performing any maintenance procedures.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY FROM ACCIDENTAL GENERATOR STARTING! DISCONNECT THE BATTERY CABLES BEFORE WORKING ON THE GENERATOR.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY FROM A HOT GENERATOR AND EXHAUST SYSTEM. DO NOT WORK ON GENERATOR UNTIL THE UNIT COOLS.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY FROM ROTATING PARTS! OPERATE THE GENERATOR ONLY WHEN ALL SCREENS, COVERS & GUARDS ARE IN PLACE.

Gas Generator-Maintenance Procedures

Perform maintenance on each item in the service schedule at the designated intervals in the life of the generator set.

If the generator set operates under dusty or dirty conditions, use dry compressed air to blow dust out of the alternator. With the generator running, direct the stream of air through the cooling slots at the alternator end.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

ROTARE ECNANETNI	NEGFOERAM	OFEB NITRATS	051R HTNOM	RETFA ROSRH OR 3	YRE SRH001 OR 6 SHTNOM	YRE SRH003 OR SHTNOM	YRE SRH005 OR YLRAEY
METSYSLEUF
LEVELLEUFEHTKCEHCX
CHECK FUEL LINES					X
REPLACE FUEL FILTER							X
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
CHECK CRANKCASE OIL. ADD AS DEDEEN	X
REPLACE CRANKCASE OIL & FILTER		X BB2 KANRB	X
METSYSNOI
LEVELTNALCKCEM
CHECK SEACOCK & STRAINER	X
REPLACE SEAWATER PUMP IMPELLER					X KCEH	X
CHECK HEAT EXCHANGER ZINC ANODE NDOI					X
REPLACE HEAT EXCHANGER ZINC EDONA							X
FLUSH COOLING SYSTEM							X EBO
METSYSNOI
CLEAN, REGAP SPARK PLUGS				X
REPLACE SPARK PLUGS					X
REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
CHECK REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION		X KANRB					X

ROTAREECNANETNI	NEGFOERAM	OFEBGNITRATS	051RHTNOM	RETFAOR 3	YRESHOTNOM	VEH001OR 6	YRESHOTNOM	VEH003OR YLRAEY
INTAKE/EXHAUST SYSTEM
METSYSTSUA STNERMOC	HXEBHX
CHECK EXHAUST GAS CONDITION	X
SERVICE BACKFIRE FLAME ARRESTOR				XABD
SERVICE CATALYST ASSEMBLY							XABD
CHECK CO SENSOR MONITOR							X SRAEY2
REHTAERBE	SACKNARCEH
COMPLETE EXHAUST SYSTEM							X
METSYSBROCE
BATTERY CONDITION	X
CHECK & TIGHTEN ELECTRICAL CONN.		X
ENGINE & MOUNTING SYSTEM
CHECK FOR WATER, FUEL, COLLANT & OIL LEAKAGE	X
RETIGHTEN ALL NUTS & BOLTS	X
CHECK TIGHTNESS OF MOUNTING BOLTS & VIBROMOUNTS				XBBO
CHECK HEAT EXCHANGER ZINC ANODE NOOI					X
CHECK & ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE					XABD
CLEAN COMBUSTION CHAMBER					XABD

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Gas Generator-Checking Oil

Gas Generator-Adding Oil

Check the crankcase oil level before each outing. Let the generator run to warm up properly. Level the unit.

Adding oil between changes is a normal procedure. The amount of oil will vary on intensity of use.

To check the oil:

1. Remove the sound shield cowling.
2. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert dipstick and remove again.

4. The oil level should be between mark 1 & 2 as shown in the illustration. If the oil level is below mark 2 do not attempt to start the generator until the correct type and amount of oil is added or severe internal engine damage could result.

Gas Generator-Changing Oil

RECOMMENDED OIL VISCOSITY GRADES

Use the service schedule to determine when to change engine oil. Use the chart above to determine correct oil viscosity based on the temperature where the generator is used.

Always warm the engine before changing oil. This will help remove any sludge and deposits from the crankcase. Replace oil filter each time generator oil is changed.

Note: Oil capacity is 1.44 US quarts with filter.

To change oil do the following:

1. Warm up the generator. Stop the generator.

2. To drain the oil, open the oil-drain valve. See the parts illustration shown earlier in this section.

3. Drain the oil into a container. Dispose of used oil in an environmentally friendly manner.

4. Close the oil drain valve.

5. Loosen the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise. It may require an oil filter wrench to break it free. Remove the oil filter and use a rag to catch any spilled oil. Dispose of in an environmentally friendly manner.

6. Clean the surface of the oil filter adapter.

7. Use a small amount of fresh oil on the new oil filter gasket surface.

8. Thread the new oil filter on the adapter until the gasket makes contact and hand-tighten the filter an extra one half turn.

9. Remove the oil fill cap.

10. Replace the oil as recommended on the page opposite.

11. Replace the oil cap.

12. Make sure the dipstick is inserted in the tube.

13. Start the generator and check for leaks.

14. Stop the generator. Remove the dipstick. Wipe it with a soft clean rag. Reinsert the dipstick. Ensure it is completely down in the tube. Pull it out and check level. Add oil to the full mark.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY FROM A HOT GENERATOR AND EXHAUST SYSTEM. DO NOT WORK ON GENERATOR UNTIL THE UNIT COOLS.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Gas Generator-Changing Fuel Filter

The gas generator features a spin on canister fuel filter in-line and a sediment filter located on the unit. Replace the fuel filter every 500 hours of running or when the engine is running rough.

To change the fuel filter do the following:

1. Turn the filter counterclockwise to loosen. It may be necessary to use an oil filter style wrench to break it free. Be prepared to catch spilled fuel with the proper container. Dispose of spilled fuel and the old fuel filter in an environmentally friendly manner.

2. Coat the new fuel filter gasket with a light coat of fresh oil. Turn the new fuel filter clockwise until the filter contacts the adapter housing. Turn an additional half turn.

3. Bleed the system as shown earlier in the operation section before attempting to start the generator. This will eliminate any vapor lock and prevent rough operation.

4. Start the blower and run until any existing fumes have been removed.

5. Start the generator after bleeding and check for fuel system leaks.

Note: Use exact replacement parts only. Do not substitute.

! DANGER AVOID INJURY OR DEATH DUE TO FIRE OR EXPLOSION! DO NOT SMOKE OR PRODUCE ANY SPARKS INTHE ENGINE COMPARTMENT! VENTILATE THE COMPARTMENT AT ALL TIMES!

! WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY FROM ACCIDENTAL GENERATOR STARTING! DISCONNECT THE BATTERY CABLES BEFORE WORKING ON THE GENERATOR.

Gas Generator-Cleaning Backfire Flame Arrestor

To clean the flame arrestor do the following:

1. Loosen the hose clamp at the breather hose at the air silencer fitting and remove the hose.
2. Loosen the hose clamp attaching the air silencer assembly to the carburetor.
3. Lift off the air silencer assembly.
4. Clean the assembly in solvent and let dry.
5. Reassemble in reverse order.

Gas Generator-Checking Exhaust System

DANGER

CARBON MONOXIDE IS A TASTELESS, ODORLESS AND INVISIBLE GAS THAT CAN CAUSE DISCOMFORT, SEVERE ILLNESS, AND EVEN DEATH. EXERCISE CAUTION WHILE OPERATING GENERATOR OR ENGINES IN CONFINED SPACES OR AT DOCKSIDE. DO NOT ALLOW HULL EXHAUST OUTLETS O BECOME BLOCKED OR EXHAUST FUMES TO BECOME TRAPPED IN AND AROUND THE CONFINES OF YOUR BOAT. URING IDLE & SLOW CRUISE CONDITIONS, BILGE BLOWERS SHOULD BE USED.

At regular intervals inspect the complete exhaust system including the exhaust manifold, catalyst assembly, gaskets, exhaust hose, hose clamps, silencer, and outlet flapper for cracks, leaks and corrosion.

When the generator is operating make sure all CO detectors are energized and operational. See the danger warning above.

Check the exhaust system for the following:

1. Check over any leaks and blockages.
2. Check the silencer and piping for tight connections.
3. Check the hoses for softness, cracks, leaks, or dents. Replace the hoses as needed.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

1. Check for broken or corroded metal parts and replace as necessary..

2. Check for loose, corroded, or missing clamps. Tighten or replace hose clamps as needed.

3. Check the generator overboard discharge. It is located at the starboard aft hull. Make sure there is no blockage especially looking for spider webs and insect nests.

4. Inspect the entire system for exhaust leaks (blowby). Check for carbon or soot residue on exhaust system parts. They are indicators of exhaust leaks. Seal any leaks or replace parts as needed. Recheck after running generator.

1. The generator muffler exits water and exhaust from the unit to the overboard discharge outlet. Check the fiberglass muffler for any weeping areas of carbon or water. They are indicators of leaks. Check the entire hose run from the generator to and from the muffler for leaks. Tighten all hose clamps periodically.

2. The generator exhaust manifold is protected by a siphon device. It forms a loop higher than the generator. If the generator exhaust system tries to back up water through the exhaust manifold the check (reed style) valve opens and allows the water to exit the top of the siphon loop through the clear hose into the bilge.

Vessels in rough seas that are constantly rolling side to side are more susceptible to this water injection through the exhaust system.

To inspect the siphon break system:

1. Stop generator.

2. Remove the retaining cap and the check valve.

3. Use a mild detergent to remove any debris or oxidation from the valve.

4. Check the opening for blockage & remove as needed.

5. Replace the siphon break if the valve is cracked or if hardened or deteriorated.

6. Install the valve into the base with the valve downward.

7. Install the retaining cap finger tight.

Gas Generator-Checking/Changing Seawater Pump Impeller

The water pump impeller is a rubber slinger style device that uses vanes to draw water through the generator via the seacock and water strainer. The impeller is fastened to a shaft that is driven by a camshaft or crankshaft.

Normally as the water pump impeller or housing wears the amount of water decreases over a period of time. In more severe cases the generator will overheat due to a lack of sufficient water.

To check/change the water pump impeller do the following:

1. Close the seacock.

2. Remove the seawater cover plate.

3. Remove the impeller.

4. Inspect the impeller for damaged, cracked, broken, missing or flattened vanes.

5. Lubricate the new impeller with soapy water to aid in installing it.

6. Install the impeller. Use a rotating motion to seat the impeller in its housing in the direction of engine rotation.

7. Inspect the cover plate for wear such as heavy grooves or damaged surfaces from debris. Also, inspect the gasket for any nicks or cuts.

8. Lubricate the gasket with silicon grease and attach the gasket and cover plate to the seawater pump housing.

9. Open the seacock.

10. Start the generator and check for leaks.

11. Stop the generator and repair any leaks or replace any damaged parts.

NOTICE

GENERATOR DAMAGE WILL RESULT FROM RUNNING THE UNIT WITHOUT SUFFICIENT WATER SUPPLY. THIS IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE PRODUCT WARRANTY.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Gas Generator-Checking/Changing Zinc Anode

The heat exchanger contains a zinc anode for electrolytic corrosion protection. The anode needs to be checked or replaced according to the maintenance schedule.

To check/replace the zinc anode:

1. With the generator set cooled, close the seacock, remove the anti-corrosion zinc plug from the heat exchanger, and drain all coolant into a clean container.

2. Remove any build up on the zinc anode with a wire brush. Replace the anode as follows taking 50% as the replacement value from the original length and width.

a. Length= 1.7 inches b. Width= .34 inches

1. Clean the threaded hole of the heat exchanger and coat the threads of the zinc anode with a marine style pipe sealant. Install the zinc anode into the heat exchanger.

2. Open the seacock. Refill the cooling system.

3. Start the generator and check for any leaks at the zinc anode location. The pump is operating if water flows from the generator hull exhaust outlet. If no sign of water shut down the system and check the seawater pump for priming.

Gas Generator-Checking/Changing Spark Plugs

The generator spark plugs need to be checked/changed at regular service intervals as noted in the maintenance schedule.

To check/change the spark plugs:

1. Remove the spark plug wires by grasping the boot and rotating it while pulling on the boot. The boot will release from the spark plug. Do not pull on the wire itself since damage to the receptacle and wire will occur. Check the boot for debris and clean as necessary.

2. Make sure you lay the spark plug boots in the order you removed them to eliminate the boot being put on the wrong cylinder spark plug.

3. Blow off the areas around the spark plug holes with compressed air to eliminate debris from falling in the spark plug hole.

4. Remove the spark plug with a 5/8" socket with a rubber boot to protect the spark plug from being damaged.

5. Remove and examine each spark plug. A normal firing spark plug should be tan or gray at the spark plug tip. See the diagnostic chart for additional information.

6. Clean each spark plug with a rag. File any debris from the spark plug electromyte area.

7. Check the spark plug gap with a feeler gauge. Correct gap is .024-.028; the gauge should pass through with a slight resistance indicating the correct gap.

8. As needed regap the spark plug using a gaping tool. Fit the gapping tool into the electromyte and pull up on it slightly to widen the gap. Push down with the tool to narrow the gap. Recheck each gap adjustment with the feeler gauge.

9 Use a torque wrench with a 5/8" deep spark plug socket and tighten to 9-12 ft. lbs. Install the boot.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Problem/Condition	Means of Identification		Possible Cause/Solution
Gap-bridged spark plug	Built-up deposits and gap between electrodes closing.		Oil or carbon fouling. Clean and regap the spark plug.
Oil-fouled spark plug	Wet, black deposits on the insulator shell, bore, and electrodes.		Excessive oil entering combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive clearance between valve guides and stems, or worn or loose bearings. Replace the spark plug.
Carbon-fouled spark plug	Black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes.		Incorrect spark plug, weak ignition, clogged air intake, defective fuel pump, overrich fuel mixture, or excessive no-load operation. Clean and regap the spark plug.
Lead-fouled spark plug	Dark gray, black, yellow, or tan deposits; or a glazed coating on the insulator tip.		Caused by highly leaded fuel. Replace the spark plug.
Preignition damaged spark plug	Melted electrodes and possibly blistered insulator. Metallic deposits on insulator suggest internal engine damage.		Wrong type of fuel, incorrect timing or advance, too hot a plug, burned valves, or engine overheating. Replace the spark plug.
Overheated spark plug	White or light gray insulator with small black or gray/brown spots with bluish (burned) appearance on electrodes.		Engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, too hot a plug, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Replace the spark plug.
Worn spark plug	Severely eroded or worn electrodes.		Caused by normal wear and failure to replace spark plug at prescribed interval. Replace the spark plug.
DATE RUN	OPERATING HOURS		SERVICE RECORD
	HOURS RUN	TOTAL HOURS	SERVICE DATE	SERVICE

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

DIESEL GENERATOR

Overview

Your vessel may feature a diesel generator. Read and become familiar with the generator owner's manual. It provides a variety of operational, safety and troubleshooting information. The output voltage under a full load can be easily periodically checked by observing the AC voltage meter found on the AC/DC panel. The output voltage should be between 110 -120 volts AC (60 hertz-US), and 220- 240 volts AC at (50 hertz-International). Voltages outside these specifications could indicate a generator malfunction. Make sure all fluid levels are checked before starting the generator. The generator seacock handle must be in-line with the seacock and the sea water strainer must be free from debris.

The generator features an automatic shut down system of sensors controlling high exhaust temperature, high water, low oil pressure, and high RPM. If one of these sensors engages, the generator will shut down. The source of the problem then needs to be determined. Use the owner's manual troubleshooting section as a reference. There is a fuel filter in the system that periodically needs checking and cleaning. Refer to the owner's manual.

Disconnect the battery cables before doing any generator maintenance. Inspect and clean the carburetor flame arrestor periodically by blowing off with compressed air. Inspect all fuel system fittings for leakage periodically. Be sure proper ventilation is present when servicing the fuel system components. Inspect all water and heat exchanger fittings periodically for leaks. Repair or replace components as needed. Be sure the generator is completely cold before performing any maintenance on the water system due to possible hot water and or antifreeze filled components. Be sure to catch and dispose of any antifreeze coolant properly. Refer to the generator owner's manual regarding antifreeze recommendations for type and mixture concentrations.

There is a zinc anode located in the raw water part of the heat exchanger. Replace if 50% erroded. It is self-sacrificing thereby reducing the effects of electrolysis to the generator water system.

Check the drive belt deflection with the generator stopped. At the longest span, push down at the center. You should generate a movement of 3/8 to 1/2 inch. Refer to the generator manual for more information.

When refilling the crankcase with oil follow the specifications given in the owner's manual. Dispose of used oil in an environmentally friendly manner. Following are selected detailed maintenance functions on the diesel generator. Refer to the generator owner's manual for more information.

Note: Read and understand the following safety warnings before performing any maintenance procedures.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY FROM ACCIDENTAL GENERATOR STARTING! DISCONNECT THE BATTERY CABLES BEFORE WORKING ON THE GENERATOR.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY FROM A HOT GENERATOR AND EXHAUST SYSTEM. DO NOT WORK ON GENERATOR UNTIL THE UNIT COOLS.

WARNING

AVOID SERIOUS INJURY FROM ROTATING PARTS! OPERATE THE GENERATOR ONLY WHEN ALL SCREENS, COVERS & GUARDS ARE IN PLACE.

TYPICAL DIESEL GENERATOR PARTS DESCRIPTION

1. ADC 2100 Control
2. Run-Off/Reset-Auto switch
3. Nameplate
4. Mixing elbow (water outlet/exhaust outlet), far side
5. Air intake silenpen/cleaner
6. Lifting eye
7. Coolant overflow bottle (location varies by model)
8. Fuel feed pump
9. Oil check/dipstick
10. Coolant pressure cap
11. Coolant overflow tube
12. Oil fill (engine top)
13. Lube oil filter
14. Fuel filter
15. Oil fill (front gear cover)
16. Seawater pump and water inlet
17. Oil drain valve and hose
18. Strain relief for the load lead cable
19. Alternator cooling air inlet
20. AC circuit breaker panel
21. Anticorrosion zinc anode (seawater drain)
22. Belt guard
23. V-bells
24. Engine coolant drain
25. Heat exchanger
26. Heat exchanger
27. Seawater drain
28. Engine coolant drain

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Diesel Generator-Checking/Changing Fuses

A circuit breaker in line interrupts the generator output in the event of a fault in the wiring between the generator and the load. The line circuit breaker is shown in the typical parts description on the previous page. If the breaker "blows", reduce the load and switch the breaker to the ON position.

The engine junction box on the 9EOZD model contains three 10 amp in-line fuses. Always identify the cause of a blown fuse before restarting the generator. See the troubleshooting section for more information or call your closest authorized dealer.

A replaceable 10 amp fuse protects the controller circuitry. If the controller display is dark, check the battery and battery connections and then check the controller fuse. Replace the fuse if it is blown.

A replaceable 10 amp fuse protects the engine relays. If the generator set does not crank, check the battery and battery connections and then check the relay fuse. Replace the fuse if it is blown.

A replaceable 10 amp fuse protects the alternator.

Note: Some fuses are ceramic, others are of the glass type. Replace with identical type and amperage.

Diesel Generator-Checking/Changing Oil

Use oil that meets or exceeds the American Petroleum Institute (API) classification of CD or CF. Using an unapproved oil can shorten the engine life just as not changing oil on a regular schedule.

The chart above shows the recommended viscosity from the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) for a given operating temperature.

Note: Failure to follow the oil specifications may cause inadequate lubrication/oil pressure and cold-starting difficulties.

Check the crankcase oil level before each outing to verify it is in the safe range.

To check the oil remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth. Reinsert the dipstick as far as possible and remove it. The oil level needs to be between the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick.

Do not operate the generator if the oil is above the MAX level or below the MIN level as engine damage could result.

The oil change capacity for the 9EOZD and 7EFOZD is 3.8 quarts

To change the oil and filter follow these steps:

1. Start the generator and run until it reaches normal operating temperature.

2. Disconnect the battery cables or turn off all battery switches.

3. Remove the oil draining hose from it's clip. Remove the cap from the oil drain hose and lower the hose into an oil collection container. You can also use an electric pump to drain the oil.

4. Open the drain valve on the engine. Drain all oil.

5. Close the drain valve.

6. Replace the cap on the oil drain hose. Replace the oil drain hose on its retaining clip.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

To replace the oil filter:

1. Remove the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise with a oil filter wrench until it breaks free. Dispose of old filter in an environmentally friendly manner.
2. Clean the oil filter adapter housing with a clean cloth.
3. Apply a light coat of fresh oil to the rubber seal of the new oil filter.
4. Install the new oil filter turning it clockwise by hand for one turn after contacting the adapter housing.
5. Fill the crankcase with the proper oil viscosity, grade and quantity.
6. Reconnect all battery cables.
7. Energize the battery switches.
8. Start the generator and check for leaks around the oil filter.
9. Stop the generator. Pull out the dipstick. Wipe with a clean cloth. Reinsert fully into the tube. Pull again and check oil level. Add oil as necessary.

Perform Service at Intervals Indicated (X)	Reference Section	Daily	Every 50 Hrs. or 1 Month	Every 200 Hrs. or 3 Months	Every 400 Hrs. or 6 Months	Every 1000 Hrs. or Yearly
FUEL SYSTEM
Check the fuel level and fill as necessary	3.5	X (Before operation)
Check for any unusual noise †		X (During operation)
Remove the sediment from the fuel tank and drain the fuel tank †§				X
Clean the fuel filter *	3.5.2			X
Fuel/water separator draining *†			X
Fuel/water separator cleaning *†					X
Replace the fuel filter element *	3.5.2				X
Fuel injection valve— Check the injection condition *†‡	Eng. S/M				X (300 hrs.)
Fuel injection pump— Check the injection timing *†‡	Eng. S/M				X (500 hrs.)
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Check the crankcase oil level and add oil as necessary	3.4.2	X (Before operation)
Replace the oil in the crankcase *	3.4.3		X (Break-in period)	X (150 hrs.)
Replace the lube oil filter element *	3.4.3		X (Break-in period)		X (300 hrs.)
COOLING SYSTEM
Check the coolant level and fill as necessary *	3.8.2	X (Before operation)
Check the seawater outlet and clean as necessary	3.7	X
Adjust the seawater pump belt tension *	3.9.1		X (Break-in period)	X
Check the function of the siphon break, if equipped	3.8.6			X
Check the heat exchanger anticorrosion zinc condition, if equipped *	3.8.7			X (100 hrs.)
Check/replace the seawater pump impeller *†	3.8.5				X (Check)	X (Replace)
Replace the coolant *†	3.8.3					X
Replace the heat exchanger anticorrosion zinc anode, if equipped *†	3.8.7					X

* Requires removal of the sound shield door, if installed

† Consult your local distributor/dealer for service

Read the WARNING found at the beginning of the manual regarding moving parts

§ Consult the operating instructions supplied with the craft

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Perform Service at Intervals Indicated (X)	Reference Section	Daily	Every 50 Hrs. or 1 Month	Every 200 Hrs. or 3 Months	Every 400 Hrs. or 6 Months	Every 1000 Hrs. or Yearly
INTAKE/EXHAUST SYSTEM
Inspect the exhaust system components *†	3.7	X (Before operation)
Check the exhaust gas condition. If the exhaust is blue or black, contact your local distributor/dealer	3.7	X (During operation)
Clean the air cleaner element *	3.6				X
Replace the intake silencer element *	3.6					X
Clean the exhaust/water mixing elbow *†	3.7				X
Check the breather pipe for obstructions *†					X
Inspect the complete exhaust system †	2.2					X
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Keep the battery charged and in good condition §	3.10	X (Before operation)
Adjust the alternator driving belt tension *	3.9.2		X (Break-in period)	X
Check and tighten the electrical connections *			X
Clean the battery cables †						X
ENGINE AND MOUNTING
Check for water, fuel, coolant, and oil leakage *†§		X (After operation)
Retighten any loose nuts and bolts *		X (Before operation)
Check the mounting bolts/vibromounts and tighten if necessary *					X
Adjust the intake/exhaust valve clearance *†					X
Check the compartment condition (fuel, oil, or water leaks)		X (Before operation)
REMOTE START PANEL
Check the remote start panel operation, if equipped			X (Break-in period)			X
GENERATOR
Test run the generator set			X (Weekly)
Blow dust out of the generator *†	3.1					X

* Requires removal of the sound shield door, if installed

÷ Consult your local distributor/dealer for service

Read the WARNING found at the beginning of the manual regarding moving parts

§ Consult the battery manufacturer's instructions

Diesel Generator-Bleeding the Fuel System

Periodically the fuel system needs bleeding to prevent starting failures and rough or erratic operation. This can be caused from the generator running out of fuel, air leaks between the fuel tank and the engine fuel pump, and from replacing the fuel filter.

To bleed a typical system follow these steps:

Note: If the ADC 2100 indicates an overcrank fault during this procedure, disconnect the negative wire from the fuel solenoid (allowing the fuel injection pump to fill with fuel) and repeat this procedure after allowing the starter motor to cool down.

Note: Have a cloth handy during the bleeding procedure. Wipe up all spilled diesel fuel after bleeding the system. Wash hands after any contact with fuel oil.

1. Loosen the fuel filter screw at position 1 (See illustration above).

2. Initiate the auto/start sequence until the fuel appears free of air bubbles as viewed from the vent screw at position 2. Tighten the screw.

3. Loosen the fuel filter screw at positon 2.

Initiate the auto/start sequence until until the fuel appears free of bubbles as viewed from the vent screw at position 1.

1. Tighten the screw.

2. Loosen the fuel injection pump screw at position 5.

3. Initiate the suto/start sequence until the fuel appears free of air bubbles as viewed from the vent screw at position 5. Tighten the screw.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Diesel Generator-Checking/Cleaning Air Cleaner

Clean or replace the generator air intake filter according to the maintenance schedule. If unit is used in dusty or dirty environments maintenance will be required sooner. A dry type air cleaner silences and filters the incoming air. The assembly connects to the intake manifold through a flexible hose.

To clean/replace air cleaner follow these steps:

1. Release the spring clips to open the housing and remove the air filter element.

2. Tap the element lightly against a firm surface to loosen any surface debris. Do not clean in any type of liquid or use compressed air as these types of filter elements will be damaged.

3. Examine the element and housing for damage and wear. Replace the element or housing if needed.

4. Wipe the cover and base with a clean cloth to remove any dirt. Make sure that the scaling surfaces fit correctly, and reattach the spring clips.

Diesel Generator-Checking Exhaust System

DANGER

CARBON MONOXIDE IS A TASTELESS,

ODORLESS AND INVISIBLE GAS

THAT CAN CAUSE DISCOMFORT,

GENERATOR OR ENGINES

IN CONFINED SPACES

OR AT DOCKSIDE. DO NOT ALLOW

HULL EXHAUST OUTLETS

TO BECOME BLOCKED OR EXHAUST FUMES

TO BECOME TRAPPED

IN AND AROUND THE CONFINES

OF YOUR BOAT.

DURING IDLE & SLOW CRUISE CONDITIONS,

Periodically inspect the exhaust system for cracks, leaks, and corrosion.

1. Check all hoses for rigidity, cracks, leaks, or dents. Replace as needed.

2. Check muffler for cracks, leaks, or weak walls.

3. Check for loose, corroded, or missing hose clamps.

4. Check the exhaust system for any obstructions including the generator hull exhaust. Make sure there are no insect nests at the outlet. Check for carbon or soot deposits which are indicators of exhaust leaks.

5. Make sure that all carbon monoxide detectors are working.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Diesel Generator-Checking Exhaust Siphon Break

1. Install the valve into the base with the valve downward.

2. Install the retaining cap finger tight.

The generator exhaust manifold is protected by a siphon device. It forms a loop higher than the generator. If the generator exhaust system tries to back up water through the exhaust manifold the check (reed style) valve opens and allows the water to exit the top of the siphon loop via the clear hose into the bilge.

Vessels in rough seas that are constantly rolling side to side are more susceptible to this water injection through the exhaust system.

To inspect the siphon break system:

1. Stop generator.

2. Remove the retaining cap and the check valve.

3. Use a mild detergent to remove any debris or oxidation from the valve.

4. Check the opening for blockage & remove as needed

5. Replace the siphon break if the valve is cracked or if hardened or deteriorated.

Diesel Generator-Checking Cooling System

The generator features a closed cooling system. The seawater circulates through separate chambers within the heat exchanger or manifold to cool the engine coolant. The seawater mixes with the engine exhaust and exits at the hull exhaust outlet.

The cooling system capacity is approximately 2.6 quarts.

Maintain the coolant level in the recovery tank at approximately 1/4 full. Before filling the cooling system, close all petcocks and tighten all hose clamps. Use a solution of 50% ethylene glycol and 50% clean, softened water to prevent rust/corrosion build-up and protect against freezing in colder climates. Add additional coolant solution, as necessary, to the coolant recovery tank. Periodically check the coolant level by removing the pressure cap. Do not rely on the level in the coolant recovery tank. Add fresh coolant until the level is just below the overflow tube opening.

Note: A coolant solution of 50% ethylene glycol is required to provide freezing protection to (-34 degrees F.) and overheating protection to (265 degrees F.).

Do not use or mix alcohol or methanol antifreeze or mix them with the recommended coolant.

Note: If the generator is overheated do not add the recommended coolant until the generator is cool to prevent engine or component damage.

Note: After the coolant drains, allow time when refilling the coolant for a complete refill of the engine water jacket.

A complete flushing periodically will keep the cooling system in optimum condition. Use the service schedule. To flush the cooling system do the following:

1. Open the pressure cap and open petcocks located at the heat exchanger, engine block, and cooling system, and let the system drain completely. Remove the pressure cap to simplify draining.

2. Drain, clean and flush the coolant recovery tank.

3. Flush the system with clean water.

4. Fill the system with recommended coolant.

The closed heat exchanger systems use a special pressure cap that raises the boiling point of the coolant, enabling a higher operating temperature. If the cap leaks or fails to hold pressure replace it with one of the same pressure. The pressure rating is stamped on the cap body.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Diesel Generator-Checking/Changing Seawater Pump Impeller

The water pump impeller is a rubber slinger style device that uses vanes to draw water through the generator via the seacock and water strainer. The impeller is fastened to a shaft that is driven by a camshaft or crankshaft.

Normally as the water pump impeller or housing wears the amount of water decreases over a period of time. In more severe cases the generator will overheat due to a lack of sufficient water.

To check/change the water pump impeller do the following:

1. Close the seacock.

2. Remove the seawater cover plate.

3. Remove the impeller.

4. Inspect the impeller for damaged, cracked, broken, missing or flattened vanes.

5. Lubricate the new impeller with soapy water to aid in installing it.

6. Install the impeller. Use a rotating motion to seat the impeller in its housing in the direction of engine rotation.

7. Inspect the cover plate for wear such as heavy grooves or damaged surfaces from debris. Also, inspect the gasket for any nicks or cuts.

8. Lubricate the gasket with silicon grease and attach the gasket and cover plate to the seawater pump housing.

9. Open the seacock.

10. Start the generator and check for leaks.

11. Stop the generator and repair any leaks or replace any damaged parts.

NOTICE

GENERATOR DAMAGE WILL RESULT FROM RUNNING THE UNIT WITHOUT SUFFICIENT WATER SUPPLY. THIS IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE PRODUCT WARRANTY.

Diesel Generator-Checking/Adjusting Belt Tension

Check the belt tension at the service interval specified. If the belt tension is not within specifications, adjust as needed using the following procedures:

1. Remove the belt guard.
2. Check the belt tension at the midpoint of the longest span of the belt using a belt tensioning tool set to 55 foot pounds. Once installed recheck a new belt after 10 minutes of operation.

Note: If the belt tension is not within specifications, go to step 3. If the belt tension is within specifications go to step 7.

1. Loosen the pivot and adjusting screws.

2. While prying the seawater pump outward, tighten the adjusting screw.

3. Tighten the pivot screw.

4. Recheck and adjust as necessary.

5. Replace the belt guard.

Note: Refer to the illustration on the next page.

Alternator Belt Tensioning Procedure

1. Remove the guard belt.
2. Check the belt tension at the midpoint of the longest span of the belt by pressing with your finger. If the belt is not within specifications go to step 3. If the belt is within specifications go to step 7.

Belt Type Deflection
New .3-.5 inch
Used .4-.6 inch

1. Loosen the adjusting arm pivot screw, alternator pivot screw, and alternator adjusting screw.

2. While prying the alternator outward, tighten the alternator adjusting screw.

3. Tighten the adjusting arm pivot screw and alternator pivot screw.

4. Recheck and adjust as necessary.

5. Replace the belt guard.

Note: Refer to the diagram on the next page.

Cosmetic Care & Maintenance

Belt Tensioning Diagram

1. Engine-driven water pump pulley
2. Adjusting arm pivot screw
3. Battery charging alternator pulley
4. Alternator adjusting screw
5. Alternator pivot screw
6. Check the alternator belt deflection (tension) here
7. Crankshaft pulley
8. Check the seawater pump belt deflection (tension) here
9. Seawater pump adjusting screw
10. Seawater pump pulley
11. Pivot screw

Notes

Troubleshooting

DIAGNOSTIC CHARTS

The following diagnostic charts will assist you in identifying minor electrical, electronic, fuel, and mechanical problems. Some of the items listed require technical training and tools. Additional assistance is available in the engine manufacturer's manual. Also, you can contact your closest Regal dealer or marine professional for more information. Many times the root cause of a problem can be found by a step by step process of elimination.

CAUTION

TO AVOID BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE!

USE ONLY APPROVED MARINE REPLACEMENT PARTS.

CAUTION

TO AVOID BODILY INJURYAND PROPERTY DAMAGE!SOME EQUIPMENT CONTAINS HIGHVOLTAGE. USE CAUTION WHENTROUBLESHOOTING ELECTRICALCOMPONENTS.

WARNING

TO AVOID BODILY INJURY AND DEATH! BEFORE PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE WORK TURN OFF THE BATTERY SWITCH AND REMOVE THE KEYS FROM THE IGNITION SWITCH.

Quick Reference Index Page

Air Conditioner 2

Battery Charger 3

CD Player 4

Cablemaster 7

Coffee Maker 8

DVD Player 9

Electrical-AC 10

Electrical-DC 11

Electronics 12

Engine-MerCruiser 13

Engine-Performance 16

Engine-Volvo 17

Fresh Water 23

Fuel System 24

Generator-Gas 25

Generator-Diesel 28

Instruments 31

iPod 32

Refrigerator 33

Refrigerator/Icemaker Combo 34

Remote Control 35

Sirius Marine Weather 36

Steering-V-Drive 37

Stereo Amplifier 39

Television 40

Television-Inverter 41

Toilet 42

Vacuum Cleaner 44

Windlass 45

TRAH
FAULT	POSSIBLE CAUSE	POSSIBLE FIX
A/C will not start	Circuit breaker offShorepower voltage at dock too/lo	Turn on at ship's main AC panelCheck AC input voltage at ship's
No cooling or heating	Temperature set too low or too high	Raise or lower temperature as required
	Control program for heat or cool	Reprogram for heat, cool or auto
	Obstructed sea water flow	Clean sea water strainerCheck output hose flow
	Sea water pump has airlock	Remove hose from pump discharge to remove airlock
Fan is not running	Air flow blocked	Locate obstruction,clean return filter and grill
Coil is iced over	Thermostat set too low	Raise thermostat
	Improper air flow	Clean return air filter; remove obstructions, check for restricted ducting
HHHdisplayed	High pressure switch openNot enough sea water flow	Check seacock, hoses, strainer, AC pump for restrictions
PPP is displayed	Low pressure switch is open	Restart AC unit
AC or heat runs continuously	Temperatures are set too low for cooling; too high for heating	Raise or lower set temperature
	Porthole, window, hatch or door open	Close all appendages

TRAHCCI'

BATTERY CHARGER DIAGNOSTIC CHART
Condition	Solution
Not clear if batteries are fully charged.	As the batteries charge, the ammeter gradually falls. When it reads zero, the batteries are fully charged.
It takes too long to charge batteries.	The SP series C-Charger brings a discharged battery voltage level up slowly to avoid shortening the life of the battery. The recharge time depends on the degree of discharge.
Unable to identify if lack of battery charge is due to a battery problem or an SP series C-Charger problem.	When the ammeter reads zero, test the condition of a battery by first turning off the AC power source to the SP series C-Charger, and disconnecting the battery from the SP series C-Charger for at least one hour. Connect battery to an ohm-volt meter. A reading of 12.6 VDC or more is desirable. A reading between 12.4 and 12.6 indicates a charge between 75 and 100%. A reading between 12.2 and 12.4 VDC indicates a charge between 50 and 75%. Consult the battery manufacturer's Owner's Manual for instructions.If it appears the battery is operating properly, proceed to check the following only after reading and fully understanding all safety instructions listed in this manual. Check input voltage at 120 VAC, check the SP series C-Charger's AC fuse and DC fuse, check the battery fuse/AC circuit breaker (Figure 1, Note 3) and check all associated wiring connections. If these appear to be working, the SP series C-Charger's DC output can be tested by turning off all AC power to the unit and then disconnecting all DC outputs from the charger. Upon reapplying AC power, the DC voltage between any (+) and (-) output connection should be between 13.5 and 15 VDC. Should the unit still be inoperable after all tests have been completed in sequence, refer to the section in this manual on Warranty & Customer Service.
The ammeter deflects in a counterclockwise direction.	Disconnect the unit immediately. Examine wiring instructions again to assure proper connections. A movement in a counterclockwise direction or a full-scale movement indicates excessive current. A wiring error is suspected. A voltmeter can monitor the voltage at the battery when the SP series C-Charger is turned on. An increase in voltage should occur as power is applied.
Internal red LED on.	The unit is at half-power because the ambient air is too hot. The unit may be at half-power because the fans are not working. Full power will be restored when the temperature returns to normal.

CD PLAYER

What might seem to be a malfunction in your unit may just be the result of slight misoperation or miswiring. Before calling service, first check the following table for possible problems.

General

? The power does not turn ON.

√ The fuse has blown.

After checking for short circuits in the wires, replace the fuse with one with the same rating.

? There's a source you can't switch.

√ There's no media inserted.

Set the media you want to listen to. If there's no media in this unit, you can't switch to each source.

√ The Disc changer isn't connected.

Connect the Disc changer. If the Disc changer isn't connected to it's input terminal, You can't switch to an external disc source.

? The memory is erased when the ignition is turned OFF.

√ The ignition and battery wire are incorrectly connected.
Connect the wire correctly, referring to the section on .

? The TEL mute function does not work.

√ The TEL mute wire is not connected properly.
Connect the wire correctly, referring to the section on .

? The TEL mute function turns ON even though the TEL mute wire is not connected.

√ The TEL mute wire is touching a metal part of the car.
Pull the TEL mute wire away from the metal part of the car.

? Even if Loudness is turned ON, high-pitched tone isn't compensated for.

√ Tuner source is selected.

High-pitched tone isn't compensated for when in Tuner source.

? No sound can be heard, or the volume is low.

√ The fader or balance settings are set all the way to one side.

or Center the fader and balance settings

√ The input/output wires or wiring harness are connected incorrectly.

Reconnect the input/output wires or the wiring harness correctly. See the section on .

√ The values of Volume offset are low.

Turn up the Volume offset, referring to the section on

? The sound quality is poor or distorted.

√ One of the speaker wires is being pinched by a screw in the car.

Check the speaker wiring.

√ The speakers are not wired correctly.

Reconnect the speaker wires so that each output terminal is connected to a different speaker.

? The Touch Sensor Tone doesn't sound.

√ The preout jack is being used.

The Touch Sensor Tone can't be output from the preout jack.

Tuner source

? Radio reception is poor.

√ The car antenna is not extended.

er Pull the antenna out all the way.

√ The antenna control wire is not connected.

Connect the wire correctly, referring to the section on .

CD PLAYER

Disc source

? "AUX EXT" is displayed without achieving External disc control mode.

√ Unsupported disc changer is connected.

Use the disc changer mentioned in the (page 4) of the section on .

? The specified disc does not play, but another one plays instead.

√ The specified CD is quite dirty.

Clean the CD.

√ The disc is loaded in a different slot from that specified.

Eject the disc magazine and check the number for the specified disc.

√ The disc is severely scratched.

or Try another disc instead.

? A CD ejects as soon as it is loaded.

√ The CD is quite dirty.

Clean the CD, referring to the CD cleaning of the section on (page 6).

? Can't remove disc.

√ The cause is that more than 10 minutes has elapsed since the vehicle ACC switch was turned OFF.

The disc can only be removed within 10 minutes of the ACC switch being turned OFF. If more than 10 minutes has elapsed, turn the ACC switch ON again and press the Eject button.

? The disc won't insert.

√ There's already another disc inserted.

■ Press the [▲] button and remove the disc

? Direct Search can't be done.

√ Another function is ON

Turn Random Play or other functions OFF.

? Track Search can't be done.

√ For the discs/folders first or last song.

For each disc/folder, Track Search can't be done in the backward direction for the first song or in the forward direction for the last song.

Audio file source

? Cannot play an Audio file.

√ The media is scratched or dirty.

Clean the media, referring to the CD cleaning of the section on (page 6).

? The sound skips when an Audio file is being played.

√ The media is scratched or dirty.

Clean the media, referring to the CD cleaning of the section on (page 6).

√ The recording condition is bad.

Record the media again or use another media.

? The Audio file track time isn't displayed correctly

√

There are times when it isn't displayed correctly according to the Audio file recording conditions.

? Supreme does not take effect when it is turned ON.

√ Little high-frequency component.

Supreme would not take effect with songs with little high-frequency component.

√ Songs that have not been encoded at bit rates lower than 96 kbps (fs = 32k, 44.1 k, 48 kHz) or those that have been encoded at a variable bit rate cannot be decoded to reproduce their high-frequency components.

[Unreadable]

HD Radio source

? No sound can be heard, or the volume is low.

√ The preset broadcast station is not transmitting in the mode that was set with (page 22).

Please set to "AUTO".

√ In digital AM broadcasting, receive mode switches between stereo and monaural too often.

Receiving condition is bad or unstable. Stereo is chosen when receiving condition is good, and it switches to monaural when the condition becomes bad.

√ HD Radio tuner is connected to KCA-S210A or other units.

Connect the HD Radio tuner directly to the control unit.

CD PLAYER

The messages shown below display your systems condition.		HOLD:	The protective circuit in the unit activates when the temperature inside the automatic disc changer exceeds 60°C (140°F), stopping all operation.Cool down the unit by opening the windows or turning on the air conditioner. As the temperature falls below 60°C (140°F), the disc will start playing again.
EJECT:	No disc magazine has been loaded in the changer. The disc magazine is not completely loaded.Load the disc magazine properly.No CD in the unit.Insert the CD.
NO DISC:	No disc has been loaded in the disc magazine.Load a disc into the disc magazine.	LOAD:	Discs are being exchanged in the Disc changer.
TOC ERR:	No disc has been loaded in the disc magazine.Load a disc into the disc magazine.The CD is quite dirty. The CD is upside-down. The CD is scratched a lot.Clean the CD and load it correctly.	READING:IN (Blink):	The unit is reading the data on the disc.The CD player section is not operating properly.Reinsert the CD, if the CD cannot be ejected or the display continues to flash even when the CD has been properly reinserted, please switch off the power and consult your nearest service center.
E-05:	The CD is upside-down.Load the CD correctly.	PROTECT:	The speaker wire has a short-circuit or touches the chassis of the vehicle, and then the protection function is activated.Wire or insulate the speaker cable properly and press the reset button.
BLANK:	Nothing has been recorded on the MD.
NO TRACK:	No tracks are recorded on the MD, although it has a title.
E-15:	Media was played that doesn't have data recorded that the unit can play.Use media that has data recorded that the unit can play.	NA FILE:	An Audio file is played with a format that this unit can't support.----
NO PANEL:	The faceplate of the slave unit being connected to this unit has been removed.Replace it.	COPY PRO:	A copy-protected file is played.----
E-77:	The unit is malfunctioning for some reason.Press the reset button on the unit. If the "E-77" code does not disappear, consult your nearest service center.	DEMO:	The Demonstration mode has been selected.The(page 23) is ON. Turn it OFF.
E-99:	Something is wrong with the disc magazine. Or the unit is malfunctioning for some reason.Check the disc magazine. And then press the reset button on the unit, if the "E-99" code does not disappear, consult your nearest service center.

CABLEMASTER SYSTEM
COMPLAINT	PROBABLE CAUSE	RECOMMENDED ACTION
Non-functional(either no power or unit has power and does not respond)	○ Tripped breaker○ Power wire incorrectly connected to relay assembly○ Defective motor○ Defective relay box	○ Reset breaker○ Replace relay assembly○ With power switch on and voltage across motor wires — if no response, replace motor
Pays out cable only	○ In-Limit switch circuit open○ Power inputs reversed○ Defective relay or diode○ Bad power switch	○ Check in-limit switch○ Check polarity on DC input wires○ Replace relay assembly○ Check power switch
Retracts cable only	○ Out-Limit switch circuit open○ Defective relay○ Bad power switch	○ Check out-limit switch○ Replace relay assembly○ Check power switch
Tripped DC breaker	○ Main pulley too tight○ Cable jammed and kinking○ Defective motor	○ Adjust pulley○ Check for adequate storage space and/or cable for undue kinking — see Cable Adjustment (pg. ?)○ Disconnect motor wires from relay box. Apply power directly to motor wires; motor should run one direction or other — no response from motor; replace motor

TROUBLE-SHOOTING YOUR SUNBEAM® COFFEE MAKER
POTENTIAL PROBLEMS	PROBABLE CAUSE
ON LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE	UnpluggedPower outage
COFFEE IS NOT BREWING	UnpluggedPower outageThe water reservoir is emptyThe filter basket door is not properly insertedCarafe lid is not placed all the way on the warming plate
COFFEE MAKER ONLY BREWS WATER	No grounds in filter basket
COFFEE MAKER BREWS SLOWLY	Coffee Maker needs decalcifying
FILTER BASKET OVERFLOWS	The filter basket is not properly insertedCarafe is not placed all the way on the warming plateCarafe lid not on carafeToo many grounds placed in filterCarafe was removed from warming plate longer than 30 seconds
BURNING COFFEE SMELL	Empty carafe was left on hot warming plateCoffee was spilled on a warming plate
COFFEE IS NOT HOT*	Power outage1-hour Automatic Shut-Off was activated (Some Models Only)
COFFEE TASTES BAD	Coffee grounds other than for automatic drip Coffee Maker were usedGrounds-to-water ratio was unbalanced
GROUNDS ARE IN COFFEE	Paper filter not properly seated in basketFilter overflowed

TRAHCO
MRD.B	POSSIBLE CAUSE	POSSIBLE FIX
No Sound	Poor connections at DVD player	Check to see DVD player is connected right
	TV not set up properly	Check TV settings
No picture	Poor connections at DVD player	Check to see DVD player is connected right
	AV 1 not selected on remote control	Select AV 1
Unit does not play	No disc in player	Insert disc in player
	Disc installed upside ndo	Reinstall disc correctly
	Dics scratched, broke or excessively dirty	Replace disc
	Moisture in player	Dry out player by letting it stand 1 hour
Remote control not functioning	Object inbetween player and remote	Obtain clear pathway for remote
	Batteries weak or dead	Replace batteries
TRA
PROBLEM	POSSIBLE CAUSE	POSSIBLE FIX
No AC power	Main shore power inlet breakers tripped or offPower at dock offShore power cord not connectedFaulty connection	Energize shore power inlet breakersActivate dock box powerPlug in shore power: twist to lockRepair as needed
No power to AC outlets & equipment	Main breakers at AC control panel tripped or offShore power not connectedGFIC tripped	Activate main breakers or resetPlug in cordReset GFIC
Main breaker continues to trip	Faulty main breaker	Contact dealer
Inadequate AC power with genset running	Electrical demand greater than electrical output	Turn off equipment as needed
No 12 volt power	Battery switch in "off" positionWeak or dead battery	Turn selector switch to "on" positionCharge or replace battery
Battery not charging; (Engine running)	Loose beltFaulty alternatorFaulty volt meter	Tighten beltRepair/Replace alternatorReplace volt meter
Battery will not hold charge	Faulty/Old battery	Replace battery
12 volt equipment not working	Equipment switch "off"Circuit breaker blownWeak or dead batteryCorroded connectionLoose wireInternal equipment short	Switch to "on" positionPush reset on circuit breakerReplace batteryEliminate corrosionTighten connectionReplace equipment
ELECTRONICS- GENERAL
Fault	Cause	Remedy
Display blank	No power supply	Check power supply & ensure instrument is switched on.Check SeaTalk cabling and connector securityCheck fuse/circuit breaker
No transfer of information between SeaTalk instruments (e.g. illumination levels).	SeaTalk cable or connector fault	Check security of SeaTalk connectors.Check condition of SeaTalk cables.Isolate faulty instrument by disconnecting instruments one by one.
Failure of a group of SeaTalk instruments.	SeaTalk cable or connector fault	Check the security of SeaTalk connectors between functioning and non-functioning instruments
LAST flashing or dashes displayed continuously (depth greater than 3 ft)	Transducer cable or connector fault	Check the condition of the transducer cable and the security of the connections
LAST flashes when under way	Aerated water due to -boat wakes, propeller wash etc.	Ensure reading stabilizes when clear of disturbed water.

ENGINE-MERCRUISER

Starter Motor Will Not Crank Engine, Or Cranks Slow

Possible Cause	Remedy
Battery switch turned off.	Turn switch on.
Remote control not in neutral position.	Position control lever in neutral.
Open circuit breaker or blown fuse.	Check and reset circuit breaker or replace fuse.
Loose or dirty electrical connections or damaged wiring.	Check all electrical connections and wires (especially battery cables). Clean and tighten faulty connection.
Bad battery.	Test and replace if bad.

Engine Will Not Start, Or Is Hard To Start

Possible Cause	Remedy
Lanyard stop switch activated	Check lanyard stop switch.
Improper starting procedure.	Read starting procedure.
Insufficient fuel supply.	Fill tank or open valve.
Clogged fuel filter.	Replace filter.
Stale or contaminated fuel.	Drain tank. Fill with fresh fuel.
Fuel line or tank vent line kinked or clogged.	Replace kinked lines or blow out lines with compressed air to remove obstruction.
EFI system fault.	Have EFI System checked by an authorized Mercury MerCruiser dealer.
Faulty wire connections.

Engine Runs Rough, Misses And/Or Backfires

Possible Cause	Remedy
Clogged fuel filter.	Replace filter.

ENGINE-MERCRUISER

Possible Cause	Remedy
Stale or contaminated fuel.	If contaminated, drain tank. Fill with fresh fuel.
Kinked or clogged fuel line or fuel tank vent line.	Replace kinked lines or blow out lines with compressed air to remove obstruction.
Flame Arrestor dirty.	Clean Flame Arrestor.
Idle speed too low.	Have EFI system checked by an authorized Mercury MerCruiser dealer.
EFI System fault.	Have EFI System checked by an authorized Mercury MerCruiser dealer.

Poor Performance

Possible Cause	Remedy
Throttle not fully open.	Inspect throttle cable and linkages for proper operation.
Damaged or improper propeller.	Replace propeller.
Excessive bilge water.	Drain and check for cause of entry.
Boat overloaded or load improperly distributed.	Reduce load or redistribute load more evenly.
Flame arrestor dirty.	Clean flame arrestor.
Boat bottom fouled or damaged.	Clean or repair as necessary.
Ignition problem.	See Engine Runs Rough, Misses or Backfires.
Engine overheating.	See Excessive Engine Temperature.
EFI system fault.	Have EFI System checked by an authorized Mercury MerCruiser dealer.

Excessive Engine Temperature

Possible Cause	Remedy
Water inlet or seacock closed.	Open.
Drive belt loose or in poor condition.	Replace or adjust belt.
Seawater pickups or sea strainer obstructed.	Remove obstruction.
Faulty thermostat.	Replace.
Coolant level (if equipped) low in closed cooling section.	Check for cause of low coolant level and repair. Fill system with proper coolant solution.
Heat Exchanger or Fluid Cooler plugged with foreign material	Clean Heat Exchanger, Engine Oil Cooler, and Transmission Oil Cooler (if equipped).
Loss of pressure in closed cooling section.	Check for leaks. Clean, inspect and test pressure cap.
Faulty seawater pickup pump.	Repair.
Seawater discharge restricted or plugged.	Clean exhaust elbows.

ENGINE-MERCRUISER

Insufficient Engine Temperature

Possible Cause	Remedy
Faulty thermostat.	Replace.

Low Engine Oil Pressure

Possible Cause	Remedy
Insufficient oil in crankcase.	Check and add oil.
Excessive oil in crankcase (causing it to become aerated).	Check and remove required amount of oil.Check for cause of excessive oil (improper filling).
Diluted or improper viscosity oil.	Change oil and oil filter, using correct grade and viscosity oil. Determine cause for dilution (excessive idling).

Battery Will Not Come Up On Charge

Possible Cause	Remedy
Excessive current draw from battery.	Turn off non-essential accessories.
Alternator drive belt loose or in poor condition.	Replace and/or adjust.
Unacceptable battery condition.	Test battery, replace if necessary.
Loose or dirty electrical connections or damaged wiring.	Check all associated electrical connections and wires (especially battery cables). Clean and tighten faulty connections. Repair or replace damaged wiring.
Faulty alternator	Test alternator output, replace if necessary.

Remote Control Operates Hard, Binds, Has Excessive Free-play Or Makes Unusual Sounds

Possible Cause	Remedy
Insufficient lubrication on shift and throttle linkage fasteners.	Lubricate.
Obstruction in shift or throttle linkages.	Remove obstruction.
Loose or missing shift and throttle linkages.	Check all throttle linkages. If any are loose or missing, see authorized Mercury MerCruiser dealer immediately.
Shift or throttle cable kinked.	Straighten cable or have authorized Mercury MerCruiser dealer replace cable if damaged beyond repair.

SC
PROBLEM	POSSIBLE CAUSE	POSSIBLE FIX
Excessive vibration	Material obstructing propellerBent propeller shaftBent propeller bladePropeller hub slipping	Remove material by reversing engineCall Regal dealerRepair/replace propellerReplace propeller
Poor performance	Engine trim incorrectUneven load distributionEngine problem	Adjust trimAdjust boat loadCall Regal dealer

SCITS

ENGINE-VOLVO
Engine Will Not Crank	Starter Circuit - Check:Battery condition: weak, dead, sulfated, bad cells.Battery cables-for loose or corroded connections.Shorted or open ignition switch.Starter motor and solenoid-for shorts, grounds, or open circuits.Starter assist solenoid/starter relay.Circuit breakers.Wiring, from battery to ignition switch.
Engine Cranks, But Will Not Start	Ignition Circuit - Check:Primary circuit wiring, from ignition switch to ignition coil/ignition module.Secondary circuit wiring, from coil to spark plug.Spark plugs-for proper gap, fouling, burned electrodes, or cracked/dirty insulator.Low battery voltage.
	Fuel System - Check:Quantity and condition of fuel in boat tank.Operation and flow capacity of boat anti-siphon valve.Fuel tank vent is unrestricted.Fuel tank pick-up screen is clean.Correct diameter/unrestricted boat fuel lines.Fuel shutoff and multiple tank valves are open and operating properly.Fuel pump vent hose-for signs of fuel or oil that would indicate a fuel pump failure.Fuel pump/relay/circuit breaker operation.External fuel filter canister.
Hard Starting - Cold Engine	Has Engine Always Done This? Check:☐ Fuel lines for obstructions.☐ For debris inside fuel tank.Was Engine Unused For A Long Time? Check:☐ Water in fuel due to condensation.☐ Fuel quality deterioration.Is This A New Condition? Check:☐ Fuel system-for leaks, dirt, or obstructions.☐ Engine timing and ignition system.
Hard Starting - Hot Engine	Has Engine Always Done This? Check:☐ See Electrical/Ignition/Fuel Service Manual.Is This A New Condition? Check:☐ Brand, type, or octane of fuel.☐ Spark plugs.☐ Water in fuel.☐ Condition of battery and cables.☐ Starter motor-for overheat damage.Did Engine Refuse To Start After Being Run? Check:☐ Ignition system primary circuit.☐ Ignition coil(s) and/or ignition module.☐ Engine timing.

ENGINE-VOLVO

Engine Runs Rough

Also, see EFI Diagnostic Manual

If At Slow Speed - Check:

☐ Idle speed and idle mixture.
☐ Engine timing and spark plugs.
☐ Fuel pump pressure.
□ Water or contaminants in fuel.
□ Manifold vacuum leak.

If At High Speed - Check:

Air leak on suction side of fuel system.
☐ Too low octane fuel.
Ignition system secondary circuit.
Engine timing.
☐ Improper main jets or power valve, defective secondary fuel circuit, or secondary vacuum diaphragm failure.
External fuel filters.
☐ Fuel pump pressure.
□ Engine compression.
☐ Water or contaminants in fuel, or water in cylinders.

Engine Noises and Vibrations

Valves - Hydraulic Lifters

☐ Rapping only when starting-oil too heavy for prevailing weather, varnish on lifter, oil needs to be changed.
☐ Intermittent rapping-leakage at lifter check ball.
□ Idle noise-excessive leak down rate, faulty check ball seat.
□ Generally noisy—excessive oil in crankcase, stuck lifter plunger.
☐ Loud noise at operating temperature–scored lifter plunger, fast leak down rate, oil viscosity too light for prevailing weather or operating temperatures.

Ignition System (Ping or Knock)

□ Improper tuning.
☐ Incorrect spark plug wire routing.
□ Use higher octane fuel.

ENGINE-VOLVO
Engine Noises and Vibrations (Cont.)	Cooling SystemSupply pump.Loose belts and/or pulleys.
	MountingsLoose, broken, or worn engine mounts.Loose lag screws holding mounts to stringer.
	Crankshaft Balancer or FlywheelLoose bolt(s).
	AlternatorLoose pulley and/or worn bearings.Loose mounting bolts.
Engine Overheats	Check:Actual engine temperature by verifying with an accurate thermometer.Gauge operation and wiring circuit.Sending unit operation and wiring circuit.Supply pump, circulating pump, and belt(s).Water intake screens-for blockage.Thermostat.Water supply hoses.Engine timing.Water leaks on pressure side of supply pump.Air leaks on suction side of supply pump.Engine compression.If equipped with a heat exchanger, check to be sure that it is free of debris.
Engine Dies Out	Loss Of-Or Out Of-Fuel - Check:☐ Fuel gauge operation and wiring.☐ Fuel level in tank.☐ Water or debris in fuel.☐ Fuel pickup tube and screen blockage.☐ Fuel tank vent blockage.☐ Plugged fuel filters.☐ Air leak on suction side of fuel system.☐ Fuel leak on pressure side of fuel system.☐ Inoperative, restricted, or incorrectly sized anti-siphon valve.☐ Boat fuel lines too small in diameter.☐ Fuel pump pressure and suction.
	Loss Of Ignition - Check:☐ Primary and secondary ignition circuits.☐ Ignition switch.☐ Circuit breakers.☐ Wiring between engine and dash.☐ Main engine harness wiring.
	Engine Stops Or Dies Out Due To Seizure - Check:☐ Vertical drive for internal damage.☐ Oil pressure gauge and crankcase oil level.☐ Temperature gauge and cooling system operation.☐ Internal engine components as required.
Engine Won't Reach Operating RPM	Check:☐ Fuel type or octane.☐ Propeller pitch or diameter, damaged blades, or slipping hub.☐ Crankcase oil volume.☐ Marine growth on hull.☐ Operating at high altitude.☐ Restricted exhaust outlets in engine.☐ Poor cylinder compression.☐ Fuel pump pressure and vacuum.☐ Boat overloaded or load improperly placed.

ENGINE-VOLVO

Engine Won't Reach Operating RPM (Cont.)

Defective Engine Lubricating System

□ Engine overheating.
☐ Engine timing and ignition system operation.
Remote control cables and linkage for proper attachment and travel.

Engine Components - Check:

☐ Clogged or incorrect oil filter.
☐ Worn oil pump gears, cover, or shaft.
☐ Worn or collapsed oil pump relief valve spring or foreign material caught on valve seat.
Oil pump relief valve plunger loose in cover.
□ Damaged filter bypass grommet.
☐ Clogged oil pickup screen, broken tube, or housing.
☐ Plugged crankshaft or blocked oil galleys.
☐ Dirty or defective hydraulic lifters or clogged push rod passages.
☐ Poor quality, or incorrect viscosity or quantity of oil.
☐ Incorrect hose routing on remote filter systems.
☐ Water in crankcase oil from condensation, or defective head gasket, oil cooler, or cracked manifold/block water passages.

Oil Pressure Warning System - Check:

Oil gauge/warning horn operation and wiring.
Engine temperature.
Oil pressure gauge and warning horn sender operation and wiring.

Low Battery Voltage After Short Storage

Engine/Boat Components - Check:

☐ All electrical accessories including ignition circuit off.
☐ Disconnect main battery negative cable from battery.
☐ Connect ammeter or voltmeter in series between negative battery cable and negative battery post:
- Meter reading of "0" indicates no draw; test battery and charging system.
- Meter movement no matter how slight indicates draw from battery.
☐ Disconnect main engine harness 14-Pin Connector:
- Meter drops back to "0" indicates problem caused by boat system; continue to isolate each boat electrical accessory until problem is found.
- Meter does not drop back to "0" indicates problem caused by engine electrical system; continue to isolate each engine electrical accessory until problem is found.
□ Repair or replace components as necessary.

PROBLEM	POSSIBLE CAUSE	POSSIBLE FIX
Air in system	Water tank empty	Fill tank. With pump on bleed air from lines until water flows out faucet w/o air.
Fresh water pump cycles on and off	Leak in water system	Locate water leak & repair
No water at sink faucets	Breaker blownWater tank emptySwitch turned offBlocked/pinched line or water filterLoosr or disconnected wire	Reset breakerRefill water tankTurn switch onClear obstruction or straighten line;Clean water filterCheck connections;Tighten as needed
Low water pressure	Defective fresh water pump	Replace pump
Weak pressure at transom shower	Line pinched	Relocate line
Water to pump. No output	Faulty pump or pump pressure switch	Replace water pump or pressure switch

TRAHCCIT

TRAH
PROBLEM	POSSIBLE CAUSE	POSSIBLE FIX
Engine won't start or not running right	Fuel tank vent obstructed	Clean vent hose or and fitting. Check for kinks.
	Fuel line blocked	Check for kinked hose
	Lack of fuel	Clean filter. Check for clogged anti-siphon valve (Call dealer)
	Water in fuel	Eliminate water
	Clogged engine water separator filter	Replace filter element
	No fuel reaching engine	Check fuel pump output. Clean filters. Check fuel tank gauge level.

TRAHCCI

GAS GENERATOR

Trouble Symptoms										Probable Causes	Recommended Actions
Does not crank	Cranks but does not start	Starts hard	No or low output voltage	Stops suddenly	Lacks power	Overheats	Low oil pressure	High fuel consumption	Excessive or abnormal noise
Fuel System
	x			x						Fuel tank empty or fuel valve shut off	Add fuel and move the fuel valve to the ON position.
	x				x					Fuel pressure insufficient	Check the fuel supply and valves.†
	x	x		x	x					Fuel line restriction	Check the fuel lines and fuel tank.
	x	x			x					Stale or bad fuel. Incorrect type of fuel	Replace fuel. Clean the carburetor.
	x				x			x		Fuel feed pump inoperative	Replace the fuel feed pump.†
Generator
			x							AC output circuit breaker open	Reset the breaker and check for AC voltage at the generator side of the circuit breaker.
				x						Overcrank shutdown	Reset the controller. If the overcrank fault occurs again, contact the distributor/dealer.
x										Transfer switch test switch in the OFF position	Move the transfer switch test switch to the AUTO position.
			x							Wiring, terminals, or pin in the exciter field open	Check for continuity.
			x							Main field (rotor) inoperative (open or grounded)	Test and/or replace the rotor.†
			x							Stator inoperative (open or grounded)	Test and/or replace the stator.†
									x	Vibration excessive	Tighten loose components.†
Lube System
						x	x		x	Oil level low	Restore the oil level. Inspect the generator set for oil leaks.
				x						Low oil pressure shutdown	Check the oil level.
				x						Low oil pressure (LOP) switch inoperative	Replace the LOP switch.
	x	x					x		x	Crankcase oil type incorrect for ambient temperature	Change the oil. Use oil with a viscosity suitable for the operating climate.

• Dealer Service Item

GAS GENERATOR

Trouble Symptoms										Probable Causes	Recommended Actions
Does not crank	Cranks but does not start	Starts hard	No or low output voltage	Stops suddenly	Lacks power	Overheats	Low oil pressure	High fuel consumption	Excessive or abnormal noise
Electrical System (DC circuits)
x	x									Battery connections loose, corroded, or incorrect	Verify that the battery connections are correct, clean, and light.
x	x									Battery weak or dead	Recharge or replace the battery. The spec sheet provides recommended battery CCA rating.
x				x						Engine harness connector(s) not locked light	Disconnect the engine harness connector(s) then reconnect it to the controller.
				x						Fault shutdown	Reset the controller.
				x						High exhaust temperature switch inoperative	Replace the inoperative switch.
x	x									Starter/starter solenoid inoperative	Replace the starter or starter solenoid.
				x						High water temperature switch inoperative	Replace the inoperative switch.
	x									Faulty ground connection	Clean and retighten the connection.
Engine
	x	x			x			x		Air cleaner/backfire flame arrester clogged	Clean or replace the filter element.
	x	x				x		x	x	Compression weak	Check the compression.†
			x		x	x		x	x	Engine overload	Reduce the electrical load. See the generator set installation manual for wattage specifications.
									x	Exhaust system leak	Inspect the exhaust system. Replace the inoperative exhaust system components.†
									x	Exhaust system not securely installed	Inspect the exhaust system. Tighten the loose exhaust system components.†
					x				x	Valve clearance incorrect	Adjust the valves.†
									x	Vibration excessive	Tighten all loose hardware.
	x	x			x					Ignition system inoperative (gas/gasoline only)	Check the ignition system (ignition module, spark plugs, spark plug wires, etc.).

• Dealer Service Item

GAS GENERATOR

Trouble Symptoms										Probable Causes	Recommended Actions
Does not crank	Crancks but does not start	Starts hard	No or low output voltage	Stops suddenly	Lacks power	Overheats	Low oil pressure	High fuel consumption	Excessive or abnormal noise
Controller
x										Generator set master switch in the OFF position	Move the generator set master switch to the correct position (RUN or AUTO).
			x	x						The auxiliary winding fuse (F1) blown	Replace the blown F1 fuse. If the fuse blows again, troubleshoot the controller.†
x	x		x	x						The controller fuse (F2) blown	Replace the blown F2 fuse. If the fuse blows again, troubleshoot the controller.†
x				x						The customer connection fuse (F3) blown. Note that the remote digital gage (if equipped) will not function.	Replace the blown F3 fuse. If the fuse blows again, troubleshoot the controller.†
	x									The coil/injector fuse (F4) blown	Replace the blown F4 fuse. If the fuse blows again, troubleshoot the controller.†
	x	x	x	x	x			x		The ECM, O2 sensor, and fuel pumps fuse (F5) blown	Replace the blown F5 fuse. If the fuse blows again, troubleshoot the controller.†
x		x								The battery charging alternator and voltage regulator fuse (F6) blown	Replace the blown F6 fuse. If the fuse blows again, troubleshoot the controller.†
x										The starter motor and crank solenoid fuse (F7) blown	Replace the blown F7 fuse. If the fuse blows again, troubleshoot the controller.†
x				x						Controller circuit breaker tripped	Reset the controller circuit breaker
x										Controller master or start/stop switch inoperative	Replace the controller master or start/stop switch.
			x							Incorrect controller settings	Check and adjust the controller.†
				x						Remote stop command received from a remote switch	Check and remote switch position.
				x						Controller fault	Troubleshoot the controller.†
x	x									Controller circuit board(s) inoperative	Replace the controller circuit board.
Cooling System
						x		x		Air openings clogged	Clean the air openings.
						x				Impeller damaged	Replace the impeller.
						x		x		Seawater strainer clogged or restricted	Clean the strainer.
				x						High temperature shutdown	Allow the engine to cool down. Then troubleshoot the cooling system (add coolant).
						x				Coolant level low	Restore the coolant to normal operating level.
						x				Thermostat inoperative	Replace the thermostat.

DIESEL GENERATOR

Trouble Symptoms										Probable Causes	Recommended Actions
Does not crank	Cranics but does not start	Starts hard	No or low output voltage	Stops suddenly	Lacks power	Overseats	Low oil pressure	High fuel consumption	Excessive or abnormal noise
Electrical System (DC circuits)
x	x									Battery connections loose, corroded, or incorrect	Verity that the battery connections are correct, clean, and fight.
x	x									Battery weak or dead	Recharge or replace the battery. The spec sheet provides recommended battery CCA rating.
x				x						Engine harness connector(s) not locked tight	Disconnect the engine harness connector(s) then reconnect it to the controller.
				x						Fault shutdown	Reset the controller.
x	x									Starter/starter solenoid inoperative	Replace the starter or starter solenoid.
Engine
	x	x			x			x		Air cleaner/beckfire flame arrester clogged	Clean or replace the filter element.
	x	x				x		x	x	Compression weak	Check the compression.†
			x		x	x		x	x	Engine overload	Reduce the electrical load. See the generator set installation manual for wattage specifications.
									x	Exhaust system leak	Inspect the exhaust system. Replace the inoperative exhaust system components.†
									x	Exhaust system not securely installed	inspect the exhaust system. Tighten the loose exhaust system components.†
				x						Overspeed shutdown	Reset the controller. If the overspeed fault occurs again, contact the distributor/dealer.
		x	x		x			x		Governor inoperative	Adjust the governor.†
					x				x	Valve clearance incorrect	Adjust the valves.†
									x	Vibration excessive	Tighten all loose hardware.

• Dealer Service Item

DIESEL GENERATOR

Trouble Symptoms										Probable Causes	Recommended Actions
Does not crank	Cranks but does not start	Starts hard	No or low output voltage	Stops suddenly	Locks power	Overheats	Low oil pressure	High fuel consumption	Excessive or abnormal noise
Controller
x				x						Generator set master switch in the OFF position	Move the generator set master switch to the correct position (RUN or AUTO).
x				x						Controller fuse (F3) blown	Replace the blown controller fuse. If the fuse blows again, troubleshoot the controller.?
x				x						The relay interface board fuse (F2) blown	Replace the blown relay interface board fuse. If the fuse blows again, troubleshoot the controller.?
				x						The auxiliary winding fuse (F1) blown	Replace the blown auxiliary winding fuse. If the fuse blows again, troubleshoot the controller.?
x				x						Controller circuit breaker tripped	Reset the controller circuit breaker.
x										Controller master or start/stop switch inoperative	Replace the controller master switch.
				x						Controller fault	Troubleshoot the controller.?
				x						Remote stop command received from a remote switch or ATS	Check the remote switch position.
Cooling System
						x		x		Air openings clogged	Clean the air openings.
						x				Impeller inoperative	Replace the Impeller
						x		x		Seawater strainer clogged or restricted	Clean the strainer.
				x						High temperature shutdown	Allow the engine to cool down. Then troubleshoot the cooling system.
				x						Low coolant level shutdown	Restore the coolant to normal operating level.
						x				Coolant level low	Restore the coolant to normal operating level.
						x				Thermostat inoperative	Replace the thermostat.
						x				Cooling water pump inoperative	Tighten or replace the belt. Replace the water pump.

DIESEL GENERATOR

Trouble Symptoms										Probable Causes	Recommended Actions
Does not crank	Cranks but does not start	Starts hard	No or low output voltage	Stops suddenly	Lackis power	Overmeats	Low oil pressure	High fuel consumption	Excessive or abnormal noise
Fuel System
	x			x						Fuel tank empty or fuel valve shut off	Add fuel and move the fuel valve to the ON position.
	x	x		x	x					Fuel filter restriction	Clean or replace the fuel filter.
	x									Fuel solenoid inoperative	Troubleshoot the fuel solenoid.†
	x	x			x					Air in fuel system (diesel only)	Bleed the diesel fuel system.
	x	x			x					Fuel or fuel injectors dirty or faulty (diesel only)	Clean, test, and/or replace the inoperative fuel injector.†
	x	x			x			x		Fuel injection timing out of adjustment (diesel only)	Adjust the fuel injection timing.†
	x				x			x		Fuel feed or injection pump inoperative (diesel only)	Rebuild or replace the injection pump.†
Generator
			x							AC output circuit breaker open	Reset the breaker and check for AC voltage at the generator side of the circuit breaker.
				x						Overcrank shutdown	Reset the controller. If the overcrank fault occurs again, contact the distributor/dealer.
x										Transfer switch test switch in the OFF position	Move the transfer switch test switch to the AUTO position.
			x							Wiring, terminals, or pin in the exciter field open	Check for continuity
			x							Main field (rotor) inoperative (open or grounded)	Test and/or replace the rotor.†
			x							Stator inoperative (open or grounded)	Test and/or replace the stator.†
									x	Vibration excessive	Tighten loose components.†
Lube System
						x	x		x	Oil level low	Restore the oil level. Inspect the generator set for oil leaks.
				x						Low oil pressure shutdown	Check the oil level.
	x	x					x		x	Crankcase oil type incorrect for ambient temperature	Change the oil. Use oil with a viscosity suitable for the operating climate.

Troubleshooting

TRA
PROBLEM	POSSIBLE CAUSE	POSSIBLE FIX
No reading on gauge or gauge reads wrong	Faulty gaugeWiring to gauge faultyFaulty sender	Replace gaugeInspect/repair wiringReplace sender
Gauge reads erratic	Loose ground or hot wire	Repair or replace wire and or connection

iPOD

Use this guide for troubleshooting, when you have difficulty in operating the unit or you cannot play a song with an error message displayed on Control unit.

? Currently selected Browsing (Music menu) item cannot be identified or not displayed.

√ Control unit does not support a CD TEXT (disc title) display function.
- Slide the "1" of "SELECT SWITCH" to up position to lock on to "Playlists" (page 5). Next, press the reset button on Control unit.

? Browsing (Music menu) items cannot be selected.

√ The "1" of 'SELECT SWITCH' is set to up position.
- Slide the "1" of "SELECT SWITCH" to down position (page 5). Next, press the reset button on Control unit.

? Setting of the "SELECT SWITCH" is not enabled.

√ The "SELECT SWITCH" might be set with KCA-iPS00 connected to Control unit.
Press the reset button on Control unit.

? Songs cannot be selected.

√ If a resume function is enabled, a song of "track number 1, title number 1 in Playlist" is automatically played when you try to select a song.
You can select a song after a song of "track number 1, title number 1 in Playlist" is played.

? "LOAD"/ "Reading" is continuously displayed on Control unit.

√ Communication failure occurs between KCA-iPS00 and iPod.
- Disconnect iPod from KCA-iPS00, make sure "KENWOOD" is not displayed on iPod, then reconnect. If "LOAD"/ "Reading" is still displayed, reset iPod.

? iPod becomes inoperative after being disconnected from KCA-iP500.

√ Communication failure occurs between KCA-iPS00 and iPod.
Reset iPod.

? Playback stops.

√ An external unit such as headphones has been disconnected from iPod.
* Disconnect iPod from KCA-iP500, make sure "KENWOOD" is not displayed on iPod, then reconnect iPod. Before reconnecting iPod, be sure to disconnect all external units from iPod.

Messages

"RESUMING"

: Resume function is enabled. See on page 6.

"EJECT"

: Continuously displayed "EJECT" that iPod is not connected. Make sure that iPod is securely connected.

"NO DISC"

: A song corresponding to currently selected Browsing (Music menu) item or title (title of Playlist or album, for example) does not exist. Select other Browsing item or title.

"ERROR 18"/ "E-18"

: Software version of the connected iPod is not supported by KCA-iP500. See on page 3.

"ERROR 60"/ "E-60"

: Communication failure occurs between KCA-IP500 and iPod. Disconnect iPod from KCA-IP500, make sure "KENWOOD" is not displayed on iPod, then reconnect iPod. If "ERROR 60"/ "E-60" is still displayed, reset iPod.

TRA
PROBLEM	POSSIBLE CAUSE	POSSIBLE FIX
Refrigerator not cold	Compressor will not start	Make sure the breaker is activated at the main AC panel
	Thermostat set too high or on-off switch is off	Reset thermostat or activate on-off switch
	Compressor starts but does not cool fridge	Contact repair center
	Door latch not closing or seal not seated	Adjust latch or replace seal
	Condensor dirty	Remove fridge and clean coils with duster or vacuum
Not running on DC	Check for defective thermostat or converter, low battery	Replace thermostat, converter or battery
Not running on AC	Inadequate input voltage	Make sure proper voltage exists on ship's main AC panel

PROBLEM	POSSIBLE CAUSE	REMEDY
Unit not cold enough	Door gasket not sealing properly	Adjust door (See MAINTENANCE; DOOR ALIGN, ADJUST, REVERSE).
	Item(s) interfering with door	Reposition or remove item(s).
	Dirty condenser coils	Clean condenser (See MAINTENANCE; CONDENSER CLEANING).
	Airflow to front grille blocked	Airflow must not be obstructed to front grille (See OPERATION).
	Temperature not set cold enough	Set control knob to cooler setting (See OPERATION). Allow 24 hours for temperature to stabilize.
The unit frosts up.	Unit is manual defrost model.	Models CO29 and CO75 are manual defrost (See MAINTENANCE; DEFROSTING).
	Door gasket not sealing properly	Adjust door (See MAINTENANCE; DOOR ALIGN, ADJUST, REVERSE).
	High ambient temperatures or humidity	Defrost unit manually (See MAINTENANCE; DEFROSTING).
Water is leaking out the back of the unit.	Water supply connection leaking	Tighten fitting as required.
Ice cubes sticking together	Door gasket not sealing properly	Adjust door (See MAINTENANCE; DOOR ALIGN, ADJUST, REVERSE).
	Infrequent use of cubes	Break apart cubes.
Noise during operation	Copper water supply tubing contacting internal components	Carefully bend tubing away from cabinet and components.
	Certain sounds are normal.	Soft sounds from the fan and water/dropping sounds from the ice maker will be heard.
No ice	Bin arm locked in upright position	Lower bin arm.
	No water to unit	Turn on water or contact plumber.
Not enough ice	Control set too cold	Adjust control to a warmer setting (See OPERATION).
	Ice cube size too large	Set cube size smaller (See MAINTENANCE; ICE MAKER; ICE CUBE THICKNESS ADJUST).
	Dirty condenser coils	Clean condenser (See MAINTENANCE; CONDENSER CLEANING).
Water leaks into ice bucket.	Water level set too high	Set cube size smaller (See MAINTENANCE; ICE MAKER; ICE CUBE THICKNESS ADJUST).
Fresh food section on Combo units too cold	Ice bucket not fully inserted	Push ice bucket into place.
	Flap door not closed correctly	Be sure flap door is closed correctly.
Unit too cold	Temperature control set too cold	Set control to warmer setting (See OPERATION).
TRA
PROBLEM	POSSIBLE CAUSE	POSSIBLE FIX
Remote control stiff/inoperative	Corroded cableKinked cableBroken cableRemote control box jammed	Clean/lubricate cableReplace cableReplace cableRepair/Replace box
Throttle only control inoperative (neutral)	Worn throttle cableBinding cableBroken cableControl box worn or in need of lubrication	Replace cableFollow cable routing; look for pinched cableReplace cableRefer to information supplied by control mfg.

SIRIUS MARINE WEATHER

LED STATUS

The LED on the connector panel provides valuable troubleshooting information on the status of your weather system.

The LED blinks green while the system is operating normally.. If the unit detects a problem, the LED blinks amber to indicate a warning or red to indicate an error. The pattern of the LED blink is a code representing the nature of the problem. For multiple warnings/errors the codes are given in sequence with a 1.5 second pause between the indications.

It is normal during the first minute of initial power that the SR100 status LED shows no activity and remains off. During the second minute the status LED will start to flash the amber or red fault strings. Typically, during normal operation, a flashing green LED will occur within 90 seconds of initial power. If there is no LED indicaiton of any sort displayed after 90 seconds you should check the circuit breaker.

A blinking red LED indicates an internal fault condition. If this condition persists contact the Raymarine Technical Services.

The following table shows the LED status codes and their meanings:

LEDROLOC	LEDNRETTAP	NOITPIRES
GREEN	BLINKING	RIMNNOITAROP
AMBER	ESNO1 SEC OFF	ANNETNADEKOOHNU
AMBER	ESNO1 SEC OFFESNO1 SEC OFF	KEAESBACDEKOOHNU
RED	BLINKING	ERNILUAF

V-DRIVE HYDRAULIC STEERING

FAULT	CAUSE	SOLUTION
1. During Filling, the helm becomes completely jammed.	• Blockage in the line between the helm(s) and the cylinder(s).	• Make certain that tubing has not collapsed during installation. If so, the collapsed section must be removed and re-fitted with a new piece with the aid of tube connectors. Check fittings for incomplete holes. Fittings with incomplete holes, however, are not common.
2. System is very difficult to fill. Air keeps burping out top of helm even after system appears full.	• Cylinder(s) has been mounted upside down. This causes air to be trapped in the cylinder(s).• Air in system.	• Mount cylinder(s) correctly, according to cylinder installation instruction. Ports should always be kept in uppermost position.• Review filling instructions.
3. Steering is stiff and hard to turn, even when the vessel is not moving.	• Rudder post glands are too tight or rudder post is bent, causing mechanical binding. The same applies to tiller arm and linkage on outdrives.• Restrictions in hose, copper tubing, piping or fittings.• Air in oil.• Wrong oil has been used to fill steering system, like A.T.F. (automatic transmission fluid, or any other oil with a high viscosity factor).• Support tube corroded or seized restricting movement of hydraulic cylinder.	• Io test, disconnect cylinder(s) from the tiller arm and turn the steering wheel. If it turns easily, correct above-mentioned problems. Please note that excessively loose connections to tiller arm or tie-bar can also cause mechanical binding.• Find restriction and correct.Note: Collapsing of copper tubing during bending is enough to cause restrictions.• See filling instructions supplied with helm units.• Drain system and fill with recommended oils.• Remove cylinder, clean and re-grease.
4. One helm unit in system is very bumpy and requires too many turns from hardover to hardover.	• Dirt in inlet check of helm pump.	• Dismantle helm pump and remove contaminant from make-up checks.

V-DRIVE HYDRAULIC STEERING

FAULT	CAUSE	SOLUTION
5. Steering is easy to turn at the dock, but becomes hard to turn when vessel is underway.	Steering wheel is too small.cylinder(s) too small.incorrect setting of trim tab(s) on stern drive.incorrectly designed or adjusted rudders, causing binding on rudder post and/or tie bar at cruising speeds.	fit larger wheel if possible, see installation instructions. If the problem cannot be rectified by the above mentioned solution, proceed with next cause and solution or consult factory.replace with larger cylinder(s).adjust tab(s).seek professional help. Have competent, qualified marine mechanic correct problem.
6. Rudder drifts to port or starboard while vessel is underway, even when wheel is not being turned.	Dirt in check valves.	Remove check valve plugs. These are the larger plugs on either side on rear of helm. Clean ball seats and balls and re-assemble.Note:Be prepared to lose a certain amount of oil during this procedure. Have a small can available. Refill system when check balls have been re-assembled.
7. Turning one wheel causes second steering wheel to rotate.	See fault No. 6.	See fault No. 6.
8. Seals will sometimes leak if steering system is not vented at uppermost helm.		The Seastar helm has a field replaceable wheel shaft seal which can readily be replaced by removing the steering wheel and seal cover held in place by three small screws. Quad ring no. 210 is found in Seastar helm seal kit HS5151.NOTE:Seal kits are available for Seastar cylinders, however, these must only be used by a qualified marine mechanic.

STEREO AMPLIFIER

PROBLEM	POSSIBLE CAUSE	SOLUTION
No sound.(No sound from one side.)(Blown fuse.)	·Input (or output) cables are disconnected.·Protection circuit may be activated.·Volume is too high.·The speaker cord is shorted.	·Connect the input (or output) cables.·Check connections by referring to.<Protection function>.·Replace the fuse and use lower volume.·After check the speaker cord and fixing the cause of the short, replace the fuse.
The output level is too small (or too large).	·The input sensitivity adjusting control is not set to the correct position.	·Adjust the control correctly referring to<Controls>.
The sound quality is bad.(The sound is distorted.)	·The speakers wire are connected with wrong ⊕ /⊖polarity.·A speaker wire is pinched by a screw in the car body.·The switches may be set improperly.	·Connect them properly checking the ⊕ /⊖ of the terminals and wires well.·Connect the speaker wire again so that it is not pinched by anything.·Set switches properly by referring to<System examples>.

TRA
PROBLEM	POSSIBLE CAUSE	POSSIBLE FIX
Screen is black. Power indicator is off.	TV breaker not activated	Activate TV breaker on ship's main AC panel.
	TV and/or DVD not turned on	Activate TV or DVD player
TV signal weak	TV antenna breaker not activated or wrong antenna button in use	Activate TV antenna breaker. Check antenna switch for proper signal button
Image too light or dark	Brightness or contrast improperly adjusted	Readjust brightness or contrast to owner's manual specs
Horizontal bars appear to flicker, jitter or shimmer on the image	Fine function not adjusted properly	Adjust fine function to owner's manual specs
Vertical bars appear to flicker, jitter or shimmer on the image	Coarse function not adjusted properly	Adjust coarse function Then adjust fine function
Screen is blank and power indicator light is steady amber or blinks every 1/2 or 1 seconds	Power management system being used	See power saver in owner's manual
Image not centered on screen	Horizontal or vertical adjustments off	Readjust horizontal or vertical controls

TRAHCCITSONG

Troubleshooting

RETREVNINOISIVELET
PROBLEM	SOLUTION
No Power At TV	Check 15 Amp In-Line Fuse At Socket
	Check AC Inverter Receptacle For Voltage
	Television Monitor Faulty
	Television AC Breaker Not Energized
	System Disabled By Lightning
	Inverter Power Switch In Off Position
Inverter Beeping	Charge Vessel House Battery

Should the television inverter not function find its location as shown in chapter 7. Use the following information to find the root cause of the malfunction.

VACUFLUSH® HEAD DIAGNOSTIC CHART
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE FIX
Water will not stay in bowl.	Loose clamp ring.Improper seal around flush ball or Look for debris on underside of Teflon scal. ball.Worn or damaged seal or flush ball. Replace seal or flush ball.	Tighten clamp ring adjusting nutforeign objects at flush
Toilet overflows. Dirt stuck in water valve scal or bad scal. Clean water valve or replace.Cam strap bent down holding valve open. Bend fornt of strap up 1/16”
Water does not enter toilet bowl properly.	Low water pressure.Water valve clogged.	Check incoming pressure.Clean filter on water valve inlet.
Water leaking at water valve.	Loose connection.Worn or defective water valve.	Tighten cap, inlet fitting, clampReplace water valve.
Water leaking at bowl rear.	Loose hose connection.Loose or worn vacuum breaker.	Tighten connection.Tighten/replacevacuum breaker
Pump runs alot between flushes.	Flush ball leaks.Vacuum line leaks.Duckbill valves in pump not sealing.Pump bellows in vacuum generator worn.	See problems 1 & 2.Tighten all hose connections at toilet and vacuum generator.Inspect all duckbill valves for poor sealing.Inspect for small hole or rip.
Toilet will not flush.	Plugged vacuum line, vacuum pump discharge or intake lines.Duckbill valves inverted to clogged discharge line or seacock	Clear line(s).Replace valves.
PROBLEM POSSIBLE	CAUSE POSSIBLE FIX
Pump will not run. No power.	Check input power, breaker and fuse. Loose or broken electric wire. Check faulty vacuum switch. Short across Faulty motor. Replace motor.	wires at pump, vac. generator, vacuum switch (B terminal conn). B terminals w/ jumper.
Pump will not shut off. Insufficient vacuum. Check for 10 inches of vacuum. Excessive vacuum leak. See pump running between flushes. Faulty vacuum switch. Check by removing one of B wires.
Pump running too slow, overheating, or blowing breaker.	Improper voltage Loose or broken wire. Discharge line blocked causing back pressure. Plugged or defective duckbill valve.	Check input voltage. Find & replace wire. Check lines/seacock. Clean discharge line. Clean duckbill valve or replace parts.
Pump emits odor.	Loose or defective hose connection on pump. Loose intake or discharge fittings on pump. Worn, torn or punctured pump bellows or diaphragm.	Tighten connections or replace hose. Tighten all fittings on pump or replace all nipples & adapters if necessary. Replace pump bellows or diaphragm.
Blockage between toilet and vacuum generator.	Collapsed or kinked vacuum line. Flushing foreign objects down toilet.	Inspect & repair vacuum lines. Do not flush non-dissolving objects or excessive tissue down toilet.

VACUUM CLEANER

If The Motor Stops Suddenly:

1. The most common cause is a clogged hose. Try to unclog the hose with a long stick or by shaking the hose until the clogged debris clears.

2. The bag is overfilled and fine dust has clogged the bag.

3. The vacuum cleaning tools are clogged.

4. The motor (exhaust) filter is dirty and should be cleaned or replaced.

5. It is a good idea to keep the cushion up where the main unit is stored to provide additional air to the unit. This will help prevent the unit for shutting down.

WINDLASS

Notes

Storage & Winterization

NOTICE

YOUR WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER DAMAGE TO YOUR BOAT IF IT IS NOT PROPERLY STORED AND WINTERIZED. CHECK WITH A REGAL DEALER OR MARINE PROFESSIONAL ABOUT WINTERIZATION PROCEDURES.

INTRODUCTION

Storage procedures are outlined in this chapter. These are general guidelines to follow in colder climates. Be sure to familiarize yourself with all relevant information in the owner's packet. Special winterization procedures are necessary for the boat equipment and systems. Use the enclosed checklists to help you identify areas of concern and maintenance. These lists cover land stored boats either inside or outside.

NOTICE

REMOVE ALL BATTERIES WHEN VESSEL IS IN STORAGE FOR EXTENDED PERIODS OF TIME.

DECOMMISSIONING CHECKLIST

ENGINE

☐ Run engine. Pour a fuel stabilizer/conditioner in the fuel tank. Allow time for it to circulate through the fuel system. Top off fuel tanks to help prevent condensation.
Change all engine fluids as referenced in the engine manufacturer's owners manual.
☐ Drain cooling and exhaust system or have a marine professional “pickle” the engine with antifreeze and rust preventative.
□ Spray all exterior parts with a rust preventative.

WARNING

EXPLOSION, FIRE & POLLUTION HAZARD! DO NOT FILL FUEL TANK TO RATED CAPACITY. LEAVE ROOM FOR EXPANSION.

STERN DRIVE

☐ Change engine and stern drive oil along with steering fluids.
□ Remove drive. Perform maintenance as referenced in the manufacturer's owners manual including checking seals for vacuum and pressure.
☐ Check all belts for wear and tension.
☐ Remove propeller. Refurbish as needed.
☐ Touch up paint on stern drive upper and lower gear housings as required.
☐ Check exhaust, fuel, and cooling systems for leaks.
☐ Keep the unit trimmed down to assist in draining any water still in the exhaust system. Also, this position allows the universal to set without extra pressure on the bearings.

V-DRIVE

☐ Winterize engine as required.
☐ Remove propellers. Refurbish as needed.
☐ Touch up engine paint as required.
□ Apply rust inhibitor to engine.
☐ Change engine oil, transmission fluids and steering fluids.
☐ Check all belts for wear and tension.
□ Apply rust inhibitor to engine.
☐ Check exhaust, fuel, and cooling systems for leaks.

BOAT

☐ Check hull bottom for any fiberglass damage. Repair as needed.
□ Apply a coat of wax to hull and deck surfaces.
☐ Pour a pint of 50/50 antifreeze into bilge pump.
☐ Remove batteries. Charge as needed.
☐ Remove all loose gear from boat such as life jackets, etc. Inspect and store in cool, dry environment.
☐ Remove drain plug. Clean drain plug hole of debris as needed. Enclose drain plug in plastic bag and tie to steering wheel.
☐ Drain the waste system per instructions in this chapter. Make sure bow is higher than stern to permit proper drainage.
□ Clean all upholstery and store so it breathes.
☐ Conduct a visual inspection to ensure boat is balanced properly on the trailer, cradle or blocks.
☐ Cover boat with tarp. Tie down for wind protection if outside. Prop tarp up as needed to provide proper ventilation. Be sure not to cover up the fuel vents.
☐ Drain the fresh water system per instructions in this chapter.
☐ Send in appropriate equipment for calibration such as the automatic fire extinguisher canister or the CO detectors.

Storage & Winterization

ENGINES

The propulsion systems on your vessel are complex in scope. It is recommended that your Regal dealer winterize your boat's engines. Regal dealers have undergone extensive factory training covering the Regal product line. Also, the dealer is equipped with the parts and tools to perform a carefree winterization procedure.

GENERAL NOTE ON ANTIFREEZE

Engine cooling fluids must be replaced with a marine antifreeze solution; mix antifreeze according to directions for the lowest expected temperature. The above method is much more reliable than just draining the engines and manifolds because sometimes pockets of water can form which can freeze in cold temperatures and cause engine damage. Draining the system fosters rust in engine parts.

NOTICE

USE A SPECIAL NON-TOXIC ANTIFREEZE

IN THE FRESH WATER & WASTE SYSTEM

WHICH IS AVAILABLE AT RV AND

MARINE DEALERS.

DO NOT USE AN AUTOMOTIVE

TYPE ANTIFREEZE.

IT CAN BE HIGHLY

POISONOUS AND CORROSIVE.

FRESH WATER SYSTEM:

1. Turn on the fresh water pump switch.
2. Open all faucets including transom shower and allow tank to empty.
3. Drain the water heater; shut off water pump switch.
4. Mix nontoxic antifreeze with water in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Pour solution into the fresh water tank.
6. Turn on fresh water pump switch.
7. Open each cold water faucet one by one beginning with the one furthest away from the tank and purge the system until a steady stream flows from the faucet. Then close the faucet.
8. Repeat step 7 for hot water faucets.
9. Shut off water pump switch.
10. Pour a quart of antifreeze into shower drain. Run the shower pump until a steady stream flows from the discharge fitting.
11. Leave at least 2 gallons of antifreeze solution in the holding tank during storage.

WASTE/TOILET SYSTEM:

1. Pump out waste holding tank, flush the tank with fresh water and pump out again.
2. With antifreeze in the fresh water tank, operate head until antifreeze flows into bowl of head. Allow time between flushes for the vacuum to build up.
3. Operate macerator until antifreeze has a steady flow coming from the discharge fitting. Pour antifreeze solution in head and flush head as needed to produce enough flow to winterize the macerator.
4. Leave at least 2 gallons of antifreeze solution in the holding tank during storage.

Storage & Winterization

AIR CONDITIONING:

There are several methods of winterization, some of which work better than others. The 4 various methods employed using a 50/50 nonpouiting biodegradable antifreeze/water solution arc:

1. Pumping of antifreeze solution into the overboard thru-hull fitting, and discharging through the intake thru-hull fitting.
2. Use of the seawater pump to pump antifreeze solution through the system and discharging through the overboard thru-hull fitting. Close the seacock, remove the hose for the strainer outlet, raise the hose above the AC pump (to prevent lose of prime) and pour in antifreeze solution. Pump solution through system. The strainer and hose to seacock will also need to be drained.
3. Use of pressurized air to force water from the intake through the overboard discharge.

Note: Any method that causes the antifreeze solution to flow downward is the method of choice. By this means, the antifreeze solution will displace any water trapped and eliminate the possibility of freezing in hidden areas. In addition, since the seawater pump utilizes a magnetically driven impeller, the impeller would be removed from the wet end assembly, wiped with an alcohol solution, and stored in a warm, dry area until commissioning takes place.

NOTICE

FOR THE PURPOSE OF PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT, DISPOSE OF ANY CONTAMINATED ACID SOLUTIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH FEDERAL, STATE AND/OR LOCAL REGULATIONS

FUEL SYSTEM:

Fill the fuel tank to minimize condensation but do not overfill. Leave enough space for fuel to expand and add a gasoline/fuel stabilizer to fuel prior to storage following the manufacturer's recommended procedures.

BATTERIES:

Remove the batteries and check the electrolyte level. Store in a cool, dry place. Add distilled water as necessary to to off the battery.

Monthly recharging or continuous trickle charging should be done to insure your batteries life during storage.

GAS/DIESEL GENERATOR

If equipped, the generator must be commissioned for storage in freezing climates. Your Regal dealer or marine professional has special training along with the necessary parts for wintcrizing your generator.

If tackling the procedure yourself, here are the basics of winterizing the generator. Refer to your generator manual for further information. The vessel must be in the water for the procedures below. Remove the sound shield enclosure if equipped.

1. Start the generator and let run for 1/2 hour or until it reaches normal operationg temperatures.

2. Stop the generator. Change the oil as specified earlier along with the oil filter.

3. Close the seacock and remove the hose. Place the hose in a container having a capacity of 1-2 US gallons of an environmentally friendly antifreeze such as PEAK® RV/marine propylene glycol/water mix or equivalent.

4. Disconnect the lead (#87) to the low seawater pressure switch (LWP).

5. With a suitable container at the hull exhaust outlet, run the generator until coolant discharges at the exhaust outlet or until depleting the coolant mixture. Do not allow coolant mixture to flow into the environment.

6. Reconnect the lead (#87) to the low seawater switch (LWP).

7. Turn off the generator fuel valve. Let the unit run until it is out of fuel.

8. Stop the generator.

9. Connect the hose to the seacock. Leave the seacock closed.

10. Check the coolant hose of the heat exchanger and add coolant if necessary (make sure suitable for lowest temperature of the stored environment).

11. Add a fuel stabilizer to the tank.

12. Spray a rust preventative over any exposed areas that may develop rust.

13. Disconnect the battery cables at the battery.

14. Reinstall the sound shield to keep debris out of the generator.

Glossary & Index

Here is a brief list of nautical terms useful in everyday boating experiences and communications. For more detailed glossaries of nautical terminology we recommend you check your local library, the internet or a marine store for boating books.

GLOSSARY

Abeam: at right angles to the fore and aft line and off the boat

Aboard: on or in the boat

Above: the part of the boat on a bavin vessel which is above the interior of the boat

Aft, After: aft is the boat section toward the stern or back of the boat

Admidships: toward the center of the boat from either side to side or rear to front

Beam: the width of a boat at its widest part

Bilge: the lower interior of the hull of the boat

Bitter end: the end of a line also the end of an anchor line

Bow: the front, or forward part of the boat

Bulkhead: the vertical partition or wall of a boat

Cast off: to let go or release

Chine: the line fore and aft formed by the intersection of the side and bottom of the boat

Chock: deck fitting used to secure or guide anchor or tie lines

Cleat: deck fitting with protruding arms around which lines are secured

Cockpit: the seating space used to accommodate passengers

Cuddy: a small cabin in the fore part of the boat

Deck: the open flooring surface on which crew and passengers walk

Draft: the depth from the waterline of the boat to the lowest part of the boat, which indicates how much water is required to float the boat

Fathom: a measurement of depth; one fathom equals six feet

Fender: a cushion hung from the side of a boat to prevent it from rubbing against a dock or against other boats

Fend off: to push off to avoid sharp contact with dock or other vessel

Fore: the part of the boat toward the bow or front

Freeboard: the height of the top side from the waterline to the deck at its shortest point. (The distance from the sheer or gunwale to the water)

Galley: cooking area

Gunwale: rail or upper edge of the side of the boat

Hatch: an opening in the deck to provide access below

Head: toilet

Hull: the part of the hull from the deck down

Keel: the lowest point of a boat

Knots: a measurement of speed indicating nautical miles per hour

Lee: the side opposite that from which the wind is blowing: the side sheltered from the wind

Leeward: the direction toward which the wind is blowing

PFD: personal floatation device; required for each person aboard

Port: the left side of the boat when facing forward (an easy way to remember the difference between “port” and “starboard” is that both “port” and “left” have four letters)

Shank: the main body of an anchor

Sheer: the curve of the boat's deck from fore to aft when seen from the side

Starboard: the right side of the boat when facing forward

Stern: the aft end of the boat

Stern drive: an inboard/outboard (IO) unit

Stringer: strengthening integral unit fastened from fore to aft inside the hull and fiberglass encapsulated for added strength: much like the skeleton system of our body

Top off: to fill up a tank

Transom: the vertical part of the stern.

Trim: the boat's balance when properly loaded

Wake: the path of a boat left astern in the water

Glossary & Index

A

AC Current 5-10

Accidents 2-17

Accident Reporting 2-1

Air Conditioner 7-3

8-18

Alcohol Myths & Facts 2-17

All Around Light 7-25

Amplifier-Woofer 7-198

Antenna-GPS 7-9

7-21

Anchoring 5-19

Arch-Radar 7-87

Audible Alarms 4-2

B

Battery 5-1

7-10

8-22

Battery Charger 5-2

7-11

8-23

Battery Isolator 5-2

Battery Parallel Switch

7-12

8-25

Battery Switches 5-2

7-13

8-25

Bilge-Engine Compartment

Bilge Pump

5-6

7-88

8-26

Blower

4-2

5-4

8-26

Bottom Paint

7-155

8-3

Breakers

5-8

5-13

Breast Lines

6-6

Bridge Clearance

3-8

C

CD Changer 7-15

CD Player 7-10

Cablemaster System 7-156

8-27

Camera Monitoring System 7-158

8-28

Canvas 7-89

8-4

Carbon Monoxide 2-14

7-3

Carbon Monoxide Detector 7-14

8-7

8-29

Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation 6-16

Carpet 7-93

8-7

Center Windshield 7-25

Coffee Maker 7-15

Compass 7-93

8-29

Corian 8-7

Controls 4-3

D

DVD Player 7-18

8-30

Dealer Responsibilities 1-10

Decommissioning 10-1

Depth Sounder 4-4

Diagnostic Charts (Troubleshooting) 9-1

Diesel Fuel Filter 5-16

Diesel Fuel Transfer Switch 5-16

Direct Current (DC) 5-1

Direct Circuit Protection 5-3

Distress Signals 2-7

Distribution Center 5-3

7-17

Diver's Flag 2-19

Docking 6-8

Dock Lincs 6-6

Dockside Power (See Shorepower)

Dockside Water Inlet 7-7

Door (Cabin) 7-26

8-31

Drain Plug 6-1

E

Electrical 5-1

7-10 Technical

Electrolysis 8-19

Electronics 7-94

7-159

8-31

Engine Alignment 4-1

Engine 8-17

9-1

10-1

Environmental Awareness 6-18

Equipment Operation 7-1

Exhaust 2-14

F

Fabrics-Interior 8-8

Fenders 6-5

Fiberglass Maintenance 8-9

Fire Extinguishers 2-6

7-132

Fires 6-16

First Aid 6-16

Float Plan 1-7

Flooring 7-27

8-11

Fresh Water System 7-6

Fuel System 5-15

6-3

8-33

9-1

G

Gas Vapor Detector 7-1

8-34

Gathering Headway 6-12

Gelcoat Maintenance 8-10

General Boating Safety 2-2

Generator 5-13

7-179

Generator Maintenance 8-143

Getting Underway 6-1

Glossary 11-1

Ground Fault Outlet (GFIC) 8-34

H

Hard Top 7-190 Hatches 7-27 7-134

Heater-Hot Water 7-135

8-35

High Water Alarm 7-136

8-35

HIN 1-3 Horn 2-10 5-6 8-30

Hull/Deck 8-12

Hull Bottom 8-6

Hypothermia 6-17

I

iPod Adapter 7-199 Ignition Switch 5-4 Index 11-3 Instruments (Gauges) 4-4 8-11

International Distress Signals 2-9

Inverter-(Television) 7-68

Isolator-Galvanic 7-28

K

Knots 6-15

L

Lights 2-10

5-6

7-30

Glossary & Index

M

Mancuvering 6-9

Maintenance Log 8-28

Maintaining PFD'S 2-6

Markers-For Slings 7-137

Mayday 2-10

Metal (Cleaning) 8-6

Microwave 7-33

Minimum Required Equipment 2-13

Monitor Panel 7-42

Mooring 6-6

8-8

N

Navigation Aids 3-5

Navigation Lights 2-10

Navigation Rules 3-1

Neutra-Salt System 7-192

Neutral Safety Switch 4-8

49

0

Oil Spills

Overboard Discharge Pump

7-193

8-38

Overloading

Owner's Information Packet

Owner Responsibilities

Overcurrent Protection

4-3

P

Performance Package

Personal Flotation Devices

Plastics

Plumbing Connectors

Pollution Regulations

Porpoising

Portlights

Pre-departure questionnaire

Pressure Pump-Fresh Water

7-201

8-38

4-14

8-17

8-20

Propellers

Propulsion

4-1

R

Range

7-43

Refrigerator

8-13

Refrigerator-Icemaker

7-45

8-39

7-194

8-39

Registration Information

1-10

Remote Control

4-8

5-6

8-13

Right-Of-Way

3-1

Rudder

8-21

Rules Of The Road

3-1

S

Safety Labels 2-1

Seacocks 8-23

Seating 7-26

7-49

7-140

7-141

Shaft Scal 4-2

Technical

8-20

Shorepower 5-10

5-12

7-9

Shower-Transom 7-139

Shower Sump Pump 7-46

8-42

Sirius Marine Weather 7-203

8-42

Sirius Satellite Radio 7-202

Slccper/Sofa 7-47

Sound Producing Devices 2-10

Specifications Technical

Speedometer 4-4

Spotlight 7-142

8-14

Spring Line 5-11

Strainer 8-23

Stainless Steel 8-14

Stains 8-15

Stern Line 6-6

Steering 4-17

5-17

8-18

8-21

Stereo 7-50

7-197

8-43

Sterco Remote 7-61

Sterco-Steering Wheel Controls 7-61

8-43

Stern Drive Maintenance 8-49

Strataglass Cleaning 7-6

Sunbrella Canvas Cleaning 8-4

Sunpad/Chaisc Lounge 7-25

Swim Ladder 7-144

Swim Platform 2-19

7-144

Switches (DC) 5-6

5-8

Switches (AC) 5-12

Sunpad-Chaise Lounge 7-143

T

Table-Cockpit 7-145

Tachometer 4-4

Teak Inlay-Swim Platform 7-205

Technical Drawings 12-7

Technical Information 12-1

Television 7-62

8-44

Temperature Gauge 4-4

Toilet-VacuFlush® 7-85

8-45

7-17

Towing 6-14

Transom Shower 7-7

Trim 5-18

8-44

Turning 6-12

Troubleshooting 9-1

U

Underwater Lighting 7-206

Upholstery 7-23

8-16

V

VHF 2-10

V-Drive 4-1

4-17

8-20

V-Drive Maintenance 8-94

Vacuum Cleaner System 7-206

Valves-Fuel & Generator 7-152

Ventilation System 4-2

Vessel Information Sheet 1-6

Visual Distress Signals 2-7

Volt Gauge 4-5

W

Washdown 7-147

Warranty 1-12

Water Inlet-Dockside 7-147

Water Sports 2-19

Weather 2-20

Windlass 7-148

8-46

Windshield Wiper/Latch 7-151

Wintcrizing 10-1

Glossary & Index

Z

Zipper Care 8-5

Notes

Technical

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The following technical information is accurate up to the printing date listed at the beginning of this manual. Note that all product specifications, models, standard and optional equipment, systems, along with the technical information is subject to change without notice. For more information contact your nearest authorized Regal dealer. For the location of your nearest authorized dealer call 407-851-4360 or you can contact Regal through the internet at: www.regalboats.com. Your Regal dealer has received special factory training on the entire product line and his services should be employed to solve more technical problems.

The technical drawings found in this chapter are actual product drawings from the Regal factory. These drawings should be of special interest in mechanical and electrical troubleshooting. The equipment in the drawings is discussed in various sections of this manual. Please read and understand the system and related drawings to help you solve a problem on your vessel. When all else fails contact your closest Regal dealer for assistance.

SNOITACIFI
LLAREVOHTGNEL USADEDNETXE/W 830"MROATP		RIGEMM6
IENETNECHTGNEL	34' 9"	10.6 M
BEAM	12' 2"	3.7 M
DEADRISE	19 DEGREES
APPROXIMATE DRYWEIGHT W/ TWIN8.1	15,200 LBS	6895 Kg
EREDPOECNARAELC2"THCRAFO		3.7 M
EREDPOECNARAELC12' 4"DESCORADARR		3.7 M
COCKPIT DEPTH	30"	0.7 M
THEARDDOWN-I/O	36"	0.9 M
THEARDDOWN-V DRIVE	34"	0.9 M
FUEL CAPACITY	276 GALS	1045 L
FRASERF 67 GALS-I/OCAPAC	61 GALS-V DRIVE	5282
DUNAOAPAC	SLAGG
MUMAMQDAEH	6' 5"	1.96 L
PENELSOAPAC	6

4 L

Technical Information

TYPICAL LABEL LOCATIONS

3760 FUEL SYSTEM-GAS

Legend

Fs=Feed To Selector Valve

Fg=Feed To Generator

S=Gas Tank Sender

V=Gas Tank Vent

F=Gas Tank Fill

F

* NOT TO SCALE

Technical Information

REVISION DESCRIPTION				REV. DATE:DR.B
BLOGICAL NAME: FORDINERS2300187927010000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
DRAWING TITLE:3760 ARCH HARNESS
DATE: 01-27-03	LATEST REV LET:		SCALE:
DR. BY:	APP. BY:		DWG. NO.:ETA22D

BY: APP. BY:

REVISION DESCRIPTION				REV. DATE:DR.
DRAWING TITLE:3760 GALLEY HARNESS
DATE:01-27-03	LATEST REV. LET:		SCALE:
DR. BY:	APP. BY:		DWG. NO.:ETA22E

REVISION DESCRIPTION				REV. DATE: OR. BY: APP. BY:
DRAWING TITLE:3760 V-BERTH HARNESS
DATE:01-27-03	LATEST REV LET:		SCALE:
DR. BY:	APP. BY:		DWG. NO.:ETA22F

BILL OF MATERIALS

ITEM	CITY	SIZE	MATERIAL	PMT #
01	1		INSTRUMENT PANEL	656779
02	1		MERCURY AUDIBLE WARNING BUZZER	49334
03	1		COMPASS	64271
04	1		TRIM TAB SWITCH	14839
05	1		ELECTRONICS PANEL	956782
06	1		2 RING SS DRINK HOLDER	78543
07	1		DIGITAL DEPTH BOUNDER	643193
08	1		GPS/PLOTTER - 320	956804
09	1		STEERING WHEEL	7853
10	1		TILT HELM	59155
11	1	240" (NOT SHOWN)	CC STEERING CABLE	59151
12	1		DUAL BINCAL TOP MOUNT CONTROL	1374
13	1	192" (NOT SHOWN)	CONTROL CABLE	7791
14	1	201" (NOT SHOWN)	CONTROL CABLE	7792
15	1		FIRE EXTINGUISHER LIGHT	185704
16	1		GAS VAPOR ALARM	18755
17	1		SPOT LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH	50602
18	1		VHF RADIO	641570
19	1		VHF RADIO FLUSH MOUNT KIT	64206
20	1		STEREO REMOTE	95728
21	1		SHIFT CONTROL	78218
22	1	228" (NOT SHOWN)	CONTROL CABLE	7794
23	1	240" (NOT SHOWN)	CONTROL CABLE	7795
24	1		CONTROL STOP ADJUSTMENT KIT	78206
25	1			64125VDO ALARM HORN
26	1		HELM PANEL	856786
27				78196QC STEERING HELM MC
	1	28		6527COCKPIT LIGHT
29	1	BEHIND DASH, (NOT SHOWN)	DASH EXTENSION HARNESS	189431
30	1		YACHT BIA PLATE, ALUMINUM	2421
31	1	BEHIND DASH, (NOT SHOWN)	GROUND BUSS BAR	66962
32	1	(NOT SHOWN)	GAS VAPOR HARNESS	18753
33	1	(NOT SHOWN)		6994WINDLASS CAUTION LAB
				556845BREAKER PANEL134
		276" 14221MERC ENG HARNESS35 1
		(NOT SHOWN)		556770INTERFACE CABLE (SE
				642754TR M GUAGE37 2

REVISION DESCRIPTION		DR. BY:	APP.BY:	REV. DATE
			DRAWING TITLE:3760 DASH ASSEMBLY
DATE:01-27-03	LATEST REV LET:		SCALE:
DR. BY:	APP. BY:		DWG. NO.:ETA22H

A ENEINE ROOM LIGHT ENGINE ROOM LIGHT	B 3/4" SPLIT FLEX CO DETECTOR CABIN LIGHTS	C BONDBONDBUSS GROUND	D ALL @ RIGHT SIDE MAIN BUSS MAIN BUSS
F OPTION STEREO AMP-RED/VIOLET	G STEREO MEMORY-16 YELLOW/RED AFT BILGE PUMP-16 BROWN/RED FWD BLGE PUMP-16 BROWN/RED 16 BROWN/BLACK	H PARALLEL SOLENOID-16 BLACK PARALLEL SOLENOID-14 RED/WHITE	I 1/2" SPLIT FLEX ENG ROOM LIGHT ENG ROOM LIGHT
J FIRE EXTINGUISHER-10 BLACK FIRE EXTINGUISHER-10 BLACK MARKED-10 BLACK 16 BLACK/WHITE	K MID CABIN LIGHT MID CABIN LIGHT	L MID CABIN LIGHT MID CABIN LIGHT

REVISION DESCRIPTION				REV. DATE OR BY: APP BY:
			RICALS, SPINIC PONSIBLES(230, ET/27/2018)ORJICO FLORIDA 5639, 106514.11.2024 (147), 25-1228
DRAWING TITLE:3760 STEREO HARNESS
DATE:01-29-03	LATEST REV LET:		SCALE:
DR. BY:	APP. BY:		DWG. NO.:ETA22M

BILL OF MATERIALS
ITEM	QTY	SIZE	MATERIAL	PART I
01	2	LARGE	BATTERY TRAY with HDWR	14792
02	2	GROUP 31A	BATTERY	2258
03	1	NG-DB	BATTERY	2212
04	1		BATTERY BOX-9D	2313
05	2	1500 GPM	BILGE PUMP	1371
06	1	18" (cut to fit)	1-1/8" BILGE FLEX HOSE	1463
07	2		AUTO BILGE SWITCH SURE BAIL	48324
08	3	4 x 10-24	100amp BUSS BOND BAR	66980
09	X	X	X	X
10	2	40" (cut to fit)	2" x 3/8" FOAM TAPE	6738
11	X		X	X
12	2	12v.	BLOWER SQUIRREL CAGE	57229
13	1	20" (cut to fit)	4" BLOWER HOSE	1783
14	1	138 gal.	STBD FUEL TANK	68254
15	1	60" (cut to fit)	FUEL SUPPLY HOSE A1	48701
16	1		COCKPIT TABLE HOLDER	WTA25G
17	1	THRU-HULL	RAYTHEON TRANSDUCER	643198
18	1	40M	BILGE SWITCH HIGH WATER/LARM	57631
19	4		ENGINE MOUNTS	48116
20	4		ENGINE MOUNT BACKING PLATE	48178
21	1		AFT STORAGE TUB	U.A21G
22	1		RUDDER ENGINE TIE BAR	49007
23	1		HATCH RAM BRACKET	78587
24	1	3" x 3/4" x 1"	S/S BRACKET	12615
25	1	2/2	QUICK RELEASE HINGE PIN	4891
26	1	24"	HEAVY DUTY ACTIVATOR A	70663
27	1	138 gal.	PORT FUEL TANK	68255
28	1		VACUUM GENERATOR	47465

REVISION DESCRIPTION	DR. BY:	APP. BY:	REV. DATE:
REGAL BOATS
DRAWING TITLE:3760 V-DRIVE SUMP LAYOUT
DATE:3-26-03	LATEST REV LET:	SCALE:NTS
DR. BY:	APP. BY:	DWG. NO.:MTC23D

PIN 1 _UVPERS TO PIN 5 TYING BOTH RF+ AND RR- TOGETHER PIN 2 _JUMPERS TO PIN 6 TYING BOTH RF- AND RR- TOGET-ER PIN 3 _JUMPERS TO PIN 8 TYING BOTH LF AND _R1 TOGET-ER PIN 4 _JUMPERS III PIN / TYNG BOTH LF- AND R- TIGE-ER PIN 9 IS NOT USED

• AMFLIF PER PUG TAIL WILL PUG INTO -HE VAIN SPEAK-RS HARNESS.
• RACITI 9 PIN CAP WILL PUG INTO THE UP IN SPEAKERS PLUG HARNESS. A 16GA BLU WIRE IS NEEDED TO CONNECT FROM THE AMP'S P CONT TERM AND SPICE OF TO THE P CONT BLU/WHT WIRE OF THE RADI B PIN CAP. A RCA SABLE IS NEEDED TO CONNECT BETWEEN THE AMP K'NE IND AND THE RADI REFARS.

3760 DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL-FRONT

BLG PMP LN - 14RED/GRN
ST MEM LN - 14 RED/BLU ALARM HIGHWTR LN - 14 RED
3760 DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL-REAR

REGAL.

Luxury Performance Boats

Regal Marine Industries, Inc.

2300 Jetport Drive

Orlando, FL 32809-7895

[phone]

Internet Address: http://www.RegalBoats.com

EMail Address: [e-mail]